Canon powershot G7X III camera manual
andonis-artist
1,082 views
202 slides
Jan 05, 2020
Slide 1 of 202
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
About This Presentation
Canon powershot G7X III camera manual
Slide Content
CET pe
Basic Guise
Advanced Guide
1 Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
FewerShot G7 X 2 yi Ato mode
3 Other Shooting Moses:
4 P Mode
Camera User Guide 5 TWA. Mane CMode
6 Playback Mode
+ Make sure you read this guide, including the “Safety Precautions” the buttons inthe lower right to access other pages.
(15) section, before using the camera, D Not page 7 WiFi Functions
€ Previous page
+ Reading this guide vil help you lea to use the camera propery, dial af St Tes
« Store this guide sefly so thet you can use it inthe future. « Tojumptothe beging a chapter ice chapters a cht
9 Accessories
10 Appendix
ENGLISH
OCANONINO. 2014 coDesss 010
Basic Guise
Advanced Guide
1 Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
FewerShot G7 X 2 yi Ato mode
3 Other Shooting Moses:
4 P Mode
Camera User Guide 5 TWA. Mane CMode
6 Playback Mode
+ Make sure you read this guide, including the “Safety Precautions” the buttons inthe lower right to access other pages.
(15) section, before using the camera, D Not page 7 WiFi Functions
€ Previous page
+ Reading this guide vil help you lea to use the camera propery, dial af St Tes
« Store this guide sefly so thet you can use it inthe future. « Tojumptothe beging a chapter ice chapters a cht
9 Accessories
10 Appendix
ENGLISH
OCANONINO. 2014 coDesss 010
Before Use
Initial Information
Package Contents
re use, make sure the following items are included inthe package
If anything is missing, contact your camera retailer,
Battery Pack
Neal"
I
ist Strap
ge
CB2LHC82LHE
* Donotpee one paty pack abel
+ Printed matter is also included
+ Amemory card isnot included (2),
Compatible Memory Cards
The fllowing memory cards (sold separate
capacity
+ SD memory cards"
+ SOHC memory cards"
SOXC memory cards"
sz»
32
y) can be used, regardess of
+1. cards contormingto SD standards, However nata memory cards have been
"2. UNS: memory cards a also supported
Basie Guide
Advanced Guido
Inder
1 Canora Basics,
2 Auto Modo
Hybrid Auto Modo
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4 P Mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
Initial Information
Package Contents
re use, make sure the following items are included inthe package
If anything is missing, contact your camera retailer,
Battery Pack
Neal"
I
ist Strap
ge
CB2LHC82LHE
* Donotpee one paty pack abel
+ Printed matter is also included
+ Amemory card isnot included (2),
Compatible Memory Cards
The fllowing memory cards (sold separate
capacity
+ SD memory cards"
+ SOHC memory cards"
SOXC memory cards"
sz»
32
y) can be used, regardess of
+1. cards contormingto SD standards, However nata memory cards have been
"2. UNS: memory cards a also supported
Basie Guide
Advanced Guido
Inder
1 Canora Basics,
2 Auto Modo
Hybrid Auto Modo
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4 P Mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
Preliminary Notes and Legal Informatio! LES
+ Take and review some test shots initially to make sure the images AN
ie a ae
D ms on dat ron Lalola on corea iaa
damages arising from any malfunction of a camera or accessory,
including memory cards, tha resul in the falure of an image to be
recorded or to be recorded in a way that is machine readable e
+. Images recorded by the camera shall be for personal use Refrain Auto Mode /
from unauthorized recording that infringes on copyright law, and note 2 Hybrid Auto Mode
that even for personal use, photography may contravene copyright
or ther legal rights at some performances or exhibitions, or in some 8 Other Shooting Modos.
commercial stings
+ The camera warrenty is valid only inthe area d purchase. In case of 4 P Mode
camera problems while abroad, return tothe area of purchase before
contactng a Canon Customer Support Help Desk.
‘though the LCD monitor is produced under extremely high-precision
manufacturing conditions and more than 99 99% ofthe pxels meet
design specications, in rare cases some pixels may be defective (6 Playback Modo
or may appear as red or black dots. This does not indicate camera
damage or affect recorded images,
+ The LCD monitor may be covered wit a thin plastic firm for protection
‘against scratches during shipment. covered, remove te fm before
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
7 WiFi Functions
using the camera, 8 Sowing Menu.
+ When the camera is used over an extended period, it may become
warm. This does not indicate damage Accessories
10 Appendix
Inder
«ba
+ Take and review some test shots initially to make sure the images AN
ie a ae
D ms on dat ron Lalola on corea iaa
damages arising from any malfunction of a camera or accessory,
including memory cards, tha resul in the falure of an image to be
recorded or to be recorded in a way that is machine readable e
+. Images recorded by the camera shall be for personal use Refrain Auto Mode /
from unauthorized recording that infringes on copyright law, and note 2 Hybrid Auto Mode
that even for personal use, photography may contravene copyright
or ther legal rights at some performances or exhibitions, or in some 8 Other Shooting Modos.
commercial stings
+ The camera warrenty is valid only inthe area d purchase. In case of 4 P Mode
camera problems while abroad, return tothe area of purchase before
contactng a Canon Customer Support Help Desk.
‘though the LCD monitor is produced under extremely high-precision
manufacturing conditions and more than 99 99% ofthe pxels meet
design specications, in rare cases some pixels may be defective (6 Playback Modo
or may appear as red or black dots. This does not indicate camera
damage or affect recorded images,
+ The LCD monitor may be covered wit a thin plastic firm for protection
‘against scratches during shipment. covered, remove te fm before
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
7 WiFi Functions
using the camera, 8 Sowing Menu.
+ When the camera is used over an extended period, it may become
warm. This does not indicate damage Accessories
10 Appendix
Inder
«ba
Part N: an
nventio
sin Thi
uid
DO MD PAN a
ION
(16) (15) (14)
(10) FUNCSET uton
(31) (Flash Rego
(m Screen (L60 montar"
(2) Merophene
a
“
DIGITAL teminal
HOM terminal
(02) DISP. spa Dow tuton
(13) inacator
(8) Dinoote Devic comectonyouten (1a) MENUlbuton
(5) conta ai (05) IT] Playtacigqouton
m BE Ringtncsonsaecter|s (16) ¡Macro IMF (aan va focus
M (Sngeumage erase) baton
Lutin
(14) (15) (16)(17)}
(Zoom eve (©) speaker
rostro
24 BE (00) Flash
Payoack(Q imag (01) Cortina
(Bingen) (12) ($ Fash up) swatch
@ Sonar (03) Wer ate are
©) Lamp (04) Renan
im (15) Tmoosorke
(©) Exposure compensation dt (16) Memarycaraatay over
© Mode (07) DO courte cover
9 Snutertumn
(©) Porto
CR
(9) Abe mosey [Up (MEN
Up buzon
Usea wan NC features (D128
Gestures may note detected as asly you apply screen protector inthis
case, increase the sens ene tour screen panel (156),
‘© Turing the control cialis one way to
choose setting tems, switch images, and
perform cther operations. Most of these
operations are also possible withthe
(alia) buttons
Basie Guide
Advanced Guido
1 Camera Basics
2 Auto mee
Hybrid Auto Modo
3 Othor Shooting Modos.
4 P mode
5 Tan. m and C Modo
6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu,
9 Accessories
10 Apendix
«ba
nventio
sin Thi
uid
DO MD PAN a
ION
(16) (15) (14)
(10) FUNCSET uton
(31) (Flash Rego
(m Screen (L60 montar"
(2) Merophene
a
“
DIGITAL teminal
HOM terminal
(02) DISP. spa Dow tuton
(13) inacator
(8) Dinoote Devic comectonyouten (1a) MENUlbuton
(5) conta ai (05) IT] Playtacigqouton
m BE Ringtncsonsaecter|s (16) ¡Macro IMF (aan va focus
M (Sngeumage erase) baton
Lutin
(14) (15) (16)(17)}
(Zoom eve (©) speaker
rostro
24 BE (00) Flash
Payoack(Q imag (01) Cortina
(Bingen) (12) ($ Fash up) swatch
@ Sonar (03) Wer ate are
©) Lamp (04) Renan
im (15) Tmoosorke
(©) Exposure compensation dt (16) Memarycaraatay over
© Mode (07) DO courte cover
9 Snutertumn
(©) Porto
CR
(9) Abe mosey [Up (MEN
Up buzon
Usea wan NC features (D128
Gestures may note detected as asly you apply screen protector inthis
case, increase the sens ene tour screen panel (156),
‘© Turing the control cialis one way to
choose setting tems, switch images, and
perform cther operations. Most of these
operations are also possible withthe
(alia) buttons
Basie Guide
Advanced Guido
1 Camera Basics
2 Auto mee
Hybrid Auto Modo
3 Othor Shooting Modos.
4 P mode
5 Tan. m and C Modo
6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu,
9 Accessories
10 Apendix
«ba
In this guide, icons are used to represent ne corresponding camera
Buttons and dals on which they appear or which hey resemble
The following camera buttons and controls are represented by icons
{0} Control ring (14) on from
[a] Up button (9) on back
Fa] Let button (16) on back,
DD Right button (11) on back
y] Down button (12) on back
16) Conta dial 6) on back.
‘Shooting modes and on screen icons end text ar indicated in
brackets
D Important information you should know
2 Notes and ips for expert camera use
‘6 Indicates touch-screen operations
Ma: Pages wi relate information (inthis example, a” represents
page number)
Instructions in this guide apply tothe camera under default settings
For convenience, al supported memory cards are simply referredto as
th memory card”
The symbols ‘Be Stil Images" and Po Moves" below ties indicate
how the funcion is used-—uhelher or sl images or movies.
Basic Guido
Advanced Guido.
1 Camora Basics
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4 P Mode
snd C Modo
5 ma
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
5
Buttons and dals on which they appear or which hey resemble
The following camera buttons and controls are represented by icons
{0} Control ring (14) on from
[a] Up button (9) on back
Fa] Let button (16) on back,
DD Right button (11) on back
y] Down button (12) on back
16) Conta dial 6) on back.
‘Shooting modes and on screen icons end text ar indicated in
brackets
D Important information you should know
2 Notes and ips for expert camera use
‘6 Indicates touch-screen operations
Ma: Pages wi relate information (inthis example, a” represents
page number)
Instructions in this guide apply tothe camera under default settings
For convenience, al supported memory cards are simply referredto as
th memory card”
The symbols ‘Be Stil Images" and Po Moves" below ties indicate
how the funcion is used-—uhelher or sl images or movies.
Basic Guido
Advanced Guido.
1 Camora Basics
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4 P Mode
snd C Modo
5 ma
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
5
Table of Contents
Before Use
Initial Information... 2
Package Contents……. 2
Compatible Memory Caras. 2
Preliminary Notes and Legal information 3
4
3
5
Part Names and Conventions in This Guide …
‘Common Camera Operations
Safety Precautions...
Basic Guide
Basic Operations. 18
Initial Preparations. 18
Attaching the Strep.
Holding the Camera. sic tant
Charging the Battery Pack. a)
Inserting the Battery Pack and Memory Card. 19
Removing the Battery Pack and Memory Card 20
Setting the Date and Time... 20
Changing the Date and Time. 2
Display Language. 2
Trying the Camera Out 22
2
24
2
25
‘Shooting (Smart Auto)
Viewing...
Touch-Sereen Operations nu
Erasing images ..
Advanced Guide
1 Camera Basics.
Onvort pannes
Power-Saving Features (Auto Power Down).
Power Saving in Shooting Mode
Power Saving in Playback Mode.
Shutter Button
Shooting Modes. a
‘Adjusting the Screen Angle and Orientation.
Shooting Display Options.
Using the FUNC. Menu
Using Touch-Sereen Operations to Configure Setings
Using the Menu Screen.
Touch-Sereen Operations,
(On-Screen Keyboard.
Indicator Display...
Clock
2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode...
Shooting with Camera-Determined Settings.
‘Shooting (Smart Auto)
‘Shooting in Hybrid Auto Mode.
Digest Movie Playback
Still magesiMovies
Stitimages
Movies.
‘Scene Icons.
Continuous Shooting Scenes.
Image Stablization Icons.
On-Screen Frames.
SSBERNANAÑAR!
bebkauseseseeese
Basie
Guide
Advanced Guido
1 Camora Basics
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
8 Other Shooting Modos.
4 P mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
Before Use
Initial Information... 2
Package Contents……. 2
Compatible Memory Caras. 2
Preliminary Notes and Legal information 3
4
3
5
Part Names and Conventions in This Guide …
‘Common Camera Operations
Safety Precautions...
Basic Guide
Basic Operations. 18
Initial Preparations. 18
Attaching the Strep.
Holding the Camera. sic tant
Charging the Battery Pack. a)
Inserting the Battery Pack and Memory Card. 19
Removing the Battery Pack and Memory Card 20
Setting the Date and Time... 20
Changing the Date and Time. 2
Display Language. 2
Trying the Camera Out 22
2
24
2
25
‘Shooting (Smart Auto)
Viewing...
Touch-Sereen Operations nu
Erasing images ..
Advanced Guide
1 Camera Basics.
Onvort pannes
Power-Saving Features (Auto Power Down).
Power Saving in Shooting Mode
Power Saving in Playback Mode.
Shutter Button
Shooting Modes. a
‘Adjusting the Screen Angle and Orientation.
Shooting Display Options.
Using the FUNC. Menu
Using Touch-Sereen Operations to Configure Setings
Using the Menu Screen.
Touch-Sereen Operations,
(On-Screen Keyboard.
Indicator Display...
Clock
2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode...
Shooting with Camera-Determined Settings.
‘Shooting (Smart Auto)
‘Shooting in Hybrid Auto Mode.
Digest Movie Playback
Still magesiMovies
Stitimages
Movies.
‘Scene Icons.
Continuous Shooting Scenes.
Image Stablization Icons.
On-Screen Frames.
SSBERNANAÑAR!
bebkauseseseeese
Basie
Guide
Advanced Guido
1 Camora Basics
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
8 Other Shooting Modos.
4 P mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
‘Common, Convenient Features
Zooming In Closer on Subjects (Digtal Zoom).
‘Shooting at Preset Focal Lengths (Step Zoom).
Using the Se Timer.
Using the Sal Timer to Avoid Camera Shake.
Customaing the Sa-Timer ………
‘Shooting by Touching the Screen (Touch Smtr).
Continuous Shooting. E
Image Display during Majbadk
Using Face 1D,
Persona Information
Registering Face ID Information
‘Shooting
(Checking and Eating Regstered Information
COverwnting and Adding Face Information.
Erasing Registered information.
Image Customization Features.
‘Changing the Aspect Rato.
(Changing Image Resoluton (Sze).
Guideines for Choosing Resauion Based on Paper Sze
(for 3:2 mages) ne or)
Correcting Greenish Image Areas ram Mercity LMP 49
(Changing Movie Image Quality. 50
Helpful Shooting Features. 50
Using the Dual Axis Electronic Level.
Magnifying the Area in Focus,
(Checking for Closed Eyes...
Customizing Camera Operation.
Deactvating the AF-Assist Beam.
Deactvating the Red-Eye Reduction Lamp.
st
Ree
Changing the Image Display Se after Shots
Changing the Image Display Period ater Shots
Changing the Screen Dislayed ater Shots .
3. Other Shooting Modes.
Enjoying a Variety of Images from Each Shot
(Creative Sho).
Choosing Efects
Specific Scenes. =
Using Functions for Underwater Shots
Shooting wih an Underwater Focusing Range
Correcting White Balance.
Image Eds (Creative Fitters).
‘Shooting High-Contrast Scenes (Hgh Dynamic Range).
Adding Atstic Efecs. =
‘Shooting wth Faded Colors (Nostalgic) =
‘Shooting wth aFis-Eye Lans Elec (Fen Eye Elec)
‘Shots Resembing Miniature Models (Miniature Etec...
Playback Speed and Estimated Playback Time
(for One-Minute Cips) ,
Shooting th a Toy Camera Elect (Toy Camera Elec
Making Subjects Stand Out (Background Defocus)
Shooting wih a Soft Focus Etec.
‘Shooting in Monochrome...
Special Modes for Other Purposes ….
‘Ato Shooting ter Face Detection (Smart Shute.
Auto Shooting ater Smile Detection
Using the Wink Selk-Timer
Using the Face Sel Timer.
‘Shooting Stary Skies (Sta). .
Shocing People aginst Stary Sues (Star Porta).
Shoating Night Scenes under Stary Shes
(Star Nightscape)
BBR
ag
agsuuganan
9 888288888822
Basic Guido
Advanced Guido.
1 Camora Basics
2 Auto Mose/
yori Auto Modo
8 Other Shooting Modos.
4 P Mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
7
Zooming In Closer on Subjects (Digtal Zoom).
‘Shooting at Preset Focal Lengths (Step Zoom).
Using the Se Timer.
Using the Sal Timer to Avoid Camera Shake.
Customaing the Sa-Timer ………
‘Shooting by Touching the Screen (Touch Smtr).
Continuous Shooting. E
Image Display during Majbadk
Using Face 1D,
Persona Information
Registering Face ID Information
‘Shooting
(Checking and Eating Regstered Information
COverwnting and Adding Face Information.
Erasing Registered information.
Image Customization Features.
‘Changing the Aspect Rato.
(Changing Image Resoluton (Sze).
Guideines for Choosing Resauion Based on Paper Sze
(for 3:2 mages) ne or)
Correcting Greenish Image Areas ram Mercity LMP 49
(Changing Movie Image Quality. 50
Helpful Shooting Features. 50
Using the Dual Axis Electronic Level.
Magnifying the Area in Focus,
(Checking for Closed Eyes...
Customizing Camera Operation.
Deactvating the AF-Assist Beam.
Deactvating the Red-Eye Reduction Lamp.
st
Ree
Changing the Image Display Se after Shots
Changing the Image Display Period ater Shots
Changing the Screen Dislayed ater Shots .
3. Other Shooting Modes.
Enjoying a Variety of Images from Each Shot
(Creative Sho).
Choosing Efects
Specific Scenes. =
Using Functions for Underwater Shots
Shooting wih an Underwater Focusing Range
Correcting White Balance.
Image Eds (Creative Fitters).
‘Shooting High-Contrast Scenes (Hgh Dynamic Range).
Adding Atstic Efecs. =
‘Shooting wth Faded Colors (Nostalgic) =
‘Shooting wth aFis-Eye Lans Elec (Fen Eye Elec)
‘Shots Resembing Miniature Models (Miniature Etec...
Playback Speed and Estimated Playback Time
(for One-Minute Cips) ,
Shooting th a Toy Camera Elect (Toy Camera Elec
Making Subjects Stand Out (Background Defocus)
Shooting wih a Soft Focus Etec.
‘Shooting in Monochrome...
Special Modes for Other Purposes ….
‘Ato Shooting ter Face Detection (Smart Shute.
Auto Shooting ater Smile Detection
Using the Wink Selk-Timer
Using the Face Sel Timer.
‘Shooting Stary Skies (Sta). .
Shocing People aginst Stary Sues (Star Porta).
Shoating Night Scenes under Stary Shes
(Star Nightscape)
BBR
ag
agsuuganan
9 888288888822
Basic Guido
Advanced Guido.
1 Camora Basics
2 Auto Mose/
yori Auto Modo
8 Other Shooting Modos.
4 P Mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
7
Shooting Star Tras (Star Trails)
‘Shoting Movies of Star Movement.
(Star Time-Lapse Move).
Adjusting Colors...
Shooting Various Movies...
‘Shooting Movies in Standard Mode.
Lasiag Chango imap Barnes ete Shain
‘Shooting iFrame Movies.
4 P Mode.
‘Shooting in Program AE ((P] Mode).
Image Brightness (Exposure).
Acustng Image Brightness (Exposure Compensation).
Locking Image Brightness / Exposure (AE Lock
(Changing the Metering Method...
Linking the Spot AE Point Frame tothe AF Frame.
(Changing the ISO Speed.
‘Adjusting ISO Auto Settings...
Changing the Noise Reduction Level (High ISO pur
‘Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB Shocting)...
Correcting Image Brightness (¿Contrast
Dynamic Range Correction (DR Correction).
‘Shadow Correa.
Using the NO Fiter.
Image Colors.
‘Adjusing White Balance
Custom White Balance,
Manualy Correcting White Balance
(Changing Image Color Tones (My Colors).
Custom Calor. .
Shooting Range and Focusing.
‘Shooting Close-Ups (Macro)
‘Shooting in Manual Focus Mode.
Easiy Identifying the Focus Area (MF Peaking)
Focus Bracketing (Focus-BKT Mode).
Digital Tale Converter... .
Changing the AF Frame Mode...
pont .
Moving and Resting AF Frames (1.90 ua
Face AAP...
Shoeting wth Seno AF
Changing the Focus Setting
Choosing a Person to Focus On (Face Select
Choosing Subjects to Focus On (Touch AF).
‘Shooting with the AF Lock.
‘Shooting Continuously as the Camera Keeps the Subject in
Focus.
Flash...
Changng the Flash Moda.
Auto.
On
Son Synchro
‘Adusting the Flash Exposure Compensation
‘Shooting with the FE Lock.
(Changing the Flash Timing
Shooting RAW Images.
Other Settings.
CChangng the Compression Ratio (mage Qual).
Changing the IS Mode Settings.
‘Shocting Movies with Subjects atthe Same Size Shown
before Shoong….
Sting the Color of Shooting Sereen information.
228eeeee8e828 TERERERESERRE
Basie Guido
Advanced Guide
1 Camora Basics
2 Auto Mose/
yori Auto Modo
8 Other Shooting Modos.
4 P Mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
8
‘Shoting Movies of Star Movement.
(Star Time-Lapse Move).
Adjusting Colors...
Shooting Various Movies...
‘Shooting Movies in Standard Mode.
Lasiag Chango imap Barnes ete Shain
‘Shooting iFrame Movies.
4 P Mode.
‘Shooting in Program AE ((P] Mode).
Image Brightness (Exposure).
Acustng Image Brightness (Exposure Compensation).
Locking Image Brightness / Exposure (AE Lock
(Changing the Metering Method...
Linking the Spot AE Point Frame tothe AF Frame.
(Changing the ISO Speed.
‘Adjusting ISO Auto Settings...
Changing the Noise Reduction Level (High ISO pur
‘Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB Shocting)...
Correcting Image Brightness (¿Contrast
Dynamic Range Correction (DR Correction).
‘Shadow Correa.
Using the NO Fiter.
Image Colors.
‘Adjusing White Balance
Custom White Balance,
Manualy Correcting White Balance
(Changing Image Color Tones (My Colors).
Custom Calor. .
Shooting Range and Focusing.
‘Shooting Close-Ups (Macro)
‘Shooting in Manual Focus Mode.
Easiy Identifying the Focus Area (MF Peaking)
Focus Bracketing (Focus-BKT Mode).
Digital Tale Converter... .
Changing the AF Frame Mode...
pont .
Moving and Resting AF Frames (1.90 ua
Face AAP...
Shoeting wth Seno AF
Changing the Focus Setting
Choosing a Person to Focus On (Face Select
Choosing Subjects to Focus On (Touch AF).
‘Shooting with the AF Lock.
‘Shooting Continuously as the Camera Keeps the Subject in
Focus.
Flash...
Changng the Flash Moda.
Auto.
On
Son Synchro
‘Adusting the Flash Exposure Compensation
‘Shooting with the FE Lock.
(Changing the Flash Timing
Shooting RAW Images.
Other Settings.
CChangng the Compression Ratio (mage Qual).
Changing the IS Mode Settings.
‘Shocting Movies with Subjects atthe Same Size Shown
before Shoong….
Sting the Color of Shooting Sereen information.
228eeeee8e828 TERERERESERRE
Basie Guido
Advanced Guide
1 Camora Basics
2 Auto Mose/
yori Auto Modo
8 Other Shooting Modos.
4 P Mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
8
5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode......
Specific Shutter Speeds ((Tv] Mode),
Specific Aperture Values ([Av] Mode).
Spec Shfter Speeds and Aperture Values (M] Mode)...
‘Adjusting he Flash Output
Recording Movies at Specific Shutter Speeds and Aperture
Values...
Setup via Touch Operations a
Custom@ation for Shooting Styes …
(Changing Control Ring Settings.
Functions Assignable to the Control Ring
Assigning Functions to the Control Ring
Using the Contra Ring for Adustment,
(Customizing Display Information...
Assigning Functions to Buttons…….
Customizing the FUNC. Menu (FUNC. Menu Layout.
‘Choosing tems to Include in the Menu.
Rearranging Menu Items...
‘Saving Shooting Settings...
Settings that can be saved:
‘Saving Commonly Used Shooting Menu Items (My Menu).
6 Playback Mode ...
Viewing.
auch Screen Operations.
‘Switching Display Modes.
Overexposure Warning (fr Image Highlights)
Histogram.
RGB Histogram, GPS Information Dsplay..
Viewing Short Movies Created When Shocting Stl Images
(Digest Movies). 106
Viewing by Date, 108
Checking People Detected in Face D.
Browsing and Filtering Images.
Narigatng through Images in an Index …
Touch-Screen Operations.
Finding Images Matching Spectied Condiins..
Using the Contra Ring to Jump between Images.
Touch-Sereen Operations.
Viewing Individual Images in a Group …
Editing Face ID Information.
Changing Nemes.
Erasing Names.
Image Viewing Options.
Magnifying Images.
Touch-Sereen Operations.
Viewing Sideshons.……
‘Auto Playback of Related Images (Smart Shuffe)
Protecting Images
Choosing a Selection Method.
(Choosing Images Individually...
Salting @ RANge a
Protecting Al Images at Once...
Clearing All Protection at Once
Erasing Images
Erasing Multiple Images at Once.
Choosing a Selection Method
Choosing Images Individually.
Selecting a Range...
Spectying Al mages at Once.
Rotating Images...
Deactivating Auto Rotation...
Tagging Images as Favorites.
Basic Guido
Advanced Guido.
1 Camora Basics
2 Auto Mose/
yori Auto Modo
8 Other Shooting Modos.
4 P Mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
9
Specific Shutter Speeds ((Tv] Mode),
Specific Aperture Values ([Av] Mode).
Spec Shfter Speeds and Aperture Values (M] Mode)...
‘Adjusting he Flash Output
Recording Movies at Specific Shutter Speeds and Aperture
Values...
Setup via Touch Operations a
Custom@ation for Shooting Styes …
(Changing Control Ring Settings.
Functions Assignable to the Control Ring
Assigning Functions to the Control Ring
Using the Contra Ring for Adustment,
(Customizing Display Information...
Assigning Functions to Buttons…….
Customizing the FUNC. Menu (FUNC. Menu Layout.
‘Choosing tems to Include in the Menu.
Rearranging Menu Items...
‘Saving Shooting Settings...
Settings that can be saved:
‘Saving Commonly Used Shooting Menu Items (My Menu).
6 Playback Mode ...
Viewing.
auch Screen Operations.
‘Switching Display Modes.
Overexposure Warning (fr Image Highlights)
Histogram.
RGB Histogram, GPS Information Dsplay..
Viewing Short Movies Created When Shocting Stl Images
(Digest Movies). 106
Viewing by Date, 108
Checking People Detected in Face D.
Browsing and Filtering Images.
Narigatng through Images in an Index …
Touch-Screen Operations.
Finding Images Matching Spectied Condiins..
Using the Contra Ring to Jump between Images.
Touch-Sereen Operations.
Viewing Individual Images in a Group …
Editing Face ID Information.
Changing Nemes.
Erasing Names.
Image Viewing Options.
Magnifying Images.
Touch-Sereen Operations.
Viewing Sideshons.……
‘Auto Playback of Related Images (Smart Shuffe)
Protecting Images
Choosing a Selection Method.
(Choosing Images Individually...
Salting @ RANge a
Protecting Al Images at Once...
Clearing All Protection at Once
Erasing Images
Erasing Multiple Images at Once.
Choosing a Selection Method
Choosing Images Individually.
Selecting a Range...
Spectying Al mages at Once.
Rotating Images...
Deactivating Auto Rotation...
Tagging Images as Favorites.
Basic Guido
Advanced Guido.
1 Camora Basics
2 Auto Mose/
yori Auto Modo
8 Other Shooting Modos.
4 P Mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
9
Convenient Control: Touch Actions 19
Using Touch Actions Functions, 19
Changing Touch Actions Functions ae)
‘Assignable Functions. 120
Editing Stil Images………. un 120
Reszing Images. 120
Cropping, 11
Changing Image Color Tones (My Colts). ..122
Correcting Image Brightness (Contrast. ...129
Correcting Red Eye. ee
Editing Movies. 124
Reducing File Sizes, 125
citing Digest Movies. 128
Wi-Fi Functions... 127
Available Wi-Fi Features... „127
‘Sending Images to a Smartphone. 128
‘Sending to a Smartphone Assigned tothe Button...
‘Adding a Smartphone Using the WiFi Menu.
Using Ancther Access Point
Previous Access Points.
‘Saving Images to a Computer. 133
Preparing to Register a Computer 133
Checking Your Computer Environment er)
Instaling the Sofware. 18
Cortiguring the Computer fora Wi-Fi Connection
(Windows On. ees |
‘Savinglmages to a Connected Computer. 195
Confirming Access Point Compattiy.. 135
Using WPS-Compatble Access Points. 136
Connecting to Listed Access Points a1
Previous Access Points, 138
‘Sending Images to a Registered Web Service 198
Registering Web Services. 138
Registering CANON IMAGE GATEWAY... 139
Registering Other Web Services un
Uploading Images to Web Services … .
Printing Images Wralessy ftom a Comnactod Pinter... 142
Sending Images to Another Camera 143
Image Sending Options... 144
Sending Multiple Images. 144
Notes on Sending Images. u o 144
Choosing th image Resolution (Se). 145
‘Adding Comments. 145
Sending Images Automatically (Image Sync). 145
Initial Preparations. re 146
Preparing the Camera 145;
Preparing the Computer 146
Sending Images. 146
Using a Smartphone to View Camera Images and Control
the Camera.
Geotagging Images onthe Camera.
Shooting Remote}
Eating or Erasing MF Setings.
Editing Connection Information.
Changing a Device Nickname.
Erasing Connection Information une
Retuming the Wi-Fi Settings to Defaut..
Setting Menu
‘Adjusting Basic Camera Functions...
Silencing Camera Operations...
‘Adusting the Volume...
Customizing Sounds.
Basie Guido
Advanced Guide
1 Camora Basics
2 Auto Mose/
yori Auto Modo
8 Other Shooting Modos.
4 P Mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
10
Using Touch Actions Functions, 19
Changing Touch Actions Functions ae)
‘Assignable Functions. 120
Editing Stil Images………. un 120
Reszing Images. 120
Cropping, 11
Changing Image Color Tones (My Colts). ..122
Correcting Image Brightness (Contrast. ...129
Correcting Red Eye. ee
Editing Movies. 124
Reducing File Sizes, 125
citing Digest Movies. 128
Wi-Fi Functions... 127
Available Wi-Fi Features... „127
‘Sending Images to a Smartphone. 128
‘Sending to a Smartphone Assigned tothe Button...
‘Adding a Smartphone Using the WiFi Menu.
Using Ancther Access Point
Previous Access Points.
‘Saving Images to a Computer. 133
Preparing to Register a Computer 133
Checking Your Computer Environment er)
Instaling the Sofware. 18
Cortiguring the Computer fora Wi-Fi Connection
(Windows On. ees |
‘Savinglmages to a Connected Computer. 195
Confirming Access Point Compattiy.. 135
Using WPS-Compatble Access Points. 136
Connecting to Listed Access Points a1
Previous Access Points, 138
‘Sending Images to a Registered Web Service 198
Registering Web Services. 138
Registering CANON IMAGE GATEWAY... 139
Registering Other Web Services un
Uploading Images to Web Services … .
Printing Images Wralessy ftom a Comnactod Pinter... 142
Sending Images to Another Camera 143
Image Sending Options... 144
Sending Multiple Images. 144
Notes on Sending Images. u o 144
Choosing th image Resolution (Se). 145
‘Adding Comments. 145
Sending Images Automatically (Image Sync). 145
Initial Preparations. re 146
Preparing the Camera 145;
Preparing the Computer 146
Sending Images. 146
Using a Smartphone to View Camera Images and Control
the Camera.
Geotagging Images onthe Camera.
Shooting Remote}
Eating or Erasing MF Setings.
Editing Connection Information.
Changing a Device Nickname.
Erasing Connection Information une
Retuming the Wi-Fi Settings to Defaut..
Setting Menu
‘Adjusting Basic Camera Functions...
Silencing Camera Operations...
‘Adusting the Volume...
Customizing Sounds.
Basie Guido
Advanced Guide
1 Camora Basics
2 Auto Mose/
yori Auto Modo
8 Other Shooting Modos.
4 P Mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
10
Hidng Hints and Tps. 182
Date and Time 152
World C10¢K mr a)
Lens Retraction Tin ...153
Using Eco Mode a ..153
Power-Saving Adustment 153
‘Screen Brightness. 153
Start-Up Screen. E ..154
Formatting Memory Cards... ..154
Low-Level Formatting. i
File Numbering 155
Date-Based Image Storage, 155
Metric / Non Metric Display 155
Electronic Level Calbration.. 155
Resetting the Electronic LV 156
Deacivating Touch-Sereen OperaiONS anos rn 156
Increasing Touch-Screen Panel Sensitivity 156
Setting Copyright Information to Record in Images. 156
Deleting Al Copyright Information 156
Checking Cetfication LOB ST
Display Language. 157
Agjustng Other Settings. 187
Restoring Defauts. 157
9 Accessories ..
System MAD a
Optional Accessories. 159
Power Supplies. 159
Flash Unit. 160
Other Accessories …… |
Printers … e 160
Using Optional Accessories. 161
Playback on a TV 161
Playback on a High Defniion TV. 161
Playback on a Standard Definition TV. 162
Powering the Camera with Household Power...
Using the Software.
Software.
Software instucton Manual.
(Computer Connections via a Cable
Checking Your Computer Environment
Instalingthe Sofware
Saving Images to a Computer.
Printing Images
Easy Print
Configuring Print Setings.
Cropping Images before Printing. 2
Choosing Paper Sze and Layout before Pang nn 168
‘Available Layout Option... ae
Printing ID Photos
Printing Movie Scenes.
Movie Printing Options
Ang Images tothe Pant List [DPOF).
Configuring Print Setings. =
Seting Up Printing fr nvidia Images. 170
Setting Up Printing fora Range of Images. 170
Setting Up Printing for Al Images.
Clearing Al Images from the Print List...
Printing Images Added to the Print List (DPOF
‘Adging Images to a Photobook …… nn TY
Choosing a Selection Method am
‘Adding Images Individually. 172
‘Adding Al Images to a Photobook 172
Removing AI Images from a PhGtObOGk nn 172
Basie Guido
Advanced Guide
1 Camora Basics
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
8 Other Shooting Modos.
4 P mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
1"
Date and Time 152
World C10¢K mr a)
Lens Retraction Tin ...153
Using Eco Mode a ..153
Power-Saving Adustment 153
‘Screen Brightness. 153
Start-Up Screen. E ..154
Formatting Memory Cards... ..154
Low-Level Formatting. i
File Numbering 155
Date-Based Image Storage, 155
Metric / Non Metric Display 155
Electronic Level Calbration.. 155
Resetting the Electronic LV 156
Deacivating Touch-Sereen OperaiONS anos rn 156
Increasing Touch-Screen Panel Sensitivity 156
Setting Copyright Information to Record in Images. 156
Deleting Al Copyright Information 156
Checking Cetfication LOB ST
Display Language. 157
Agjustng Other Settings. 187
Restoring Defauts. 157
9 Accessories ..
System MAD a
Optional Accessories. 159
Power Supplies. 159
Flash Unit. 160
Other Accessories …… |
Printers … e 160
Using Optional Accessories. 161
Playback on a TV 161
Playback on a High Defniion TV. 161
Playback on a Standard Definition TV. 162
Powering the Camera with Household Power...
Using the Software.
Software.
Software instucton Manual.
(Computer Connections via a Cable
Checking Your Computer Environment
Instalingthe Sofware
Saving Images to a Computer.
Printing Images
Easy Print
Configuring Print Setings.
Cropping Images before Printing. 2
Choosing Paper Sze and Layout before Pang nn 168
‘Available Layout Option... ae
Printing ID Photos
Printing Movie Scenes.
Movie Printing Options
Ang Images tothe Pant List [DPOF).
Configuring Print Setings. =
Seting Up Printing fr nvidia Images. 170
Setting Up Printing fora Range of Images. 170
Setting Up Printing for Al Images.
Clearing Al Images from the Print List...
Printing Images Added to the Print List (DPOF
‘Adging Images to a Photobook …… nn TY
Choosing a Selection Method am
‘Adding Images Individually. 172
‘Adding Al Images to a Photobook 172
Removing AI Images from a PhGtObOGk nn 172
Basie Guido
Advanced Guide
1 Camora Basics
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
8 Other Shooting Modos.
4 P mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
1"
10 Appendix
ae WEFi (Wireless LAN) Precautions. 201 A
> Ratio Wave interference Precautions. 201
Teubleshocting ae Security Precaution... .201 A
(On-Screen Messages. 17 Trademarks and Licensing... .202 ee
On-Screen information ne 79 Discamer.. E77
‘Shooting (Information Display). 179 ¿pense Guide)
Battery Level en
Payback (Detailed Information DS 190 e
Summary of Movie Control Panel. nen sr
Functions and Menu Tables 181 Hybrid Auto Mode
Functions Avalæble n Each Shootng Mode 181 Res
FUNC. Menu 183
ONO TB. Be} RES
Set Up Tab... 2
My Menu Tab ar ES
Playback Tab u . nn
Print Tab 1 aa
Hanging Precautons... 193
Specifications . 194 en
Camera Speciation... vn 104
WiFi 194 ce
Digta Zoom Focal Lengh (36mm equivalent. 194
Number of Shots Recording Time, Playback Time 198 AR
Number of Shots per Memory CAN. 105
Recoring Time per Memory Card 198 De
Flash RANGE cc 198
Srodting RANGE nnn ns =
Continuous Shooting Speed. 196
Shutter Speed 197
Aperture... 197
Baton Pack NB BL. A Big .
ee = DIE]
Inden 198
12
ae WEFi (Wireless LAN) Precautions. 201 A
> Ratio Wave interference Precautions. 201
Teubleshocting ae Security Precaution... .201 A
(On-Screen Messages. 17 Trademarks and Licensing... .202 ee
On-Screen information ne 79 Discamer.. E77
‘Shooting (Information Display). 179 ¿pense Guide)
Battery Level en
Payback (Detailed Information DS 190 e
Summary of Movie Control Panel. nen sr
Functions and Menu Tables 181 Hybrid Auto Mode
Functions Avalæble n Each Shootng Mode 181 Res
FUNC. Menu 183
ONO TB. Be} RES
Set Up Tab... 2
My Menu Tab ar ES
Playback Tab u . nn
Print Tab 1 aa
Hanging Precautons... 193
Specifications . 194 en
Camera Speciation... vn 104
WiFi 194 ce
Digta Zoom Focal Lengh (36mm equivalent. 194
Number of Shots Recording Time, Playback Time 198 AR
Number of Shots per Memory CAN. 105
Recoring Time per Memory Card 198 De
Flash RANGE cc 198
Srodting RANGE nnn ns =
Continuous Shooting Speed. 196
Shutter Speed 197
Aperture... 197
Baton Pack NB BL. A Big .
ee = DIE]
Inden 198
12
Common Camera Operation
shoot
+ Use camera-determined settings (Auto Mode, Hybrid Auto Mode)
Fass, ise
+ See several effects applied to each shot, using camera-determined
settings (Creative Shot Mode)
se
Shooting people well
Portraits
(iss)
Mating pci snes
y 4
dec
Wg Scenes Under tr
(ss) ss)
$
Against Snow
(iss)
Fireworks Starry Skies
(ss) (ies)
Apphing special effects
a ¥ @
vid Colors Poster Etect ‘Aged! Photos
as) se) was
& & ©
FisnEye tect Mniaure Effect Toy Camera Eect
(io) (260 si)
Background Defocus SofFacus Moncchrome
(ez) (ea (Usa
+ Focus on faces
24, 55 ea, es
+ Without using the flash (Flash Of)
‘Mas
+ Include yourself in the shot (Sel-Timer)
a1, Des
+ Use Face ID
Manor
+ Movie chps and photos together (Movie Digest)
Ms
Guide
Advanced Guido
Inder
1 Canora Basics,
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4 P Mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
13
shoot
+ Use camera-determined settings (Auto Mode, Hybrid Auto Mode)
Fass, ise
+ See several effects applied to each shot, using camera-determined
settings (Creative Shot Mode)
se
Shooting people well
Portraits
(iss)
Mating pci snes
y 4
dec
Wg Scenes Under tr
(ss) ss)
$
Against Snow
(iss)
Fireworks Starry Skies
(ss) (ies)
Apphing special effects
a ¥ @
vid Colors Poster Etect ‘Aged! Photos
as) se) was
& & ©
FisnEye tect Mniaure Effect Toy Camera Eect
(io) (260 si)
Background Defocus SofFacus Moncchrome
(ez) (ea (Usa
+ Focus on faces
24, 55 ea, es
+ Without using the flash (Flash Of)
‘Mas
+ Include yourself in the shot (Sel-Timer)
a1, Des
+ Use Face ID
Manor
+ Movie chps and photos together (Movie Digest)
Ms
Guide
Advanced Guido
Inder
1 Canora Basics,
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4 P Mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
13
von vas 5 ancora LEE
‘View images (Playback Mode) + Send images to a smartphone Sagen
Eos 28
+ Automatic playback (Sideshow) + Share images online ae
na ise.
+ OnaTv + Send images to a computer AE
Fores as
+ On a computer 2 Auto Mod /
pas Hybrid Auto Modo
+ Eronse through images quicliy 3 Otner Shooting Modes
Cor
+ Erase images 4 P Mode
ns
Av an
"9 Shoot View Movies 5 Tv.Av.M and C Modo
+ Shoot movies (6 Playback Modo
Lisa 171, es
+ View movies (Playback Mode) 7 WiFi Functions
Eos
8 Sowing Menu.
Brin
Accessories
+ Print pictures
ies 10 Appencix
save —
+ Save images to a computer via a cable
iss
«ba
14
‘View images (Playback Mode) + Send images to a smartphone Sagen
Eos 28
+ Automatic playback (Sideshow) + Share images online ae
na ise.
+ OnaTv + Send images to a computer AE
Fores as
+ On a computer 2 Auto Mod /
pas Hybrid Auto Modo
+ Eronse through images quicliy 3 Otner Shooting Modes
Cor
+ Erase images 4 P Mode
ns
Av an
"9 Shoot View Movies 5 Tv.Av.M and C Modo
+ Shoot movies (6 Playback Modo
Lisa 171, es
+ View movies (Playback Mode) 7 WiFi Functions
Eos
8 Sowing Menu.
Brin
Accessories
+ Print pictures
ies 10 Appencix
save —
+ Save images to a computer via a cable
iss
«ba
14
+ Before using the product, ensure that you read the safety precautions
described below. Always ensure thatthe product is used correctly.
+ The safety precautions noted here are intended to prevent you and
«ther persons from being injured er incuring property damage.
+ Be sure to also check the guides included with any separately sold
‘accessories you use
ENT Denotes the possibilty of serious injury or death
= Donct tigger the flash in close proximity to people's eyes.
Exposure to the intense light produced by he flash could damage
‘eyesight, In particular, remain at least 1 meter (3.3 feet) away from infants
when using the flash.
+ Store this equipment out of the reach of children and infants
Astap wound around a chlds neck may result in asphyaiation
It your product uses a power cord, mistakenly winding the cord around a
cis neck may result in asphyxiation
+ Use only recommended power sources.
+ Do nct disassemble, alter, or apply heat to the product
+ Donot peel of the abel, the battery pack has one.
Avoid cropping or subjecting the product to severe impact.
+ Dont touch the interior ofthe productif ts broken, such as when
copped.
+ Stop using the product immediately tit emits smoke ora strange
smell, or otherwise behaves abnormally
+ Do not use organic solvents such as alcohol, benzine, or thinner to
dean the product
+ Avoid contact with quid, and do not alow quid or foreign objects inside
This could resul in electrical shack or fr,
Ifthe product gets wet, orf Iqui or foreign objects get inside, remove the
battery packbatteries or unplig immediately,
+ Do net lok through the viewfinder (i your model has one) at intense
light sources, such as the sun on a clear day or an intense arial,
light source
This could damage your eyesight
| Do not touch the product during thunderstorms fitis pluggedin.
This could resul in electrical shock o fre. Immediately top using the
product and distance yourself from t
+ Use only the recommended battery pecklbatieries.
+ Do not place the battery packibatteries near orin drectflame,
This may cause the battery packlbatteries to explode or leak, resutingin
electrical shock, fre, or injuries If leaking battery electro comes into
Contact with eyes, mouth, sin, or clething, immediately fush with water
«the product uses a battery charger, note the folowing precautions,
Remove the plug perodcaly and, using a dy cloth, wipe away any
dust and dit that has collected onthe plug, the extencr ofthe power
outlet, and the surrounding area,
Do not insert or remove the plug with wet hands
Do not use the equipment in a manner that exceeds the rated
capacity ofthe electrical outlet or wiring accessories, Do not use if
the plug is damaged or nat full inserted in the out
Do not allow dust or metal objects (such as pins or keys) to contact
the terminals or plug
Do not eut, damage, ater, or place heavy items on the power cord
your product uses one
This could resul in electrical shock or fre.
« Turn the camera off in places where camera useis prohibited
The electromagnetic waves emited by the camera may intrfere withthe
operation of electronic instruments and other devices, Exercise adequate
caution when using the product in places where use of electronic devices
is restricted, such as inside airplanes and medical facts.
+ Donotallowthe camera to maintain contact wth sin for extended periods
Even £ the camera does nat feel hot. this may cause low-temperature
burns, manifested in edness ofthe skin or blistering. Use a ipod in hot
places, oi you have poor crculaton or insensitive skin,
Basie Guido
Advanced Guide
1 Camora Basics
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
8 Other Shooting Modos.
4 P mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
15
described below. Always ensure thatthe product is used correctly.
+ The safety precautions noted here are intended to prevent you and
«ther persons from being injured er incuring property damage.
+ Be sure to also check the guides included with any separately sold
‘accessories you use
ENT Denotes the possibilty of serious injury or death
= Donct tigger the flash in close proximity to people's eyes.
Exposure to the intense light produced by he flash could damage
‘eyesight, In particular, remain at least 1 meter (3.3 feet) away from infants
when using the flash.
+ Store this equipment out of the reach of children and infants
Astap wound around a chlds neck may result in asphyaiation
It your product uses a power cord, mistakenly winding the cord around a
cis neck may result in asphyxiation
+ Use only recommended power sources.
+ Do nct disassemble, alter, or apply heat to the product
+ Donot peel of the abel, the battery pack has one.
Avoid cropping or subjecting the product to severe impact.
+ Dont touch the interior ofthe productif ts broken, such as when
copped.
+ Stop using the product immediately tit emits smoke ora strange
smell, or otherwise behaves abnormally
+ Do not use organic solvents such as alcohol, benzine, or thinner to
dean the product
+ Avoid contact with quid, and do not alow quid or foreign objects inside
This could resul in electrical shack or fr,
Ifthe product gets wet, orf Iqui or foreign objects get inside, remove the
battery packbatteries or unplig immediately,
+ Do net lok through the viewfinder (i your model has one) at intense
light sources, such as the sun on a clear day or an intense arial,
light source
This could damage your eyesight
| Do not touch the product during thunderstorms fitis pluggedin.
This could resul in electrical shock o fre. Immediately top using the
product and distance yourself from t
+ Use only the recommended battery pecklbatieries.
+ Do not place the battery packibatteries near orin drectflame,
This may cause the battery packlbatteries to explode or leak, resutingin
electrical shock, fre, or injuries If leaking battery electro comes into
Contact with eyes, mouth, sin, or clething, immediately fush with water
«the product uses a battery charger, note the folowing precautions,
Remove the plug perodcaly and, using a dy cloth, wipe away any
dust and dit that has collected onthe plug, the extencr ofthe power
outlet, and the surrounding area,
Do not insert or remove the plug with wet hands
Do not use the equipment in a manner that exceeds the rated
capacity ofthe electrical outlet or wiring accessories, Do not use if
the plug is damaged or nat full inserted in the out
Do not allow dust or metal objects (such as pins or keys) to contact
the terminals or plug
Do not eut, damage, ater, or place heavy items on the power cord
your product uses one
This could resul in electrical shock or fre.
« Turn the camera off in places where camera useis prohibited
The electromagnetic waves emited by the camera may intrfere withthe
operation of electronic instruments and other devices, Exercise adequate
caution when using the product in places where use of electronic devices
is restricted, such as inside airplanes and medical facts.
+ Donotallowthe camera to maintain contact wth sin for extended periods
Even £ the camera does nat feel hot. this may cause low-temperature
burns, manifested in edness ofthe skin or blistering. Use a ipod in hot
places, oi you have poor crculaton or insensitive skin,
Basie Guido
Advanced Guide
1 Camora Basics
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
8 Other Shooting Modos.
4 P mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
15
Den
the possibilty of injury
+ When carrying the product by the strap, be careful notto bang,
subjectitto strong impacts or shocks, o lett get caught on other
objects
+ Becarafulnotto bump or push strongly onthe lens.
‘This could lead to injury or damage the camera,
+ Be carelulnotto subjectthe screen to strong impacts
Ifthe screen cracks, injury may resul from the broken fragments.
+ When using te flash, be careful not to cover it with your fingers or
thing
‘This could result in burns or damage tothe flash.
Avoid using, placing, or storing the product in the following places.
Places subjectto drect sunlight
Places subjectto temperatures above 40 °C (104 °F)
Humid or dusty places.
‘These could cause leakage, overheating, or an explosion ofthe battery
packibatetes, resulting in electrical shock, fe, burns, or other injuries
(Overheating and damage may result in electrica shock, fire, burns, or
other injuries.
+ The sideshow transtion effects may cause discomfort when viewed
for prolonged periods.
+ When using optional lenses, lens fiers, or iter adapters (if
applicable), be sure to atach these accessories firmly.
Itthe lens accessory becomes loose and als of, it may crack, and the
shards of glass may lead to cuts
+ On products that aise and lower the flash automatically, make sure to
avoid pinching your fingers wäh the lowering fash
This could resul in injury.
[Ecauion | Denotes the possibilty of property damage.
+ Do not aim the camera atintense light sources, such as the sun on a
clear day or an intense aii light source
Doing so may demage the image sensor or other intemal components
+ When using the camera on a sandy beach or at a windy location, be
careful noto allow dust or sandto enter the camera
+ On products that raise and lower the flash automatically, do not push
the flash down or pry open
This may cause the product to malfunction
+ Wipe off any dust, gime, or other foreign matter onthe flash wih a
coton swab ar cath
The neat emitted from the flash may cause foreign matter to smoke or the
product to mattuncton
+ Remove and store the battery packbateries when you are natusing
the product
Any battery leakage that occurs may cause product damage.
+ Before you discard the battery pachbatteries, cover the terminals with
tape or ther insulators.
Contacting ater metal materials may lead to fre or explosions
+ Unplug any battery charger used with the product when notin use. Do
not cover witha clth ar other objects when in use
Leaving the unit plugged in or a long period of time may cause itto
overheat and dstor, resulting in fre.
Do not leave any dedicated battery packs near pets.
Pets biting the battery pack could cause leakage, overhezting, or
explosion, resulting in product damage o fre
Basie Guido
Advanced Guide
1 Camora Basics
2 Auto Mose/
yori Auto Modo
8 Other Shooting Modos.
4 P Mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
16
the possibilty of injury
+ When carrying the product by the strap, be careful notto bang,
subjectitto strong impacts or shocks, o lett get caught on other
objects
+ Becarafulnotto bump or push strongly onthe lens.
‘This could lead to injury or damage the camera,
+ Be carelulnotto subjectthe screen to strong impacts
Ifthe screen cracks, injury may resul from the broken fragments.
+ When using te flash, be careful not to cover it with your fingers or
thing
‘This could result in burns or damage tothe flash.
Avoid using, placing, or storing the product in the following places.
Places subjectto drect sunlight
Places subjectto temperatures above 40 °C (104 °F)
Humid or dusty places.
‘These could cause leakage, overheating, or an explosion ofthe battery
packibatetes, resulting in electrical shock, fe, burns, or other injuries
(Overheating and damage may result in electrica shock, fire, burns, or
other injuries.
+ The sideshow transtion effects may cause discomfort when viewed
for prolonged periods.
+ When using optional lenses, lens fiers, or iter adapters (if
applicable), be sure to atach these accessories firmly.
Itthe lens accessory becomes loose and als of, it may crack, and the
shards of glass may lead to cuts
+ On products that aise and lower the flash automatically, make sure to
avoid pinching your fingers wäh the lowering fash
This could resul in injury.
[Ecauion | Denotes the possibilty of property damage.
+ Do not aim the camera atintense light sources, such as the sun on a
clear day or an intense aii light source
Doing so may demage the image sensor or other intemal components
+ When using the camera on a sandy beach or at a windy location, be
careful noto allow dust or sandto enter the camera
+ On products that raise and lower the flash automatically, do not push
the flash down or pry open
This may cause the product to malfunction
+ Wipe off any dust, gime, or other foreign matter onthe flash wih a
coton swab ar cath
The neat emitted from the flash may cause foreign matter to smoke or the
product to mattuncton
+ Remove and store the battery packbateries when you are natusing
the product
Any battery leakage that occurs may cause product damage.
+ Before you discard the battery pachbatteries, cover the terminals with
tape or ther insulators.
Contacting ater metal materials may lead to fre or explosions
+ Unplug any battery charger used with the product when notin use. Do
not cover witha clth ar other objects when in use
Leaving the unit plugged in or a long period of time may cause itto
overheat and dstor, resulting in fre.
Do not leave any dedicated battery packs near pets.
Pets biting the battery pack could cause leakage, overhezting, or
explosion, resulting in product damage o fre
Basie Guido
Advanced Guide
1 Camora Basics
2 Auto Mose/
yori Auto Modo
8 Other Shooting Modos.
4 P Mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
16
+ Ifyour product uses multiple batteries, do not use batteries that LES
have diferent levels of charge together, and do not use dd and
new batteries together. Do notinsert the batteries with the + end —
terminals reversed.
his may cause the product to malfunction
Basie Guido
Advanced Guide
+ Do not sit down withthe camera in your pant pocket
Doing so may cause mafunctions or damage the screen.
1 Camera Basics
+ When putting the cemera in your bag, ensure that hard objects do not
come into contact wth the screen, Also close the screen (so thatit
faces the body) your products screen closes
© Dondtatach any hard objects to the product y Shooting Modes
Doing so may cause mafunctions or damage the screen. IS
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
4 P Mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
Inder
«ba
7
have diferent levels of charge together, and do not use dd and
new batteries together. Do notinsert the batteries with the + end —
terminals reversed.
his may cause the product to malfunction
Basie Guido
Advanced Guide
+ Do not sit down withthe camera in your pant pocket
Doing so may cause mafunctions or damage the screen.
1 Camera Basics
+ When putting the cemera in your bag, ensure that hard objects do not
come into contact wth the screen, Also close the screen (so thatit
faces the body) your products screen closes
© Dondtatach any hard objects to the product y Shooting Modes
Doing so may cause mafunctions or damage the screen. IS
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
4 P Mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
Inder
«ba
7
Basic Guide
Basic Operations
Basic information and instructions, from initial
preparations to shooting and playback
| Initial Preparations
Prepare for shooting as follows,
Attaching the Strap
Attach the strap.
ead the end ofthe strap through the
strap hole (1), and hen pull the other
end ofthe trap through the loop on the
readed end (2)
‘The strap can also be attached tothe left
sd
Place the strap around your wrist.
When shooting, keep your arms close to
your body and hold the camera securely
to preventitfrom moving I you have
¡sed the flash, do nat rest your fingers
Advanced Guido
1 Camora Basics,
Auto Mode
2 Hybrid Auto Mode
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4 P Mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Setting Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
Inder
Basic Operations
Basic information and instructions, from initial
preparations to shooting and playback
| Initial Preparations
Prepare for shooting as follows,
Attaching the Strap
Attach the strap.
ead the end ofthe strap through the
strap hole (1), and hen pull the other
end ofthe trap through the loop on the
readed end (2)
‘The strap can also be attached tothe left
sd
Place the strap around your wrist.
When shooting, keep your arms close to
your body and hold the camera securely
to preventitfrom moving I you have
¡sed the flash, do nat rest your fingers
Advanced Guido
1 Camora Basics,
Auto Mode
2 Hybrid Auto Mode
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4 P Mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Setting Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
Inder
™ Charging the Battery Pack
Before use, charge the battery pack withthe included charger. Be sure to
charge the battery pack Italy, because the camera is not sold wih the
battery pack charged.
1 Insert the battery pack.
© After aligning the A marks onthe batery
pack and charger insert he battery pack
by pushing tin (1) and down (2)
2 Charge the battery pack.
+ CB-2LH: Flip out the plug (1) and plug the
charger into a power outlet (2).
+ CB-2LHE Plug the power cord into the
charger, then plug te other endinto a.
Power outlet
‘© The charging lamp tums orange, and
chargng begins,
‘© When charging is finished, the lamp turns
green.
3 Remove the battery pack.
e After unplugging the battery charger,
remove the battery pack by pushing tin
(1) andup 2)
(CD pss tay ccs kop a or
See eae
«erate cn tus pov! re ta
thee oso er ogee bang a
cms be ai
O rar aeoisoncrrgratme ara ne er no
‘sora ne ete we cored a ot
“Number of ShatsRecording Time, Playback Time” (1195).
Crop gaan Dar age, en en
del ehage ebay pan reds
Do ey tse
Teheran es ars wh 10-240 pont
(Shean ro pane ains once, unse
Sonne auge ne Nee aan
fcr rm age nam nay ape
A
® Inserting the Battery Pack and Memory Card
Insert the included battery pack and a memory card (sold separetely).
Note that before using a new memory card (or a memory card formatted
in another device), yu should format the memory card with this camera
rsa).
1 Open the cover.
+ Side the switch (1) and open the cover
y) >
N 2)
Before Use
Advanced Guide
1 Camora Basics
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
8 Other Shooting Modos.
4 P mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
19
Before use, charge the battery pack withthe included charger. Be sure to
charge the battery pack Italy, because the camera is not sold wih the
battery pack charged.
1 Insert the battery pack.
© After aligning the A marks onthe batery
pack and charger insert he battery pack
by pushing tin (1) and down (2)
2 Charge the battery pack.
+ CB-2LH: Flip out the plug (1) and plug the
charger into a power outlet (2).
+ CB-2LHE Plug the power cord into the
charger, then plug te other endinto a.
Power outlet
‘© The charging lamp tums orange, and
chargng begins,
‘© When charging is finished, the lamp turns
green.
3 Remove the battery pack.
e After unplugging the battery charger,
remove the battery pack by pushing tin
(1) andup 2)
(CD pss tay ccs kop a or
See eae
«erate cn tus pov! re ta
thee oso er ogee bang a
cms be ai
O rar aeoisoncrrgratme ara ne er no
‘sora ne ete we cored a ot
“Number of ShatsRecording Time, Playback Time” (1195).
Crop gaan Dar age, en en
del ehage ebay pan reds
Do ey tse
Teheran es ars wh 10-240 pont
(Shean ro pane ains once, unse
Sonne auge ne Nee aan
fcr rm age nam nay ape
A
® Inserting the Battery Pack and Memory Card
Insert the included battery pack and a memory card (sold separetely).
Note that before using a new memory card (or a memory card formatted
in another device), yu should format the memory card with this camera
rsa).
1 Open the cover.
+ Side the switch (1) and open the cover
y) >
N 2)
Before Use
Advanced Guide
1 Camora Basics
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
8 Other Shooting Modos.
4 P mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
19
ax]
Ñ An
D > racscenes
2 insert the battery pack.
‘© Holding the battery pack wath the terminals
(1) facing as shown, press the battery lock
(2) inthe direction ofthe arrow and insert
the battery pack untilthe lock licks shut
Ifyou insert the battery pack facing the
‘wrong way, cannct be locked into the
correct postion. Always confirm that the
battery pack is facing the right way and
locks when inserted,
3 Check he cards writ-protect tab
and inser the memory card
‘Recordings notpossble on memory
cards th ate protect ab unen the
{abs nthe locked poston, Side the ab
to tie unicied poston
‘© Insert the memory card with the label (1)
fering as shown Ul cchs nto lace
Make sure the memory cards facing the
Fight way when yu inser Insering
mamon) cars Range wrong way may
damage the camera
Close the cover.
‘© Loner the cover (1) and hold down as
you side the such, unit dicks into the
closed postion (2)
On how many shes or hous e recardng canbe
saved on ane memory card, see Number of Sots per Memory
Cars miss),
Removing the Battery Pack and Memory Card
N
™ Setting the Date
Remove the battery pack.
‘© Open the cover and press the battery
lock in the direction of the arow.
© The battery pack wil pop up
Remove the memory card.
Push the memory card in unlit dicks,
andthen slo release à
‘© The memory card will pop up.
and Time
‘Sat the current dete and time correctly as follows ithe (DateTime) screen
is dsplayed when you turn the camera on. Information you specty this
vay is recorded in image
properties when you shoot, and it used when
you manage images by shooting date or print images showing the date
1 Turn the camera on
+ Pressthe poner buton
0 Te [Date/Time] screen is displayed
Before Use
Advanced Guide
1 Camora Basics
2 Auto Mose/
yori Auto Modo
8 Other Shooting Modos.
4 P Mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
20
Ñ An
D > racscenes
2 insert the battery pack.
‘© Holding the battery pack wath the terminals
(1) facing as shown, press the battery lock
(2) inthe direction ofthe arrow and insert
the battery pack untilthe lock licks shut
Ifyou insert the battery pack facing the
‘wrong way, cannct be locked into the
correct postion. Always confirm that the
battery pack is facing the right way and
locks when inserted,
3 Check he cards writ-protect tab
and inser the memory card
‘Recordings notpossble on memory
cards th ate protect ab unen the
{abs nthe locked poston, Side the ab
to tie unicied poston
‘© Insert the memory card with the label (1)
fering as shown Ul cchs nto lace
Make sure the memory cards facing the
Fight way when yu inser Insering
mamon) cars Range wrong way may
damage the camera
Close the cover.
‘© Loner the cover (1) and hold down as
you side the such, unit dicks into the
closed postion (2)
On how many shes or hous e recardng canbe
saved on ane memory card, see Number of Sots per Memory
Cars miss),
Removing the Battery Pack and Memory Card
N
™ Setting the Date
Remove the battery pack.
‘© Open the cover and press the battery
lock in the direction of the arow.
© The battery pack wil pop up
Remove the memory card.
Push the memory card in unlit dicks,
andthen slo release à
‘© The memory card will pop up.
and Time
‘Sat the current dete and time correctly as follows ithe (DateTime) screen
is dsplayed when you turn the camera on. Information you specty this
vay is recorded in image
properties when you shoot, and it used when
you manage images by shooting date or print images showing the date
1 Turn the camera on
+ Pressthe poner buton
0 Te [Date/Time] screen is displayed
Before Use
Advanced Guide
1 Camora Basics
2 Auto Mose/
yori Auto Modo
8 Other Shooting Modos.
4 P Mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
20
2 Set the date and time.
‘© Press the (4JIM buttons to choose an
option
e Press the [aw] buttons ortum the (
dial to spect the date and time
‘© When finished, press the (@) button
3 Specity your home time zone.
‘© Press th [dD] butons to choose your
home ime zone.
4 Finish the setup process.
‘© Press the (8) button when finshed
‘After a confrmation message, the setting
Screen is no longer displayed.
(© Totum off the camera, press the power
button
(© © tnessyoust ine ene a rane ne zeae
Tine ate te Se crime youn camera cn
Spas cares aomaton
Q + Tosstunng sing ume ( nour area), choose in step 2
‘an then choose PK] by pressing te axl buttons or turing
tne @iaa
iden lea ida lese
One seen p roza Lv me
by (ESN Simiany, you can aso set your home time zone by
touching (dp) on the screen in step 3, followed by
Changing the Date and Time
Agust he date end time as follows
1 Access the menu screen.
+ Press the MENU] button
2 Choose [DaterTime}.
‘© Move the 200meverto choose the (FM tab.
+ Press the [aw] buttons ortum tha
(©) alto choose (OsterTime}, and then
press the (@) button
5) 3 change the date and time.
+ Folow stop 2in Soting the Dao and
Time" (120) to adjust the settings.
Press the (MENU) button to close the
Degen een.
mer enn tay au tay re
Ba pac reno
Ne Bern ren
meta cured bate ps cme cams aac
por cad sept EAI) end comer at
E
+ Creme ete ay scie me eins stent
Derek
Shanes ctor Se Oat Ts E32)
Advanced Guide
Inder
1 Canora Basics,
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4 P Mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
a
‘© Press the (4JIM buttons to choose an
option
e Press the [aw] buttons ortum the (
dial to spect the date and time
‘© When finished, press the (@) button
3 Specity your home time zone.
‘© Press th [dD] butons to choose your
home ime zone.
4 Finish the setup process.
‘© Press the (8) button when finshed
‘After a confrmation message, the setting
Screen is no longer displayed.
(© Totum off the camera, press the power
button
(© © tnessyoust ine ene a rane ne zeae
Tine ate te Se crime youn camera cn
Spas cares aomaton
Q + Tosstunng sing ume ( nour area), choose in step 2
‘an then choose PK] by pressing te axl buttons or turing
tne @iaa
iden lea ida lese
One seen p roza Lv me
by (ESN Simiany, you can aso set your home time zone by
touching (dp) on the screen in step 3, followed by
Changing the Date and Time
Agust he date end time as follows
1 Access the menu screen.
+ Press the MENU] button
2 Choose [DaterTime}.
‘© Move the 200meverto choose the (FM tab.
+ Press the [aw] buttons ortum tha
(©) alto choose (OsterTime}, and then
press the (@) button
5) 3 change the date and time.
+ Folow stop 2in Soting the Dao and
Time" (120) to adjust the settings.
Press the (MENU) button to close the
Degen een.
mer enn tay au tay re
Ba pac reno
Ne Bern ren
meta cured bate ps cme cams aac
por cad sept EAI) end comer at
E
+ Creme ete ay scie me eins stent
Derek
Shanes ctor Se Oat Ts E32)
Advanced Guide
Inder
1 Canora Basics,
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4 P Mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
a
™ Display Language
‘Change the display language as needed.
1 Enter Playback mode.
Press the [EN button.
2 Access the setting screen.
‘© Press andhald the (@ button, and then
immediately press the MENU button
Sot the display language.
‘© Press the [al[w][4][p] buttons or tum,
the [@] dia to choose a language, and
‘then press the (@) button
‘© Once the display language has been set,
the setting screen is no longer displayed.
+ Tre curenttime ls displayed youwatto ong instep 2 ater
pressing the (button before you press in» MENU tuto.
Int case, press he (®)tttontocsmiss ne time dspiay an
repeat step 2
+ Youcan also change the dsplay language by pressing ne
¡MENU button ana choosing Language Gone [Ft
Ad) + Youcanats sete spay language by touring language on
the screen m step 3anstnen touching again
Tryin a Out
D Sil images D Movies
Follow these instructions totum the camera on, shoot stil mages or
‘movies, and then view them,
Shootin
(Smart Auto)
For fully automatic selection ofthe optimal setings for specific scenes,
simply let the camera determine the subject and shooting condtions,
1 Turn the camera on.
e Press the power button
(©The startup screen is displayed
2 Enter [AUTO] mode.
L + Settne mode dal to (AUTO),
5% © Aim the camera atthe subject The
camera wil make a sight clicking noise
asi determines the scene.
+ Icons representing the scene and image
stæbization mode are dsplayedin the
upper left ofthe screen
‘© Frames dsplayed around any detected
subjects indicate that they are in focus.
3 Compose the shot.
To zoom in and enlarge the subject, move
the zoom lever toward [LAT (telephoto),
‘nd to zoom away from the subject, move
‘toward (HA) (vide ange)
Betore Use
Advanced Guide
1 Camora Basics,
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
8 Omer Shooting Modes
4 Prode
5 RAM and Modo
6 Playback Modo
7 wer Functions
8 Song Meno
9 Acseasones
10 Appendix
«ba
‘Change the display language as needed.
1 Enter Playback mode.
Press the [EN button.
2 Access the setting screen.
‘© Press andhald the (@ button, and then
immediately press the MENU button
Sot the display language.
‘© Press the [al[w][4][p] buttons or tum,
the [@] dia to choose a language, and
‘then press the (@) button
‘© Once the display language has been set,
the setting screen is no longer displayed.
+ Tre curenttime ls displayed youwatto ong instep 2 ater
pressing the (button before you press in» MENU tuto.
Int case, press he (®)tttontocsmiss ne time dspiay an
repeat step 2
+ Youcan also change the dsplay language by pressing ne
¡MENU button ana choosing Language Gone [Ft
Ad) + Youcanats sete spay language by touring language on
the screen m step 3anstnen touching again
Tryin a Out
D Sil images D Movies
Follow these instructions totum the camera on, shoot stil mages or
‘movies, and then view them,
Shootin
(Smart Auto)
For fully automatic selection ofthe optimal setings for specific scenes,
simply let the camera determine the subject and shooting condtions,
1 Turn the camera on.
e Press the power button
(©The startup screen is displayed
2 Enter [AUTO] mode.
L + Settne mode dal to (AUTO),
5% © Aim the camera atthe subject The
camera wil make a sight clicking noise
asi determines the scene.
+ Icons representing the scene and image
stæbization mode are dsplayedin the
upper left ofthe screen
‘© Frames dsplayed around any detected
subjects indicate that they are in focus.
3 Compose the shot.
To zoom in and enlarge the subject, move
the zoom lever toward [LAT (telephoto),
‘nd to zoom away from the subject, move
‘toward (HA) (vide ange)
Betore Use
Advanced Guide
1 Camora Basics,
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
8 Omer Shooting Modes
4 Prode
5 RAM and Modo
6 Playback Modo
7 wer Functions
8 Song Meno
9 Acseasones
10 Appendix
«ba
4 Shoot.
Shooting Still Images
1) Focus.
‘© Press the shutter button lighty, halfway
down. The camera beeps twice after
focusing, and AF frames are displayed to
indicate image areas in focus.
‘(Reise the flash) appears on the screen,
move the [$] Switch to raise the flash It
wilfire when shooting. If you prefer not
to use the flash, push it down with your
finger, into the camera.
2) Shoot.
‘© Press the shutter button athe way
down
+ As the camera shoots, a shutter sound
is played, andin lonlight condtions
when you have raised the flash, ities
automaticaly,
‘© Keep the camera stil uni the shutter
sound ends
After dsplaying your Shot, the camera vill
revert tothe shooting screen,
Shooting Movies
1
2)
Start shooting
‘© Press the movie button, The camera
beeps once as recording begins, and
(@Rec]is displayed uit the elapsed
time (1),
e Elackbers are displayed on the top and
bottom edges ofthe screen, and the
subjectis slightly eniarged. The black
bars indicate image areas not recorded
e Frames displayed around any detected
faces indicate that they ae in focus
Once recording begins, take your finger
cf the movie button
Finish shooting.
‘© Press the movie button again to stop
shooing. The camera beeps twice as
recording stops
Before Use
Advanced Guide
1 Camora Basics
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
8 Other Shooting Modos.
4 P mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
Shooting Still Images
1) Focus.
‘© Press the shutter button lighty, halfway
down. The camera beeps twice after
focusing, and AF frames are displayed to
indicate image areas in focus.
‘(Reise the flash) appears on the screen,
move the [$] Switch to raise the flash It
wilfire when shooting. If you prefer not
to use the flash, push it down with your
finger, into the camera.
2) Shoot.
‘© Press the shutter button athe way
down
+ As the camera shoots, a shutter sound
is played, andin lonlight condtions
when you have raised the flash, ities
automaticaly,
‘© Keep the camera stil uni the shutter
sound ends
After dsplaying your Shot, the camera vill
revert tothe shooting screen,
Shooting Movies
1
2)
Start shooting
‘© Press the movie button, The camera
beeps once as recording begins, and
(@Rec]is displayed uit the elapsed
time (1),
e Elackbers are displayed on the top and
bottom edges ofthe screen, and the
subjectis slightly eniarged. The black
bars indicate image areas not recorded
e Frames displayed around any detected
faces indicate that they ae in focus
Once recording begins, take your finger
cf the movie button
Finish shooting.
‘© Press the movie button again to stop
shooing. The camera beeps twice as
recording stops
Before Use
Advanced Guide
1 Camora Basics
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
8 Other Shooting Modos.
4 P mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
"Viewing
‚Alter shooting images or movies, you can view them on the screen as
follows
1 Enter Playback mode.
‘© Press the [[E]} button,
© Your last shot is displayed.
2 Browse through your images.
‘© To view the previous image, press.
the [4] button or tum the (6) cial
counterclockwise. To view the next
image, press the [P] button or tum the
(@) dia clockwise.
‘© Press and hold the [Ib] buttons to
browse through images quickly.
2 To access Scrall Display modo, tur the
(@ al rapidy, In this mode, tum the (6)
‘dal to browse through images.
2 To retum to single-image display, press
the [O] button.
® Movies are identified by a [HB >] icon.
To play movies, go to step 3.
Play movies.
‘© Press the (8) button to access the movie
‘control panel, choose [Dj] (either press.
‘the [41D] buttons or tum the (6) dia),
‘and then press the (@) button again.
Playback now begins, and after the movie
(m |Sfinished, (EBD is displayed,
© To adjust the volume (1), press the
[Jr] buttons.
D: momie rior ton Psico pon a
ner
™ Touch-Screen Operations
+ To view the next image, drag ltt across
the screen in step 2, and to view the
previous image, drag right,
To access Scrall Display mode, quickly
«rag let or right repeatedly
+ To retum to single mage display from
‘Scroll Display mode, touch the image in
the mide of the screen.
‘© Choose a movie, and touch (6) to start
playback
© To adjust the volume during movie
playback, quickly drag up or down across
the screen.
Advanced Guide
Inder
1 Canora Basics,
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
8 Other Shooting Modos.
4 P Mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
4/»/9
24
‚Alter shooting images or movies, you can view them on the screen as
follows
1 Enter Playback mode.
‘© Press the [[E]} button,
© Your last shot is displayed.
2 Browse through your images.
‘© To view the previous image, press.
the [4] button or tum the (6) cial
counterclockwise. To view the next
image, press the [P] button or tum the
(@) dia clockwise.
‘© Press and hold the [Ib] buttons to
browse through images quickly.
2 To access Scrall Display modo, tur the
(@ al rapidy, In this mode, tum the (6)
‘dal to browse through images.
2 To retum to single-image display, press
the [O] button.
® Movies are identified by a [HB >] icon.
To play movies, go to step 3.
Play movies.
‘© Press the (8) button to access the movie
‘control panel, choose [Dj] (either press.
‘the [41D] buttons or tum the (6) dia),
‘and then press the (@) button again.
Playback now begins, and after the movie
(m |Sfinished, (EBD is displayed,
© To adjust the volume (1), press the
[Jr] buttons.
D: momie rior ton Psico pon a
ner
™ Touch-Screen Operations
+ To view the next image, drag ltt across
the screen in step 2, and to view the
previous image, drag right,
To access Scrall Display mode, quickly
«rag let or right repeatedly
+ To retum to single mage display from
‘Scroll Display mode, touch the image in
the mide of the screen.
‘© Choose a movie, and touch (6) to start
playback
© To adjust the volume during movie
playback, quickly drag up or down across
the screen.
Advanced Guide
Inder
1 Canora Basics,
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
8 Other Shooting Modos.
4 P Mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
4/»/9
24
Erasing Images
You can choose and erase unneeded images one by one. Be careful
when erasing images, because they cannot be recovered
1 Choose an image to erase.
‘© Press the [4]IM buttons or tum the (6)
dial to choose an mage
2 Erase the image.
+ Press the [Bbuton
«Aer [Eras07] is dsplayed, press the
(ID butons ortur ho (6) dalto
choose [Erase and ten press ne (8)
buton
«+ The curent image is now erased
© To cancel erasure, press the QU]
butons ortum the (0) did to chocse
{Cancel and nen press the (8) button
À > voucméronsemaimages vere sae Bi)
+ Youcan aso erase me curentimage y auching frase onthe
sereen instep 2
+ Images can iso be erased by using Tourn Actions RN)
Betore Use
Advanced Guide
1 Camora Basics,
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
8 Other Shooting Modos.
4 P mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
Lap
You can choose and erase unneeded images one by one. Be careful
when erasing images, because they cannot be recovered
1 Choose an image to erase.
‘© Press the [4]IM buttons or tum the (6)
dial to choose an mage
2 Erase the image.
+ Press the [Bbuton
«Aer [Eras07] is dsplayed, press the
(ID butons ortur ho (6) dalto
choose [Erase and ten press ne (8)
buton
«+ The curent image is now erased
© To cancel erasure, press the QU]
butons ortum the (0) did to chocse
{Cancel and nen press the (8) button
À > voucméronsemaimages vere sae Bi)
+ Youcan aso erase me curentimage y auching frase onthe
sereen instep 2
+ Images can iso be erased by using Tourn Actions RN)
Betore Use
Advanced Guide
1 Camora Basics,
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
8 Other Shooting Modos.
4 P mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
Lap
Shooting Mode
der
turn the camera of, press the power
Advanced Guide aor ager
Camera Basics NS) Ly ne tanto un cana
— moO / on and ew your shots.
Other basic operations and more ways to enjoy your Toturn the camera of, press the [EN]
button again
‘camera, including shooting and playback options
To smitento Playa
To sutento Smading mode ram Platack mode, press the
ster tuto aa (027,
‘The lens wi be taste aer abc one minute once the camera
IsinPlayoack mode. You can tum the camera ct when fe ens Is
retracted by pressing te [I ute
trom Shooting mode, press the ([EJ)
Betore Use
Basie
ue
Inder
Auto Mode
2 Hybrid Auto Mode
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4 P Mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Setting Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
26
der
turn the camera of, press the power
Advanced Guide aor ager
Camera Basics NS) Ly ne tanto un cana
— moO / on and ew your shots.
Other basic operations and more ways to enjoy your Toturn the camera of, press the [EN]
button again
‘camera, including shooting and playback options
To smitento Playa
To sutento Smading mode ram Platack mode, press the
ster tuto aa (027,
‘The lens wi be taste aer abc one minute once the camera
IsinPlayoack mode. You can tum the camera ct when fe ens Is
retracted by pressing te [I ute
trom Shooting mode, press the ([EJ)
Betore Use
Basie
ue
Inder
Auto Mode
2 Hybrid Auto Mode
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4 P Mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Setting Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
26
™ Power-Saving Features (Auto Power Down)
As a way to conserve battery power, the camera automatically deactivates
the screen (Display OM) and then tums itself of after a specfic period of
inactivity.
Power Saving in Shooting Mode
‘The screen is automaticaly deactivated after about one minute of
inactwty In about two more minutes, the lens is retracted and the camera
tums itself off, To activate the screen and prepare for shooting when
the screen is ff butthe lens sil cut, press the shutter button halfway
An,
Power Saving in Playback Mode
‘The camera tums sel of automatically ater about five minutes of
inactivity.
PR
Delay om ryote ED
«Pon surg mache mas cocci stor
Senos van GR nen meted comer
en,
Shutter Button
To ensure your shots are in focus, aways begin by holding the shutter
button halfway down, and once the subjects in focus, press the button all
the way down to shoot
In tis manuel, shutter button operations are described as pressing the
button haltway or al the way down
À Press halfway. (Press lightly to
focus.)
‘© Press the shutter button halfway. The
camera beeps twice, and AF frames are
‘splayed around image areas in focus,
2 Press all the way down, (From the
halfway position, press fl to shoot)
Te camera shoots, a à shutter sound
is played
+ Koep he camera slut the shutter
sound ends
D © images moy s at yo twenty pes
thes buts my
+ Luna nate sain as ceenangon tee
Vera me sot tae organs stg were,
triage wal be ny tyaumore e camer (re ae
mov bee he ners ets,
Betore Use
Guide
ra
2 Auto Mode
Hybrid Auto Mode
8 Other Shooting Modos.
4 P mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
Lap
27
As a way to conserve battery power, the camera automatically deactivates
the screen (Display OM) and then tums itself of after a specfic period of
inactivity.
Power Saving in Shooting Mode
‘The screen is automaticaly deactivated after about one minute of
inactwty In about two more minutes, the lens is retracted and the camera
tums itself off, To activate the screen and prepare for shooting when
the screen is ff butthe lens sil cut, press the shutter button halfway
An,
Power Saving in Playback Mode
‘The camera tums sel of automatically ater about five minutes of
inactivity.
PR
Delay om ryote ED
«Pon surg mache mas cocci stor
Senos van GR nen meted comer
en,
Shutter Button
To ensure your shots are in focus, aways begin by holding the shutter
button halfway down, and once the subjects in focus, press the button all
the way down to shoot
In tis manuel, shutter button operations are described as pressing the
button haltway or al the way down
À Press halfway. (Press lightly to
focus.)
‘© Press the shutter button halfway. The
camera beeps twice, and AF frames are
‘splayed around image areas in focus,
2 Press all the way down, (From the
halfway position, press fl to shoot)
Te camera shoots, a à shutter sound
is played
+ Koep he camera slut the shutter
sound ends
D © images moy s at yo twenty pes
thes buts my
+ Luna nate sain as ceenangon tee
Vera me sot tae organs stg were,
triage wal be ny tyaumore e camer (re ae
mov bee he ners ets,
Betore Use
Guide
ra
2 Auto Mode
Hybrid Auto Mode
8 Other Shooting Modos.
4 P mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
Lap
27
Shooting Modes
Use the mode di to access each shooting mode.
4
(1) Auto Mode rHyoridauto Mose (5) Move Mode
Fly toma shocting, win Far shosting movies
cameraetemnes segs (71,
(Bez, ss, B96, Voucan aso stoot movies wnen
€) Create shat Moge ne mage dali not setto Mowe
‘See severa tects applesto mode, mp y pressing the
each set automaticaly (Se) mone bon
(© Special Soene Mate ©
‘Shoot win optimal stings or
spect scenes (ASS)
(0 PAM ana Moses
Tate aval a sets using
you preferred setungs
Gara so,
Create Ftes Mode
Ada a variety of fects to images
when shooting (258).
justing the Screen Angle and Orientation
You can adjust the screen angl and orientation to su the scene or hom
You ee shocting.
Tit he screen upto 180" upward
+ When including yoursefin shes, you can
view a mirror image of yourse by rotating
the screen around toward the front ofthe
camera To cancalreverse dsplay, press
the MENU button, choose [Reverse
‘Disp ] on the I tab, and press the
AD Butons to cnoose [Of]
(© : wnmine canes minus, see sonen ced
1 Bea pn De san ay arr tan hi
nape ame
Betore Use
Guide
Inder
1 can
2 Auto Mode
Hybrid Auto Mode
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4 P Mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
28
Use the mode di to access each shooting mode.
4
(1) Auto Mode rHyoridauto Mose (5) Move Mode
Fly toma shocting, win Far shosting movies
cameraetemnes segs (71,
(Bez, ss, B96, Voucan aso stoot movies wnen
€) Create shat Moge ne mage dali not setto Mowe
‘See severa tects applesto mode, mp y pressing the
each set automaticaly (Se) mone bon
(© Special Soene Mate ©
‘Shoot win optimal stings or
spect scenes (ASS)
(0 PAM ana Moses
Tate aval a sets using
you preferred setungs
Gara so,
Create Ftes Mode
Ada a variety of fects to images
when shooting (258).
justing the Screen Angle and Orientation
You can adjust the screen angl and orientation to su the scene or hom
You ee shocting.
Tit he screen upto 180" upward
+ When including yoursefin shes, you can
view a mirror image of yourse by rotating
the screen around toward the front ofthe
camera To cancalreverse dsplay, press
the MENU button, choose [Reverse
‘Disp ] on the I tab, and press the
AD Butons to cnoose [Of]
(© : wnmine canes minus, see sonen ced
1 Bea pn De san ay arr tan hi
nape ame
Betore Use
Guide
Inder
1 can
2 Auto Mode
Hybrid Auto Mode
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4 P Mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
28
Shooting Display Options
Press the [w] button to view other information on the screen, or to hide
the information, For details on the information displayed, see "On-Screen
Information’ (£4179),
Display 1
Display 2
Using the FUNC. Menu
Configure commonly used shooting functions through the FUNC. menu as.
follows
"Note that menu items and options vary depending on the shooting mode
1 Access the FUNG. menu
© Press tho (@) button
2 Choose a menu item.
‘© Press the [AJ w] buttons to choose a
menu tem (1).
+ Availabe options (2) are shown at the
bottom of the screen
i
a
0 seis oran, resto ve iden
Arc ee an GB le er
‘Dentin ll cons Home, res mao
Domne maytag yrs Nat
a
Aa nen mager
«ernest py oor, seeing Dy Motes
ec
SN] 3 croose an option
‘© Press the [4][b] buttons or turn the (9)
{ Gato cose an aan
+ Options labeled wath a (BEM icon can be
Sedo puso te MENU baton
«Osten aed wt a HI ocn bo
ido sang eB bon
Finish the setup process.
© Press the (@) button
© The screen before you pressed the
(@ button in step 1s displayed again,
‘showing the option you configured.
Pp
Q + unos scr sto nanos, you cane ve
Caner ates CDS
2 Auto Mode
Hybrid Auto Mode
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4 P Mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
Press the [w] button to view other information on the screen, or to hide
the information, For details on the information displayed, see "On-Screen
Information’ (£4179),
Display 1
Display 2
Using the FUNC. Menu
Configure commonly used shooting functions through the FUNC. menu as.
follows
"Note that menu items and options vary depending on the shooting mode
1 Access the FUNG. menu
© Press tho (@) button
2 Choose a menu item.
‘© Press the [AJ w] buttons to choose a
menu tem (1).
+ Availabe options (2) are shown at the
bottom of the screen
i
a
0 seis oran, resto ve iden
Arc ee an GB le er
‘Dentin ll cons Home, res mao
Domne maytag yrs Nat
a
Aa nen mager
«ernest py oor, seeing Dy Motes
ec
SN] 3 croose an option
‘© Press the [4][b] buttons or turn the (9)
{ Gato cose an aan
+ Options labeled wath a (BEM icon can be
Sedo puso te MENU baton
«Osten aed wt a HI ocn bo
ido sang eB bon
Finish the setup process.
© Press the (@) button
© The screen before you pressed the
(@ button in step 1s displayed again,
‘showing the option you configured.
Pp
Q + unos scr sto nanos, you cane ve
Caner ates CDS
2 Auto Mode
Hybrid Auto Mode
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4 P Mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
"Using Touch-Screen Operations to Configure
Settings
a) a
‘© Access the FUNC. menu (1) by pressing
the [@] button, and then either drag he
menu up or down to scralit, ortouch a
menu item to choose it
(© Touch an option (2) o chooseit. Touch
the option again to confirm your choice
‘and return tothe screen displayed before
‘you pressed the [6] button
‘© You can access the screen for options
labeled vith a I con by touching
Em
You can access the screen for options
labeled wath a (HB con by touching
[1
the Menu
Configure a variety of camera functions through the menu screen as
follows. Menu items are grouped by purpose on tabs, such as shooting
NEN, playback [[EI], and so on. Note that avaiable menu tems vary
depending on the selected shocting or playback mode (11188 —
isa)
=e
>
e
Ea
©
KM
À Access the menu screen.
e Press the MENU button.
2 Choose a tab.
‘© Move the zoom lever to choose a tab.
+ Alter you have pressed the [atv]
buttons or turned the (6) dial to choose a
tab italy, you can switch between tabs
by pressing the [4]{p] buttons.
3 Choose a menu item,
e Press the [at] buttons or tum the (6)
dal to choose a menu fem
‘© For menu items with options not shown,
frst press the (8) o [D] button to switch
screens, and then either press the [al]
buttons or turn the (@) dal to select the
menu ter,
e To retum to the previous screen, press
the MENU button
Inder
2 Auto Mode
Hybrid Auto Mode
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4 P Mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
30
Settings
a) a
‘© Access the FUNC. menu (1) by pressing
the [@] button, and then either drag he
menu up or down to scralit, ortouch a
menu item to choose it
(© Touch an option (2) o chooseit. Touch
the option again to confirm your choice
‘and return tothe screen displayed before
‘you pressed the [6] button
‘© You can access the screen for options
labeled vith a I con by touching
Em
You can access the screen for options
labeled wath a (HB con by touching
[1
the Menu
Configure a variety of camera functions through the menu screen as
follows. Menu items are grouped by purpose on tabs, such as shooting
NEN, playback [[EI], and so on. Note that avaiable menu tems vary
depending on the selected shocting or playback mode (11188 —
isa)
=e
>
e
Ea
©
KM
À Access the menu screen.
e Press the MENU button.
2 Choose a tab.
‘© Move the zoom lever to choose a tab.
+ Alter you have pressed the [atv]
buttons or turned the (6) dial to choose a
tab italy, you can switch between tabs
by pressing the [4]{p] buttons.
3 Choose a menu item,
e Press the [at] buttons or tum the (6)
dal to choose a menu fem
‘© For menu items with options not shown,
frst press the (8) o [D] button to switch
screens, and then either press the [al]
buttons or turn the (@) dal to select the
menu ter,
e To retum to the previous screen, press
the MENU button
Inder
2 Auto Mode
Hybrid Auto Mode
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4 P Mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
30
=
4 Choose an option Touch-Screen Operations Bere Uso
‘© Press the [4][D] buttons to choose an
option, + To access tabs, press the (MENU) button to access the menu screen, Basic Guide
5 Finish the setup process ‘andihen touch the desired tab.
+ Drag the menu items up or down to serail them, or touch a menu item
‘© Press the MENU button to return to the to choose
screen dsplayed befcre you pressed the
IMENU tuton in step 1
+ Touch an option to choose it Options shown with [AID] icons on ether
side can also be configured by touching these icons,
+ For menu items displayed with a bar to indicate the level, touch the 2 Auto Mode
desired postion on the bar Hybrid Auto Modo
+ To configure menu ems for which options are not shown, fst touch
the menu item to access the setting screen. On the setting screen,
8
3 On Shotng Mader
Q + soar ssl stn names yocanretize te
Cea ler drag touch to choose the mena Rem, and en ouch to
oat choose the option. To rem othe previous screen, touch [ESM 4 Pose
+ Yau can also touch input elements (such as check bores ortex el)
Lo soict them, and yeu can eter txt y touching the an screen 5 TM and cose
keybcard
+ When (BEI is shown, you can touch
(69) tuton, you prefer
+ When RD is shown, you can touch (HEMI instead of pressing the cran
(MENU. buton, ityou prefer
+ To dsmissthe menu, press the [MENU button again.
aM instead of pressing the 6 Playback Mode
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
3
4 Choose an option Touch-Screen Operations Bere Uso
‘© Press the [4][D] buttons to choose an
option, + To access tabs, press the (MENU) button to access the menu screen, Basic Guide
5 Finish the setup process ‘andihen touch the desired tab.
+ Drag the menu items up or down to serail them, or touch a menu item
‘© Press the MENU button to return to the to choose
screen dsplayed befcre you pressed the
IMENU tuton in step 1
+ Touch an option to choose it Options shown with [AID] icons on ether
side can also be configured by touching these icons,
+ For menu items displayed with a bar to indicate the level, touch the 2 Auto Mode
desired postion on the bar Hybrid Auto Modo
+ To configure menu ems for which options are not shown, fst touch
the menu item to access the setting screen. On the setting screen,
8
3 On Shotng Mader
Q + soar ssl stn names yocanretize te
Cea ler drag touch to choose the mena Rem, and en ouch to
oat choose the option. To rem othe previous screen, touch [ESM 4 Pose
+ Yau can also touch input elements (such as check bores ortex el)
Lo soict them, and yeu can eter txt y touching the an screen 5 TM and cose
keybcard
+ When (BEI is shown, you can touch
(69) tuton, you prefer
+ When RD is shown, you can touch (HEMI instead of pressing the cran
(MENU. buton, ityou prefer
+ To dsmissthe menu, press the [MENU button again.
aM instead of pressing the 6 Playback Mode
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
3
On-Screen Keyboard
Use the on-screen keyboard to enter information for Face ID (£1144),
WiFi connections (CL1135), and so on. Note thatthe length andtype of
information you can enter varies depending on the function you are using
(1) Entering Characters
Ea ‘© Touch the characters to enter them.
= S
are using.
Moving the Cursor
© The amount of nformation you can enter
© Touch led] or tur te (0) ing
(1) venes depending onthe function you
Entering Line Breaks
Touch fet}
Switching Input Modes
To such t numbers or symbols, touch (A
+ Touch [$] o enter capital lets.
+ Available input modes vary depending on
the funcion you are using
Deleting Characters
(© To delete the previous character, ether
touch (EM or press the (E) button
© Holding down the [bution wil delete
fie characters at atime
Confirming Input and Retuming to the
Previous Screen
e Press the MENU button
Indicator Display
The indicator on the back ofthe camera (INA) lights up or Binks
depending on the camera status.
Inlcztor
Status
Calor Camera Staus
Connect a computer (F164), or display ff
£027, £01153, 1153)
Green ‘Staring up, ecerdnokeadnaivanamiong mages,
Bintng | shootng ong exposures EDS ES) or
cennacingtvensmiting a WF
on
© + menmeimacaorun gen ner ante camera. pan
{he menay carina core ar sae oot ne cane, ach
may carga damage camera or many a,
Betore Use
Basie Guide
2 Auto Mode
Hybrid Auto Mode
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4 P Mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
Inder
«ba
32
Use the on-screen keyboard to enter information for Face ID (£1144),
WiFi connections (CL1135), and so on. Note thatthe length andtype of
information you can enter varies depending on the function you are using
(1) Entering Characters
Ea ‘© Touch the characters to enter them.
= S
are using.
Moving the Cursor
© The amount of nformation you can enter
© Touch led] or tur te (0) ing
(1) venes depending onthe function you
Entering Line Breaks
Touch fet}
Switching Input Modes
To such t numbers or symbols, touch (A
+ Touch [$] o enter capital lets.
+ Available input modes vary depending on
the funcion you are using
Deleting Characters
(© To delete the previous character, ether
touch (EM or press the (E) button
© Holding down the [bution wil delete
fie characters at atime
Confirming Input and Retuming to the
Previous Screen
e Press the MENU button
Indicator Display
The indicator on the back ofthe camera (INA) lights up or Binks
depending on the camera status.
Inlcztor
Status
Calor Camera Staus
Connect a computer (F164), or display ff
£027, £01153, 1153)
Green ‘Staring up, ecerdnokeadnaivanamiong mages,
Bintng | shootng ong exposures EDS ES) or
cennacingtvensmiting a WF
on
© + menmeimacaorun gen ner ante camera. pan
{he menay carina core ar sae oot ne cane, ach
may carga damage camera or many a,
Betore Use
Basie Guide
2 Auto Mode
Hybrid Auto Mode
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4 P Mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
Inder
«ba
32
You can check the curenttime.
e Press andhald he (8) button
© The current me appears,
CAIGA) “y roc the camera vertically while
Using the clock function, itil swich to
vertical display. Press the [41] buttons
ortum the [6] dal to change the display
calor.
‘© Press the (8) button again to cancel the
clock dis
Y + verve caso pes oro len men
nenn.
Betore Use
Basie Guide
Inder
2 Auto Mode
Hybrid Auto Mode
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4 P Mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
e Press andhald he (8) button
© The current me appears,
CAIGA) “y roc the camera vertically while
Using the clock function, itil swich to
vertical display. Press the [41] buttons
ortum the [6] dal to change the display
calor.
‘© Press the (8) button again to cancel the
clock dis
Y + verve caso pes oro len men
nenn.
Betore Use
Basie Guide
Inder
2 Auto Mode
Hybrid Auto Mode
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4 P Mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
| Shooting with Camera-Determined Settings MET
For fully automatic selection ofthe optimal setings for specific scenes, Basie Guide
simply let the camera determine the subject end shooting conditions,
Shooting (Smart Auto)
Sill images. D> Movies 1 Camora Basics,
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Turn the camera on.
Press the power button
3 Otner Shooting Modes
me startup screen is displayed
Convenient mode for easy shots with greater control rue
over shooting Enter [AUTO] mode
Setthe mode dalto AUTO 5 T4, Av.M and O Mode
Alm the camera atthe su
camera will make a sight clicking noise 6 Playback Modo
termines the scene
ns representing th
stabization me
Upper et ofthe s
ames dsplaye:
7 WiFi Functions
Seting Menu
y detected oe
becs toy een ocus
" D Accessories
Compose the shot
10 Aopen
ante zoom ava rom he sued. too
move ittoward [ER (wide angle). (A
200m bar (1) shoving he zoom position
is displayed, along with the area in focus
a
34
For fully automatic selection ofthe optimal setings for specific scenes, Basie Guide
simply let the camera determine the subject end shooting conditions,
Shooting (Smart Auto)
Sill images. D> Movies 1 Camora Basics,
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Turn the camera on.
Press the power button
3 Otner Shooting Modes
me startup screen is displayed
Convenient mode for easy shots with greater control rue
over shooting Enter [AUTO] mode
Setthe mode dalto AUTO 5 T4, Av.M and O Mode
Alm the camera atthe su
camera will make a sight clicking noise 6 Playback Modo
termines the scene
ns representing th
stabization me
Upper et ofthe s
ames dsplaye:
7 WiFi Functions
Seting Menu
y detected oe
becs toy een ocus
" D Accessories
Compose the shot
10 Aopen
ante zoom ava rom he sued. too
move ittoward [ER (wide angle). (A
200m bar (1) shoving he zoom position
is displayed, along with the area in focus
a
34
4 Shoot.
Shooting Still Images
1) Focus.
Press the shutter button halfway, The
camera beeps twice ater focusing, and
AF frames are displayed to indicate
image areas infocus.
e Several AF frames are displayed when
multiple areas are in focus.
‘If Reise the flash} appears on the screen.
move te [$] such to raise the fash. It
val re when shooting. If you prefer not
to use the flash, push it down with your
finger, nto the camera,
2) Shoot.
‘© Press the shutter button athe way
down
‘© As the camera shocts, a shutter sound
is played, andi low-light conditions
when you have raised the flash, ities
‘automaticaly
Keep the camera stil uni the shutter
sound ends
After dsplaying your shot, the camera will
Fever tothe shooting screen,
Shooting Movies
1) Start shooting.
‘© Press the movie button. The camera
beeps once as recording begins, and
(@Rec]is displayed wath the elapsed
time (1),
e Black bars are displayed on the top and
bottom edges ofthe screen, and the
subjectis slightly enlarged, The black
bars indicate image areas not recorded
e Frames displayed around any detected
faces indicate that they are in focus
Once recording begins, take your finger
af the movie button
2) Resize the subject and recompose
the shot as needed.
e Toresize the subject, repeat the
‘operations in step 3.
However, ne thatthe sound of camera
‘operations will be recorded. Note that
movies shot at zoom factors shown in
‘blue wi look grainy
‘© When you recompose shots, the
focus, brightness, and colors wil be
automaticaly adusted.
3) Finish shooting.
e Press the movie button again to stop
shooting. The camera beeps twice as
recording stops,
«© Recording wil stop automaticaly when
the memory card becomes full
QO + rre args roces as mena
o
ga maso ars e Sn)
Before Use
Basie Guide
1 Camera Basics
3 Other Shooting Modos.
4 P mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
Shooting Still Images
1) Focus.
Press the shutter button halfway, The
camera beeps twice ater focusing, and
AF frames are displayed to indicate
image areas infocus.
e Several AF frames are displayed when
multiple areas are in focus.
‘If Reise the flash} appears on the screen.
move te [$] such to raise the fash. It
val re when shooting. If you prefer not
to use the flash, push it down with your
finger, nto the camera,
2) Shoot.
‘© Press the shutter button athe way
down
‘© As the camera shocts, a shutter sound
is played, andi low-light conditions
when you have raised the flash, ities
‘automaticaly
Keep the camera stil uni the shutter
sound ends
After dsplaying your shot, the camera will
Fever tothe shooting screen,
Shooting Movies
1) Start shooting.
‘© Press the movie button. The camera
beeps once as recording begins, and
(@Rec]is displayed wath the elapsed
time (1),
e Black bars are displayed on the top and
bottom edges ofthe screen, and the
subjectis slightly enlarged, The black
bars indicate image areas not recorded
e Frames displayed around any detected
faces indicate that they are in focus
Once recording begins, take your finger
af the movie button
2) Resize the subject and recompose
the shot as needed.
e Toresize the subject, repeat the
‘operations in step 3.
However, ne thatthe sound of camera
‘operations will be recorded. Note that
movies shot at zoom factors shown in
‘blue wi look grainy
‘© When you recompose shots, the
focus, brightness, and colors wil be
automaticaly adusted.
3) Finish shooting.
e Press the movie button again to stop
shooting. The camera beeps twice as
recording stops,
«© Recording wil stop automaticaly when
the memory card becomes full
QO + rre args roces as mena
o
ga maso ars e Sn)
Before Use
Basie Guide
1 Camera Basics
3 Other Shooting Modos.
4 P mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
™ Shooting in Hybrid Auto Mode
D>Süilimages D Movies
You can make a short movie o he day just by shooting stil images. The
camera records 2 - second clips of Scenes before each shot, which are
later combined in a digest movie
1 Enter [9 mode.
Folow step 2 in "Shooting (Smart Auto)"
(C224) and choose [dB
2 Compose the shot
‘© Folow stops 3-4 in “Shooting (Smart
Auto) (0134) to compose he shot and
focus
+ For more inpressive digest moves
am the camera at subjects about four
Seconds before shacing stil mages
3 shoot.
Folow step 4 in “Shooting (Smart Auto)”
(C2424) 0 shoot a stil image.
+ The camera records both a stil image
‘and movie cip. The cip, which ends with
the stil image and a shutter sound, forms
a single chapter in the digest movie.
© © satay eestor rs mosetanin AUTO) mote because
pots me rca res
+ Rap ot mayne eesti ya sot = sage
Immediately ater turning the camera on, choosing if] mode, or
Den nine
«Shun navn ram pen camera be rca
nanas
Q + ones move quoi ER aca changed
Sosa ne plays wen you presse ster ton ay
Ortner tne serämer (152,
+ Digestnovies ar savas separate mode es inte alo
‘cases even if they were recorded on the same day in lil mode.
“The get moe tie ae wachen proto 408, oe
tata eo me rece apra ¡Sins and 20,
seas
Tre pet moe prete Far)
Day aung um (E220) re 200 (182) segs
are canes
Anan fer crete D159.
1 Rense sous cam be most eres
= yeu prtrtorecr ages modes mar st Images agus
ie eto vance. Chose MENU (230) a >
(Digest Type > oss.
+ Inga nape can be ate (220,
Digest Movie Playback
Display a st image shot in LM mode to play a digest movie, or speciy
the date ofthe digest movie to play (£21106).
Still Images/Movies
fine camera sumed on whl the [button Isa down, the
camera wil o longer sau, To avale sounds aga, press the
MENU) button and choose (Mute on the (Ff tab, and then
press the] buttons to choose (om
Betore Use
1 Camera Basics
Guide
3 Other Shooting Modes
4 P mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
36
D>Süilimages D Movies
You can make a short movie o he day just by shooting stil images. The
camera records 2 - second clips of Scenes before each shot, which are
later combined in a digest movie
1 Enter [9 mode.
Folow step 2 in "Shooting (Smart Auto)"
(C224) and choose [dB
2 Compose the shot
‘© Folow stops 3-4 in “Shooting (Smart
Auto) (0134) to compose he shot and
focus
+ For more inpressive digest moves
am the camera at subjects about four
Seconds before shacing stil mages
3 shoot.
Folow step 4 in “Shooting (Smart Auto)”
(C2424) 0 shoot a stil image.
+ The camera records both a stil image
‘and movie cip. The cip, which ends with
the stil image and a shutter sound, forms
a single chapter in the digest movie.
© © satay eestor rs mosetanin AUTO) mote because
pots me rca res
+ Rap ot mayne eesti ya sot = sage
Immediately ater turning the camera on, choosing if] mode, or
Den nine
«Shun navn ram pen camera be rca
nanas
Q + ones move quoi ER aca changed
Sosa ne plays wen you presse ster ton ay
Ortner tne serämer (152,
+ Digestnovies ar savas separate mode es inte alo
‘cases even if they were recorded on the same day in lil mode.
“The get moe tie ae wachen proto 408, oe
tata eo me rece apra ¡Sins and 20,
seas
Tre pet moe prete Far)
Day aung um (E220) re 200 (182) segs
are canes
Anan fer crete D159.
1 Rense sous cam be most eres
= yeu prtrtorecr ages modes mar st Images agus
ie eto vance. Chose MENU (230) a >
(Digest Type > oss.
+ Inga nape can be ate (220,
Digest Movie Playback
Display a st image shot in LM mode to play a digest movie, or speciy
the date ofthe digest movie to play (£21106).
Still Images/Movies
fine camera sumed on whl the [button Isa down, the
camera wil o longer sau, To avale sounds aga, press the
MENU) button and choose (Mute on the (Ff tab, and then
press the] buttons to choose (om
Betore Use
1 Camera Basics
Guide
3 Other Shooting Modes
4 P mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
36
Still Images
Movies
(où
A bitng ¡$ icon warns tnat images are more ikely to e.
bisredby camera shake. nts case, moutt camera ona
tipo er take oer measures to keep sti
Inyour shots are dark despte te lash ning, move coserto
the sujet For tas onthe fash ange, se Flash Range”
Biv,
‘The subject may be oo dose fine camera ony beeps once
‘when you press the shuter button away For deals onthe
focusingrange (shootng range), see“Shootng Range” (196).
Toredure red.eye andto asi Infocusi, the lamp maybe
actvated when shootngin log condor,
|A biténg ($) Icon displayed when you attempt to shoot
inacats tn stoong isnot pose url the ash as nine
rechargng Shooting can resume as soon ashe ass ready,
so ever ress te shutter buon ale way down and wat, er
release and press aga
‘The ste sound wl ot be played when the Sleeping and
Bates (Sleeping) Icons (FAs) are asplayed
‘Although you can shoot again before the soctng screen
Is spayed, your previous sha may determine e focus,
brightness and colors used
‘Yu can change now ong images are displayed ater shots
se
Keep your tigers away rom the meropran (1) nie shooting
movies Blocing te mrophone may prevent au trom being
recorded ormay cause Ie recording sound muted,
SAI
OS
Ava toxig camera orto cer ran the move Etton when
hosting moves, because sounds made bythe camera willbe
recorde
(Onze mode recording begs, te Image display area changes
and subjects are enirgeato al for corectin of slgriicant
camera shake. To shoot subjects athe same size shown before
shooting, agus the mage stabtzaton seting (Mn)
‘uso Isrecorded in stereo.
Distertes auso caused byrecorng when he winds sang can
bereduced. However, the recording may sound unraural when
this options used when theres no wind When te wind ot
strong, choose MENU (290) > HEN] ta (Wind Fer >
(on,
Betore Use
Basie Guide
1 Camora Basics,
3 Other Shooting Modos.
4 P mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
37
Movies
(où
A bitng ¡$ icon warns tnat images are more ikely to e.
bisredby camera shake. nts case, moutt camera ona
tipo er take oer measures to keep sti
Inyour shots are dark despte te lash ning, move coserto
the sujet For tas onthe fash ange, se Flash Range”
Biv,
‘The subject may be oo dose fine camera ony beeps once
‘when you press the shuter button away For deals onthe
focusingrange (shootng range), see“Shootng Range” (196).
Toredure red.eye andto asi Infocusi, the lamp maybe
actvated when shootngin log condor,
|A biténg ($) Icon displayed when you attempt to shoot
inacats tn stoong isnot pose url the ash as nine
rechargng Shooting can resume as soon ashe ass ready,
so ever ress te shutter buon ale way down and wat, er
release and press aga
‘The ste sound wl ot be played when the Sleeping and
Bates (Sleeping) Icons (FAs) are asplayed
‘Although you can shoot again before the soctng screen
Is spayed, your previous sha may determine e focus,
brightness and colors used
‘Yu can change now ong images are displayed ater shots
se
Keep your tigers away rom the meropran (1) nie shooting
movies Blocing te mrophone may prevent au trom being
recorded ormay cause Ie recording sound muted,
SAI
OS
Ava toxig camera orto cer ran the move Etton when
hosting moves, because sounds made bythe camera willbe
recorde
(Onze mode recording begs, te Image display area changes
and subjects are enirgeato al for corectin of slgriicant
camera shake. To shoot subjects athe same size shown before
shooting, agus the mage stabtzaton seting (Mn)
‘uso Isrecorded in stereo.
Distertes auso caused byrecorng when he winds sang can
bereduced. However, the recording may sound unraural when
this options used when theres no wind When te wind ot
strong, choose MENU (290) > HEN] ta (Wind Fer >
(on,
Betore Use
Basie Guide
1 Camora Basics,
3 Other Shooting Modos.
4 P mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
37
scene Icons + The background color of. (Y (ED, LY, end ls dar ue Boro Uso
andthe badground colore PA range
Sil mages Movies + Formoses, any People, Other Subject, and Other Close Range ER
In an (AUTO) modes, hosting sanes determined the camera Subjedsicons ao dspayed
are indeed by the con Seplajed nd conespondno sags are + In mode, icons are on displayed fo Pose, Shadows on Face,
Stems selected or optima focusing, subject ightness, and calor, Otter Subeci, ond Other lose Range Subjects
Depencing cn te scene, continuous images maybe shat (9), + Forselkämer sats, ions are nt play forte folowing sujet
sora moro, sng. or aeepng peon amg or ARNO bases, Y caracas
moving chien endothermovng subas
SIDA + Icons are not dplayedtor sing or siespng subjects and moving
Esa ropa SE, children in drive mode ether than [A] (C1139, (143) and when
‘amp Cos et [On] and scenes are automaticaly carrected ET
ue n|- Riga Gers sat (on y 3 Omer Shooting Modes
Waving People = | -|-] - + Bact icons re nt played or moving chicren and sing people TER
Per E — shen the lash & seo
os on Face «Icons fr bebies (dung sming ond seeping bates) and moving
Smiling @ | - = a children are displayed when [Face ID] is set to [On] and faces of Bote and 6 Mode
— © | -I- 1 - feosterdbabes ess an bo yrs ag or chien (2 12 years
zu ol) are detected (£244), Confirm beforehand thatthe date and time 6 Playback Mode
Babes | -|- | sxe caret (120)
ing Babes I - 1-1 = 7 Wo notons
EXE u © - twsteotng nf mote (ray scene co oes ak
Seepng Estes we | -|- | - mac ait sd ON, ni mt peste sak ae
a wll stinyourexpertedeet ct, rungen
EXE a ala 9 Accesos
Other Moving Subjects a | - a = 10 Appendix
Omer Close Range ele =
Sites = a oe
21 Tiposuses
2, The bacigiound coor ricos is gt tue when the backgrounds a ue sy,
ark tue when te backgrounds dak, and 92 or al ne background
"3 Tre bacigiouna coor oficons is gi ve when background is ale sy,
ana gay for al cane backgounes
«ba
andthe badground colore PA range
Sil mages Movies + Formoses, any People, Other Subject, and Other Close Range ER
In an (AUTO) modes, hosting sanes determined the camera Subjedsicons ao dspayed
are indeed by the con Seplajed nd conespondno sags are + In mode, icons are on displayed fo Pose, Shadows on Face,
Stems selected or optima focusing, subject ightness, and calor, Otter Subeci, ond Other lose Range Subjects
Depencing cn te scene, continuous images maybe shat (9), + Forselkämer sats, ions are nt play forte folowing sujet
sora moro, sng. or aeepng peon amg or ARNO bases, Y caracas
moving chien endothermovng subas
SIDA + Icons are not dplayedtor sing or siespng subjects and moving
Esa ropa SE, children in drive mode ether than [A] (C1139, (143) and when
‘amp Cos et [On] and scenes are automaticaly carrected ET
ue n|- Riga Gers sat (on y 3 Omer Shooting Modes
Waving People = | -|-] - + Bact icons re nt played or moving chicren and sing people TER
Per E — shen the lash & seo
os on Face «Icons fr bebies (dung sming ond seeping bates) and moving
Smiling @ | - = a children are displayed when [Face ID] is set to [On] and faces of Bote and 6 Mode
— © | -I- 1 - feosterdbabes ess an bo yrs ag or chien (2 12 years
zu ol) are detected (£244), Confirm beforehand thatthe date and time 6 Playback Mode
Babes | -|- | sxe caret (120)
ing Babes I - 1-1 = 7 Wo notons
EXE u © - twsteotng nf mote (ray scene co oes ak
Seepng Estes we | -|- | - mac ait sd ON, ni mt peste sak ae
a wll stinyourexpertedeet ct, rungen
EXE a ala 9 Accesos
Other Moving Subjects a | - a = 10 Appendix
Omer Close Range ele =
Sites = a oe
21 Tiposuses
2, The bacigiound coor ricos is gt tue when the backgrounds a ue sy,
ark tue when te backgrounds dak, and 92 or al ne background
"3 Tre bacigiouna coor oficons is gi ve when background is ale sy,
ana gay for al cane backgounes
«ba
Continuous Shooting Scenes ™ Image Stabilization Icons Before Use
It you shoot a til image when the folowing scene icons are displayed,
the camera will shoot continuous. Ifyou press the shutter button hatway
when one of he icons in the table below is displayed, one d the following
icons wil be displayed to inform you thatthe camera will shoot continuous
D> Sil images DP Movies
Optimal image stablizton for ne shoctng conditions i automaticaly
‘applied (ntliget IS) Adationaly, tn flowing cons are splayed in
Le and (AUTO! modes
Basie Guide
images (es) bl, or (Qu)
E
smiling Consecutive images are captured, and the camera
(including Babies) | analyzes detais such as facial expressions to save
the image determined to be the best
a
Beautiful shots of sleeping faces, created by
Seeping combining consecutive shots to reduce camera
(including Babies) | shake and image noise
[The AF-assist beam wll not ight up, the fash wil
notre, andthe shutter sound wi not be played,
Image stabilzation for sil images (Normal)
Image stabilization for sl images when panning (Panning)
Image stabilization for macro shots. During movie recording, (WS
is ásplayed_ and image stablizaion for macro movie recordings
used (Hybrid IS)
Image stabilization for movies, reducing strong camera shake, as
when shooting while walking (Dynamic)
Image stabilization for slow camera shake, such as when
shooting movies at telephoto (Powered)
@/a| 63 [1/3
El
So you don't miss a photo opportunity of children
who move ercund, the camera wil capture three
consecutive images for each shot
children
No image stabiizaton, because the camera is mounted on
ta | atripod or ned stil by other means. However, during movie
68 | recording, (i's displayed, and mage stabilization to counteract
wind or cther sources of vibration is used (Tripad IS).
* Dipayea when you pan tating moving subjects wi ne camera, nen you
Talon subjects moving nrzoreay,magesabizaton any caurterats verte
1 Camera Basics
3 Other Shooting Modos.
4 P mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
OT Cairo anon sri sop Sse mn ino 8 Son nw
ae] moi ec, nape aan oh, tn ane
«Fo as Sn acc tai tn tt ise RE
© > Tocaeemage src sti Mono (om Be) in =
Q + imenyaunantosnstsnge maps coy press a etn
‘ans then select CA (einer press the (41D) tutions or tum the:
1@) cia),
‘nis case, ants eons mot spayed
+ Intl mode, no PN icons play
«ba
It you shoot a til image when the folowing scene icons are displayed,
the camera will shoot continuous. Ifyou press the shutter button hatway
when one of he icons in the table below is displayed, one d the following
icons wil be displayed to inform you thatthe camera will shoot continuous
D> Sil images DP Movies
Optimal image stablizton for ne shoctng conditions i automaticaly
‘applied (ntliget IS) Adationaly, tn flowing cons are splayed in
Le and (AUTO! modes
Basie Guide
images (es) bl, or (Qu)
E
smiling Consecutive images are captured, and the camera
(including Babies) | analyzes detais such as facial expressions to save
the image determined to be the best
a
Beautiful shots of sleeping faces, created by
Seeping combining consecutive shots to reduce camera
(including Babies) | shake and image noise
[The AF-assist beam wll not ight up, the fash wil
notre, andthe shutter sound wi not be played,
Image stabilzation for sil images (Normal)
Image stabilization for sl images when panning (Panning)
Image stabilization for macro shots. During movie recording, (WS
is ásplayed_ and image stablizaion for macro movie recordings
used (Hybrid IS)
Image stabilization for movies, reducing strong camera shake, as
when shooting while walking (Dynamic)
Image stabilization for slow camera shake, such as when
shooting movies at telephoto (Powered)
@/a| 63 [1/3
El
So you don't miss a photo opportunity of children
who move ercund, the camera wil capture three
consecutive images for each shot
children
No image stabiizaton, because the camera is mounted on
ta | atripod or ned stil by other means. However, during movie
68 | recording, (i's displayed, and mage stabilization to counteract
wind or cther sources of vibration is used (Tripad IS).
* Dipayea when you pan tating moving subjects wi ne camera, nen you
Talon subjects moving nrzoreay,magesabizaton any caurterats verte
1 Camera Basics
3 Other Shooting Modos.
4 P mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
OT Cairo anon sri sop Sse mn ino 8 Son nw
ae] moi ec, nape aan oh, tn ane
«Fo as Sn acc tai tn tt ise RE
© > Tocaeemage src sti Mono (om Be) in =
Q + imenyaunantosnstsnge maps coy press a etn
‘ans then select CA (einer press the (41D) tutions or tum the:
1@) cia),
‘nis case, ants eons mot spayed
+ Intl mode, no PN icons play
«ba
=
On-Screen Frames
D>Süilimages D Movies
In {AUTO} mode, a variety of frames are displayed once the camera
detects subjects you are aiming the camera at
+ Awe frame is displayed around the subject (or person's face)
determined by the camera to be the main subject, and gray frames are
splayed around cther detected faces, Frames fllow moving subjects
within a certain range to keep them in focus, However, the camera
detects subject movement, only the white frame wal remain onthe
+ When you are pressing the shutter button halfway and the camera
detects subject movement, a blue frame is displayed, and the focus
‘and image tightness are constantly adusted (Servo AF),
CD © 1ysmangın Pimoue (73) no rames are asplyed
frames aro ised around sms sued, or frames ae
spa don be tacna or sima
Ad) + To choose sujeto ocus on, tu the deste subject on
tre screen fis displayed andtne camera enter TouchAF
‘mode. Pressing the stes tft hay wil saya Ue A
frame, and tre camera wil eep te sujetin focus and image
gres adusted (Servo AF)
Comm convenient Fi
n tures
™ Zooming In Closer on Subjects (Digital Zoom)
D sill images. D Movies
Wen distant subjects are too far away to enlarge using the optical zoom,
use dgtal zoom for up to about 17x enlargement
1 Move the zoom lever toward [C41]
‘© Hold the lever until zooming stops.
‘© Zooming stops at the largest possible
00m factor (before the image becomes
‘noticeably grainy), which is then indicated
‘on the screen,
SE
a) 2 Move the zoom lever toward [CA
again.
© The camera zooms in even closer on the
subject
(1 te current zoom factor.
D © nomma zum erw spy zoom me mac
ne zum posta), Tele 20m Dawa range
Sparing one zoo ange
te ange pea za range wer ne mag wnt
pps gy
“how ae ota zo ange ee mage ar
noticeably grainy (ZoomPlus).
Bie range zou age wre te mage appear
ram
+ strate be range wit re aval some soin
‘settings (249), tre maximum zoom factor can be achieved by
foiong sep
Betore Use
1 Camora Basics,
Guide
3 Other Shooting Modes
4 P mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
Lap
40
On-Screen Frames
D>Süilimages D Movies
In {AUTO} mode, a variety of frames are displayed once the camera
detects subjects you are aiming the camera at
+ Awe frame is displayed around the subject (or person's face)
determined by the camera to be the main subject, and gray frames are
splayed around cther detected faces, Frames fllow moving subjects
within a certain range to keep them in focus, However, the camera
detects subject movement, only the white frame wal remain onthe
+ When you are pressing the shutter button halfway and the camera
detects subject movement, a blue frame is displayed, and the focus
‘and image tightness are constantly adusted (Servo AF),
CD © 1ysmangın Pimoue (73) no rames are asplyed
frames aro ised around sms sued, or frames ae
spa don be tacna or sima
Ad) + To choose sujeto ocus on, tu the deste subject on
tre screen fis displayed andtne camera enter TouchAF
‘mode. Pressing the stes tft hay wil saya Ue A
frame, and tre camera wil eep te sujetin focus and image
gres adusted (Servo AF)
Comm convenient Fi
n tures
™ Zooming In Closer on Subjects (Digital Zoom)
D sill images. D Movies
Wen distant subjects are too far away to enlarge using the optical zoom,
use dgtal zoom for up to about 17x enlargement
1 Move the zoom lever toward [C41]
‘© Hold the lever until zooming stops.
‘© Zooming stops at the largest possible
00m factor (before the image becomes
‘noticeably grainy), which is then indicated
‘on the screen,
SE
a) 2 Move the zoom lever toward [CA
again.
© The camera zooms in even closer on the
subject
(1 te current zoom factor.
D © nomma zum erw spy zoom me mac
ne zum posta), Tele 20m Dawa range
Sparing one zoo ange
te ange pea za range wer ne mag wnt
pps gy
“how ae ota zo ange ee mage ar
noticeably grainy (ZoomPlus).
Bie range zou age wre te mage appear
ram
+ strate be range wit re aval some soin
‘settings (249), tre maximum zoom factor can be achieved by
foiong sep
Betore Use
1 Camora Basics,
Guide
3 Other Shooting Modes
4 P mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
Lap
40
D + T0 ceactvae agta zoom cose MENU (FASO) > E ao»
{Ott 2o2m| > (on
™ Shooting at Preset Focal Lengths (Step Zoom)
>Si images. D Movies
You can shoot & preset focal lengths of 24, 28,36, 50,85 or 100 mm
(25mm fim equivalent), This is convenient when you want to shoot atthe
‘angle of view of those focal lengths,
e To change the focal length from 24 to
28mm, tum the [O] ring counterclockwise
‘int itclicks, Keep turning the (Q) ring to
increase the focal length, which changes
10 35, 50, 85, and 100 mm at each dick
Op ees
‘the ring.
Q + vmenyossee seg un GO yas crmt guste
Zam aco unge (Or course Howe
energy mr Ks
™ Using the Self-Timer
Sil images D Movies
Wih the sete, you can include yourself in group photos or other
timed shots, The camera wll oot about 10 seconds after you press the
shutter button
1 Configure the setting.
+ Press ho (6) ttton, choose (in the
manu, anden choose) (129).
© Once the setting is complete, (AY) is
‘ployed
2 Shoot.
«© For Süll Images: Press the shutter button
hallway to focus on the subject, and then
Press al the way down
For Movies: Press the movie button
Once you stat the sel timer, the lamp
wil Bink and the camera wil play a Sa.
timer sound
‘© Two seconds before the shot, he blinking
‘and sound will speed up. (The amp wil
remain Kn case the flash fres.)
+ To cancel shooting after you have
triggered the sei-imer, press the
MENU button
e To restore the original seting, choose [63]
in step 1
Before Use
Basie Guide
1 Camera Basics
3 Other Shooting Modos.
4 P mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
41
{Ott 2o2m| > (on
™ Shooting at Preset Focal Lengths (Step Zoom)
>Si images. D Movies
You can shoot & preset focal lengths of 24, 28,36, 50,85 or 100 mm
(25mm fim equivalent), This is convenient when you want to shoot atthe
‘angle of view of those focal lengths,
e To change the focal length from 24 to
28mm, tum the [O] ring counterclockwise
‘int itclicks, Keep turning the (Q) ring to
increase the focal length, which changes
10 35, 50, 85, and 100 mm at each dick
Op ees
‘the ring.
Q + vmenyossee seg un GO yas crmt guste
Zam aco unge (Or course Howe
energy mr Ks
™ Using the Self-Timer
Sil images D Movies
Wih the sete, you can include yourself in group photos or other
timed shots, The camera wll oot about 10 seconds after you press the
shutter button
1 Configure the setting.
+ Press ho (6) ttton, choose (in the
manu, anden choose) (129).
© Once the setting is complete, (AY) is
‘ployed
2 Shoot.
«© For Süll Images: Press the shutter button
hallway to focus on the subject, and then
Press al the way down
For Movies: Press the movie button
Once you stat the sel timer, the lamp
wil Bink and the camera wil play a Sa.
timer sound
‘© Two seconds before the shot, he blinking
‘and sound will speed up. (The amp wil
remain Kn case the flash fres.)
+ To cancel shooting after you have
triggered the sei-imer, press the
MENU button
e To restore the original seting, choose [63]
in step 1
Before Use
Basie Guide
1 Camera Basics
3 Other Shooting Modos.
4 P mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
41
Using the Self-Timer to Avoid Camera Shake
D Sil images Pe Movies
‘This option delays shutter release until about two seconds after you
have pressed te shutter button If the camera is unsteady while you are
pressing the shutter button it ill not efect your shot.
x ‘© Follow step 1 in ‘Using the Sel-Timer"
M DAT) and choose [63
N + Once the setingis complete, [43 is
displayed
Flow step 2 in ‘Using the Sef-Timer
(Man to shoot
Customizing the Self-Timer
> Süilimages De Movies
You can specity the delay (0-30 seconds) and number of shots (1- 10)
1 Choose 1
‘© Foloning sep 1 in“Using the Sel. Timer
(RAT), choose {QI and press the BRE)
buton
2 Configure the setting.
2 Tum the (0) mato choose the (Delay
time, ether press the [AJ buttons or
turn the (@] dal to choose the number of
(Shots), end then press the (9) button
+ Once the setingis complete, (is
displayed
e Folow step 2in ‘Using the Saf-Timer
(st) to shoot
(© © Farmoessntusig ne setames (eto repens edly
before recording begins, but the [Shots] setting has no effect.
QO + virenyou spec matt has, mage bigness and white
balance are etemined bythe st nc Move time is required
between cts when fe ash res or when you ave species
totake many shes. Shocting wa stop automatcaly when te
memory card becomes nal
+ When a dla longer than two seconds speed two seconds
Deore te sot. ne lamp inking and slim sound speed
up. (The lamp wi remain tin case me lashes.)
™ Shooting by Touching the Screen (Touch Shutter)
D suit images
‘With this option, instead of pressing the shutter button, you can simply
touch the screen and release your Ingar to shoot. The camera wil focus
on subjects and adjust mage brightness automaticaly.
1 Enable touch-shutter function
e Press the MENU button, choose [Touch
Shutter] on th (EM tab, and then choose
[On] (C20).
2 Shoot.
Touch the subject on the screen, and
then litt your finger immediately.
© The camera shoots, as a shutter scund
is played
+ To cancel touch shutter, choose [Of in
sept
(© > Senate ens ayes cannot et
‘shot by touching (1.
Betore Use
Basie Guide
1 Camora Basics,
3 Other Shooting Modos.
4 P mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
dba
42
D Sil images Pe Movies
‘This option delays shutter release until about two seconds after you
have pressed te shutter button If the camera is unsteady while you are
pressing the shutter button it ill not efect your shot.
x ‘© Follow step 1 in ‘Using the Sel-Timer"
M DAT) and choose [63
N + Once the setingis complete, [43 is
displayed
Flow step 2 in ‘Using the Sef-Timer
(Man to shoot
Customizing the Self-Timer
> Süilimages De Movies
You can specity the delay (0-30 seconds) and number of shots (1- 10)
1 Choose 1
‘© Foloning sep 1 in“Using the Sel. Timer
(RAT), choose {QI and press the BRE)
buton
2 Configure the setting.
2 Tum the (0) mato choose the (Delay
time, ether press the [AJ buttons or
turn the (@] dal to choose the number of
(Shots), end then press the (9) button
+ Once the setingis complete, (is
displayed
e Folow step 2in ‘Using the Saf-Timer
(st) to shoot
(© © Farmoessntusig ne setames (eto repens edly
before recording begins, but the [Shots] setting has no effect.
QO + virenyou spec matt has, mage bigness and white
balance are etemined bythe st nc Move time is required
between cts when fe ash res or when you ave species
totake many shes. Shocting wa stop automatcaly when te
memory card becomes nal
+ When a dla longer than two seconds speed two seconds
Deore te sot. ne lamp inking and slim sound speed
up. (The lamp wi remain tin case me lashes.)
™ Shooting by Touching the Screen (Touch Shutter)
D suit images
‘With this option, instead of pressing the shutter button, you can simply
touch the screen and release your Ingar to shoot. The camera wil focus
on subjects and adjust mage brightness automaticaly.
1 Enable touch-shutter function
e Press the MENU button, choose [Touch
Shutter] on th (EM tab, and then choose
[On] (C20).
2 Shoot.
Touch the subject on the screen, and
then litt your finger immediately.
© The camera shoots, as a shutter scund
is played
+ To cancel touch shutter, choose [Of in
sept
(© > Senate ens ayes cannot et
‘shot by touching (1.
Betore Use
Basie Guide
1 Camora Basics,
3 Other Shooting Modos.
4 P mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
dba
42
Image Display during Playback
™ Continuous Shooting
D sun mages
In {AUTO} mode, hold the shutter button athe way down to shoot
continuously
For details on the continuous shooting speed, see “Continuous Shooting
Speed (21196).
1 Configure the setting.
‘© Press the [a] button, choose [fl (either
press the (4){p] buttons or turn the (6)
dial), and then press the [O] button
‘© Once the setting is complete, Fl is
displayed
2 Shoot.
e Holdthe shutter button al the way dorm
o shoot continucush,
CD + our rr stig sad onu kd tn
peor damon hn pen be sb at,
Ena ved no sate)
2 Stoning oy sopmonertany cons tot my sw
Sonn deg age cane senor ae
con post
Fern
2 Stostnomay or am wehren
+ Mufkarea White Balance (£1134) is not available. Similarly, [Hg
Lamp Corr] (£249) is set to [Off] and cannct be changed,
«imo Ste ANT ama sts iy
Wine ala Deren Four ni pau dy runs
man cor te moy a ema aot
Each set of images shot continuously is managed as a single group,
and ont the frst mage in that group wil be displayed. To indicate that
the image is part of a group, (BB) is displayed in the upper et of the
screen.
© + tryuenseagmpes moge (210, a mages me gu
lr a
Y + cmpeamagscante oros many Gars
ciao
rec a agas nae we tags
tego
|r ener ny
me seen EN or Oma sre ne
caw noes tengo et
«Teton street Dr quemas
bing Facto roman ED mang Ea)
‘gry atoms ft tra AT ring
(hic eo aa D oF
Sing ro ER E cn ves ge ave
am age Ge eigen
AO) test.
Betore Use
Basie Guide
1 Camera Basics
3 Other Shooting Modos.
4 P mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
43
™ Continuous Shooting
D sun mages
In {AUTO} mode, hold the shutter button athe way down to shoot
continuously
For details on the continuous shooting speed, see “Continuous Shooting
Speed (21196).
1 Configure the setting.
‘© Press the [a] button, choose [fl (either
press the (4){p] buttons or turn the (6)
dial), and then press the [O] button
‘© Once the setting is complete, Fl is
displayed
2 Shoot.
e Holdthe shutter button al the way dorm
o shoot continucush,
CD + our rr stig sad onu kd tn
peor damon hn pen be sb at,
Ena ved no sate)
2 Stoning oy sopmonertany cons tot my sw
Sonn deg age cane senor ae
con post
Fern
2 Stostnomay or am wehren
+ Mufkarea White Balance (£1134) is not available. Similarly, [Hg
Lamp Corr] (£249) is set to [Off] and cannct be changed,
«imo Ste ANT ama sts iy
Wine ala Deren Four ni pau dy runs
man cor te moy a ema aot
Each set of images shot continuously is managed as a single group,
and ont the frst mage in that group wil be displayed. To indicate that
the image is part of a group, (BB) is displayed in the upper et of the
screen.
© + tryuenseagmpes moge (210, a mages me gu
lr a
Y + cmpeamagscante oros many Gars
ciao
rec a agas nae we tags
tego
|r ener ny
me seen EN or Oma sre ne
caw noes tengo et
«Teton street Dr quemas
bing Facto roman ED mang Ea)
‘gry atoms ft tra AT ring
(hic eo aa D oF
Sing ro ER E cn ves ge ave
am age Ge eigen
AO) test.
Betore Use
Basie Guide
1 Camera Basics
3 Other Shooting Modos.
4 P mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
43
Ising Face ID ™ Registering Face ID Information Belore Use
If you register a person ahead of time, the camera will detect that person's You can register information (face info, names, birthdays) for up to 12
face, and prortize focus, brightness, and color for that person when people to use with Face ID.
shooting, In [AUTO] mode, tne camera can detect babies and children
based on registered birthdays and optimize settngs for them when
shooting
This function i also useful when searching fr a specic registered
person among a large number of images (£11108)
1 Access the setting screen.
‘© Press the (MENU) button, choose [Face
ID Settings] on the (Y tab, and then 1 Camera Basics
press the (@} button (a0).
2 ondas
=
Personal Information e Press the [AY] buttons or tum the 16)
‘ ‘da to choose [Add to Registry], and then
+ Information such as images of aface (face info) registered with ass he ation
Face ID, and personal information (name, bsthday) wil be saved WED
en the camera Additional, hen registered people are detecto, ees
thsirnames willbe recorded in sll mages. When using the Face ID
3 Otner Shooting Modes
function, be careful when sharing the camera or images with others, 5 Tv. Av.M and C Mode
and inn posngimages cine ere many ar an nen hm Pres the [ast] buttons ortum the 10)
+ Wien pongo! acera rtnforing te mer person ater Gato cross Aad a Now Face and 6 Portas
Using Foc IO be sure erase al nomaten (raged faces then press the (baton
names, and onda) om he camera (48) 7 ventanas
8 seri ons
ter face information
ans a 9 Accessories
Aim te camera so tat the face ono
person you want regstr ma he
‘gay frame at the center ofthe screen. 10 Appendix
«Aut ame one pases face
‘nests at Ma foes econ toos
‘Make sure a white frame is displayed on
the face, endihen shoot
If the face isnot recognized you cannot
register face information
«ba
If you register a person ahead of time, the camera will detect that person's You can register information (face info, names, birthdays) for up to 12
face, and prortize focus, brightness, and color for that person when people to use with Face ID.
shooting, In [AUTO] mode, tne camera can detect babies and children
based on registered birthdays and optimize settngs for them when
shooting
This function i also useful when searching fr a specic registered
person among a large number of images (£11108)
1 Access the setting screen.
‘© Press the (MENU) button, choose [Face
ID Settings] on the (Y tab, and then 1 Camera Basics
press the (@} button (a0).
2 ondas
=
Personal Information e Press the [AY] buttons or tum the 16)
‘ ‘da to choose [Add to Registry], and then
+ Information such as images of aface (face info) registered with ass he ation
Face ID, and personal information (name, bsthday) wil be saved WED
en the camera Additional, hen registered people are detecto, ees
thsirnames willbe recorded in sll mages. When using the Face ID
3 Otner Shooting Modes
function, be careful when sharing the camera or images with others, 5 Tv. Av.M and C Mode
and inn posngimages cine ere many ar an nen hm Pres the [ast] buttons ortum the 10)
+ Wien pongo! acera rtnforing te mer person ater Gato cross Aad a Now Face and 6 Portas
Using Foc IO be sure erase al nomaten (raged faces then press the (baton
names, and onda) om he camera (48) 7 ventanas
8 seri ons
ter face information
ans a 9 Accessories
Aim te camera so tat the face ono
person you want regstr ma he
‘gay frame at the center ofthe screen. 10 Appendix
«Aut ame one pases face
‘nests at Ma foes econ toos
‘Make sure a white frame is displayed on
the face, endihen shoot
If the face isnot recognized you cannot
register face information
«ba
+ After [Register?]is displayed, press
the [ID] buttons or tum the (@) dal
to choose [OK], and then press the [E]
button
The Et Profe] screen is displayed.
3 Register the person's name and
birthday.
‘© Press the (@) button to access the
keyboard, and then enter the name
(032),
e To register a birthday, on the [Edt Profle]
screen, choose [Bithday](ether press.
the [AV] buttons or tum the (@ día)
andihen press the ($) button
e Press the (D) buttons to choose an
option
‘© Press the [AJ Y] buttons or turn the [
lal to speaty the date,
‘© When finished, press the (@) button
Save the settings.
‘© Press the [ay] buttons or turn the [@)
dial to choose [Save], and then press the
[6] button
‘© After a message is displayed, press the
(BI buttons or turn the (6) dalto
hose Vas, an thon press te EN
5 Continue registering face information.
+ To register up to 4 more points d face
information (expressions or anges),
repeet step 2
+ Registered aces are more easly
recognized ifyou add a variety of face
information. In addtion to a head-on
angl, add a sight side angle, a shot
when smiling, and shots inside and
outside
© > Trenammand re wen ooo sep 2
2 ana sr ato lo, ates rcnigen con
(238) will pot be displayed in AUTO] mode.
+ Youcan avenue registered face no, and ad face fo later it
yournave nat teal Stace ino sats (44)
® Shooting
I you register a person ahead oftime, the camera wi proritze that
person as he main subject, and optimize focus, brightness, and color for
that person when shooting
‘© When you point the camera toward a
‘subject, the names of up to 3 registered
people will be displayed when they are
detected
e Shoot
+ Displayed names wil be recorded in stil
images, Even if people are detected, but
{har names are not displayed, the names.
{upto 5 people) willbe recorded in the
image
Betore Use
Basie Guide
1 Camora Basics,
3 Otner Shooting Modes.
4 P Mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
Inder
«ba
45
the [ID] buttons or tum the (@) dal
to choose [OK], and then press the [E]
button
The Et Profe] screen is displayed.
3 Register the person's name and
birthday.
‘© Press the (@) button to access the
keyboard, and then enter the name
(032),
e To register a birthday, on the [Edt Profle]
screen, choose [Bithday](ether press.
the [AV] buttons or tum the (@ día)
andihen press the ($) button
e Press the (D) buttons to choose an
option
‘© Press the [AJ Y] buttons or turn the [
lal to speaty the date,
‘© When finished, press the (@) button
Save the settings.
‘© Press the [ay] buttons or turn the [@)
dial to choose [Save], and then press the
[6] button
‘© After a message is displayed, press the
(BI buttons or turn the (6) dalto
hose Vas, an thon press te EN
5 Continue registering face information.
+ To register up to 4 more points d face
information (expressions or anges),
repeet step 2
+ Registered aces are more easly
recognized ifyou add a variety of face
information. In addtion to a head-on
angl, add a sight side angle, a shot
when smiling, and shots inside and
outside
© > Trenammand re wen ooo sep 2
2 ana sr ato lo, ates rcnigen con
(238) will pot be displayed in AUTO] mode.
+ Youcan avenue registered face no, and ad face fo later it
yournave nat teal Stace ino sats (44)
® Shooting
I you register a person ahead oftime, the camera wi proritze that
person as he main subject, and optimize focus, brightness, and color for
that person when shooting
‘© When you point the camera toward a
‘subject, the names of up to 3 registered
people will be displayed when they are
detected
e Shoot
+ Displayed names wil be recorded in stil
images, Even if people are detected, but
{har names are not displayed, the names.
{upto 5 people) willbe recorded in the
image
Betore Use
Basie Guide
1 Camora Basics,
3 Otner Shooting Modes.
4 P Mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
Inder
«ba
45
People otter than those registered may be mistakenly detected
asthe rgstered person tthe stare similar fail features
RRegstered people may nt be conscty detect the capture
image or scene ars rasta rom te registre ace
Information.
I aregstered faces not detected, or not easy detecte,
vente regstere romain win new face no, Regstenng
face fo igtbefreshostng mil alow for easier detection of
regitereataces
Ita persons misakeny detected as anotner person ana you
cortrue shodhng you can eat or erase te name recorded the
Image aunngploack AA),
Because faces bats and corn change qucky as they
grow you shou update terface info regulan (FD).
"Names waste recorded in mages even you dear he
[Shooting ro] check bax in [Custam Dispiay] (295) on tne
MON 10 so nat me names are not splayed.
Inyou dont ware names to he recorded Insta images, choose
[Face D Setings] on te Mao, choose [Face D, anat
choose or)
‘You can check names recorded in mages inthe playback creen
(simple rrormason dspiay (D105,
Inj) mode, names are not spayed on te shooing screen,
bt they wil be recoded in sl Images
Names recorded in corinuous shooting 49,267 wit
Corin tobe recorded n he same postin as forthe tt set,
event subjects move
™ Checking and Editing Registered Information Betore Use
1 Access the [Check/Edit Info] screen. Pat Cie
‘© Following step 1 in “Registering Face ID
Information” (144), choose [Check
Et Info and press the (6) button
1 Camora Basics,
2 Choose a person to check or edit,
© Press the [AI wI14](D] buttons or tum
the (@) da to choose the person to
‘check or edi, and then press the [@)
button. 4 P Mode
3 Otner Shooting Modes.
3 Check or edit the information as Bote and 6 Mode
needed.
+ To check a name or birthday, choose [Edt DELE
Profie (eter press the (au fw] buttons.
or tum the (@) da), and then press the 7 WiFi Functions
KI burn. On the screen displayed,
you can edt names or bitndays as. =
described in step 3 of Registering Face LÉ
ID Information” (Mas,
Accessories
+ To check face information, choose [Face
Info List (ether press the (a) buttens
‘ortum the (6) da), and then press. 10 Appendix
the (8) button. Press the [$] button
‘on the screen displayed, choose face
information to erase by pressing the
LAIYIRIDI buttons or tuming the (8)
dal, and then press the (@) button. After
[Erase7]is dsplayed, choose [OK] (ether
press the (4)(P] buttons or tum the (8)
da), and then press the (@) button, 4»
46
Inder
asthe rgstered person tthe stare similar fail features
RRegstered people may nt be conscty detect the capture
image or scene ars rasta rom te registre ace
Information.
I aregstered faces not detected, or not easy detecte,
vente regstere romain win new face no, Regstenng
face fo igtbefreshostng mil alow for easier detection of
regitereataces
Ita persons misakeny detected as anotner person ana you
cortrue shodhng you can eat or erase te name recorded the
Image aunngploack AA),
Because faces bats and corn change qucky as they
grow you shou update terface info regulan (FD).
"Names waste recorded in mages even you dear he
[Shooting ro] check bax in [Custam Dispiay] (295) on tne
MON 10 so nat me names are not splayed.
Inyou dont ware names to he recorded Insta images, choose
[Face D Setings] on te Mao, choose [Face D, anat
choose or)
‘You can check names recorded in mages inthe playback creen
(simple rrormason dspiay (D105,
Inj) mode, names are not spayed on te shooing screen,
bt they wil be recoded in sl Images
Names recorded in corinuous shooting 49,267 wit
Corin tobe recorded n he same postin as forthe tt set,
event subjects move
™ Checking and Editing Registered Information Betore Use
1 Access the [Check/Edit Info] screen. Pat Cie
‘© Following step 1 in “Registering Face ID
Information” (144), choose [Check
Et Info and press the (6) button
1 Camora Basics,
2 Choose a person to check or edit,
© Press the [AI wI14](D] buttons or tum
the (@) da to choose the person to
‘check or edi, and then press the [@)
button. 4 P Mode
3 Otner Shooting Modes.
3 Check or edit the information as Bote and 6 Mode
needed.
+ To check a name or birthday, choose [Edt DELE
Profie (eter press the (au fw] buttons.
or tum the (@) da), and then press the 7 WiFi Functions
KI burn. On the screen displayed,
you can edt names or bitndays as. =
described in step 3 of Registering Face LÉ
ID Information” (Mas,
Accessories
+ To check face information, choose [Face
Info List (ether press the (a) buttens
‘ortum the (6) da), and then press. 10 Appendix
the (8) button. Press the [$] button
‘on the screen displayed, choose face
information to erase by pressing the
LAIYIRIDI buttons or tuming the (8)
dal, and then press the (@) button. After
[Erase7]is dsplayed, choose [OK] (ether
press the (4)(P] buttons or tum the (8)
da), and then press the (@) button, 4»
46
Inder
3 choose the face into to overwrite. ==
+ Press the [aJ[W][4][}] buttons or tun
a Te maire
overwrite, and then press the (@] button.
CD © sent enna anes nat re eames cea
pa nape woman sane,
Y + Youcmweire une ie oat egsteesranes
en
cnn MA ey cS
4 Register face information
«© Fallow step 2 in“ Registering Face ID
Information” (22144) to shock, and then 24
register the new face information E
e Registered faces are more easily
recognized ifyou add a variety of face
informañon. In adation to a head-on
1 Camora Basics,
Qverwriting and Adding Face Information
You can overwrite existing face Information wth new face ino. You should
update face information regular, especially with babies and children, as their
faces change quicky a they grow
3 Otner Shooting Modes
fou can also add face information when al 6 face info slots have nat been fl Sighs dde sgh ce angle, SN 46 Me
You can also add face information when al 5 face info Sots have not been fle, ficas cele erat
outside
À Access the [Add Face Info] screen.
‘© Foloning step 1 in “Registering Face ID Ÿ:
5 Tv,Av.M and C Modo
‘You canna aa fac farm ion al 5 rom ation sts ae ea,
Information" (C0144), choose [Add Face 6 Playback Mode.
irate an come ee
«Sota on nenne ec en
ee one 7 ver ins
es
sta ise tS Ds co Fear te =
2 choose the name ofthe person Soman tats DET
Presse autos om T=
the [O] did to choose the name of a
por vcs ac you van oo
over, and then press the [@ button
if five tems of face info have already
been registered, a message will be
displayed Choose [OK] (ether press the
ID buttons or turn the (@} dal), and
then press the (@) button
‘If ess than five tems of face info are
Tegstered goto sop dto ace «ba
information.
Inder
47
+ Press the [aJ[W][4][}] buttons or tun
a Te maire
overwrite, and then press the (@] button.
CD © sent enna anes nat re eames cea
pa nape woman sane,
Y + Youcmweire une ie oat egsteesranes
en
cnn MA ey cS
4 Register face information
«© Fallow step 2 in“ Registering Face ID
Information” (22144) to shock, and then 24
register the new face information E
e Registered faces are more easily
recognized ifyou add a variety of face
informañon. In adation to a head-on
1 Camora Basics,
Qverwriting and Adding Face Information
You can overwrite existing face Information wth new face ino. You should
update face information regular, especially with babies and children, as their
faces change quicky a they grow
3 Otner Shooting Modes
fou can also add face information when al 6 face info slots have nat been fl Sighs dde sgh ce angle, SN 46 Me
You can also add face information when al 5 face info Sots have not been fle, ficas cele erat
outside
À Access the [Add Face Info] screen.
‘© Foloning step 1 in “Registering Face ID Ÿ:
5 Tv,Av.M and C Modo
‘You canna aa fac farm ion al 5 rom ation sts ae ea,
Information" (C0144), choose [Add Face 6 Playback Mode.
irate an come ee
«Sota on nenne ec en
ee one 7 ver ins
es
sta ise tS Ds co Fear te =
2 choose the name ofthe person Soman tats DET
Presse autos om T=
the [O] did to choose the name of a
por vcs ac you van oo
over, and then press the [@ button
if five tems of face info have already
been registered, a message will be
displayed Choose [OK] (ether press the
ID buttons or turn the (@} dal), and
then press the (@) button
‘If ess than five tems of face info are
Tegstered goto sop dto ace «ba
information.
Inder
47
Erasing Registered Information
You can erase information (face info, names, birthdays) registered to
Face ID, However, names recorded in previously shot images wal not be
erased
1 Access the [Erase Info] screen.
‘© Fotow step 1 in Registering Face ID
Information” (44) and choose [Erase
Info}
2 Choose the name of the person
whose info you want to erase.
e Press the [a VII buttons or turn
the [@) dia to choose the name of a
person to erase, and then press the (9)
button
+ Afar (Erase?) is ásplayed press the
ED] buttons or turn the (6) dato
choose [OK], andthen press the [®]
button
© © inpuers aregistera ers ty ae eto
apy ornare ED our re to AI,
search images for them (A108).
Deere
Image Customization Featur
™ Changing the Aspect Ratio
D Su images
Change the image aspect ratio (ato of wich to height) as follows,
e Press the (@) button, choose [92] inthe
menu, and choose the desired option
-@: ma.
‘© Once the setting is complete, the screen
‘aspect ratio will be updated
e To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [3:2
69] Used for ásplay on widescreen HOTVS or similar ásplay devices,
„2 | Natve aspect rato ofthe camera screen. Same aspect rato as
82 | mm tum, useáor pining images at 5x Tnch of postcard ses
Used for dsplay on standard-defntion televisions or similar display
143 | devices, Also used for printing images at 35x Sinch or series
1A [ Square aspect rato.
[435 | Aspect ratio commonly used for porrats
+ Youcan customize camera operation so int turing te (D ng
changes tne aspect ato 287),
+ Notavalabe in gf] mode,
Betore Use
Basic Guido
1 Camora Basics,
Inder
3 Otner Shooting Modes.
4 P Mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
48
You can erase information (face info, names, birthdays) registered to
Face ID, However, names recorded in previously shot images wal not be
erased
1 Access the [Erase Info] screen.
‘© Fotow step 1 in Registering Face ID
Information” (44) and choose [Erase
Info}
2 Choose the name of the person
whose info you want to erase.
e Press the [a VII buttons or turn
the [@) dia to choose the name of a
person to erase, and then press the (9)
button
+ Afar (Erase?) is ásplayed press the
ED] buttons or turn the (6) dato
choose [OK], andthen press the [®]
button
© © inpuers aregistera ers ty ae eto
apy ornare ED our re to AI,
search images for them (A108).
Deere
Image Customization Featur
™ Changing the Aspect Ratio
D Su images
Change the image aspect ratio (ato of wich to height) as follows,
e Press the (@) button, choose [92] inthe
menu, and choose the desired option
-@: ma.
‘© Once the setting is complete, the screen
‘aspect ratio will be updated
e To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [3:2
69] Used for ásplay on widescreen HOTVS or similar ásplay devices,
„2 | Natve aspect rato ofthe camera screen. Same aspect rato as
82 | mm tum, useáor pining images at 5x Tnch of postcard ses
Used for dsplay on standard-defntion televisions or similar display
143 | devices, Also used for printing images at 35x Sinch or series
1A [ Square aspect rato.
[435 | Aspect ratio commonly used for porrats
+ Youcan customize camera operation so int turing te (D ng
changes tne aspect ato 287),
+ Notavalabe in gf] mode,
Betore Use
Basic Guido
1 Camora Basics,
Inder
3 Otner Shooting Modes.
4 P Mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
48
™ Changing Image Resolution (Size)
D Su Images
‘Choose from leves of image resolution, as allons. For guidelines on
how many shots at each resolution setting can ft on a memory card, soe
"Number of Shots per Memory Card" (£1188).
‘© Press the ($) button, choose IL in the
menu, and choose the desired cption
(e).
The option you configured is now
displayed
+ To restore the original seting, repost this
process but choose (LI
Guidelines for Choosing Resolution Based on Paper Size
(for 3:2 Images)
L | 085x234)
Mi | #-A501.1x 165-58x 83m)
M2 | 35x5m.5x 7in, Postcard
S_| Fore-maling and smiar purposes
D + nvarsien din
™ Correcting Greenish Image Areas from
Mercury Lamps
D> Sl images
In (AUTO! mode, subjects or background in shots of evening scenes
¡luminated by mercury amps may appear to have a greenish tinge, This.
‘greenish tinge can be corrected automatically when shooting, using Mult-
‘area White Balance
©) + Press the MENU} button, choose [Hg
Lamp Cort Jon the (KM) tab, and then
© choose [On] (£130),
Once the seting is complete, [A] is
splayed
e To restore the original setting, repeat his
process but choose [Of
(© + na yaa sed sing unter meray laps you sha
Seto Lam Contacto [om One, ren urs ok
ne merry lamps moy e comets mate
À» wang met as tom route
Seeds
+ es aan ES nes setngi sta [Or ans
ma ages
we
Basie Guide
1 Camora Basics,
Inder
3 Omer Srcoting Modes
4 Prode
5 RAM and Modo
6 Playback Modo
7 wer Functions
8 Song Meno
9 Acseasones
10 Appendix
4/»/9
49
D Su Images
‘Choose from leves of image resolution, as allons. For guidelines on
how many shots at each resolution setting can ft on a memory card, soe
"Number of Shots per Memory Card" (£1188).
‘© Press the ($) button, choose IL in the
menu, and choose the desired cption
(e).
The option you configured is now
displayed
+ To restore the original seting, repost this
process but choose (LI
Guidelines for Choosing Resolution Based on Paper Size
(for 3:2 Images)
L | 085x234)
Mi | #-A501.1x 165-58x 83m)
M2 | 35x5m.5x 7in, Postcard
S_| Fore-maling and smiar purposes
D + nvarsien din
™ Correcting Greenish Image Areas from
Mercury Lamps
D> Sl images
In (AUTO! mode, subjects or background in shots of evening scenes
¡luminated by mercury amps may appear to have a greenish tinge, This.
‘greenish tinge can be corrected automatically when shooting, using Mult-
‘area White Balance
©) + Press the MENU} button, choose [Hg
Lamp Cort Jon the (KM) tab, and then
© choose [On] (£130),
Once the seting is complete, [A] is
splayed
e To restore the original setting, repeat his
process but choose [Of
(© + na yaa sed sing unter meray laps you sha
Seto Lam Contacto [om One, ren urs ok
ne merry lamps moy e comets mate
À» wang met as tom route
Seeds
+ es aan ES nes setngi sta [Or ans
ma ages
we
Basie Guide
1 Camora Basics,
Inder
3 Omer Srcoting Modes
4 Prode
5 RAM and Modo
6 Playback Modo
7 wer Functions
8 Song Meno
9 Acseasones
10 Appendix
4/»/9
49
= si .
Changing Movie Image Qualit | Shooting Features Betore Use
D Movies . aes
4 mage quality setings are valable. For guideines on the maximum Using the Dual Axis Electronic Level
movie length a each level of image qualty na vil ft on a memory card,
Tang Tne per Memory Card (21196) D Siil Images. Movies
am.) Press the (@) button, choose (ABRE) in ‘An electronic level can be displayed as a guideline to ensure the camera
Camera asics
the menu, and choose the desred option is leva from rot Lo back and tonight. a
(6029),
+ The option you configured is now sx À Display the electronic level.
displayed | Presse [y] button several times to
+ Torestore the orginal seting, repeat this úsplay the electronic level 8 Omer Shooting Modes
process but choose Mal
4 Pode
2 Straighten the camera.
(1) ndeates the front-back crientation 5 Ay Mand Modo
‘and (2) the left-right orientation
= le «i the cameras ted, move it so that the 6 Playback Mode
Que | Resolution | Frame Rate Detais redline chengesto green
em |1920x 1080 hotes [or shooting n Full HO GARDES
(MER encbles movies with
WER 1920x1080 [potes [seater moton PT aa anne 8 Sotho Men
Fizso mo aos [For shootiagin HO MENU bution, a cnt MC ab. choose Custom Display]
= = Fr a Ada (Y JIM) or) cose te decai teva 9 Accessories
mea fou kom or shooting n standard + Thestecrnic ee srt sployes ung move recrang
Ieefnticn 5 iryounats ne camera verte ne atentan te econ Meer
level wi be updated automaticaly to mathe camera
crertaton
Q + tocar splayed ontnetop and bat in O. ME + Citrate the electronic eval seems inetectve in hna you co
ans [DH moses and ont et ans srt moe) level the camera (2158)
Inacate mage areas rt record + Not aval ni mode
4/»/9
Changing Movie Image Qualit | Shooting Features Betore Use
D Movies . aes
4 mage quality setings are valable. For guideines on the maximum Using the Dual Axis Electronic Level
movie length a each level of image qualty na vil ft on a memory card,
Tang Tne per Memory Card (21196) D Siil Images. Movies
am.) Press the (@) button, choose (ABRE) in ‘An electronic level can be displayed as a guideline to ensure the camera
Camera asics
the menu, and choose the desred option is leva from rot Lo back and tonight. a
(6029),
+ The option you configured is now sx À Display the electronic level.
displayed | Presse [y] button several times to
+ Torestore the orginal seting, repeat this úsplay the electronic level 8 Omer Shooting Modes
process but choose Mal
4 Pode
2 Straighten the camera.
(1) ndeates the front-back crientation 5 Ay Mand Modo
‘and (2) the left-right orientation
= le «i the cameras ted, move it so that the 6 Playback Mode
Que | Resolution | Frame Rate Detais redline chengesto green
em |1920x 1080 hotes [or shooting n Full HO GARDES
(MER encbles movies with
WER 1920x1080 [potes [seater moton PT aa anne 8 Sotho Men
Fizso mo aos [For shootiagin HO MENU bution, a cnt MC ab. choose Custom Display]
= = Fr a Ada (Y JIM) or) cose te decai teva 9 Accessories
mea fou kom or shooting n standard + Thestecrnic ee srt sployes ung move recrang
Ieefnticn 5 iryounats ne camera verte ne atentan te econ Meer
level wi be updated automaticaly to mathe camera
crertaton
Q + tocar splayed ontnetop and bat in O. ME + Citrate the electronic eval seems inetectve in hna you co
ans [DH moses and ont et ans srt moe) level the camera (2158)
Inacate mage areas rt record + Not aval ni mode
4/»/9
™ Magnifying the Area in Focus
™ Checking for Closed Eyes
D Su Images
You can check the focus by pressing the shutter button half, which wil
enlarge the portion ofthe image in focus in the AF frame,
1 Configure the setting.
‘© Press the MENU button, choose (AF-
Pont Zoom] on the MA) tab, and then
choose [On] (£1130
2 Check the focus.
‘Press the shutter aten haliuay The
face detected asthe man subject snow
magaiies
© To estore the orginal sting, choose
¡fin eo 1
D + vrewenntensisn neds wes mera
‘nie on peers,
Ta ecos razon fe points cee ane
a mt nal: re soe one
Canasta namen
er
ana Vs eds ana Eh
+ Not available in gif] mode.
D Sil Images
is dsplayed when the camera detects that people may have closed
ther eyes.
1 Configure the settings.
+ Press the [MENU] button, choose [Blink
Detection] on the if tab, and then
choose [On] (F130),
2 shoot.
ashes when the camera detects a
person whose eyes are closed.
e To restore the original setting, choose
Of] in step 1
DP © venosa pected mp tas ere
Nielson ae mean
«Ata tinea pira ote yet me cate wen
Yours oe es] tase scl Pro nl]
ie) ce,
+ This feature is not available during continuous shooting in [A]
mo on
«Tater nd oi eco tt mote
(aus men
Betore Use
Basie Guide
1 Camora Basics,
Inder
3 Other Shooting Modos.
4 P Mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
4/»/9
st
™ Checking for Closed Eyes
D Su Images
You can check the focus by pressing the shutter button half, which wil
enlarge the portion ofthe image in focus in the AF frame,
1 Configure the setting.
‘© Press the MENU button, choose (AF-
Pont Zoom] on the MA) tab, and then
choose [On] (£1130
2 Check the focus.
‘Press the shutter aten haliuay The
face detected asthe man subject snow
magaiies
© To estore the orginal sting, choose
¡fin eo 1
D + vrewenntensisn neds wes mera
‘nie on peers,
Ta ecos razon fe points cee ane
a mt nal: re soe one
Canasta namen
er
ana Vs eds ana Eh
+ Not available in gif] mode.
D Sil Images
is dsplayed when the camera detects that people may have closed
ther eyes.
1 Configure the settings.
+ Press the [MENU] button, choose [Blink
Detection] on the if tab, and then
choose [On] (F130),
2 shoot.
ashes when the camera detects a
person whose eyes are closed.
e To restore the original setting, choose
Of] in step 1
DP © venosa pected mp tas ere
Nielson ae mean
«Ata tinea pira ote yet me cate wen
Yours oe es] tase scl Pro nl]
ie) ce,
+ This feature is not available during continuous shooting in [A]
mo on
«Tater nd oi eco tt mote
(aus men
Betore Use
Basie Guide
1 Camora Basics,
Inder
3 Other Shooting Modos.
4 P Mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
4/»/9
st
Customizing Camera Operation
Customize shooting functions on the Bl] ta of the menu screen as
follows
For instuctions on menu functions, ses "Using the Menu Screen’
(30).
™ Deactivating the AF-Assist Beam
D suit images
You can deactivate the lamp that normaly lights up to help you focus.
when you press the shutter button halfway in low-light conditions,
Press the MENU button, choose [AF-
assist Bean) on the (fl tab, and then
choose (Of NEO)
To restore the orginal setting, repost this
process but choose [On]
™ Deactivating the Red-Eye Reduction Lamp
D suit images
You can deactivate the red-eye reduction lamp thet lights up to reduce
red-eye when the flash is used in lowight shots,
1 Access the [Flash Settings} screen.
e Press the MENU button, choose [Flash
Setungs} on he (A) tab, and then press.
the [@) button (2130).
2 Configure the setting.
‘© Choose (Red-Eye Lamp], and then
choose [Of] (£1130).
To restore the original settng, repeat this
process but choose [On]
™ Changing the Image Display Style after Shots
D Su images
You can change how long images are displayed and what information is
displayed immediately ater shooting
Changing the Image Display Period after Shots
1 Access the [Review image attr
shooting] screen
© Press the MENU) button, choose
[Review image after shooting] on the
tab, and then press the [@] button
is,
2 Configure the settings
Press ne LAW] buttons ortum he
{@) cia to cnoose (Display Time], Press
the (4)[»] buttons to choose the desired
pion
To retro the oigna seting,rpeatthis
process but choose [Qui]
Quick ‘Displays images only until you can shoot again.
sec, 4500. | Osplays images forthe specified time. Even while
zw the shots displayed, you can take another shot by
pressing the shutter button halfway again,
‘Displays images until you press the shutter button
Hoe away,
Of No image display aer shots
Betore Use
Basie Guide
1 Camora Basics,
3 Otner Shooting Modes.
4 P Mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
Inder
«ba
Customize shooting functions on the Bl] ta of the menu screen as
follows
For instuctions on menu functions, ses "Using the Menu Screen’
(30).
™ Deactivating the AF-Assist Beam
D suit images
You can deactivate the lamp that normaly lights up to help you focus.
when you press the shutter button halfway in low-light conditions,
Press the MENU button, choose [AF-
assist Bean) on the (fl tab, and then
choose (Of NEO)
To restore the orginal setting, repost this
process but choose [On]
™ Deactivating the Red-Eye Reduction Lamp
D suit images
You can deactivate the red-eye reduction lamp thet lights up to reduce
red-eye when the flash is used in lowight shots,
1 Access the [Flash Settings} screen.
e Press the MENU button, choose [Flash
Setungs} on he (A) tab, and then press.
the [@) button (2130).
2 Configure the setting.
‘© Choose (Red-Eye Lamp], and then
choose [Of] (£1130).
To restore the original settng, repeat this
process but choose [On]
™ Changing the Image Display Style after Shots
D Su images
You can change how long images are displayed and what information is
displayed immediately ater shooting
Changing the Image Display Period after Shots
1 Access the [Review image attr
shooting] screen
© Press the MENU) button, choose
[Review image after shooting] on the
tab, and then press the [@] button
is,
2 Configure the settings
Press ne LAW] buttons ortum he
{@) cia to cnoose (Display Time], Press
the (4)[»] buttons to choose the desired
pion
To retro the oigna seting,rpeatthis
process but choose [Qui]
Quick ‘Displays images only until you can shoot again.
sec, 4500. | Osplays images forthe specified time. Even while
zw the shots displayed, you can take another shot by
pressing the shutter button halfway again,
‘Displays images until you press the shutter button
Hoe away,
Of No image display aer shots
Betore Use
Basie Guide
1 Camora Basics,
3 Otner Shooting Modes.
4 P Mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
Inder
«ba
Changing the Screen Displayed after Shots Betore Use
Change the way images are displayed ater shots as follows.
nm " Basie Guide
1 Sot Display Time] to (2 sec,
(Se Be er Has is Le
2 Configure the settings.
Press the [al'w] buttons ortum the
(8) al to choose [Display nf] Press
the [ID] buttons to choose the desred
ophen
+ To estore the orignal seting, repeat his
process but choose (Of
1 Camora Basics,
3 Otner Shooting Modes.
4 P Mode
of Displays ony the image.
Detaled | Displays shooting details (2180) 5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
Q ~ menjorspiay Time (652s setto [Om or (ick. (Opa ¡6 Bartace Moe
Infos st [O and cannot be changed
+ By pressing me [W] buton while zn Image is displayed ater 7 WiFi Functions
shotng, you can swe the spay rfomaton, Note battre
settings Display nf] re nt changed, You can aso erase En
Images, by pressing te (E ute 8 Setting Mon
Accessories
10 Appendix
Inder
«ba
Change the way images are displayed ater shots as follows.
nm " Basie Guide
1 Sot Display Time] to (2 sec,
(Se Be er Has is Le
2 Configure the settings.
Press the [al'w] buttons ortum the
(8) al to choose [Display nf] Press
the [ID] buttons to choose the desred
ophen
+ To estore the orignal seting, repeat his
process but choose (Of
1 Camora Basics,
3 Otner Shooting Modes.
4 P Mode
of Displays ony the image.
Detaled | Displays shooting details (2180) 5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
Q ~ menjorspiay Time (652s setto [Om or (ick. (Opa ¡6 Bartace Moe
Infos st [O and cannot be changed
+ By pressing me [W] buton while zn Image is displayed ater 7 WiFi Functions
shotng, you can swe the spay rfomaton, Note battre
settings Display nf] re nt changed, You can aso erase En
Images, by pressing te (E ute 8 Setting Mon
Accessories
10 Appendix
Inder
«ba
Enjoying a Variety of Images from Each Boro Use
Shot (Creative Shot) asic uo
arphing specal eects andrecomposing the shot o emphasie ne
subject Sx sl Images are recorded ou ean capt 1 Canora asics
"vull st images win elects using camera determined songs
Enter [O4] mod aaa vos
Other Shooting Modes nn
atthe mode dalto (ON
2 Shoot
‘Shoot more effectively in various scenes, and recs e shuterbuton a he a
take shots enhanced with unique image effects or sm. As you shoot, the shutter sound is
dajedres times 5 TM and Choce
captured using special functions
pt g SP After the six images are displayed
nsuccesson, oy ere dspojed 6 Payback Modo
Sitaneoush for chou ho seconds
o keep the images displayed uni you a)
ress the shut
the (@) button. For ful
Is state, choose an image by
the (alld
) da, and then pre
tur to the original display, pr
MENU button. 10 Appendix
n halfway, press
splay in
8 Sowing Menu.
9 Accessories
‘Shooting wil take some me went as tres, butna tre En
camera steady nt e shutter sounds played tre times
‘The su mages are managed ngether asa group (NO.
‘Simutanecus play ofthe sx mages as shown n sep 21s only
avatate mediately aer you stock
Shot (Creative Shot) asic uo
arphing specal eects andrecomposing the shot o emphasie ne
subject Sx sl Images are recorded ou ean capt 1 Canora asics
"vull st images win elects using camera determined songs
Enter [O4] mod aaa vos
Other Shooting Modes nn
atthe mode dalto (ON
2 Shoot
‘Shoot more effectively in various scenes, and recs e shuterbuton a he a
take shots enhanced with unique image effects or sm. As you shoot, the shutter sound is
dajedres times 5 TM and Choce
captured using special functions
pt g SP After the six images are displayed
nsuccesson, oy ere dspojed 6 Payback Modo
Sitaneoush for chou ho seconds
o keep the images displayed uni you a)
ress the shut
the (@) button. For ful
Is state, choose an image by
the (alld
) da, and then pre
tur to the original display, pr
MENU button. 10 Appendix
n halfway, press
splay in
8 Sowing Menu.
9 Accessories
‘Shooting wil take some me went as tres, butna tre En
camera steady nt e shutter sounds played tre times
‘The su mages are managed ngether asa group (NO.
‘Simutanecus play ofthe sx mages as shown n sep 21s only
avatate mediately aer you stock
™ Choosing Effects
D Su Images
You can choose effects fr images captured in [Om] mode.
(© After choosing [O] mode, tum the 10)
ring to choose the effect.
Auto Al efits
BRE Images resemble ld photos
MMonochrome Images are generated in one color
& Special old, dstinctve-looking images
Natura Subdued, natura looking mages
Specific Scenes
Choose a mode matching the shocting scene, and the camera vil
‘automaticaly configure the setings for optimal shots.
1 Enter {SCN} mode.
+ Setthe mode dalto [SCN
2 Choose a shooting mode.
Press he (@) button, choose inthe
menu, and ten choose a shooting made
mm,
3 Shoot
® Shooting Portraits (Portrait)
> Sil images Po Movies
2 Take shots of people wth a softening
eect
E Shooting Evening Scenes without
Using a Tripod (Handheld NightScene)
D sill images
Beautiful shots of evening scenes or
portraits with evening scenery in the
background, without the need to hald the
camera very stil (as wth a ipod)
+ Asingle image is created by combining
Consecutive shots, reducing camera
shake and image noise.
Betore Use
Guide
1 Camera Basics,
2 Auto Mode
Hybrid Auto Mode
Inder
4 P Mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
D Su Images
You can choose effects fr images captured in [Om] mode.
(© After choosing [O] mode, tum the 10)
ring to choose the effect.
Auto Al efits
BRE Images resemble ld photos
MMonochrome Images are generated in one color
& Special old, dstinctve-looking images
Natura Subdued, natura looking mages
Specific Scenes
Choose a mode matching the shocting scene, and the camera vil
‘automaticaly configure the setings for optimal shots.
1 Enter {SCN} mode.
+ Setthe mode dalto [SCN
2 Choose a shooting mode.
Press he (@) button, choose inthe
menu, and ten choose a shooting made
mm,
3 Shoot
® Shooting Portraits (Portrait)
> Sil images Po Movies
2 Take shots of people wth a softening
eect
E Shooting Evening Scenes without
Using a Tripod (Handheld NightScene)
D sill images
Beautiful shots of evening scenes or
portraits with evening scenery in the
background, without the need to hald the
camera very stil (as wth a ipod)
+ Asingle image is created by combining
Consecutive shots, reducing camera
shake and image noise.
Betore Use
Guide
1 Camera Basics,
2 Auto Mode
Hybrid Auto Mode
Inder
4 P Mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
% Shooting Underwater (Underwater)
Pott images. D> Movies
e Natural-colored shots of sea Ife and
underwater scenery, when you use an
optional waterproof case (C1160).
‘© This mode can correct white balance and
match the effec of using a commercially
avaliable color-compensating fiter
(en.
$ Shooting with Snowy Backgrounds
(Snow)
>Si images De Movies
‘© Bright, natural-colored shots of people
against snowy backgrounds
38 Shooting Fireworks (Fireworks)
D Sil Images Do Movies
vid shets of reworks,
Subjects appear larger in (2 mode compared to are modes,
Inf ana rl mode, ss may ok gray because the 150
speed (APS) inreaseato sut the shooting conditions.
Because the camera shot continuous nl mos, holt
steady whle shooting
In fl move, excessive maten tur or tan shootngcenstions
may prevet you tom ottaning the desire results
In made, mounttne camera on a po or tae aer
measures to beep sl nd prevent camera shake. AGdtonal,
You shout set IS Mode] tor] when using atipod or other
means to secure the camera (91).
uen you use a tipod for evening scenes, shooting in {AUTO}
‘mode instead of ER mode wit gue beterresuts (94)
In mode, atnoug ro frames are asplayed when ya press
ne shuter bon hatvay optimal focus stil determine.
Betore Use
Basie Guide
1 Camora Basics,
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Mode
4 P Mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
Inder
«ba
Pott images. D> Movies
e Natural-colored shots of sea Ife and
underwater scenery, when you use an
optional waterproof case (C1160).
‘© This mode can correct white balance and
match the effec of using a commercially
avaliable color-compensating fiter
(en.
$ Shooting with Snowy Backgrounds
(Snow)
>Si images De Movies
‘© Bright, natural-colored shots of people
against snowy backgrounds
38 Shooting Fireworks (Fireworks)
D Sil Images Do Movies
vid shets of reworks,
Subjects appear larger in (2 mode compared to are modes,
Inf ana rl mode, ss may ok gray because the 150
speed (APS) inreaseato sut the shooting conditions.
Because the camera shot continuous nl mos, holt
steady whle shooting
In fl move, excessive maten tur or tan shootngcenstions
may prevet you tom ottaning the desire results
In made, mounttne camera on a po or tae aer
measures to beep sl nd prevent camera shake. AGdtonal,
You shout set IS Mode] tor] when using atipod or other
means to secure the camera (91).
uen you use a tipod for evening scenes, shooting in {AUTO}
‘mode instead of ER mode wit gue beterresuts (94)
In mode, atnoug ro frames are asplayed when ya press
ne shuter bon hatvay optimal focus stil determine.
Betore Use
Basie Guide
1 Camora Basics,
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Mode
4 P Mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
Inder
«ba
™ Using Functions for Underwater Shots
Shooting with an Underwater Focusing Range
D suit images
I focusing is dieu in [4] mode (£1155) witha focus range of LA]
sing a focus range designed for underwater shooting can ensure optimal
underwater shots
1 Configure the setting
‘© Folow stops 1-2 in “Specfe Scenes
(RSS) and choose I
+ Press ne [€] button, choose he desired
focus range (other press the (D)
buttons ortum the (0) da), end then
press the (@) button
2 shoot,
Focusing Range [Description
19 | Underwater [Tae close-ups of sea He, using te gta zoom for
Macro | even closer shots,
‘Avoid missing unexpacted underwater shooting
[20 | out |opporunties ren snooing sujets some distance
nay Especial efecto for monng subjects
MF [Matus |Focus on subjects manual (A6)
Refer to "Shooting Range” (£21196) for detals on he range of each
focus range
CD ing) mode, opicalzcomis satte maximum wide ange
+ Iféglmose se ot aglalzoom may cause mages to appear
ray se esoutons (ES)
+ nLSL mese, sis tose range mayna be tous In
tisease.ty sting focus ar D UA
+ Youcan aso conigure is seing by presing he 14) buon,
touching the dested focusing ange, and ten taxing again
Correcting White Balance
D> Still images P Movies.
‘White balance can be manual corrected in (4 mode (2255) This
adusiment can match the effect of using a commercially available color
compensating fier
1 Choose 4.
+ Follow stops 1 - 2in' Spec Scenes"
DES) ana choose (dl
2 Choose white balance.
+ Press the (@) button, and then choose
E inte menu
3 Adjust the setting.
© Tum the (O) rng to adust the correction
level for B and À and then press the (9)
button
Once the seting is complete, [Es
displayed
D
pepe)
(Serer yu ect ba en
À orense vue ata anon
Vin ec an a0 be mary carey ran
cion we one 0a (A) Bee tonne
e
Betore Use
Basie
Guide
1 Camora Basics
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Mode
4 Pode
5 Tv,Av.M and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
57
Shooting with an Underwater Focusing Range
D suit images
I focusing is dieu in [4] mode (£1155) witha focus range of LA]
sing a focus range designed for underwater shooting can ensure optimal
underwater shots
1 Configure the setting
‘© Folow stops 1-2 in “Specfe Scenes
(RSS) and choose I
+ Press ne [€] button, choose he desired
focus range (other press the (D)
buttons ortum the (0) da), end then
press the (@) button
2 shoot,
Focusing Range [Description
19 | Underwater [Tae close-ups of sea He, using te gta zoom for
Macro | even closer shots,
‘Avoid missing unexpacted underwater shooting
[20 | out |opporunties ren snooing sujets some distance
nay Especial efecto for monng subjects
MF [Matus |Focus on subjects manual (A6)
Refer to "Shooting Range” (£21196) for detals on he range of each
focus range
CD ing) mode, opicalzcomis satte maximum wide ange
+ Iféglmose se ot aglalzoom may cause mages to appear
ray se esoutons (ES)
+ nLSL mese, sis tose range mayna be tous In
tisease.ty sting focus ar D UA
+ Youcan aso conigure is seing by presing he 14) buon,
touching the dested focusing ange, and ten taxing again
Correcting White Balance
D> Still images P Movies.
‘White balance can be manual corrected in (4 mode (2255) This
adusiment can match the effect of using a commercially available color
compensating fier
1 Choose 4.
+ Follow stops 1 - 2in' Spec Scenes"
DES) ana choose (dl
2 Choose white balance.
+ Press the (@) button, and then choose
E inte menu
3 Adjust the setting.
© Tum the (O) rng to adust the correction
level for B and À and then press the (9)
button
Once the seting is complete, [Es
displayed
D
pepe)
(Serer yu ect ba en
À orense vue ata anon
Vin ec an a0 be mary carey ran
cion we one 0a (A) Bee tonne
e
Betore Use
Basie
Guide
1 Camora Basics
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Mode
4 Pode
5 Tv,Av.M and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
57
Image Effects (Creative Filters)
Add a variety of effets to images when shocting
1 Enter [0] mode.
© Set the mode dal to [Q)
2 Choose a shooting mode.
‘© Press the (8) button, choose [HR] in the.
menu, and then choose a shooting mode
(ies),
Shoot.
@ Shooting in Vivid Colors (Super Vivid)
stil images De Movies
Shots in ich, vivid colors.
IP Posterized Shots (Poster Effect)
DP Still images Do Movies
«© Shots that resemble an old poster or
iustration
A mess tings et sto mate
AS
™ Shooting High-Contrast Scenes
(High Dynamic Range)
D> suit images
Three consecutive mages are coptured a diferent brightness levels
‘each time you shoot, and the camera combines image areas wth optimal
brightness to create a singe image. This mode can reduce the washed.
out highlights and loss of detal in shadows that tend to occur in high-
contrast shots.
1 Choose IH.
+ Folow stes 1 2n'Image Efes
(Creative Filters)" (MASS) and choose
m
2 Shoot.
© Hold the camera steady as you shoot
When you press the shutter button al
the way down, the camera val take three
shots and combine them.
O sora
on ange are
Ovi eae cna ae nn um sono
ee ee
or stout te [om ane pod
uch
|
2 ete sao jus ox ago ae amer
Be
+ IND) may be displayed when you press the shutter button
Paty ra natu cs ater
oct er
Betore Use
Guide
1 Camora Basics,
2 Auto mee
Hybrid Auto Modo
Index
4 P Mode
5 Tan. m and C Modo
6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu,
9 Accessories
10 Apendix
4/»/9
Add a variety of effets to images when shocting
1 Enter [0] mode.
© Set the mode dal to [Q)
2 Choose a shooting mode.
‘© Press the (8) button, choose [HR] in the.
menu, and then choose a shooting mode
(ies),
Shoot.
@ Shooting in Vivid Colors (Super Vivid)
stil images De Movies
Shots in ich, vivid colors.
IP Posterized Shots (Poster Effect)
DP Still images Do Movies
«© Shots that resemble an old poster or
iustration
A mess tings et sto mate
AS
™ Shooting High-Contrast Scenes
(High Dynamic Range)
D> suit images
Three consecutive mages are coptured a diferent brightness levels
‘each time you shoot, and the camera combines image areas wth optimal
brightness to create a singe image. This mode can reduce the washed.
out highlights and loss of detal in shadows that tend to occur in high-
contrast shots.
1 Choose IH.
+ Folow stes 1 2n'Image Efes
(Creative Filters)" (MASS) and choose
m
2 Shoot.
© Hold the camera steady as you shoot
When you press the shutter button al
the way down, the camera val take three
shots and combine them.
O sora
on ange are
Ovi eae cna ae nn um sono
ee ee
or stout te [om ane pod
uch
|
2 ete sao jus ox ago ae amer
Be
+ IND) may be displayed when you press the shutter button
Paty ra natu cs ater
oct er
Betore Use
Guide
1 Camora Basics,
2 Auto mee
Hybrid Auto Modo
Index
4 P Mode
5 Tan. m and C Modo
6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu,
9 Accessories
10 Apendix
4/»/9
Adding Artistic Effects
™ Shooting with Faded Colors (Nostalgic)
‘© Follow steps 1-2 in Image Elfects
(Creative Fiters)"((1158) and choose
oR
‘© Tum the [O] rng to choose an efect
‘© Apreviewis shown of how your shot will
Lu look wah the efect appied
Naural Images are natural and organic
Art Standard — | Images resemble paintings, with subdued contrast
An Via Images resemble vidilustrtions.
Ar Bold Images resemble al paintings, wih bald edges
Images resemble old photos, wih bold edges and
‚At Embossed_| cari ambiance
D suit images Movies
This effect makes colors lock faded and images look weathered, as in ld
photographs, Choose from five effect levels.
1 Choose [8]
«© Fallow steps 1-2 in “Image Eifecis
(Creative Fiters) (ASS) and choose
®
2 Choose an effect level.
© Tum the (O] rng to choose an effect
level
+ Apreview is shown of how your shot will
Lock the efect applied.
3 shoot.
© > tono sone et nas mae seas an
eset
Dra sag sae tats mas ake
em nee mn ne ee
sere a
remet rn oer
Betore Use
Basie Guide
1 Camora Basics
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Mode
4 P Mode
—
9 Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
59
™ Shooting with Faded Colors (Nostalgic)
‘© Follow steps 1-2 in Image Elfects
(Creative Fiters)"((1158) and choose
oR
‘© Tum the [O] rng to choose an efect
‘© Apreviewis shown of how your shot will
Lu look wah the efect appied
Naural Images are natural and organic
Art Standard — | Images resemble paintings, with subdued contrast
An Via Images resemble vidilustrtions.
Ar Bold Images resemble al paintings, wih bald edges
Images resemble old photos, wih bold edges and
‚At Embossed_| cari ambiance
D suit images Movies
This effect makes colors lock faded and images look weathered, as in ld
photographs, Choose from five effect levels.
1 Choose [8]
«© Fallow steps 1-2 in “Image Eifecis
(Creative Fiters) (ASS) and choose
®
2 Choose an effect level.
© Tum the (O] rng to choose an effect
level
+ Apreview is shown of how your shot will
Lock the efect applied.
3 shoot.
© > tono sone et nas mae seas an
eset
Dra sag sae tats mas ake
em nee mn ne ee
sere a
remet rn oer
Betore Use
Basie Guide
1 Camora Basics
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Mode
4 P Mode
—
9 Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
59
™ Shooting with a Fish-Eye Lens Effect
(Fish-Eye Effect)
™ Shots Resembling Miniature Models
(Miniature Effect)
D sui images
‘Shoot in the distorting effect of a she lens,
1 Choose [a
‘© Follow steps 1-2 in Image Effects
ive Fiters] (ASS) and choose
ey WH) 2 Choose an ettect level
‘© Tum the (O) ring to choose an effect
Toe
«Apres sown of haw our shot
à fk the fe pied
3 Shoot.
D © rior sone ests est tomate are yt
run
Sil images Po Movies
(Creates the effect of a miniature model, by bluring image areas above
‘and below your selected area,
You can also make movies that look Ike scenes in miniatura models by
choosing the playback speed before the movie is recorded. People and
objects in the scene wil move quickly during playback Note that sounds
not recorded
1 Choose [af
e Fallow steps 1 — 2 in ‘Image Effects
{Creative Fiters) (SS) end choose
18)
+ Awhite frame is displayed, indicating the
image area that wil nat be blurred
2 Choose the area to keep in focus.
© Press the [w] button
‘© Move the zoom lever to resize the frame,
‘and tum the (8) dial to move.
3 For movies, choose the movie
playback speed
+ Tum the (Q} rng to choose the speed
Æ Return to the shooting screen and
shoot
«© Press the (8) button to retum to the
shooing screen, and then shoot
Betore Use
Guide
1 Camera Basics,
2 Auto Mode
Hybrid Auto Mode
4 Pode
5 Tv,Av.M and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
(Fish-Eye Effect)
™ Shots Resembling Miniature Models
(Miniature Effect)
D sui images
‘Shoot in the distorting effect of a she lens,
1 Choose [a
‘© Follow steps 1-2 in Image Effects
ive Fiters] (ASS) and choose
ey WH) 2 Choose an ettect level
‘© Tum the (O) ring to choose an effect
Toe
«Apres sown of haw our shot
à fk the fe pied
3 Shoot.
D © rior sone ests est tomate are yt
run
Sil images Po Movies
(Creates the effect of a miniature model, by bluring image areas above
‘and below your selected area,
You can also make movies that look Ike scenes in miniatura models by
choosing the playback speed before the movie is recorded. People and
objects in the scene wil move quickly during playback Note that sounds
not recorded
1 Choose [af
e Fallow steps 1 — 2 in ‘Image Effects
{Creative Fiters) (SS) end choose
18)
+ Awhite frame is displayed, indicating the
image area that wil nat be blurred
2 Choose the area to keep in focus.
© Press the [w] button
‘© Move the zoom lever to resize the frame,
‘and tum the (8) dial to move.
3 For movies, choose the movie
playback speed
+ Tum the (Q} rng to choose the speed
Æ Return to the shooting screen and
shoot
«© Press the (8) button to retum to the
shooing screen, and then shoot
Betore Use
Guide
1 Camera Basics,
2 Auto Mode
Hybrid Auto Mode
4 Pode
5 Tv,Av.M and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
Playback Speed and Estimated Playback Time
(for One-Minute Clips)
™ Shooting with a Toy Camera Effect
(Toy Camera Effect)
Speed Playback Time.
El ‘Approx. 12 sec.
A ‘Approx. 6 sec.
EN ‘Approx. 3 sec
Di a
a
THESES encoun
Den
Y + Tosmten me onertaton ofthe rame to verte, press the 141]
sans dep Tore Fame to hrortaoneraen,
Dress ff oon
+ Tomovette fome wnent sin hrzort orton, ress he
LAIT ts, di mate he fame when isin vei
oferta, esse batons
+ Holang te camera veteaywichage the tartine
trae
+ Move rage uty at a spectra 014 an) at
an aspect eo AS) These uty stings cnt
be tare.
+ Youcanalso move be frame by touching ocraggng across the
D sui images
"This efect makes images resemble shts froma toy camera by vignetting
(darker, blurred image comers) and changing the overall color.
1 Choose (CB.
«© Fallow steps 1-2 in “Image ects
(Creative Filters)" (SS) end choose
2 Choose a color tone.
+ Tum the (Q} rng to choose a color tone.
+ Apreview is shown of how your shot will
lookwth the efect applied.
3 Shoot.
Standard | Shots resemble toy camera mages.
‘Warm | Images have a warmer tone than with [Standard]
Cool Images have a cooler tone than with [Standard]
(© > toro somets nas a mae sue yas an
ses
Betore Use
Guide
1 Camera Basics,
2 Auto Mode
Hybrid Auto Mode
4 Pode
5 Tv,Av.M and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
61
(for One-Minute Clips)
™ Shooting with a Toy Camera Effect
(Toy Camera Effect)
Speed Playback Time.
El ‘Approx. 12 sec.
A ‘Approx. 6 sec.
EN ‘Approx. 3 sec
Di a
a
THESES encoun
Den
Y + Tosmten me onertaton ofthe rame to verte, press the 141]
sans dep Tore Fame to hrortaoneraen,
Dress ff oon
+ Tomovette fome wnent sin hrzort orton, ress he
LAIT ts, di mate he fame when isin vei
oferta, esse batons
+ Holang te camera veteaywichage the tartine
trae
+ Move rage uty at a spectra 014 an) at
an aspect eo AS) These uty stings cnt
be tare.
+ Youcanalso move be frame by touching ocraggng across the
D sui images
"This efect makes images resemble shts froma toy camera by vignetting
(darker, blurred image comers) and changing the overall color.
1 Choose (CB.
«© Fallow steps 1-2 in “Image ects
(Creative Filters)" (SS) end choose
2 Choose a color tone.
+ Tum the (Q} rng to choose a color tone.
+ Apreview is shown of how your shot will
lookwth the efect applied.
3 Shoot.
Standard | Shots resemble toy camera mages.
‘Warm | Images have a warmer tone than with [Standard]
Cool Images have a cooler tone than with [Standard]
(© > toro somets nas a mae sue yas an
ses
Betore Use
Guide
1 Camera Basics,
2 Auto Mode
Hybrid Auto Mode
4 Pode
5 Tv,Av.M and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
61
™ Making Subjects Stand Out (Background Defocus)
™ Shooting with a Soft Focus Effect
D Su Images
You can shoot subjects so that they stand out from the background.
Two consecutive images are captured wth settings optimized for
background defocus. The background is defocused through lens effects
‘and Subject and scene based image processing,
1 Choose [#]
‘© Follow steps 1 - 2in ‘Image Effects.
Gute Filters)" (P1158) and choose
ie
2 shoot.
‘© Hold the camera steady as you shoot
“Two consecutive images are captured
‘when you press the shutter button al the
way down,
+ Ablinking [icon indicates thatthe
images could not be processed.
Di ica
Rae ana
Dramas mes any coran
ee EO,
Soon
donar
+ Toagustthe effectievel, turn te (() ing.
D suit mages
This function alons you to shoot images a if a sat focus fte were
attachedto the camera. You can adustthe effect vel as desired
1 Choose [2]
«© Fallow steps 1-2 in “Image Eifecis
(Creative Filters)" (1158) and choose
quae 2 Choose an effect level.
© Tum the [O] rng to choose an effect
level
+ Apreview is shown of how your shot will
à lackwah the efect applied.
3 shoot.
D > ryainosone etna st time ey canine
Pe
Betore Use
Basie
Guide
1 Camora Basics
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Mode
4 Pode
5 Tv,Av.M and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
™ Shooting with a Soft Focus Effect
D Su Images
You can shoot subjects so that they stand out from the background.
Two consecutive images are captured wth settings optimized for
background defocus. The background is defocused through lens effects
‘and Subject and scene based image processing,
1 Choose [#]
‘© Follow steps 1 - 2in ‘Image Effects.
Gute Filters)" (P1158) and choose
ie
2 shoot.
‘© Hold the camera steady as you shoot
“Two consecutive images are captured
‘when you press the shutter button al the
way down,
+ Ablinking [icon indicates thatthe
images could not be processed.
Di ica
Rae ana
Dramas mes any coran
ee EO,
Soon
donar
+ Toagustthe effectievel, turn te (() ing.
D suit mages
This function alons you to shoot images a if a sat focus fte were
attachedto the camera. You can adustthe effect vel as desired
1 Choose [2]
«© Fallow steps 1-2 in “Image Eifecis
(Creative Filters)" (1158) and choose
quae 2 Choose an effect level.
© Tum the [O] rng to choose an effect
level
+ Apreview is shown of how your shot will
à lackwah the efect applied.
3 shoot.
D > ryainosone etna st time ey canine
Pe
Betore Use
Basie
Guide
1 Camora Basics
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Mode
4 Pode
5 Tv,Av.M and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
™ Shooting in Monochrome
D> Still images D> Movies
‘Shoot images in black nd white, sepia, or bue enduits
1 Choose ita
e Follow steps 1-2 in Image Effects
(Creative Fiters) (MASS) and choose
a
2 Choose a color tone.
‘© Tum the (O) rng to choose a color tone
‘© Apreviewis shown of how your shot will
Tookwah the effect applied
3 Shoot
BW] Black and white shots
‘Sepia | Sepia tone shots,
Blue | Blue ond white shots,
for Other Purpos
™ Auto Shooting after Face Detection (Smart Shutter]
D Su images
Auto Shooting after Smile Detection
D Su images
The camera shoots automaticaly after detecting a smile, even without you
pressing the shutter button
1 Choose l'E]
«© Folow steps 1 2in "Specific Scenes!
(G25) and choose i. and hen
press the [¥] button
+ Press the [AD] buttons or tum the (@)
Sa to choose [end then press the
(9) buton
The camera now enters shooting standby
mode, nd [Smile Detection on]
displayed
2 Aim the camera at a person.
‘© Each time the camera detects a smile, t
wil shoct aftr the lamp lights up.
+ To pause smile detection, press the
{dl button, Press the (4] button again to
resume detection
© + entes nens ning oe ane
Beer
Betore Use
Guide
1 Camera Basics,
2 Auto Mode
Hybrid Auto Mode
4 Pode
5 Tv,Av.M and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
D> Still images D> Movies
‘Shoot images in black nd white, sepia, or bue enduits
1 Choose ita
e Follow steps 1-2 in Image Effects
(Creative Fiters) (MASS) and choose
a
2 Choose a color tone.
‘© Tum the (O) rng to choose a color tone
‘© Apreviewis shown of how your shot will
Tookwah the effect applied
3 Shoot
BW] Black and white shots
‘Sepia | Sepia tone shots,
Blue | Blue ond white shots,
for Other Purpos
™ Auto Shooting after Face Detection (Smart Shutter]
D Su images
Auto Shooting after Smile Detection
D Su images
The camera shoots automaticaly after detecting a smile, even without you
pressing the shutter button
1 Choose l'E]
«© Folow steps 1 2in "Specific Scenes!
(G25) and choose i. and hen
press the [¥] button
+ Press the [AD] buttons or tum the (@)
Sa to choose [end then press the
(9) buton
The camera now enters shooting standby
mode, nd [Smile Detection on]
displayed
2 Aim the camera at a person.
‘© Each time the camera detects a smile, t
wil shoct aftr the lamp lights up.
+ To pause smile detection, press the
{dl button, Press the (4] button again to
resume detection
© + entes nens ning oe ane
Beer
Betore Use
Guide
1 Camera Basics,
2 Auto Mode
Hybrid Auto Mode
4 Pode
5 Tv,Av.M and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
D > Youcmans mas ea oyes stern
À eme ondo rey ee
ican me pen noe cota a
ane
«etn une at, ee te ators
‘after choosing (Ein step 1. [Bink Detection] (2251) is only
arena!
Y) + vou canaso chose ne racing mo by cnos in steps
1201 Specte Scenes (9) touring (IB) to access
tne sting sren, mung RE) ana ento e same
na
Using the Wink Selt-Timer
D Su Images
‘Aim the camera at a person and press the shutter button al the way
‘down, The camera wil shoot about two seconds after a wink is detected
1 Choose [¢3.
+ Folow stops 1-2 in Specie Scenes
(0055) and choose [a end then
j press te (vi button
+ Press he QD} buttons or tum he 16)
dial to choose (EN, ondthen press te
(Olbuton
2 Compose the shot and press the
shutter button halfway.
On the screen, touch the face ofthe
person who wil wink to choose t (Touch
AF), and then press the shutter button
halway.
‘© Make sure a green frame is displayed
around the face ofthe person who wil ink
EE
3 Press the shutter button all the way
down,
‘© The camera now enters shooting standby
mode, and [Wink to take picture] is
splayed
e The amp binks and the selftimer sound
is played.
4 Face the camera and wink
< The camera il shot about wo seconds
ter detecting vank bythe person
tose face inade the fame
+ To cancel shootng ater you have
nageredtne se mor ress the
MENU bin
Inte winks at detected wink agan slowly and debera
‘winking may notbe detected eyes are obscured by ar, ana,
or glasses,
Closing and opening bot eyes at once wil aso be detected as
wink
Inwinkng isnot detected, te camera wil shoot bout 15 seconds
tate,
Tochange ne number ct shots, press ne LA] butons
ater enoosng 3m sep 1. ink Detector] (51) i ny
avataie forthe tna shot
Ito oneisin te shootng area when the shuter btn Is
presse ne way down, the camera wil shock tra person
rer the shooting area ae winks,
You can also choose the shooting mode by choosing ign steps.
1-2 of Specific Scenes” (55), touching (BIA) to access
‘the setting screen, touching (€], and then touching the same
cano ER
Betore Use
Basie
Guide
1 Camora Basics
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Mode
4 Pode
5 Tv,Av.M and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
À eme ondo rey ee
ican me pen noe cota a
ane
«etn une at, ee te ators
‘after choosing (Ein step 1. [Bink Detection] (2251) is only
arena!
Y) + vou canaso chose ne racing mo by cnos in steps
1201 Specte Scenes (9) touring (IB) to access
tne sting sren, mung RE) ana ento e same
na
Using the Wink Selt-Timer
D Su Images
‘Aim the camera at a person and press the shutter button al the way
‘down, The camera wil shoot about two seconds after a wink is detected
1 Choose [¢3.
+ Folow stops 1-2 in Specie Scenes
(0055) and choose [a end then
j press te (vi button
+ Press he QD} buttons or tum he 16)
dial to choose (EN, ondthen press te
(Olbuton
2 Compose the shot and press the
shutter button halfway.
On the screen, touch the face ofthe
person who wil wink to choose t (Touch
AF), and then press the shutter button
halway.
‘© Make sure a green frame is displayed
around the face ofthe person who wil ink
EE
3 Press the shutter button all the way
down,
‘© The camera now enters shooting standby
mode, and [Wink to take picture] is
splayed
e The amp binks and the selftimer sound
is played.
4 Face the camera and wink
< The camera il shot about wo seconds
ter detecting vank bythe person
tose face inade the fame
+ To cancel shootng ater you have
nageredtne se mor ress the
MENU bin
Inte winks at detected wink agan slowly and debera
‘winking may notbe detected eyes are obscured by ar, ana,
or glasses,
Closing and opening bot eyes at once wil aso be detected as
wink
Inwinkng isnot detected, te camera wil shoot bout 15 seconds
tate,
Tochange ne number ct shots, press ne LA] butons
ater enoosng 3m sep 1. ink Detector] (51) i ny
avataie forthe tna shot
Ito oneisin te shootng area when the shuter btn Is
presse ne way down, the camera wil shock tra person
rer the shooting area ae winks,
You can also choose the shooting mode by choosing ign steps.
1-2 of Specific Scenes” (55), touching (BIA) to access
‘the setting screen, touching (€], and then touching the same
cano ER
Betore Use
Basie
Guide
1 Camora Basics
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Mode
4 Pode
5 Tv,Av.M and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
Using the Face Self-Timer
D suit images
‘The camera wil shoot about two seconds after detecting thatthe face of
another person (such as the photographer) has entered the shooting area
184). This is useful when including yourself in group photos or similar
shots,
1 Choose [e2}.
‘© Follow steps 1 - 2 in ‘Specific Scenes’
(C2455) and choose (e, and then
press the (+) button,
‘© Press the [4][P] buttons or tum the (6)
dial to choose (I, and then press the
[8 button
2 Compose the shot and press the
shutter button halfway.
‘© Make sure a green frame is displayed
‘around the face you focus on and white
frames around other faces,
3 Press the shutter button al the way
down.
+ The camera now enters shooting standby
mode, and [Look straight at camera to
Stat count dan] splayed
The lam binks andthe so-mer sound
isplayed
44 Join the subjects in the shooting
‘area and look at the camera,
Mer the camera detects anew face, the
lamp binking and sel-imer sound wil
speed up. (When he flash res, the lamp
wi remain it) About two seconds later,
the camera al shoot
+ To cancel shooting after you have
triggered the sei-imer, press the
(MENU) button
TS
hosting area the camera wil shoot bout 15 seconds later
+ Tochange ne number al hats, press ne [AV] butons
ater choosing 3m step 1. Birk Detector] AS) is onty
avatate for Oe Ia het
You can 350 choose tre shooting mode by choosing iin steps
1 ~20t"Specte Scenes (FAS), touring (AE access
the sting screen touching [ano ten touching te same
‘option or EEE
Betore Use
Basie Guide
1 Camora Basics
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
4 Pode
5 Tv,Av.M and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
D suit images
‘The camera wil shoot about two seconds after detecting thatthe face of
another person (such as the photographer) has entered the shooting area
184). This is useful when including yourself in group photos or similar
shots,
1 Choose [e2}.
‘© Follow steps 1 - 2 in ‘Specific Scenes’
(C2455) and choose (e, and then
press the (+) button,
‘© Press the [4][P] buttons or tum the (6)
dial to choose (I, and then press the
[8 button
2 Compose the shot and press the
shutter button halfway.
‘© Make sure a green frame is displayed
‘around the face you focus on and white
frames around other faces,
3 Press the shutter button al the way
down.
+ The camera now enters shooting standby
mode, and [Look straight at camera to
Stat count dan] splayed
The lam binks andthe so-mer sound
isplayed
44 Join the subjects in the shooting
‘area and look at the camera,
Mer the camera detects anew face, the
lamp binking and sel-imer sound wil
speed up. (When he flash res, the lamp
wi remain it) About two seconds later,
the camera al shoot
+ To cancel shooting after you have
triggered the sei-imer, press the
(MENU) button
TS
hosting area the camera wil shoot bout 15 seconds later
+ Tochange ne number al hats, press ne [AV] butons
ater choosing 3m step 1. Birk Detector] AS) is onty
avatate for Oe Ia het
You can 350 choose tre shooting mode by choosing iin steps
1 ~20t"Specte Scenes (FAS), touring (AE access
the sting screen touching [ano ten touching te same
‘option or EEE
Betore Use
Basie Guide
1 Camora Basics
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
4 Pode
5 Tv,Av.M and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
™ Shooting Starry Skies (Star)
‘Shooting People against Starry Skies (Star Portrait)
5 Have the person stay still until the rs
lamp blinks
The person yeu ar shooting shouldstay ASIE
sill until te lamp blinks three tes after
D suit Images
Capture beautful shots of people agains stay skies. After inital firing
the fash to capture the person, the camera shoots twce wahout flash,
The three images are combined into a single image and processed to
male the stars more prominent.
For details on the flash range, see “Flash Range” (1196).
4 Choose (68)
Folow steps 1-2 in'Specific Scenes’
(G55) and choose [Band then
press the [w] button
‘© Press the [QD] buttons or turn the (6)
dal to choose (BI, and then press the
(@)button
Zoom is setto maximum wide ange and
Cannot be adjusted.
2 Raise the flash.
‘© Move the [$] switch
secure the camera,
‘© Mount the camera on atripod or take
other measures to keep itil.
4 Shoot.
‘© Press the shutter button. The flash fires
as the camera takes the fst shot
The second and third shots are now
taken, without fing the flash,
the third she, which may take up to about
two seconds.
+ Allthe shots are combinedto create a
‘ingle image, 1 Camora Basics
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Mode
ú
(O + nte soc constan mages may tea 4 Fée
nes
DRE
5 Tv.Av.M and C Modo
processes the Images. (6 Playback Modo.
+ Toavoi luny shots, make sure te person you shootin steps
4 -Sstays si 7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
Inder
‘Shooting People against Starry Skies (Star Portrait)
5 Have the person stay still until the rs
lamp blinks
The person yeu ar shooting shouldstay ASIE
sill until te lamp blinks three tes after
D suit Images
Capture beautful shots of people agains stay skies. After inital firing
the fash to capture the person, the camera shoots twce wahout flash,
The three images are combined into a single image and processed to
male the stars more prominent.
For details on the flash range, see “Flash Range” (1196).
4 Choose (68)
Folow steps 1-2 in'Specific Scenes’
(G55) and choose [Band then
press the [w] button
‘© Press the [QD] buttons or turn the (6)
dal to choose (BI, and then press the
(@)button
Zoom is setto maximum wide ange and
Cannot be adjusted.
2 Raise the flash.
‘© Move the [$] switch
secure the camera,
‘© Mount the camera on atripod or take
other measures to keep itil.
4 Shoot.
‘© Press the shutter button. The flash fires
as the camera takes the fst shot
The second and third shots are now
taken, without fing the flash,
the third she, which may take up to about
two seconds.
+ Allthe shots are combinedto create a
‘ingle image, 1 Camora Basics
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Mode
ú
(O + nte soc constan mages may tea 4 Fée
nes
DRE
5 Tv.Av.M and C Modo
processes the Images. (6 Playback Modo.
+ Toavoi luny shots, make sure te person you shootin steps
4 -Sstays si 7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
Inder
Foreaser viewing. ty choosing MENU >) ab > [art
Display > On 292) before shooting
Toagustsioject nginess, ty changng the ash exposure
compensaton (as)
Toagustbackgaund riginess, ty changing te exposure
compensaton (TA). However, images may nat look as
expected under some shoot conaors, andthe person should
stay sii steps 4-5 which may take upto abou 15 seconds
‘Tocapture more stars ad right stright, choose MENU
(B20) > tab» Star Porrat Setngs] > [Star Vis
> [Prominert] However, images may no lok as expected under
Some shoeing canons, ande person snau stay sin
steps -5, wich may take pto about a seconds,
To make stars brighter choose MENU (E1130) » EM tab >
[Sta Emphasis] > [Snap] To emphasze te rt stars ina
Stary shy, et [Star Emphasis to [Sat] Tis setting can produce
eye-catching sos by enlarging bright stars while de emprasizing
mer sts. To sable stro processing, select om,
Yu can als choose the shocèng made by choosing fn steps
1-201°Spech Scenes" (NS) touching (IA to access
the seting screen, touching, andren toucring te same
Shooting Night Scenes under Starry Skies (Star Nightscape)
D suit images
Capture impressive shots of stay skies above night scenes. Staright in
the image is automatically enhanced, making stary shies look beautiful
À Choose (MN.
‘© Follow steps 1 ~ 2in ‘Specific Scenes
1055) and choose IE, and then
press the ['w] button,
‘© Press the (4)[D] buttons or tum the (0)
‘dato choose (BN) and then press the
(8 button
‘© Zoom is set to maximum wide angle and
cannot be adjusted
2 Secure the camera.
‘© Mount the camera on atripod or take
ther measures to keep t stil and
prevent camera shake
3 shoot.
(D © Ther unnenaaayneryoucan no aan, as e canta
ee ne map
Betore Use
Basie Guide
1 Camora Basics
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
4 Pode
5 Tv,Av.M and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
67
Display > On 292) before shooting
Toagustsioject nginess, ty changng the ash exposure
compensaton (as)
Toagustbackgaund riginess, ty changing te exposure
compensaton (TA). However, images may nat look as
expected under some shoot conaors, andthe person should
stay sii steps 4-5 which may take upto abou 15 seconds
‘Tocapture more stars ad right stright, choose MENU
(B20) > tab» Star Porrat Setngs] > [Star Vis
> [Prominert] However, images may no lok as expected under
Some shoeing canons, ande person snau stay sin
steps -5, wich may take pto about a seconds,
To make stars brighter choose MENU (E1130) » EM tab >
[Sta Emphasis] > [Snap] To emphasze te rt stars ina
Stary shy, et [Star Emphasis to [Sat] Tis setting can produce
eye-catching sos by enlarging bright stars while de emprasizing
mer sts. To sable stro processing, select om,
Yu can als choose the shocèng made by choosing fn steps
1-201°Spech Scenes" (NS) touching (IA to access
the seting screen, touching, andren toucring te same
Shooting Night Scenes under Starry Skies (Star Nightscape)
D suit images
Capture impressive shots of stay skies above night scenes. Staright in
the image is automatically enhanced, making stary shies look beautiful
À Choose (MN.
‘© Follow steps 1 ~ 2in ‘Specific Scenes
1055) and choose IE, and then
press the ['w] button,
‘© Press the (4)[D] buttons or tum the (0)
‘dato choose (BN) and then press the
(8 button
‘© Zoom is set to maximum wide angle and
cannot be adjusted
2 Secure the camera.
‘© Mount the camera on atripod or take
ther measures to keep t stil and
prevent camera shake
3 shoot.
(D © Ther unnenaaayneryoucan no aan, as e canta
ee ne map
Betore Use
Basie Guide
1 Camora Basics
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
4 Pode
5 Tv,Av.M and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
67
7 2 Specify the duration ofthe shooting ete
+ Farc owing ty chovsng MENU » EM > Wire un
Dipay > (On RE) bare ocn
+ Tome taster choose MENU (20) > ¡E > + Tum the (0) ring to choose the shooting Basic Guide
(Sta Emphas > Sha} 1 enphasze re bight stars na uration
sly st[StrEmphas to Sot), Ms sting can price
Sen 3 saree canes. JE
Simmer star, To Seale trig procesa, et [OF ‘© Maunt the camera cn a tipod or take
+ Ty swteing manual ete mod (Do mere nette, her measures to keep teil. 1 camera Bases
spect te focal postion before song.
4 Shoot. 2 fue Modo
Hybrid Auto Mode
7 + Press the shutter button le way
AY) + oucan ao emose ne sactng mot by choosing Bn tens dom. Bus) is dsplayedbney, end 3 E
1 =2of Specie Scenes (246) touerng (IBA to access then shooting begins
the sing seen. wur BB, angtrentoacng te same © Do not mera while shoctin
ini nn iB, 0 Do not distur the camera while shocing TE
am: + To cancel shooting, pres the shutter
button al he way down again, Note a
that cancelation may take upto about Bir ALM mec Hose
‘Shooting Star Trails (Star Trails) 60 seconds
D> Still Images ¡6 Bartace Modo
ats 7 , rss + Hine cameraruns ot batty pones, shooting tops anda
Eee evento ic (Draco pr y e —
Seal age Ala dome sa spaedendnumer tan 7
the camera shoots continuously. À shooting session can last up to about ae
Aou Gack ebay va avon + Tawa yo Ln ct oar se ame 8 sorgo
1 Choose (A. 9 Accessories
e Folow steps 1- 2m "Specific Scenes“
(C055) and choose (BH), and then A + Feccaser eng wy cnoosing MENU » IE > pure
press the fw] button spay» (Or Bsa vete song 10 Appondix
E un = Trysting manual to mage (AS!) mor accurately
pop rs oe spect te focal postion before soc i
(0) buton
+ Zoom is setto maximum wide ange and a
camot be adusted V5 + Youcan aso choose me nachngmose y choosing m tens
lr ir a
tne stig ren, cn N anatnen omg same |
oon or ER Lap
+ Farc owing ty chovsng MENU » EM > Wire un
Dipay > (On RE) bare ocn
+ Tome taster choose MENU (20) > ¡E > + Tum the (0) ring to choose the shooting Basic Guide
(Sta Emphas > Sha} 1 enphasze re bight stars na uration
sly st[StrEmphas to Sot), Ms sting can price
Sen 3 saree canes. JE
Simmer star, To Seale trig procesa, et [OF ‘© Maunt the camera cn a tipod or take
+ Ty swteing manual ete mod (Do mere nette, her measures to keep teil. 1 camera Bases
spect te focal postion before song.
4 Shoot. 2 fue Modo
Hybrid Auto Mode
7 + Press the shutter button le way
AY) + oucan ao emose ne sactng mot by choosing Bn tens dom. Bus) is dsplayedbney, end 3 E
1 =2of Specie Scenes (246) touerng (IBA to access then shooting begins
the sing seen. wur BB, angtrentoacng te same © Do not mera while shoctin
ini nn iB, 0 Do not distur the camera while shocing TE
am: + To cancel shooting, pres the shutter
button al he way down again, Note a
that cancelation may take upto about Bir ALM mec Hose
‘Shooting Star Trails (Star Trails) 60 seconds
D> Still Images ¡6 Bartace Modo
ats 7 , rss + Hine cameraruns ot batty pones, shooting tops anda
Eee evento ic (Draco pr y e —
Seal age Ala dome sa spaedendnumer tan 7
the camera shoots continuously. À shooting session can last up to about ae
Aou Gack ebay va avon + Tawa yo Ln ct oar se ame 8 sorgo
1 Choose (A. 9 Accessories
e Folow steps 1- 2m "Specific Scenes“
(C055) and choose (BH), and then A + Feccaser eng wy cnoosing MENU » IE > pure
press the fw] button spay» (Or Bsa vete song 10 Appondix
E un = Trysting manual to mage (AS!) mor accurately
pop rs oe spect te focal postion before soc i
(0) buton
+ Zoom is setto maximum wide ange and a
camot be adusted V5 + Youcan aso choose me nachngmose y choosing m tens
lr ir a
tne stig ren, cn N anatnen omg same |
oon or ER Lap
Shooting Movies of Star Movement (Star Time-Lapse Movie)
Pe Movies
By recording a time-lapse movie that combines images shot a a specified
interval, you can create movies wth fast-moving tars. You can adust the
shooting interval and recording duration as needed
Note that each session takes along time, and requires many shots, Check
the battery level and memory card space in advance.
1 Choose ft.
‘© Folow steps 1-2 in" Speie Scenes
(C85) and choose [BB ansthen
press te [y button
Press the QI buttons or tun he (@)
dil to choose (4, andten press the
(@}buton
+ Zoom is setto maximum wide ange and
cannot be adusted
2 Configure movie settings.
‘© Press the [A] button
‘© Press the [a]'w] buttons or tum the (9)
dialto choose an item. Choose the desired
‘option by pressing the (4){p] buttons, and
then press the [MENU] button,
3 Secure the camera.
‘© Mount the camera on atripod or take
other measures to keep & il.
Æ Check the brightness.
‘© Press the shutter button allthe way down
to shoot a single stil image.
‘© Switch to Playback mode (1103) and
check image brightness.
To adust brightness, tum the exposure
compensstion dal and change the
exposure level, Check brightness again
by taking ancther shot
5 Shoot.
«© Press the movie tutton [Busy] is
displayed brief, and then shooting
begins.
Do not disturb the camera while shooting
+ To cancel shooting, press the movie
button again, Note that cancelation may.
take up to about 60 seconds.
+ The camera operates in Eco mode
(£0153) while shooting.
Tem Options pais
Choose move effects, such
ers sara | sr
75sec, 30sec, | Choose the interval between
Snaintenal | 3 min each shot.
= ‘Choose the movie frame
Frame Rate BR erg
(Choose the length of the
80 in. 90 min
ie | Oe recording session, To record
shooting time: | aaa until the battery runs out,
choose (United)
Estimated playback time based on shooting interval and frame rate (for a
‘one-hour session)
Intewval between Shots [Frame Rate Playback Time.
15sec 3 16 sec
15 sec. E Bec
30 sec. RB B sec.
20 sec. E] 4sec
mn. = 4 sec,
mi E] 2500
Betore Use
Basic Guido
1 Camera Basics,
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Mode
4 Pode
9 Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
69
Pe Movies
By recording a time-lapse movie that combines images shot a a specified
interval, you can create movies wth fast-moving tars. You can adust the
shooting interval and recording duration as needed
Note that each session takes along time, and requires many shots, Check
the battery level and memory card space in advance.
1 Choose ft.
‘© Folow steps 1-2 in" Speie Scenes
(C85) and choose [BB ansthen
press te [y button
Press the QI buttons or tun he (@)
dil to choose (4, andten press the
(@}buton
+ Zoom is setto maximum wide ange and
cannot be adusted
2 Configure movie settings.
‘© Press the [A] button
‘© Press the [a]'w] buttons or tum the (9)
dialto choose an item. Choose the desired
‘option by pressing the (4){p] buttons, and
then press the [MENU] button,
3 Secure the camera.
‘© Mount the camera on atripod or take
other measures to keep & il.
Æ Check the brightness.
‘© Press the shutter button allthe way down
to shoot a single stil image.
‘© Switch to Playback mode (1103) and
check image brightness.
To adust brightness, tum the exposure
compensstion dal and change the
exposure level, Check brightness again
by taking ancther shot
5 Shoot.
«© Press the movie tutton [Busy] is
displayed brief, and then shooting
begins.
Do not disturb the camera while shooting
+ To cancel shooting, press the movie
button again, Note that cancelation may.
take up to about 60 seconds.
+ The camera operates in Eco mode
(£0153) while shooting.
Tem Options pais
Choose move effects, such
ers sara | sr
75sec, 30sec, | Choose the interval between
Snaintenal | 3 min each shot.
= ‘Choose the movie frame
Frame Rate BR erg
(Choose the length of the
80 in. 90 min
ie | Oe recording session, To record
shooting time: | aaa until the battery runs out,
choose (United)
Estimated playback time based on shooting interval and frame rate (for a
‘one-hour session)
Intewval between Shots [Frame Rate Playback Time.
15sec 3 16 sec
15 sec. E Bec
30 sec. RB B sec.
20 sec. E] 4sec
mn. = 4 sec,
mi E] 2500
Betore Use
Basic Guido
1 Camera Basics,
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Mode
4 Pode
9 Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
69
o
‘There wi bea delay before you can shoot again, a ine camera
processes ne Images
Ine camera uns oi of battery power or memory car space,
shooting tops and a move created tom tre Images upto that
pants saved
Asootnglrtenal of [1 min} snot avatabe wih these ets
(CB) i, 2), oF A.
Sound's mtrecrded
For ser viewing y choosing MENU > E > Pht ily
D On tara sooty
“ou ca ln aces bo aan sp by sig MENU EE)
D E» [Star Ten Lapse Movi Sat]
To save es srt tete bore te movies rates cine
MENU KA)» (lad (Save us) > (On de
Aa ee QUI mages are managed as single group, and
ng playback, ny te Irstimage Is say, To net that
ine mages prot a group. EB Gap peri
atte seen iyouerse a youped mage 62116), at mages
inne group ae do erased Be crea when eraung mages,
Try sntenigto manual oes mode (Dt) to mare acct
speciy e ca posten bere sac
Even you pect [United] in Sri Tm) and sean
AC at (sl separate, ES), ont wl stop ar
tot Bra, most
Veucan neo ne mong mos by namen stos
1 -2ot*Specitic Scenes” (C155), touching (BIR) to access
the setting screen, touching [SM and then touching the same
cmo ER
Adjusting Colors
D Sul images Do Movies
(Colors can be manually adjusted in [ mode.
1 Choose a shooting mode.
© Choose BB (256), RN (1167),
(GS) or eM se),
2 Choose color adjustment.
‘© Press the (8) button, and then choose
in the menu 29),
3 Adjust the setting.
‘© Tum the (O) ring or press the £4119)
buttons to adjust the correction level for 8
‘and, and then press the (E) button
+ Once the setting is complete, is
splayed
Q > orense ame
+ Shin tones remain te same when you adjust colors in (AY) mode.
5 hovnce segs cn be acre ressngte MENU,
baton ent rentes 2 mea)
N + Youcan sso choose te caecton evel by touching or craggng
Meta sep 2
+ Advancessehngs canbe aczessed by touring EE when the
Seren in step 2 1 aspayea (D).
Betore Use
Basie
Guide
1 Camora Basics
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
4 Pode
5 Tv,Av.M and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
‘There wi bea delay before you can shoot again, a ine camera
processes ne Images
Ine camera uns oi of battery power or memory car space,
shooting tops and a move created tom tre Images upto that
pants saved
Asootnglrtenal of [1 min} snot avatabe wih these ets
(CB) i, 2), oF A.
Sound's mtrecrded
For ser viewing y choosing MENU > E > Pht ily
D On tara sooty
“ou ca ln aces bo aan sp by sig MENU EE)
D E» [Star Ten Lapse Movi Sat]
To save es srt tete bore te movies rates cine
MENU KA)» (lad (Save us) > (On de
Aa ee QUI mages are managed as single group, and
ng playback, ny te Irstimage Is say, To net that
ine mages prot a group. EB Gap peri
atte seen iyouerse a youped mage 62116), at mages
inne group ae do erased Be crea when eraung mages,
Try sntenigto manual oes mode (Dt) to mare acct
speciy e ca posten bere sac
Even you pect [United] in Sri Tm) and sean
AC at (sl separate, ES), ont wl stop ar
tot Bra, most
Veucan neo ne mong mos by namen stos
1 -2ot*Specitic Scenes” (C155), touching (BIR) to access
the setting screen, touching [SM and then touching the same
cmo ER
Adjusting Colors
D Sul images Do Movies
(Colors can be manually adjusted in [ mode.
1 Choose a shooting mode.
© Choose BB (256), RN (1167),
(GS) or eM se),
2 Choose color adjustment.
‘© Press the (8) button, and then choose
in the menu 29),
3 Adjust the setting.
‘© Tum the (O) ring or press the £4119)
buttons to adjust the correction level for 8
‘and, and then press the (E) button
+ Once the setting is complete, is
splayed
Q > orense ame
+ Shin tones remain te same when you adjust colors in (AY) mode.
5 hovnce segs cn be acre ressngte MENU,
baton ent rentes 2 mea)
N + Youcan sso choose te caecton evel by touching or craggng
Meta sep 2
+ Advancessehngs canbe aczessed by touring EE when the
Seren in step 2 1 aspayea (D).
Betore Use
Basie
Guide
1 Camora Basics
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
4 Pode
5 Tv,Av.M and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
Shooting Various Movies
PeMovies
™ Shooting Movies in Standard Mode
$)
D>Movies
1 Enter PI mode.
+ Set the mode dl to PR
‘© Press the (@ button, choose Pin the
menu, and then choose PR (L129).
e Black bars are displayed on the top and
bottom edges of the screen, and the
subjects sighty enlarged. The black
bars indicate image areas not recorded,
2 Configure the settings to suit the
movie (£11181)
3 shoot.
‘© Press the movie button
To stop movie recording, press the movie
button again
AY) + Youcantocktne focus dung reco by touching AFI MFiis
then isla.
Locking or Changing Image Brightness before Shooting
PMovies
You can lock the exposure before or during recording or adustitin 113-
stop increments within a range of ~3 to +3 stops.
1 Lock the exposure.
‘© Touch AR] to lock the exposure.
© To unlock the exposure, touch FX] again
2 Adjust the exposure.
© Touch [Q on the screen,
© Touch (4][}] to adjust the exposure,
3 shoot (071).
OS
Q + vase ass agit egos ty urge Ol motera
reo
Betore Use
Basie Guide
1 Camora Basics,
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Mode
Inder
4 P Mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
ñ
PeMovies
™ Shooting Movies in Standard Mode
$)
D>Movies
1 Enter PI mode.
+ Set the mode dl to PR
‘© Press the (@ button, choose Pin the
menu, and then choose PR (L129).
e Black bars are displayed on the top and
bottom edges of the screen, and the
subjects sighty enlarged. The black
bars indicate image areas not recorded,
2 Configure the settings to suit the
movie (£11181)
3 shoot.
‘© Press the movie button
To stop movie recording, press the movie
button again
AY) + Youcantocktne focus dung reco by touching AFI MFiis
then isla.
Locking or Changing Image Brightness before Shooting
PMovies
You can lock the exposure before or during recording or adustitin 113-
stop increments within a range of ~3 to +3 stops.
1 Lock the exposure.
‘© Touch AR] to lock the exposure.
© To unlock the exposure, touch FX] again
2 Adjust the exposure.
© Touch [Q on the screen,
© Touch (4][}] to adjust the exposure,
3 shoot (071).
OS
Q + vase ass agit egos ty urge Ol motera
reo
Betore Use
Basie Guide
1 Camora Basics,
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Mode
Inder
4 P Mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
ñ
™ Shooting iFrame Movies
D>Movies
‘Shoot movies that can be edited wih iFreme-compatible sofware or
devices. You can quickly edt, save, and manage your Frame movies,
using ne software (£11169)
1 Choose te
+ Sethe mode alto PI)
+ Press the [G) ttton, choose Pin the
menu, andthen choose fj} (2029).
e Black bars dsplayed on the top and
bottom edges ofthe screen indicate
image areas not recorded
2 Shoot (1071).
D rem era
+ The resolution is Mg} (52150) and cannot be changed.
Betore Use
Basie Guide
1 Camera Basics,
2 Auto Mode
Hybrid Auto Mode
4 P Mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
Inder
«ba
D>Movies
‘Shoot movies that can be edited wih iFreme-compatible sofware or
devices. You can quickly edt, save, and manage your Frame movies,
using ne software (£11169)
1 Choose te
+ Sethe mode alto PI)
+ Press the [G) ttton, choose Pin the
menu, andthen choose fj} (2029).
e Black bars dsplayed on the top and
bottom edges ofthe screen indicate
image areas not recorded
2 Shoot (1071).
D rem era
+ The resolution is Mg} (52150) and cannot be changed.
Betore Use
Basie Guide
1 Camera Basics,
2 Auto Mode
Hybrid Auto Mode
4 P Mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
Inder
«ba
hooting in Program AE ([P] Mode) Bor Use
D> Still mages D> Movies Basic Guide
- 1 Enter (P] mode.
the mode dal to PP]
1 Camera Basics,
2 Customize the settings as desired 2 (bi Auto Modo
(074 ~[£)92), and then shoot.
3 Otner Shooting Modes
shuter button alway ster speeds and aperture valves are
spayedin orange Inti case, try adusting tre ISO speed
(G75 or activating the Us (subject are dar, CD)
which may erat adequate exposure
More discerning shots, in your preferred shooting style
5 Tv,Av.M and C Modo
Movies can be recorded nf) mode aswel D pressing me 6 Playback Modo
‘move bution. However, some FUNC. (29 and MENU
Instructions apply to the camera with the m (E50) settings maybe automaticaly ajuste for move 7 WiFi Functions
al set to [PJ mi record.
IP} Program AE, AE: Auto Exposure 8 Soting Menu
Before using a function introduced in his chapter in modes
«her than [PI, make sure the function is available in that mode OPES
an)
10 Appendix.
Indox
<p
73
D> Still mages D> Movies Basic Guide
- 1 Enter (P] mode.
the mode dal to PP]
1 Camera Basics,
2 Customize the settings as desired 2 (bi Auto Modo
(074 ~[£)92), and then shoot.
3 Otner Shooting Modes
shuter button alway ster speeds and aperture valves are
spayedin orange Inti case, try adusting tre ISO speed
(G75 or activating the Us (subject are dar, CD)
which may erat adequate exposure
More discerning shots, in your preferred shooting style
5 Tv,Av.M and C Modo
Movies can be recorded nf) mode aswel D pressing me 6 Playback Modo
‘move bution. However, some FUNC. (29 and MENU
Instructions apply to the camera with the m (E50) settings maybe automaticaly ajuste for move 7 WiFi Functions
al set to [PJ mi record.
IP} Program AE, AE: Auto Exposure 8 Soting Menu
Before using a function introduced in his chapter in modes
«her than [PI, make sure the function is available in that mode OPES
an)
10 Appendix.
Indox
<p
73
Image Brightness (Exposure)
™ Adjusting Image Brightness
(Exposure Compensation)
D Su Images
The standard exposure se by the camera can be adjustedin 1/3-stop
increments, in a range of -3 to +3,
© As you watch the screen, tum the
exposure compensation dial to adust
brightness
‘© The correction level you speaified is now
displayed
™ Locking Image Brightness / Exposure (AE Lock)
D Su images
Before shooting, you can lock the exposure, or you can spacihy focus and
exposure separately
1 Lock the exposure.
‘© Aim the camera at the subject to shoot
with the exposure locked With the
shutter button pressed halfway, press the
BR] button.
© Elis displayed, and the exposure is
locked.
‘© To unlock AE, release the shutter button
‘and press the 88] button again. In this
case, [34 is no longer displayed
2 Compose the shot and shoot
(D + Sam be used win Tourn ster 242).
À + re nono
2 trite x cyan age comes
‘of shufter speed and aperture value by turing the (I dial
(roan St
™ Changing the Metering Method
P suit images
‘Adjust the metering method (how brightness is measured) to suit shooting
Condtions as fallos
e Press the (8) button, choose (E) in the
menu, and choose the desired option
29),
+ The option you configured is now
displayed
For typical shooting conditions, including back
(ES Evauatve | shots. Automatically adusts exposure to match the
shooting condtions.
Canter Determines the average brightness of ight across
IC) Weignted | the entre image area, calculated by treating
Avg brighinassin the central area as more important
Metering restricted to within the | ] (Spot AE Point
frame). You can also link the Spot AE Point frame to
(o spot
the AF frame (175).
Betore Use
Basie Guide
1 Camora Basics,
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4P
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
Inder
«>4
74
™ Adjusting Image Brightness
(Exposure Compensation)
D Su Images
The standard exposure se by the camera can be adjustedin 1/3-stop
increments, in a range of -3 to +3,
© As you watch the screen, tum the
exposure compensation dial to adust
brightness
‘© The correction level you speaified is now
displayed
™ Locking Image Brightness / Exposure (AE Lock)
D Su images
Before shooting, you can lock the exposure, or you can spacihy focus and
exposure separately
1 Lock the exposure.
‘© Aim the camera at the subject to shoot
with the exposure locked With the
shutter button pressed halfway, press the
BR] button.
© Elis displayed, and the exposure is
locked.
‘© To unlock AE, release the shutter button
‘and press the 88] button again. In this
case, [34 is no longer displayed
2 Compose the shot and shoot
(D + Sam be used win Tourn ster 242).
À + re nono
2 trite x cyan age comes
‘of shufter speed and aperture value by turing the (I dial
(roan St
™ Changing the Metering Method
P suit images
‘Adjust the metering method (how brightness is measured) to suit shooting
Condtions as fallos
e Press the (8) button, choose (E) in the
menu, and choose the desired option
29),
+ The option you configured is now
displayed
For typical shooting conditions, including back
(ES Evauatve | shots. Automatically adusts exposure to match the
shooting condtions.
Canter Determines the average brightness of ight across
IC) Weignted | the entre image area, calculated by treating
Avg brighinassin the central area as more important
Metering restricted to within the | ] (Spot AE Point
frame). You can also link the Spot AE Point frame to
(o spot
the AF frame (175).
Betore Use
Basie Guide
1 Camora Basics,
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4P
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
Inder
«>4
74
Linking the Spot AE Point Frame to the AF Frame
™ Changing the ISO Speed
D suit images
1 Sot the metering method to (CI.
‘© Fotow the steps in “Changing the
Metering Method" (£174) to choose
[al
2 Configure the setting.
‘© Press the MENU button, choose [Spot
‘AE Point] on the [BY tab, and then
choose (AF Point} (£1430).
‘© The Spot AE Point frame will now be
linked to the movement ofthe AF frame
(ea),
CD © natale wnen AF Frame is setto [Face AA] (Des).
P Suit Images
+ Tum the [O] rng to choose the ISO
speed
Te option you configured is now
displayed
Tatanaicay as 1150
jaro senate ute sheng
ods nenne
Fa seems
as, 16,200 Lou [iucomentar
aan leon
sos, 400 50.0000 [SHY [sc Condos,
sa or at tvalight.
ho 100.100 000200300. | Ha Teorsroangnar
[00 sor ne Elli
Bono 1000, 1200 rion eons
D + reserve ame acemiesis0 yestmenyautone
{ete so spas AUTO] pee ander a toa
ee
Garis eta toa gens a sou on canes
Shen sme stg cans
+ Eras 60 pet wae dr peu ich
may ae let kamen sae arose an
en
+ Youcan also set the ISO speed by pressing the (®} button,
‘choosing (M. choosing an option (either by pressing the [4 1D)
‘buttons or tuming the (QI dia). and then pressing the (@) button.
Teepe ADT see oon ne genen
Betore Use
Guide
Inder
1 Canora Basics,
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4P
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
4/»/9
75
™ Changing the ISO Speed
D suit images
1 Sot the metering method to (CI.
‘© Fotow the steps in “Changing the
Metering Method" (£174) to choose
[al
2 Configure the setting.
‘© Press the MENU button, choose [Spot
‘AE Point] on the [BY tab, and then
choose (AF Point} (£1430).
‘© The Spot AE Point frame will now be
linked to the movement ofthe AF frame
(ea),
CD © natale wnen AF Frame is setto [Face AA] (Des).
P Suit Images
+ Tum the [O] rng to choose the ISO
speed
Te option you configured is now
displayed
Tatanaicay as 1150
jaro senate ute sheng
ods nenne
Fa seems
as, 16,200 Lou [iucomentar
aan leon
sos, 400 50.0000 [SHY [sc Condos,
sa or at tvalight.
ho 100.100 000200300. | Ha Teorsroangnar
[00 sor ne Elli
Bono 1000, 1200 rion eons
D + reserve ame acemiesis0 yestmenyautone
{ete so spas AUTO] pee ander a toa
ee
Garis eta toa gens a sou on canes
Shen sme stg cans
+ Eras 60 pet wae dr peu ich
may ae let kamen sae arose an
en
+ Youcan also set the ISO speed by pressing the (®} button,
‘choosing (M. choosing an option (either by pressing the [4 1D)
‘buttons or tuming the (QI dia). and then pressing the (@) button.
Teepe ADT see oon ne genen
Betore Use
Guide
Inder
1 Canora Basics,
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4P
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
4/»/9
75
Adjusting ISO Auto Settings
D suit images
When the camera is set to [AUTO], maximum ISO speed can be specified
in arange of (400) - (12800), and sensitity can be specified in a range of
three levels.
1 Access the setting sereon
«© Press the MENU buton,chcose (ISO
‘Auto Settings] on the (IG tab, and then
press the (6) button (1130).
2 Configure the setting.
‘© Choose a menu item to configure, and
then choose the desired option (C1190)
+ "Yu can aso access the ISO Auto Seting] screen when
‘choosing the ISO speedin the FUNC. menu, by pressing he
IMENU tuto,
™ Changing the Noise Reduction Level
(High ISO NR)
You can choose from 3 levels of noise reduction: [Standard], High}, (Low)
This unction is especially effecive when shocting a high ISO speeds.
e Press the [MENU] button, choose [High
ISO NR] on te [EY tab, and then choose
the desired option (180)
@ > Niotavatate win hc Rd oo
™ Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB Shooting)
D suit images
Three consecutive images are captured a diferent exposure levels
(standard exposure, underexposure, and then overexposure) each
time you shoot. You can adustthe amount of underexposure and
overexposure (relative to standard exposure) from -2to +2 stops in 1/3
stop increments
1 Choose (i.
‘© Press the (8) button, choose Min the
menu, and then choose (8 (1129).
2 Configure the setting
+ Press the RR] button, andthen agusto
setting by pressing the [GI] buttons or
turing the (@) da
Betore Use
Inder
Guide
1 Camera Basics,
2 Auto Mode
Hybrid Auto Mode
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4P
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
76
D suit images
When the camera is set to [AUTO], maximum ISO speed can be specified
in arange of (400) - (12800), and sensitity can be specified in a range of
three levels.
1 Access the setting sereon
«© Press the MENU buton,chcose (ISO
‘Auto Settings] on the (IG tab, and then
press the (6) button (1130).
2 Configure the setting.
‘© Choose a menu item to configure, and
then choose the desired option (C1190)
+ "Yu can aso access the ISO Auto Seting] screen when
‘choosing the ISO speedin the FUNC. menu, by pressing he
IMENU tuto,
™ Changing the Noise Reduction Level
(High ISO NR)
You can choose from 3 levels of noise reduction: [Standard], High}, (Low)
This unction is especially effecive when shocting a high ISO speeds.
e Press the [MENU] button, choose [High
ISO NR] on te [EY tab, and then choose
the desired option (180)
@ > Niotavatate win hc Rd oo
™ Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB Shooting)
D suit images
Three consecutive images are captured a diferent exposure levels
(standard exposure, underexposure, and then overexposure) each
time you shoot. You can adustthe amount of underexposure and
overexposure (relative to standard exposure) from -2to +2 stops in 1/3
stop increments
1 Choose (i.
‘© Press the (8) button, choose Min the
menu, and then choose (8 (1129).
2 Configure the setting
+ Press the RR] button, andthen agusto
setting by pressing the [GI] buttons or
turing the (@) da
Betore Use
Inder
Guide
1 Camera Basics,
2 Auto Mode
Hybrid Auto Mode
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4P
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
76
‘AEB shoctngis anyanalatie m (| mode (Des).
Corina shooting (87) snc avalate nts mode
It exposure compensation ready in use (274) the vale
specter tat funetons ese as the standard exposure
level fortis uncon
You can lso access In seting screen step 2by pressing
tre MENU) tuton when tne exposure compensation screen
(RA IS spayed
"Tires shat are taken, regardess of any quarty spect 2
me
In[Bink Detection mode (HAS) uncton s ony avatatle
Forte na sot
Toassesstne sting screen stp 2, you can eter ton
(Ph onthe sreeninstep 1 orten EM one exposure
compensaton screen (74.
You can also cotigue this seing by touring or craggng e
bar onthe set screen In step 210 specty avale aná en
touching PE]
D + rosca so caret etn mage (D120, ER
+ Youcan customize camera operation so that tuning the () ring.
aut DR consti osha Cometa [7 asi ude
Dil Images Y conca
Tone down bright mage areas, which might ctherwise look washed out,
as follows,
2 fue Modo
yon Ro Mode
Press te (® butan choose (y inthe
pea penne eas 8 cn Soa ae
Das).
ee géo cofaretisnon =
Sane
$ TAs os Chat
En onal EE 6 Ponca
a =
e |utomate agusimentto prevent
washed-out highlights
7 WiFi Functions
Tauro}, (125) [12800
2 8 soning Menu
Tone donn highlights by about 200%
™ Correcting Image Brightness (i-Contrast) | Sone to memes val [gi [AUTO (250 -(54001 ;
‘Accessorie
D> stil images
Before shooting, excessively bright or dark image areas (such as faces or (D + 150 spesa (475) wi be aojustas o a speed wit tne 10 Appendix
backgrounds) can be detected and automatically adusted to the optimal
brightness.
To avoid washed out highlights, specify Dynamic Range Correction. To
preserve image detal in shadows, speaty Shadow Correct
0 Serena
may cause images to appear gay.
Suppartedrangetyauhave spectieda value cutie the
suppatedrange nat here
4/9
Corina shooting (87) snc avalate nts mode
It exposure compensation ready in use (274) the vale
specter tat funetons ese as the standard exposure
level fortis uncon
You can lso access In seting screen step 2by pressing
tre MENU) tuton when tne exposure compensation screen
(RA IS spayed
"Tires shat are taken, regardess of any quarty spect 2
me
In[Bink Detection mode (HAS) uncton s ony avatatle
Forte na sot
Toassesstne sting screen stp 2, you can eter ton
(Ph onthe sreeninstep 1 orten EM one exposure
compensaton screen (74.
You can also cotigue this seing by touring or craggng e
bar onthe set screen In step 210 specty avale aná en
touching PE]
D + rosca so caret etn mage (D120, ER
+ Youcan customize camera operation so that tuning the () ring.
aut DR consti osha Cometa [7 asi ude
Dil Images Y conca
Tone down bright mage areas, which might ctherwise look washed out,
as follows,
2 fue Modo
yon Ro Mode
Press te (® butan choose (y inthe
pea penne eas 8 cn Soa ae
Das).
ee géo cofaretisnon =
Sane
$ TAs os Chat
En onal EE 6 Ponca
a =
e |utomate agusimentto prevent
washed-out highlights
7 WiFi Functions
Tauro}, (125) [12800
2 8 soning Menu
Tone donn highlights by about 200%
™ Correcting Image Brightness (i-Contrast) | Sone to memes val [gi [AUTO (250 -(54001 ;
‘Accessorie
D> stil images
Before shooting, excessively bright or dark image areas (such as faces or (D + 150 spesa (475) wi be aojustas o a speed wit tne 10 Appendix
backgrounds) can be detected and automatically adusted to the optimal
brightness.
To avoid washed out highlights, specify Dynamic Range Correction. To
preserve image detal in shadows, speaty Shadow Correct
0 Serena
may cause images to appear gay.
Suppartedrangetyauhave spectieda value cutie the
suppatedrange nat here
4/9
Shadow Correct
D suit images
‘Automatically preserve image deal in shadows as follows
‘© Press the (@) button, choose {@ inthe
menu, and then choose [Ga] (2129)
‘© Once the seting is complete, (is
displayed
™ Using the ND Filter
To shoot at lower shutter speeds and smaller aperture values, use the
[NO fer, which reduces light intensity to 1/8 the actual level (equivalent to
3 stops).
‘© Press the (8) button, choose NB} inthe
menu, and then choose ND (2129).
‘© Once the seting is complete, IND is
displayed
O errs oe
Shaner cnt sate Aion justo ets
Atom wer ang wud ac sree
camera As).
D non
Image Colors
” Adjusting White Balance
By adusting white balance (WB), you can make image colors look more
natura for the scene you are shooting.
e Press the (8) button, choose (in the
menu, and choose the desired option
Mm,
Te option you configured is now
splayed
‘Automatically sets the optimal white balance for
For manual setting a custom white balance
custom | Raima
he the shooing conditions
# Dayliom [For shooting outdoors in far weather
®& Sade [For shootngin he shade.
@ Cou [For shootngin cloudy weather ora tight
4 Tungsten _|For shooting under ordnary incandescent ightng
Fluorescent _|For shooting under white fuorescent lighting
#4 Fluorescent H [For shooting under daylght fuorescentighting
$ Flash For shooting withthe fash
“Underwater [For shooting undenvater (255).
Betore Use
Basie Guide
Pus Pen
Inder
1 Canora Basics,
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4P
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
6 Playback Mode
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
D suit images
‘Automatically preserve image deal in shadows as follows
‘© Press the (@) button, choose {@ inthe
menu, and then choose [Ga] (2129)
‘© Once the seting is complete, (is
displayed
™ Using the ND Filter
To shoot at lower shutter speeds and smaller aperture values, use the
[NO fer, which reduces light intensity to 1/8 the actual level (equivalent to
3 stops).
‘© Press the (8) button, choose NB} inthe
menu, and then choose ND (2129).
‘© Once the seting is complete, IND is
displayed
O errs oe
Shaner cnt sate Aion justo ets
Atom wer ang wud ac sree
camera As).
D non
Image Colors
” Adjusting White Balance
By adusting white balance (WB), you can make image colors look more
natura for the scene you are shooting.
e Press the (8) button, choose (in the
menu, and choose the desired option
Mm,
Te option you configured is now
splayed
‘Automatically sets the optimal white balance for
For manual setting a custom white balance
custom | Raima
he the shooing conditions
# Dayliom [For shooting outdoors in far weather
®& Sade [For shootngin he shade.
@ Cou [For shootngin cloudy weather ora tight
4 Tungsten _|For shooting under ordnary incandescent ightng
Fluorescent _|For shooting under white fuorescent lighting
#4 Fluorescent H [For shooting under daylght fuorescentighting
$ Flash For shooting withthe fash
“Underwater [For shooting undenvater (255).
Betore Use
Basie Guide
Pus Pen
Inder
1 Canora Basics,
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4P
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
6 Playback Mode
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
Custom White Balance
Psiitimages Pe Movies
For image colors that look naturel under the light in your shot, adjust white
balance to sut the ligt source where you ae shocking, Sethe we
balance under the same ight source that wil ilumina your shot
«© Fotow the steps in" Adjusting White
Balance" (L117) to choose a or Leg
+ Aim the camera at a plan wht subject,
0 that he ene screen is white. Press
on ste tro fp] buton
+ The tint ofthe screen changes once the
vite balance data has bean recorded
CD © clos maya uments range camera segs ater
‘ear ie nea
+ You can aso record white balance data onthe screen above by
tovening a
Manually Correcting White Balance
Desi images De Movies
You can correct white balance. This adustment can match the effect of
using a commercially available color temperature conversion iter or color
compensating ter.
1 Configure the setting.
‘© Follow the steps in” Adusting White
Balance" ((1178) to choose [ME
‘© Tum the [Q) ring to adjust the correction
level for B and À.
‘© Once the setting is complete, [Mis
displayed
2 Configure advanced settings.
‘© To configure more advanced settings,
press the (MENU) button and adjust the
correction level by tuming the (0) ring
ar (0) dal or pressing the Lawl
buttons
e Toresetthe correction level, press the
button.
Press the MENU] button to complete
the setting,
“The camera wil eta whe valance coecton levels even
you sutento amer we balance opton oy faloning steps in
“adustng We Balance” (78), but crecio teves wi be
reset you record custom whte balance data
5: bueA amber M magenta G green
You can customize camera operation so nat he an À
adustment screen can be accessed simply y tuming te |] ing
(Ban,
(One level ot lueamber corecti I equvalentto about 7 meds
on a colar temperature conversion ter (res Color temperate
Unt represering clr temperature coverson ter Gens)
You can aso choose the carection evel by touching or draggng
ne bar sep 1 ortne rane In step 2
You can aso access ine screen in step 2 by toucing E In
step 1
(onthe sceenin step 2 you cantoucn ft reste the
ginal eel ans tue QM to et tote shoot screen.
Betore Use
Basie Guide
1 Camora Basics,
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
3 Otner Shooting Modes
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
Psiitimages Pe Movies
For image colors that look naturel under the light in your shot, adjust white
balance to sut the ligt source where you ae shocking, Sethe we
balance under the same ight source that wil ilumina your shot
«© Fotow the steps in" Adjusting White
Balance" (L117) to choose a or Leg
+ Aim the camera at a plan wht subject,
0 that he ene screen is white. Press
on ste tro fp] buton
+ The tint ofthe screen changes once the
vite balance data has bean recorded
CD © clos maya uments range camera segs ater
‘ear ie nea
+ You can aso record white balance data onthe screen above by
tovening a
Manually Correcting White Balance
Desi images De Movies
You can correct white balance. This adustment can match the effect of
using a commercially available color temperature conversion iter or color
compensating ter.
1 Configure the setting.
‘© Follow the steps in” Adusting White
Balance" ((1178) to choose [ME
‘© Tum the [Q) ring to adjust the correction
level for B and À.
‘© Once the setting is complete, [Mis
displayed
2 Configure advanced settings.
‘© To configure more advanced settings,
press the (MENU) button and adjust the
correction level by tuming the (0) ring
ar (0) dal or pressing the Lawl
buttons
e Toresetthe correction level, press the
button.
Press the MENU] button to complete
the setting,
“The camera wil eta whe valance coecton levels even
you sutento amer we balance opton oy faloning steps in
“adustng We Balance” (78), but crecio teves wi be
reset you record custom whte balance data
5: bueA amber M magenta G green
You can customize camera operation so nat he an À
adustment screen can be accessed simply y tuming te |] ing
(Ban,
(One level ot lueamber corecti I equvalentto about 7 meds
on a colar temperature conversion ter (res Color temperate
Unt represering clr temperature coverson ter Gens)
You can aso choose the carection evel by touching or draggng
ne bar sep 1 ortne rane In step 2
You can aso access ine screen in step 2 by toucing E In
step 1
(onthe sceenin step 2 you cantoucn ft reste the
ginal eel ans tue QM to et tote shoot screen.
Betore Use
Basie Guide
1 Camora Basics,
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
3 Otner Shooting Modes
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
™ Changing Image Color Tones (My Colors)
D>Süilimages D Movies
‘Change mage color tones as desired, such as converting images to sepia
cor black and white
x «Press the [G) tutto, choose inthe
N menu, and choose the desired option
N (Es)
2 The option you coniguredis now
displayed
[& my Colas or =
Empnasizes contras and color saluraion
hdi making images sharper
Tones down contrast and cole Saturation for
A Neue subdued images
& sepa Creates sepia tone images
ae ew ‘Cates back and white mages
‘Combines the effects of Vvid Bus, VIS
, ‘Green, and Vivid Redto produce intense yet
4 Poste Fim | naturaliookng colors resembling images on
postive fim
[a Ligier Sun Tone | Ligtens skin tones
[& Darker Sn Tene | Darkens skin tones
FRE Emphasizes blues n mages, Makes te sy,
[fo va ocean, and other bie subjects mere vid
id Green | Empnaszes reensin mages. Makes mountain,
ae fotage. and otr green subjects mare vi
TES Emphasizes rds m Images. Makes red
SVM Res subjects more viv.
2 customcac | Adust contest, sharpness, color saturation
ender quais a desred (210),
CD + We tatance 76 cannot beset inl od) maces.
+ win ara Ko modes, clr cine an peoples shin tone
may change. These seing may otproace ie expected
resus win same snes.
Custom Color
D sill images D Movies
Choose the desired eval of image contrast, sharpness, color saturation,
red, green, blue, and shin tones ina range 011-5
MN 1 Access the setting screen.
NE e Fallow he steps in*Changng Image
(Calor Tones (My Colors) (E2180) to
choose [Gu and then press the (88)
button
2 Configure the setting
+ Press the [a][w] buttons to choose an
<pton, end then spect te vals by
Srossng no (ALP butons or tuning the
wis
For srongermore intense effects (o
der skin tones), agus he valu to
the ight, an for weakertanter elects
(or tte shin tones), aust the value to
thelet
«Press the Bf] button t complet the
seting
Xp + voue ato spcty vate by gag eb
Betore Use
Basie Guide
1 Camora Basics,
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
3 Otner Shooting Modes
Inder
5 TwAn.M and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
80
D>Süilimages D Movies
‘Change mage color tones as desired, such as converting images to sepia
cor black and white
x «Press the [G) tutto, choose inthe
N menu, and choose the desired option
N (Es)
2 The option you coniguredis now
displayed
[& my Colas or =
Empnasizes contras and color saluraion
hdi making images sharper
Tones down contrast and cole Saturation for
A Neue subdued images
& sepa Creates sepia tone images
ae ew ‘Cates back and white mages
‘Combines the effects of Vvid Bus, VIS
, ‘Green, and Vivid Redto produce intense yet
4 Poste Fim | naturaliookng colors resembling images on
postive fim
[a Ligier Sun Tone | Ligtens skin tones
[& Darker Sn Tene | Darkens skin tones
FRE Emphasizes blues n mages, Makes te sy,
[fo va ocean, and other bie subjects mere vid
id Green | Empnaszes reensin mages. Makes mountain,
ae fotage. and otr green subjects mare vi
TES Emphasizes rds m Images. Makes red
SVM Res subjects more viv.
2 customcac | Adust contest, sharpness, color saturation
ender quais a desred (210),
CD + We tatance 76 cannot beset inl od) maces.
+ win ara Ko modes, clr cine an peoples shin tone
may change. These seing may otproace ie expected
resus win same snes.
Custom Color
D sill images D Movies
Choose the desired eval of image contrast, sharpness, color saturation,
red, green, blue, and shin tones ina range 011-5
MN 1 Access the setting screen.
NE e Fallow he steps in*Changng Image
(Calor Tones (My Colors) (E2180) to
choose [Gu and then press the (88)
button
2 Configure the setting
+ Press the [a][w] buttons to choose an
<pton, end then spect te vals by
Srossng no (ALP butons or tuning the
wis
For srongermore intense effects (o
der skin tones), agus he valu to
the ight, an for weakertanter elects
(or tte shin tones), aust the value to
thelet
«Press the Bf] button t complet the
seting
Xp + voue ato spcty vate by gag eb
Betore Use
Basie Guide
1 Camora Basics,
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
3 Otner Shooting Modes
Inder
5 TwAn.M and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
80
Shooting Range and Focusing
™ Shooting Close-Ups (Macro)
P St images
To restrict he focus to subjects a close range, set the camera to I] For
details on the focusing range, see“Shocting Range” (C1196).
‘© Press the [4] button, choose [4 (either
press the (LD) buttons or tum the [6]
al), and then press the (E) button
‘© Once the setingis complete, (Y) is
displayed
© © metres vomtna may
Q + royrevercanerestae ty masengue amer ona pos
and shooting with the camera set to KI (2442).
A) + Youcan aio contre ns seing by pressing te [but
tovening KB) andtnen busnng again
™ Shooting in Manual Focus Mode
> Still images D> Movies.
When focusing isnot possible in AF made, use manual focus. You can
specify the general focal postion and then press the shutter button
halfway to have the camera determine the optimal foca postion near the
position you speciled. For detals on the focusing range, see Shooting
Range" (0196),
1 Choose [MFI
2 Press the (4) button, choose (MFI (ether
‘ress the [ID] buttons ortum the (8)
da), and then press the (@) button,
IMF) and tne MF indicator are dsplayed.
2 spocity the general focal position.
+ Reteringto the on-screen MF indicator
bar, which shows the distance and
focal postion) and the magntied dsplay
aca, press the [all] butons or turn
the (@) da to spect the general focal
(4) poston, and then press the (6) buton.
+ To agustthe magnification, press the IM]
button
+ During magnified display, you can move
the focusing rame by dragging onthe
screen
3 Fine-tune the focus.
Press the shutter button haltway to have
the camera fine-tune the focal postion
(Safety MF)
Betore Use
Guide
Inder
1 Canora Basics,
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4P
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
4/»/9
a1
™ Shooting Close-Ups (Macro)
P St images
To restrict he focus to subjects a close range, set the camera to I] For
details on the focusing range, see“Shocting Range” (C1196).
‘© Press the [4] button, choose [4 (either
press the (LD) buttons or tum the [6]
al), and then press the (E) button
‘© Once the setingis complete, (Y) is
displayed
© © metres vomtna may
Q + royrevercanerestae ty masengue amer ona pos
and shooting with the camera set to KI (2442).
A) + Youcan aio contre ns seing by pressing te [but
tovening KB) andtnen busnng again
™ Shooting in Manual Focus Mode
> Still images D> Movies.
When focusing isnot possible in AF made, use manual focus. You can
specify the general focal postion and then press the shutter button
halfway to have the camera determine the optimal foca postion near the
position you speciled. For detals on the focusing range, see Shooting
Range" (0196),
1 Choose [MFI
2 Press the (4) button, choose (MFI (ether
‘ress the [ID] buttons ortum the (8)
da), and then press the (@) button,
IMF) and tne MF indicator are dsplayed.
2 spocity the general focal position.
+ Reteringto the on-screen MF indicator
bar, which shows the distance and
focal postion) and the magntied dsplay
aca, press the [all] butons or turn
the (@) da to spect the general focal
(4) poston, and then press the (6) buton.
+ To agustthe magnification, press the IM]
button
+ During magnified display, you can move
the focusing rame by dragging onthe
screen
3 Fine-tune the focus.
Press the shutter button haltway to have
the camera fine-tune the focal postion
(Safety MF)
Betore Use
Guide
Inder
1 Canora Basics,
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4P
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
4/»/9
a1
© + ven youtocus mama, AF rame mode DE) is
(sor andar tame sae 684s mal, ano tres
Setings carole changes
+ Focal passe when sn te gta zoom (40) or
tale somveter ES) when sng à TV 3 a say
(Gish, mated ily wh rot appear
QO > Youcan ao aust focus by uma we O rg An.
© Totecusmre accurate, ty akachng he camera a posto
sae
+ You canertrg orge te mages aspay are by aqustng
EN KO) > Ha» (Fort Zoom segs
+ To deactate automat focus Ineunng wen te sut uton
Is presse away crsos MENU (330) » EN ab >
Corne)
AY) + Youcantocktne focus dung recorsng by touching AFI FIIs
tren displayed
Easily Identifying the Focus Area (MF Peaking)
D suit Images
Edges of subjects in focus are displayed in color to make manual focusing
‘easier. You can adust the colors and the sensiivty (level of edge
detection as needed
1 Access the setting screen
e Press the MENU button, choose [MF
Peaking Settings) on the (EN tab, and
then choose [On] (230)
2 Configure the setting,
‘© Choose a menu item to configure, and
then choose the desired option (C20)
eee Balto ee
Basie Guide
1 Camora Basics,
Focus Bracketing (Focus-BKT Mode)
D Su images
Three consecutive mages are captured each time you Shoot, with the
fist one atthe focal dstance you set manually andthe others atfather
‘and nearer focal postions determined by presets. The distance from your
specified focus can be sa in three levels
1 Choose [8].
e Press the (8) button, choose fin the
menu, and then choose (RA) (28).
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4P
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
2 Configure the setting
© Press the BRE] button, andthen adust the
setting by pressing the [4][D) buttons or
turning the (@) da
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
(D + Focus brackeingis any avalabe in) mode (Des). 9 Accessories
2 Contr hong 87) naaa int mode
10 Appendix
Pia M3
IMENU} button in step 2 of "Shooting in Manual Focus Mode”
Eo)
nee an
me
+ Ikon ma Es stent ny ata
Ken
«ba
82
(sor andar tame sae 684s mal, ano tres
Setings carole changes
+ Focal passe when sn te gta zoom (40) or
tale somveter ES) when sng à TV 3 a say
(Gish, mated ily wh rot appear
QO > Youcan ao aust focus by uma we O rg An.
© Totecusmre accurate, ty akachng he camera a posto
sae
+ You canertrg orge te mages aspay are by aqustng
EN KO) > Ha» (Fort Zoom segs
+ To deactate automat focus Ineunng wen te sut uton
Is presse away crsos MENU (330) » EN ab >
Corne)
AY) + Youcantocktne focus dung recorsng by touching AFI FIIs
tren displayed
Easily Identifying the Focus Area (MF Peaking)
D suit Images
Edges of subjects in focus are displayed in color to make manual focusing
‘easier. You can adust the colors and the sensiivty (level of edge
detection as needed
1 Access the setting screen
e Press the MENU button, choose [MF
Peaking Settings) on the (EN tab, and
then choose [On] (230)
2 Configure the setting,
‘© Choose a menu item to configure, and
then choose the desired option (C20)
eee Balto ee
Basie Guide
1 Camora Basics,
Focus Bracketing (Focus-BKT Mode)
D Su images
Three consecutive mages are captured each time you Shoot, with the
fist one atthe focal dstance you set manually andthe others atfather
‘and nearer focal postions determined by presets. The distance from your
specified focus can be sa in three levels
1 Choose [8].
e Press the (8) button, choose fin the
menu, and then choose (RA) (28).
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4P
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
2 Configure the setting
© Press the BRE] button, andthen adust the
setting by pressing the [4][D) buttons or
turning the (@) da
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
(D + Focus brackeingis any avalabe in) mode (Des). 9 Accessories
2 Contr hong 87) naaa int mode
10 Appendix
Pia M3
IMENU} button in step 2 of "Shooting in Manual Focus Mode”
Eo)
nee an
me
+ Ikon ma Es stent ny ata
Ken
«ba
82
Sh + toast cren yacananırnun ne
‘screen in step 1 or touch (NM) on the manual focus screen
(is
«Novem aso cr es seg ng or age near
‘on the screen in step 2 to specify a value and then touching ARE]
™ Digital Tele-Converter
DP stil images. D> Movies
‘The focal length of the lens can be increased by approximately 1 8x or
2.0x. This can reduce camera shake because the shutter speed is faster
{han it would be f you zoomed (including using digital zoom) nto the.
same zoom factor
Press the MENU button, choose
[Dial Zoom] on the ff tab, and then
choose the desired option (C120),
‘© The view s enlarged and the zoom factor
is displayed on the screen,
CD + the state convener canot b used win dita 0m (240)
rAF ont om ED).
D ee eee
lever all the way toward [CA] for maximum telephoto, and when
Yoution ts naa nea te sane sol sep
Frog ae net (gta Zn) E,
™ Changing the AF Frame Mode
D suit images Do Movies
Change the AF (auto focus) frame mode 1 sul the shooting conditions as
fallos
e Press the MENU} button, choose [AF
Frame] on the (tab, aná then choose
the desired option (E1180),
1-point
D> Sil images Do Movies
One AF frame is displayed Effective for rable focusing, You can also
move the frame by touching the screen (LBS)
(O © Ayeton Frames payin O Te
fons wen yours ve stern amo,
Q + Tocompse sms soma sets ar panones ae esper
Inacaner am cone Dee Mona
Trane aatennad tester ay dn A you
Corr toha een aon ay rompe hk
‘seats os Menges De er ton ny Sm
(Fos 209
« “reat tome pat enagesvnen you pese sate
Duan ay na E Sor oon So ON)
Betore Use
Basie Guide
1 Camora Basics,
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
3 Otner Shooting Modes
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
Inder
«ba
‘screen in step 1 or touch (NM) on the manual focus screen
(is
«Novem aso cr es seg ng or age near
‘on the screen in step 2 to specify a value and then touching ARE]
™ Digital Tele-Converter
DP stil images. D> Movies
‘The focal length of the lens can be increased by approximately 1 8x or
2.0x. This can reduce camera shake because the shutter speed is faster
{han it would be f you zoomed (including using digital zoom) nto the.
same zoom factor
Press the MENU button, choose
[Dial Zoom] on the ff tab, and then
choose the desired option (C120),
‘© The view s enlarged and the zoom factor
is displayed on the screen,
CD + the state convener canot b used win dita 0m (240)
rAF ont om ED).
D ee eee
lever all the way toward [CA] for maximum telephoto, and when
Yoution ts naa nea te sane sol sep
Frog ae net (gta Zn) E,
™ Changing the AF Frame Mode
D suit images Do Movies
Change the AF (auto focus) frame mode 1 sul the shooting conditions as
fallos
e Press the MENU} button, choose [AF
Frame] on the (tab, aná then choose
the desired option (E1180),
1-point
D> Sil images Do Movies
One AF frame is displayed Effective for rable focusing, You can also
move the frame by touching the screen (LBS)
(O © Ayeton Frames payin O Te
fons wen yours ve stern amo,
Q + Tocompse sms soma sets ar panones ae esper
Inacaner am cone Dee Mona
Trane aatennad tester ay dn A you
Corr toha een aon ay rompe hk
‘seats os Menges De er ton ny Sm
(Fos 209
« “reat tome pat enagesvnen you pese sate
Duan ay na E Sor oon So ON)
Betore Use
Basie Guide
1 Camora Basics,
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
3 Otner Shooting Modes
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
Inder
«ba
Moving and Resizing AF Frames (1-point)
D suit images
When you want to change the postion or size ofthe AF frame, set the AF
frame mode to [1.point]
1 Move the AF frame.
® Touch the screen, An AF frame is
displayed in orange where you touched
(Touch AF).
‘© You can tum the (6) dial to move the AF
frame and press the [aJfw][4[D] buttons
to fine-tune the position,
‘© To return the AF frame to the original
position in the center, press the [MENU]
button
2 Resize the AF trame.
To reduce the AF frame size, turn the
(0) ng Tur t again to restore to the
niga sze.
Finish the setup process.
Press the (8) button,
CD + se tame a apio oma sue urna ot
zoom (40) or agita tete-converter (283), and in manual
focus mode AB).
+ Youcan akoBnkihe Spot AE Paire rame tothe AF rame
Qs,
+ Youcanalso congue the AF frame se by pressing ne
MEN Un er es He Coe Slee me)
(oo)
+ Ontne screenin step, you can also move me AF frame by
touching te screen restore Ins AF ame tothe exigna poston
‘by touching (BER. or ext ine seting by touching SM
Face AiAF
D sult images Movies
+ Detects peoples faces, and then sets the focus, exposure (evaluative
metering only), and white balance (ME ony)
+ ter you aim the camera atthe subject a white rame is displayed around
the person's face determined by the camera tobe the main subject, and
upto two gray frames are displayed around other detected faces
+ When the camera detects movement, frames wi follow moving
subject, within a certain range.
+ After you press the shutter button halway, up to nine green frames are
‘splayed around faces infocus.
O nme
displayed (without a white frame), pressing the shuter button
e eee eee a
en
(4s) setting
1321071431 31 trames
MT or 55} 25 rames
169) 21 frames
+ tet er teen Seno A EDEN sO
{hear Vane dao te cote cere a
A
ee
nn
Sues nn aa
Fate ne arg ope aan
En ion
Tun raver De due cou cava wen
rajado
Betore Use
Basic Guido
1 Camera Basics,
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4 P Mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
D suit images
When you want to change the postion or size ofthe AF frame, set the AF
frame mode to [1.point]
1 Move the AF frame.
® Touch the screen, An AF frame is
displayed in orange where you touched
(Touch AF).
‘© You can tum the (6) dial to move the AF
frame and press the [aJfw][4[D] buttons
to fine-tune the position,
‘© To return the AF frame to the original
position in the center, press the [MENU]
button
2 Resize the AF trame.
To reduce the AF frame size, turn the
(0) ng Tur t again to restore to the
niga sze.
Finish the setup process.
Press the (8) button,
CD + se tame a apio oma sue urna ot
zoom (40) or agita tete-converter (283), and in manual
focus mode AB).
+ Youcan akoBnkihe Spot AE Paire rame tothe AF rame
Qs,
+ Youcanalso congue the AF frame se by pressing ne
MEN Un er es He Coe Slee me)
(oo)
+ Ontne screenin step, you can also move me AF frame by
touching te screen restore Ins AF ame tothe exigna poston
‘by touching (BER. or ext ine seting by touching SM
Face AiAF
D sult images Movies
+ Detects peoples faces, and then sets the focus, exposure (evaluative
metering only), and white balance (ME ony)
+ ter you aim the camera atthe subject a white rame is displayed around
the person's face determined by the camera tobe the main subject, and
upto two gray frames are displayed around other detected faces
+ When the camera detects movement, frames wi follow moving
subject, within a certain range.
+ After you press the shutter button halway, up to nine green frames are
‘splayed around faces infocus.
O nme
displayed (without a white frame), pressing the shuter button
e eee eee a
en
(4s) setting
1321071431 31 trames
MT or 55} 25 rames
169) 21 frames
+ tet er teen Seno A EDEN sO
{hear Vane dao te cote cere a
A
ee
nn
Sues nn aa
Fate ne arg ope aan
En ion
Tun raver De due cou cava wen
rajado
Betore Use
Basic Guido
1 Camera Basics,
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4 P Mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
Shooting with Servo AF
™ Changing the Focus Setting
D suit images
‘This mode helps avoid missing shots of subjects in motion, because the
camera continues to focus on the subject and adjust the exposure as long
5 you press the shutter button halfay.
1 Configure the setting.
‘© Press the MENU button, choose [Servo
AF] on the (KN) tab, and then choose [On]
(so.
2 Focus.
‘© The focus and exposure are maintained
where the blue AF frame is displayed
while you are pressing the shutter button
halway.
CD > Fosanomayna be postie some song canos
I init onan Seno A na rat aches A ames
mayan) enya pete srt bata aay.
Inns wen mean west ge
speeder rane note,
+ esca ge cate tae ert ar
e ana setas Fees sn
Baten ans eng ay an
+ ruca e oto
+ (AF Paint Zoom onthe I tab (£1430) is not available,
+ Not available when using the seif-Imer (2441).
D Suit Images
You can change defaut camera operation of constanty focusing on
subjects iis aimed at, even when the shutter button is not pressed.
Instead, you can Imt camera focusing to the moment you press the
shutter button halfway.
e Press the MENU] button, choose
{Continuous AF] on the HEN tab, and then
choose [Of (£1130)
Helps avoid missing sudden photo opportunities, because
On | the camera constanty focuses on subjects unb you press the
shutter button half,
Conserves battery poner, because the camera doss nat focus
Of | constant
™ Choosing a Person to Focus On (Face Select)
P Sil images
You can shoot after choosing a specific person's face to focus on.
1 Prepare the camera for Face Select.
+ Sotthe AF frame to [Face AIAF]
ss)
© Assign EE] to the BR button (MI).
Betore Use
Guide
Inder
1 Canora Basics,
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4P
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
4/»/9
™ Changing the Focus Setting
D suit images
‘This mode helps avoid missing shots of subjects in motion, because the
camera continues to focus on the subject and adjust the exposure as long
5 you press the shutter button halfay.
1 Configure the setting.
‘© Press the MENU button, choose [Servo
AF] on the (KN) tab, and then choose [On]
(so.
2 Focus.
‘© The focus and exposure are maintained
where the blue AF frame is displayed
while you are pressing the shutter button
halway.
CD > Fosanomayna be postie some song canos
I init onan Seno A na rat aches A ames
mayan) enya pete srt bata aay.
Inns wen mean west ge
speeder rane note,
+ esca ge cate tae ert ar
e ana setas Fees sn
Baten ans eng ay an
+ ruca e oto
+ (AF Paint Zoom onthe I tab (£1430) is not available,
+ Not available when using the seif-Imer (2441).
D Suit Images
You can change defaut camera operation of constanty focusing on
subjects iis aimed at, even when the shutter button is not pressed.
Instead, you can Imt camera focusing to the moment you press the
shutter button halfway.
e Press the MENU] button, choose
{Continuous AF] on the HEN tab, and then
choose [Of (£1130)
Helps avoid missing sudden photo opportunities, because
On | the camera constanty focuses on subjects unb you press the
shutter button half,
Conserves battery poner, because the camera doss nat focus
Of | constant
™ Choosing a Person to Focus On (Face Select)
P Sil images
You can shoot after choosing a specific person's face to focus on.
1 Prepare the camera for Face Select.
+ Sotthe AF frame to [Face AIAF]
ss)
© Assign EE] to the BR button (MI).
Betore Use
Guide
Inder
1 Canora Basics,
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4P
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
4/»/9
2 Enter Face Select mode.
‘© Aim the camera atthe person's face and
press the Bi] button.
© After [Face Select: Onis displayed, a
face frame C 1 is displayed arcund the
face detected as the main subject
‘© Even ifthe subject moves, the face frame
CJ follows the subject within a certain
range,
fa face is not detected, [ Jisnot
displayed
3 Choose the face to focus on
To switch the face frame E to another
detected face, press the fi button
+ Aer you have switched the face frame
to al detectedtaces, Face Select OM
is dsplayed, end the specfed AF frame
mode screen s dsplajed again
4 Shoot.
Press the shutter button hattway. Alter the
camera focuses, [ changes to [1
Press the shutter button allthe way down
to shoot
Al
Y vaio soto rones ay mts pte
o
|
ne ve ras le
™ Choosing Subjects to Focus On (Touch AF)
> suit images D Movies
You can shock ater choosing a persons face or another subject to focus on
1 Set the AF frame to [Face AIAF]
casa).
2 Choose a person's face or another
subject to focus on.
Touch the subject or person on the
screen,
‘© When the subjectis detected, the camera
beeps and Jis displayed. Focus is
maintained even if the subject moves,
‘© To cancel Touch AF, touch (9)
3 shoot.
+ Press the shutter button ha Aor
the camera focuses, [ ] changes to a
gent)
«Press the shutter button al the way down
Fo shoot
Betore Use
Guide
1 Camora Basics
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
3 Otner Shooting Modes
Inder
5 TwAn.M and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
86
‘© Aim the camera atthe person's face and
press the Bi] button.
© After [Face Select: Onis displayed, a
face frame C 1 is displayed arcund the
face detected as the main subject
‘© Even ifthe subject moves, the face frame
CJ follows the subject within a certain
range,
fa face is not detected, [ Jisnot
displayed
3 Choose the face to focus on
To switch the face frame E to another
detected face, press the fi button
+ Aer you have switched the face frame
to al detectedtaces, Face Select OM
is dsplayed, end the specfed AF frame
mode screen s dsplajed again
4 Shoot.
Press the shutter button hattway. Alter the
camera focuses, [ changes to [1
Press the shutter button allthe way down
to shoot
Al
Y vaio soto rones ay mts pte
o
|
ne ve ras le
™ Choosing Subjects to Focus On (Touch AF)
> suit images D Movies
You can shock ater choosing a persons face or another subject to focus on
1 Set the AF frame to [Face AIAF]
casa).
2 Choose a person's face or another
subject to focus on.
Touch the subject or person on the
screen,
‘© When the subjectis detected, the camera
beeps and Jis displayed. Focus is
maintained even if the subject moves,
‘© To cancel Touch AF, touch (9)
3 shoot.
+ Press the shutter button ha Aor
the camera focuses, [ ] changes to a
gent)
«Press the shutter button al the way down
Fo shoot
Betore Use
Guide
1 Camora Basics
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
3 Otner Shooting Modes
Inder
5 TwAn.M and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
86
™ Shooting with the AF Lock
D> Sil Images > Movies
‘The focus can be locked After you lockthe focus, the focal postion wil
nat change even when you release your finger fom he shutter button.
1 Lock the focus.
- ‘© With the shutter button pressed hay.
press the [4] button
e The focus is now locked, end IMFI and
the MF indicator ere displayed,
To unlock the focus, hold the shutter
button halhway dom and press the [4]
button again.
2 Compose the shot and shoot.
™ Shooting Continuously as the Camera Keeps
the Subject in Focus
Pe suit Images > Movies
‘Shoot continuously as the camera keeps the subject infocus. For details
an he connu soci sped, es Contes Stoing Speed
1196).
1 Configure the setting.
‘© Press the [A] button, choose fal (either
press the [4)(p] buttons ortum tne [9]
da), and then press the [@] button
Once the seting is complete, fa) is
splayed
2 Shoot.
© Hold the shutter button al the way down
to shoot continuous).
© The images are managed together as a
group (4110).
Auto Moss
2 nahen
“8 Or Shooting Modes
5 TAv.M and C Mode
(una
7 wer Funcons
(8 Soting Mons
do roses
10 Appendix
87
D> Sil Images > Movies
‘The focus can be locked After you lockthe focus, the focal postion wil
nat change even when you release your finger fom he shutter button.
1 Lock the focus.
- ‘© With the shutter button pressed hay.
press the [4] button
e The focus is now locked, end IMFI and
the MF indicator ere displayed,
To unlock the focus, hold the shutter
button halhway dom and press the [4]
button again.
2 Compose the shot and shoot.
™ Shooting Continuously as the Camera Keeps
the Subject in Focus
Pe suit Images > Movies
‘Shoot continuously as the camera keeps the subject infocus. For details
an he connu soci sped, es Contes Stoing Speed
1196).
1 Configure the setting.
‘© Press the [A] button, choose fal (either
press the [4)(p] buttons ortum tne [9]
da), and then press the [@] button
Once the seting is complete, fa) is
splayed
2 Shoot.
© Hold the shutter button al the way down
to shoot continuous).
© The images are managed together as a
group (4110).
Auto Moss
2 nahen
“8 Or Shooting Modes
5 TAv.M and C Mode
(una
7 wer Funcons
(8 Soting Mons
do roses
10 Appendix
87
™ Changing the Flash Mode
D> stil Images
You can change the flash mode to match the shooting scene. For details
‘on the flash range, see “Flash Range" (C1196),
1 Raise the flash.
‘© Move the [$] snitch
2 Configure the setting.
‘© Press the [)) button, choose a flash
mode (either press the [4][P] buttons or
turn the (6) da), and then press the [@)
button.
‘© The option you configured is now
displayed.
De mesmo ma arawynaareme Dina
‚wen the flash is Iowered. Move the [$] switch o raise the flash,
name eset,
Auto
Fires automaticaly in low-light conditions.
On
Fires for each shot
Slow Synchro
Fires to iluminate the main subject (such as people) while shooting at à
slower shutter speed to illuminate backgrounds out of flash range.
+ IHR] mode, mount camera cn atrpod e take omer
measures to keep stil and prever camera shake. AGdtonal,
You seal se IS Mode] tor] when using atipod or other
means to secure te camera (DS!)
Inf} mode even ater he lates, ensure thatthe mal
subject does net move ut srutar sounds sche paying
oft
For shooting without the flash
CD © asin ca sopesar pes me se
‘button hattway in camera-shake inducing, low-light conditions,
mouth cameron ago reo messes SP
su
A, + Adusmertis as posa bypresingtne un touching
tre deseen, entren teng aa
Betore Use
Basic Guido
1 Camera Basics,
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4P
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
Inder
«ba
D> stil Images
You can change the flash mode to match the shooting scene. For details
‘on the flash range, see “Flash Range" (C1196),
1 Raise the flash.
‘© Move the [$] snitch
2 Configure the setting.
‘© Press the [)) button, choose a flash
mode (either press the [4][P] buttons or
turn the (6) da), and then press the [@)
button.
‘© The option you configured is now
displayed.
De mesmo ma arawynaareme Dina
‚wen the flash is Iowered. Move the [$] switch o raise the flash,
name eset,
Auto
Fires automaticaly in low-light conditions.
On
Fires for each shot
Slow Synchro
Fires to iluminate the main subject (such as people) while shooting at à
slower shutter speed to illuminate backgrounds out of flash range.
+ IHR] mode, mount camera cn atrpod e take omer
measures to keep stil and prever camera shake. AGdtonal,
You seal se IS Mode] tor] when using atipod or other
means to secure te camera (DS!)
Inf} mode even ater he lates, ensure thatthe mal
subject does net move ut srutar sounds sche paying
oft
For shooting without the flash
CD © asin ca sopesar pes me se
‘button hattway in camera-shake inducing, low-light conditions,
mouth cameron ago reo messes SP
su
A, + Adusmertis as posa bypresingtne un touching
tre deseen, entren teng aa
Betore Use
Basic Guido
1 Camera Basics,
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4P
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
Inder
«ba
™ Adjusting the Flash Exposure Compensation
™ Shooting with the FE Lock
D Su Images
Just as with regular exposure compensation (2174), you can aust the
flash exposure from -2 to +2 stops, in 113-stop ncraments
Raise the flash, press the [p] button and
immediately tum the (Q) ring to choose
the compensation level, and then press.
the (©) button
‘© The correction level you specified now
displayed
©» mener enormen. cmen asoman
Ka Feel ore dann same m
Vorne wanna atom pase
Hwee outa cha ama an ot ner
Sn pat aue Dying MENU (RS) and
‘choosing (QI tab > [Flash Setings] > [Safety FE] > (OM.
ca Lo nba poc ca
accessing MENU (230) ana choosing EA tab > [Flash
Sean» FE Com)
AAA
when the flash is up by pressing the |] button and immediately
‘pressing the MENU) buton.
+ Youcan aso access the [Fash Setings MENU screen (290)
boy pressing the [D ton ae touching A
D Suit Images
Just as withthe AE lock (£1174), you can lock the exposure for the flash
shots,
1 Raise the flash and set it to (4)
Ces)
2 Lock the flash exposure.
© Aim the camera atthe subject to shoot
with the exposure locked. With the
‘shutter button pressed hathvay, press the.
I button,
+ The flash fires, and when
IH is displayed, the flash output levelis
retaned
e To unlock FE, release the shutter button
and press the [98] button again. In this
case, (His no longer displayed.
3 Compose the shot and shoot.
+ Atar ono sha, FE sucia and
rene dea
(D > retest cavetoe sent suas fe) en
AF (F186), because touchang the screen will cancel FE Lock,
D + Ferner
Betore Use
Basie Guide
1 Camera Basics,
2 Auto Mode
Hybrid Auto Mode
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4 P Mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
Lap
™ Shooting with the FE Lock
D Su Images
Just as with regular exposure compensation (2174), you can aust the
flash exposure from -2 to +2 stops, in 113-stop ncraments
Raise the flash, press the [p] button and
immediately tum the (Q) ring to choose
the compensation level, and then press.
the (©) button
‘© The correction level you specified now
displayed
©» mener enormen. cmen asoman
Ka Feel ore dann same m
Vorne wanna atom pase
Hwee outa cha ama an ot ner
Sn pat aue Dying MENU (RS) and
‘choosing (QI tab > [Flash Setings] > [Safety FE] > (OM.
ca Lo nba poc ca
accessing MENU (230) ana choosing EA tab > [Flash
Sean» FE Com)
AAA
when the flash is up by pressing the |] button and immediately
‘pressing the MENU) buton.
+ Youcan aso access the [Fash Setings MENU screen (290)
boy pressing the [D ton ae touching A
D Suit Images
Just as withthe AE lock (£1174), you can lock the exposure for the flash
shots,
1 Raise the flash and set it to (4)
Ces)
2 Lock the flash exposure.
© Aim the camera atthe subject to shoot
with the exposure locked. With the
‘shutter button pressed hathvay, press the.
I button,
+ The flash fires, and when
IH is displayed, the flash output levelis
retaned
e To unlock FE, release the shutter button
and press the [98] button again. In this
case, (His no longer displayed.
3 Compose the shot and shoot.
+ Atar ono sha, FE sucia and
rene dea
(D > retest cavetoe sent suas fe) en
AF (F186), because touchang the screen will cancel FE Lock,
D + Ferner
Betore Use
Basie Guide
1 Camera Basics,
2 Auto Mode
Hybrid Auto Mode
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4 P Mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
Lap
™ Changing the Flash Timing Shooting RAW Images Belore Use
D suit Images ange Ho
‘Chenge the timing ofthe flesh end shutter release es fllons, RAW images are “raw” unprocessed) data, recorded wth essential no
\coees the setting screen. loss of image quality from the camera's internal image processing. Use
1 Access the setting Digtal Proto Professional (£21163) to adust RAW images as desired
* ls te MENU ato, hose Fish vith minmal loss of mage quality
etings] on the andtnen press © Press the (@ buon, choose (EG in the
‘the (@) button (AD) Trent in Ohne desd cn a a
2 configure the setting GE Disc
‘© Choose [Shutter Sync, and then choose
the desired option (C130)
1 Camora Basics,
3 Otner Shooting Modes
Tsteutain_[_ The fash es inmediata ater the shuter opens 4°
Records JPEG mages JPEG mages we pocessedin the camera
oc eptimal image qualty and compressedto reduce fl size Te
RG | However, the compression process is ireversite, and mages Snes
cannot be resioredto ther rignal, unprocessed te Image
ng cutan | The Nash fires immediately before the shutter closes.
processing may also cause some loss of image quali. 6 Playback Modo.
Records RAW images. RAW images are ran’ (unprocessed)
dota, recorded with essentially no loss of image qualty from the 7 WiFi Functions
caméras mage processing. The data cannot be used in this
state for viewing on a computer cr printing. You must ist use the sane
BB | sotware (Dagital Photo Professional to convert images to ordinary
JPEG or TIFF fes. Images can be adjusted with minimal loss of
image qualty 9 Accessories
For deals on reslution and the number of shets that wil fon a
card see “Number of Shots par Memory Card (C2195) 10 Arena
Records wo images, bath a RAW image anda JPEG image, for
q [soe shot oe
The JPEG image can be viewed on computer ar printed without
using the software,
«ba
D suit Images ange Ho
‘Chenge the timing ofthe flesh end shutter release es fllons, RAW images are “raw” unprocessed) data, recorded wth essential no
\coees the setting screen. loss of image quality from the camera's internal image processing. Use
1 Access the setting Digtal Proto Professional (£21163) to adust RAW images as desired
* ls te MENU ato, hose Fish vith minmal loss of mage quality
etings] on the andtnen press © Press the (@ buon, choose (EG in the
‘the (@) button (AD) Trent in Ohne desd cn a a
2 configure the setting GE Disc
‘© Choose [Shutter Sync, and then choose
the desired option (C130)
1 Camora Basics,
3 Otner Shooting Modes
Tsteutain_[_ The fash es inmediata ater the shuter opens 4°
Records JPEG mages JPEG mages we pocessedin the camera
oc eptimal image qualty and compressedto reduce fl size Te
RG | However, the compression process is ireversite, and mages Snes
cannot be resioredto ther rignal, unprocessed te Image
ng cutan | The Nash fires immediately before the shutter closes.
processing may also cause some loss of image quali. 6 Playback Modo.
Records RAW images. RAW images are ran’ (unprocessed)
dota, recorded with essentially no loss of image qualty from the 7 WiFi Functions
caméras mage processing. The data cannot be used in this
state for viewing on a computer cr printing. You must ist use the sane
BB | sotware (Dagital Photo Professional to convert images to ordinary
JPEG or TIFF fes. Images can be adjusted with minimal loss of
image qualty 9 Accessories
For deals on reslution and the number of shets that wil fon a
card see “Number of Shots par Memory Card (C2195) 10 Arena
Records wo images, bath a RAW image anda JPEG image, for
q [soe shot oe
The JPEG image can be viewed on computer ar printed without
using the software,
«ba
men vansening RAW images (or PAN an JPEG mages
recorded togetne toa computer aways use te dedicated
sofware (169).
‘win lor ie noise recon eel ARTE. ¿Contrast
(Gam) and My Calor (180) cannot cores,
‘The te exersionto JPEG mages JPG, an ne extension for
RAWimages's CRO,
™ Changing the Compression Ratio (Image Quality)
D sult mages
(Choose from tio compression ratos, Super Fine) and Ll (Fine), as.
follows. For guidelines on how many shots at each compression ratio can
Fi on a memory card, see "Number of Shots per Memory Card" (£11195),
e Press the (@) button, choose [inthe
menu, and choose the desired option
(ie).
™ Changing the IS Mode Settings
D> Still Images > Movies
À Access the setting screen.
+ Press the MENU] button, choose [IS
‘Settings) onthe (ff) tab, and then press
the (6) button (41130).
2 Configure the setting.
e Press the MENU] button, choose IS
Mode] onthe ff} tab, and then press.
the {ID} buttons to choose the desires
option (2420)
Optima image Sabazaton forthe Shoging cendtions 5
automaticaly polea (nteligent IS) (NS)
‘Shoot On" | image stailzaton is active only atthe moment of ahosung
Off Deactvates image stabilization.
* Te seg is changed [Cortinas] fr move recerang
Continuous
Betore Use
Basie Guide
Inder
1 Canora Basics,
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
3 Otner Shooting Modes
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
a
recorded togetne toa computer aways use te dedicated
sofware (169).
‘win lor ie noise recon eel ARTE. ¿Contrast
(Gam) and My Calor (180) cannot cores,
‘The te exersionto JPEG mages JPG, an ne extension for
RAWimages's CRO,
™ Changing the Compression Ratio (Image Quality)
D sult mages
(Choose from tio compression ratos, Super Fine) and Ll (Fine), as.
follows. For guidelines on how many shots at each compression ratio can
Fi on a memory card, see "Number of Shots per Memory Card" (£11195),
e Press the (@) button, choose [inthe
menu, and choose the desired option
(ie).
™ Changing the IS Mode Settings
D> Still Images > Movies
À Access the setting screen.
+ Press the MENU] button, choose [IS
‘Settings) onthe (ff) tab, and then press
the (6) button (41130).
2 Configure the setting.
e Press the MENU] button, choose IS
Mode] onthe ff} tab, and then press.
the {ID} buttons to choose the desires
option (2420)
Optima image Sabazaton forthe Shoging cendtions 5
automaticaly polea (nteligent IS) (NS)
‘Shoot On" | image stailzaton is active only atthe moment of ahosung
Off Deactvates image stabilization.
* Te seg is changed [Cortinas] fr move recerang
Continuous
Betore Use
Basie Guide
Inder
1 Canora Basics,
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
3 Otner Shooting Modes
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
a
(D > tro sacaran ama pert mers mart ne
cantons pode oh mean organ
(aust ee ON
Shooting Movies with Subjects at the Same Size Shown
before Shooting
Pe wovios
Normally, once movie recording begins, the image display area changes
and subjects are enlarged to alow for corection of significant camera
shake. To shoot subjects at the same size shown before shooting, you can
choose not to reduce significant camera shake,
Flow the steps in “Changing the IS
Mode Settings’ (291) to access the
TIS Settings] screen
‘© Choose [Dynamic IS], and then choose
(eo,
Y > oscars 1 sa st ar cos
cue pon ash
™ Switching the Color of Shooting-Screen
Information
Sil images Po Movies
Information dsplayed on the shocting screen and menus can be changed
to a color suitable fr shooting under low-light conditions. Encbling this
setting is useful in modes such as [BY (L166)
+ Press the MENU) button, choose [Night
Display] on tne tb, and then choose
On) (2120),
D © mcosnamenpananmos
Betore Use
Guide
Inder
1 Canora Basics,
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4P
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
92
cantons pode oh mean organ
(aust ee ON
Shooting Movies with Subjects at the Same Size Shown
before Shooting
Pe wovios
Normally, once movie recording begins, the image display area changes
and subjects are enlarged to alow for corection of significant camera
shake. To shoot subjects at the same size shown before shooting, you can
choose not to reduce significant camera shake,
Flow the steps in “Changing the IS
Mode Settings’ (291) to access the
TIS Settings] screen
‘© Choose [Dynamic IS], and then choose
(eo,
Y > oscars 1 sa st ar cos
cue pon ash
™ Switching the Color of Shooting-Screen
Information
Sil images Po Movies
Information dsplayed on the shocting screen and menus can be changed
to a color suitable fr shooting under low-light conditions. Encbling this
setting is useful in modes such as [BY (L166)
+ Press the MENU) button, choose [Night
Display] on tne tb, and then choose
On) (2120),
D © mcosnamenpananmos
Betore Use
Guide
Inder
1 Canora Basics,
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4P
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
92
Specific Shutter Speeds ([Tv] Mode) Beore tse
D Sil images Basie Guide
preferred shutter speed
y fre shocing a flows, The camera
Fer tas on avaible shar Speeds see "Suter Speed 1.107,
1 Enter [Tv] mode. 1 Camera Basics
Set the mode dal to [Tv]
US 2 Setthe sh 4 enano Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode i Fiat ie ih tg ole se wood
fun the (Q} rin shutter speed.
8 Oto tonta es
=
Take smarter, more sophisticated shots, and an
customize the camera for your shooting style
‘Avalable ISO Speed (175)
(AUTO), [125] (3:
SNESEN
6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
CD) + Inconstionsrequrng sower shutter pesos, there maybe a
+ Insructo delay before you can shoot aga, asthe camera processes 8 Sowing Menu.
respective mo: Images toreauce nase,
When shostng at low shutter speeds on atrpod you shold set
IS Mose to (om 320), 9 Accessories
The speed you set may be awered automaticaly as needed tr
ee 10 Appendix
(range play of aperture values when you press the shuts
baton nasway inacates tat the singe deve rom stars
exposure Adust the shuter speed nt tne aperure values Index
fispayedin white, or use safe st (94)
Images sht a RG ISO specs may ack rary.
PE meme a Pil Sha}
changes ne shuter speed #297)
93
D Sil images Basie Guide
preferred shutter speed
y fre shocing a flows, The camera
Fer tas on avaible shar Speeds see "Suter Speed 1.107,
1 Enter [Tv] mode. 1 Camera Basics
Set the mode dal to [Tv]
US 2 Setthe sh 4 enano Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode i Fiat ie ih tg ole se wood
fun the (Q} rin shutter speed.
8 Oto tonta es
=
Take smarter, more sophisticated shots, and an
customize the camera for your shooting style
‘Avalable ISO Speed (175)
(AUTO), [125] (3:
SNESEN
6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
CD) + Inconstionsrequrng sower shutter pesos, there maybe a
+ Insructo delay before you can shoot aga, asthe camera processes 8 Sowing Menu.
respective mo: Images toreauce nase,
When shostng at low shutter speeds on atrpod you shold set
IS Mose to (om 320), 9 Accessories
The speed you set may be awered automaticaly as needed tr
ee 10 Appendix
(range play of aperture values when you press the shuts
baton nasway inacates tat the singe deve rom stars
exposure Adust the shuter speed nt tne aperure values Index
fispayedin white, or use safe st (94)
Images sht a RG ISO specs may ack rary.
PE meme a Pil Sha}
changes ne shuter speed #297)
93
Specific Aperture Values ([Av] Mode)
D> sti Images.
‘Set your preferred aperture value before shooting as follows. The camera.
‘automatically adjusts the shutter speed to suit your aperture value.
For details on available aperture values, see Aperture” (1197),
1 Enter [Av] mode.
e Set the mode dil to [Av].
2 Set the aperture value.
© Tum he (O) ingtoset the aperture
value.
E
put amy roces tte SR eve om Sanar
a
olas eee lis
QO + ¡Am pere ate (sn os opening made y he sin es)
*Toavad exposure prensa (FW a motes os
‘nave comer mata agus to sensor
peru vo, ve en Santa eps cama chase
be obtained. Press the (MENU) button and set (Safety Sn] on
Se EM Lion A,
However Soe Ss dais wren es es,
You can con camera operator e 19) a
changes pero va OT)
Specific Shutter Speeds and Aperture
Values ([M] Mode)
D sult mages
Flow these steps before shocting to set your prefered shutter speed
and aperture value to ott the desired exposure
For deta on avaioble shuter speeds and aperture values, see Shutter
Speed (2197) and Aperture” (D197)
1 Enter IM mode.
«© Setthe mode dalto M
2 Configure the setting.
‘© Tum the [@] ia to set the shutter speed
(1), and tum the [Q)rngto setthe
aperture value (2)
0.
o
(a)
Shutter Speed (Sec) valable ISO Speed (275)
. 1125)
EME 129-5200]
1112000 129 (12600)
(D © arepa spoe ate ah por
Ice ay anar ya ate toon tomase est
+ Sa bris a nun: Gen js sete
Sher sort ae Honor acen ges
remains the same when the flash is up and the mode Is setto [$]
2 Images sh aghiso pe my gary
Betore Use
Basie Guide
1 Camora Basics,
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4 P Mode
6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
Inder
«ba
D> sti Images.
‘Set your preferred aperture value before shooting as follows. The camera.
‘automatically adjusts the shutter speed to suit your aperture value.
For details on available aperture values, see Aperture” (1197),
1 Enter [Av] mode.
e Set the mode dil to [Av].
2 Set the aperture value.
© Tum he (O) ingtoset the aperture
value.
E
put amy roces tte SR eve om Sanar
a
olas eee lis
QO + ¡Am pere ate (sn os opening made y he sin es)
*Toavad exposure prensa (FW a motes os
‘nave comer mata agus to sensor
peru vo, ve en Santa eps cama chase
be obtained. Press the (MENU) button and set (Safety Sn] on
Se EM Lion A,
However Soe Ss dais wren es es,
You can con camera operator e 19) a
changes pero va OT)
Specific Shutter Speeds and Aperture
Values ([M] Mode)
D sult mages
Flow these steps before shocting to set your prefered shutter speed
and aperture value to ott the desired exposure
For deta on avaioble shuter speeds and aperture values, see Shutter
Speed (2197) and Aperture” (D197)
1 Enter IM mode.
«© Setthe mode dalto M
2 Configure the setting.
‘© Tum the [@] ia to set the shutter speed
(1), and tum the [Q)rngto setthe
aperture value (2)
0.
o
(a)
Shutter Speed (Sec) valable ISO Speed (275)
. 1125)
EME 129-5200]
1112000 129 (12600)
(D © arepa spoe ate ah por
Ice ay anar ya ate toon tomase est
+ Sa bris a nun: Gen js sete
Sher sort ae Honor acen ges
remains the same when the flash is up and the mode Is setto [$]
2 Images sh aghiso pe my gary
Betore Use
Basie Guide
1 Camora Basics,
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4 P Mode
6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
Inder
«ba
Y + Mirna
ALSO speeds otter than Lan exposure ev mak) based
on yu specie shut speed and apr abe shown
forconpasn be stand exposures) (1D
dSpapdwnentne deren tom Sansa exposure exces
250m
Calton stand exposie based nte species
meting mean EB).
+ Youeancustomze camera opens tr ming ter
gust he ste speed an umi e (O) alas De
arte abe (den,
™ Adjusting the Flash Output
D suit images
(Choose from the hree flash levels in IM mode.
1 Enter IM) mode.
«She mode dato (MI
2 Specify the flash mode.
‘© Press the (MENU button, choose [Flash
Settings] on the {Gq} tab, and then press
the (6) button (1130).
‘© Press the [a] buttons to choose
[Flash Mode). press the [4)[)] buttons
to choose [Manual], and then press the
IMENU button
3 Configure the setting
+ Raise the flash, press the [P] button and
immediately turn the (to choose the
flash level endthan press ne [@) ton
Once he setingis complete, the Nash
CADA levis played
Bl Minimum, (Bild: Medium, BA.
tasa
‘You can aso ste ash vel y accessing MENU (220)
and cc tab » [Flash Settings] > [Flash Cute
‘You can also se the flash level in (TV or AVI mode by
accessing MENU (C220) an choosing ION 1 »> Flash
Setings]» [Flash Mose] » [Manual
You can aso access re [Flash Seting] MENU screen (30)
nen ess up y pressing te Dj tuton and immediately
pressing ne MENU) tuson.
You can aso access re [Flash Seting] MENU screen (130)
by presi ne (p buten anatoucning ME)
Betore Use
Guide
Inder
1 Canora Basics,
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4 Prode
(6 Playback Modo.
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
4/»/9
95
ALSO speeds otter than Lan exposure ev mak) based
on yu specie shut speed and apr abe shown
forconpasn be stand exposures) (1D
dSpapdwnentne deren tom Sansa exposure exces
250m
Calton stand exposie based nte species
meting mean EB).
+ Youeancustomze camera opens tr ming ter
gust he ste speed an umi e (O) alas De
arte abe (den,
™ Adjusting the Flash Output
D suit images
(Choose from the hree flash levels in IM mode.
1 Enter IM) mode.
«She mode dato (MI
2 Specify the flash mode.
‘© Press the (MENU button, choose [Flash
Settings] on the {Gq} tab, and then press
the (6) button (1130).
‘© Press the [a] buttons to choose
[Flash Mode). press the [4)[)] buttons
to choose [Manual], and then press the
IMENU button
3 Configure the setting
+ Raise the flash, press the [P] button and
immediately turn the (to choose the
flash level endthan press ne [@) ton
Once he setingis complete, the Nash
CADA levis played
Bl Minimum, (Bild: Medium, BA.
tasa
‘You can aso ste ash vel y accessing MENU (220)
and cc tab » [Flash Settings] > [Flash Cute
‘You can also se the flash level in (TV or AVI mode by
accessing MENU (C220) an choosing ION 1 »> Flash
Setings]» [Flash Mose] » [Manual
You can aso access re [Flash Seting] MENU screen (30)
nen ess up y pressing te Dj tuton and immediately
pressing ne MENU) tuson.
You can aso access re [Flash Seting] MENU screen (130)
by presi ne (p buten anatoucning ME)
Betore Use
Guide
Inder
1 Canora Basics,
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4 Prode
(6 Playback Modo.
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
4/»/9
95
Recording Movies at Specific Shutter
Speeds and Aperture Valu
De Movies.
‘Set your preferred shutter speed, aperture value, and1SO speed
For details on available shutter speeds, aperture values, and ISO speeds,
see" Shutter Speed (197), Aperture (21197), and “Changing the
ISO Speed (C1175).
1 Enter Pt] mode.
1 Set the mode dal to PR
‘© Press the (@) button, choose PA in the
menu, and then choose a (1129).
2 Configure the settings.
‘© Tum the [6) dia to set the shutter speed,
‘© Tum the (Q) ring to set the aperture value
‘© Press the (@) button, choose [JR] in the
menu, and choose the desired eption
(es).
QO + wand, exposure evel mak moves when the sruterbuton
is essed rana ronge een ome standard
posi ve
+ win seüngs te ran an eoposur ee ma based on
Yu species ste speed and aero Va shown for
Comparsonote sansa exposure ev
™ Setup via Touch Operations
‘Set your preferred shutter speed, aperture value, and SO speed using
touch operatons. Setings can also be adusted during recording
© Touch (8) (0), or FHAUTO) on the
screen, andthen touch [4](D] to specty
VA
ra ta een eng ana
[ES
D > setae arcos noO sa
{0} rng.
AY) + Exposure cante locked before er amg ecercng by touring
DE
+ Focus can be locked tring recorang by touring AFL MIs
then displayed
Betore Use
Basie Guide
1 Camora Basics,
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4 P Mode
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
Inder
«ba
Speeds and Aperture Valu
De Movies.
‘Set your preferred shutter speed, aperture value, and1SO speed
For details on available shutter speeds, aperture values, and ISO speeds,
see" Shutter Speed (197), Aperture (21197), and “Changing the
ISO Speed (C1175).
1 Enter Pt] mode.
1 Set the mode dal to PR
‘© Press the (@) button, choose PA in the
menu, and then choose a (1129).
2 Configure the settings.
‘© Tum the [6) dia to set the shutter speed,
‘© Tum the (Q) ring to set the aperture value
‘© Press the (@) button, choose [JR] in the
menu, and choose the desired eption
(es).
QO + wand, exposure evel mak moves when the sruterbuton
is essed rana ronge een ome standard
posi ve
+ win seüngs te ran an eoposur ee ma based on
Yu species ste speed and aero Va shown for
Comparsonote sansa exposure ev
™ Setup via Touch Operations
‘Set your preferred shutter speed, aperture value, and SO speed using
touch operatons. Setings can also be adusted during recording
© Touch (8) (0), or FHAUTO) on the
screen, andthen touch [4](D] to specty
VA
ra ta een eng ana
[ES
D > setae arcos noO sa
{0} rng.
AY) + Exposure cante locked before er amg ecercng by touring
DE
+ Focus can be locked tring recorang by touring AFL MIs
then displayed
Betore Use
Basie Guide
1 Camora Basics,
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4 P Mode
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
Inder
«ba
Customi Functions Assignable to the Control Ring Bere Uso
Functions you can assign tothe contr ring vary depending on shooting
. mo ario eres deme v ines yccncs | A
Changing Control Ring Settings tothe control del
Dil Images. Di ‘om ang Mode
Reassgn contol ng functions a follows. Using the control ng s an AV Tv P TE
ee cae en espe ey nena coma UN - rs
1 Choose a function to assign tothe SWS = = E 2 Auto Mode
Choose SR oso
0 E) 1S0 150
Pres th atan, 8 Oe Shooting Modes
m e| Tv =
‘© Choose an option, either by pressing the MENROM| Focus manuaty nen ei
RE] or [JU] buttons or by turning the E 0 | Correctwhite balance (1179) F
(Oi ing or @ ai + = "
+ Press the [8) button to complete the 200M Perform step zooming (41)
setting. a © | Configure dynamic range (077) 6 Playback Mode
© | 0 | Enatie or disable shadow correction (1178) 7 WF: Functions
2 Configure the assigned function. El | 0 | Adust the aspect ratio (148)
Tun the (0) mg othe (6) cal to | sin funcions ss desir 8 soning Menu
configure the assigned function, € fasion fonctions ss desi (ERBEN
2 150.150 speed (C275) ME manual fois (61) e suter Te
speed (ASS). Av: aperture value (194).
" + Ven yoo ass ME 18 crf te m
ee eee Senne PM A a a
toveting an option to choose it, and entauching again,
9 - testo Gina nanenmions ae AE
ne euret shang moc or under ure fuetin contes
«+The Q)rg canbe secte step zooming AUTO) (SCN. er
move mode RAM).
+ M mode, you can assign peru vals or sruterspeea
agustmentto the ing 4» 3
97
Functions you can assign tothe contr ring vary depending on shooting
. mo ario eres deme v ines yccncs | A
Changing Control Ring Settings tothe control del
Dil Images. Di ‘om ang Mode
Reassgn contol ng functions a follows. Using the control ng s an AV Tv P TE
ee cae en espe ey nena coma UN - rs
1 Choose a function to assign tothe SWS = = E 2 Auto Mode
Choose SR oso
0 E) 1S0 150
Pres th atan, 8 Oe Shooting Modes
m e| Tv =
‘© Choose an option, either by pressing the MENROM| Focus manuaty nen ei
RE] or [JU] buttons or by turning the E 0 | Correctwhite balance (1179) F
(Oi ing or @ ai + = "
+ Press the [8) button to complete the 200M Perform step zooming (41)
setting. a © | Configure dynamic range (077) 6 Playback Mode
© | 0 | Enatie or disable shadow correction (1178) 7 WF: Functions
2 Configure the assigned function. El | 0 | Adust the aspect ratio (148)
Tun the (0) mg othe (6) cal to | sin funcions ss desir 8 soning Menu
configure the assigned function, € fasion fonctions ss desi (ERBEN
2 150.150 speed (C275) ME manual fois (61) e suter Te
speed (ASS). Av: aperture value (194).
" + Ven yoo ass ME 18 crf te m
ee eee Senne PM A a a
toveting an option to choose it, and entauching again,
9 - testo Gina nanenmions ae AE
ne euret shang moc or under ure fuetin contes
«+The Q)rg canbe secte step zooming AUTO) (SCN. er
move mode RAM).
+ M mode, you can assign peru vals or sruterspeea
agustmentto the ing 4» 3
97
Assigning Functions to the Control Ring
™ Using the Control Ring for Adjustment
D Süil images D> Movies
Assign functions to he contol ring based on each shooting made
1 Choose [CL
‘© Following step 1 in “Changing Contrat
Ring Settings” (2197), choose [CI and
press the MENU) button.
2 Configure the setting.
Press the [4](»] buttons or tum the (8)
dial to choose the shooting mode wath
functions to assign
‘© Press the [aw] buttons or tum the [Q)
ring to choose a function to assign to the
control ring (1)
‘© Functions you can assign to the control
dial willbe updated automatically.
‘© Press the MENU button to return to the
shooting screen,
“Wp + Youcanatso access the seting screen by choosing IC] and
touching EI} step 1 of Changing Corra Ring Sets
(Ban,
+ Ontne setng screen, you can aso contigure he funcions
‘ssgnedto the corral ng by ouching e functions aná ten
Lu]
D Sil Images
You can turn the control ing for instant adustment of ISO speed, shutter
speed, and aperture value, as you touch the screen to switch between
these tems
+ Touch the right edge (inthe area outined,
inthis example) to vien menu tems, dag
Up or down fo choose an tem, andturn
the () ng to speciy a valve
Available setting tems vary by shooting mode, Nate thet the functions
assigned to the control ring (£1197) are not displayed in (MI, [Av], and
vi modes.
M Av Tv P
iso 150 iso 10
Tv Ar Tv
Au
+ 1SO:1SO speed (P1175); Tv: shutter speed (E1193), Av: aperture
value (£0194,
Betore Use
Guide
Inder
1 Canora Basics,
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4 P Mode
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
™ Using the Control Ring for Adjustment
D Süil images D> Movies
Assign functions to he contol ring based on each shooting made
1 Choose [CL
‘© Following step 1 in “Changing Contrat
Ring Settings” (2197), choose [CI and
press the MENU) button.
2 Configure the setting.
Press the [4](»] buttons or tum the (8)
dial to choose the shooting mode wath
functions to assign
‘© Press the [aw] buttons or tum the [Q)
ring to choose a function to assign to the
control ring (1)
‘© Functions you can assign to the control
dial willbe updated automatically.
‘© Press the MENU button to return to the
shooting screen,
“Wp + Youcanatso access the seting screen by choosing IC] and
touching EI} step 1 of Changing Corra Ring Sets
(Ban,
+ Ontne setng screen, you can aso contigure he funcions
‘ssgnedto the corral ng by ouching e functions aná ten
Lu]
D Sil Images
You can turn the control ing for instant adustment of ISO speed, shutter
speed, and aperture value, as you touch the screen to switch between
these tems
+ Touch the right edge (inthe area outined,
inthis example) to vien menu tems, dag
Up or down fo choose an tem, andturn
the () ng to speciy a valve
Available setting tems vary by shooting mode, Nate thet the functions
assigned to the control ring (£1197) are not displayed in (MI, [Av], and
vi modes.
M Av Tv P
iso 150 iso 10
Tv Ar Tv
Au
+ 1SO:1SO speed (P1175); Tv: shutter speed (E1193), Av: aperture
value (£0194,
Betore Use
Guide
Inder
1 Canora Basics,
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4 P Mode
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
™ Customizing Display Information
D>Süilimages D Movies
‘Set the number of custom displays (£1126) and what information is
displayed in each display when the [w] button is pressed in shooting
1 Access the setting screen.
‘© Press the MENU button, choose
[Custom Display] on the [Y tab, and
then press the (6) button (E1430),
2 Configure the setting.
e Press the [AI VID buttons ortum
the [O] dial to choose an tem, and then
press the (@) button. Items you choose
for display are labeled wth [Y]
e Selected items (labeled witha (Y) wll
beiincludedin display
Shooting nto [Displays shooting information (22179)
Grdlines — [Displays areference gra
Blecvonic Level | Displays the electronic level (2150),
Displays a histogram (11105) in MB. (Avi. (Tv),
PLP, CH) and ig modes
Histogram
(D + sang mantoe sans ryoupess me sur tuto ratmoy
ns im be song seen nm Do estan say seta
Grau ems em aloe pee, tay may nae
Sa none soning moses
JD + sa nes ae not recorded in your sts
A van ame ante to spy y
Betore Use
Guide
™ Assigning Functions to Buttons
reine Done LT
You can quickly and easly activate functions that you assign tothe PRÉ or
movie button,
À Access the setting screen.
+ Press the MENU) button, choose [Set
38 button] or (Set "FR button] on the
ON tab, and then press the [@] button
oo).
2 Configure the setting.
© Press the [a][w]I4][D] buttons or tum.
the (0) da to choose a function to
‘assign, and then press the [@) button
3 Use the assigned function as needed.
‘© To activate an assigned function, press
the button you assigneditto.
Inder
1 Canora Basics,
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4 P Mode
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
99
D>Süilimages D Movies
‘Set the number of custom displays (£1126) and what information is
displayed in each display when the [w] button is pressed in shooting
1 Access the setting screen.
‘© Press the MENU button, choose
[Custom Display] on the [Y tab, and
then press the (6) button (E1430),
2 Configure the setting.
e Press the [AI VID buttons ortum
the [O] dial to choose an tem, and then
press the (@) button. Items you choose
for display are labeled wth [Y]
e Selected items (labeled witha (Y) wll
beiincludedin display
Shooting nto [Displays shooting information (22179)
Grdlines — [Displays areference gra
Blecvonic Level | Displays the electronic level (2150),
Displays a histogram (11105) in MB. (Avi. (Tv),
PLP, CH) and ig modes
Histogram
(D + sang mantoe sans ryoupess me sur tuto ratmoy
ns im be song seen nm Do estan say seta
Grau ems em aloe pee, tay may nae
Sa none soning moses
JD + sa nes ae not recorded in your sts
A van ame ante to spy y
Betore Use
Guide
™ Assigning Functions to Buttons
reine Done LT
You can quickly and easly activate functions that you assign tothe PRÉ or
movie button,
À Access the setting screen.
+ Press the MENU) button, choose [Set
38 button] or (Set "FR button] on the
ON tab, and then press the [@] button
oo).
2 Configure the setting.
© Press the [a][w]I4][D] buttons or tum.
the (0) da to choose a function to
‘assign, and then press the [@) button
3 Use the assigned function as needed.
‘© To activate an assigned function, press
the button you assigneditto.
Inder
1 Canora Basics,
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4 P Mode
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
99
+ Torestae dtautsetngs, ose EI Set A. vuton] ans
TES baton)
+ Icons bete win acte trattne funcions pt aval in
the ce snoaing mode o under curentfunctn conations.
+ Win (E, youcan move andres the AF ame by pressing tne
(RA buton in| pont) AF tame mode (ss, 84).
+ Wt jo LS), ch press ofthe asigne but record
te lance data (79), andthe we balance setting
‘changes to or Là
+ Wan{AFL), eae press of ne atsgnes buon aduss and lots
the focus. (AFL's then dsplayed.
‘Win al pressing tne assigned buton dsactvaes screen
spy T restore me spay oo any tre talon.
Pres any bition other ranthe power buton
Hala te camera another onentaton
(pan ar cose the creen
Ras orlowertre as
You can sl record moves (8%), PRR. e la? mode even
[you assign a funcion to e mode bition,
+ Youcanalso conique seings by toucing a desea option ana
thentouchngit gal r touch (EI
Customizing the FUNC. Menu
(FUNC. Menu Layout)
The display of FUNC. menu items can be customized. Functions not
shown on this menu willbe avalable on the (EM tb of the menu screen,
™ Choosing Items to Include in the Menu
D> Still Images > Movies
1 Access the setting screen
+ ress the MENU button, choose
IFUNC. Menu Layout] on the HAY tab,
andthen press the (6) button (L130).
2 Choose icons to include in the menu.
+ Press the [a][w]I4][D] buttons or tum.
the (0) dal and then press the (8)
button to choose icons to include in the
FUNC. menu. Selected icons are marked
with lv)
e Selecteditems (labeled with a [/1) wil
be included in display
© items without a (Y/] will be available on
the [BY] tab of the menu screen.
3 Configure the setting.
‘© Press the MENU button, choose [OK]
(either press the (4][P] buttons or tum the
10) cia), and then press the (©) button.
Inder
Betore Use
Basie Guide
1 Camora Basics,
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4 P Mode
6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
100
TES baton)
+ Icons bete win acte trattne funcions pt aval in
the ce snoaing mode o under curentfunctn conations.
+ Win (E, youcan move andres the AF ame by pressing tne
(RA buton in| pont) AF tame mode (ss, 84).
+ Wt jo LS), ch press ofthe asigne but record
te lance data (79), andthe we balance setting
‘changes to or Là
+ Wan{AFL), eae press of ne atsgnes buon aduss and lots
the focus. (AFL's then dsplayed.
‘Win al pressing tne assigned buton dsactvaes screen
spy T restore me spay oo any tre talon.
Pres any bition other ranthe power buton
Hala te camera another onentaton
(pan ar cose the creen
Ras orlowertre as
You can sl record moves (8%), PRR. e la? mode even
[you assign a funcion to e mode bition,
+ Youcanalso conique seings by toucing a desea option ana
thentouchngit gal r touch (EI
Customizing the FUNC. Menu
(FUNC. Menu Layout)
The display of FUNC. menu items can be customized. Functions not
shown on this menu willbe avalable on the (EM tb of the menu screen,
™ Choosing Items to Include in the Menu
D> Still Images > Movies
1 Access the setting screen
+ ress the MENU button, choose
IFUNC. Menu Layout] on the HAY tab,
andthen press the (6) button (L130).
2 Choose icons to include in the menu.
+ Press the [a][w]I4][D] buttons or tum.
the (0) dal and then press the (8)
button to choose icons to include in the
FUNC. menu. Selected icons are marked
with lv)
e Selecteditems (labeled with a [/1) wil
be included in display
© items without a (Y/] will be available on
the [BY] tab of the menu screen.
3 Configure the setting.
‘© Press the MENU button, choose [OK]
(either press the (4][P] buttons or tum the
10) cia), and then press the (©) button.
Inder
Betore Use
Basie Guide
1 Camora Basics,
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4 P Mode
6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
100
© + me sement ananote reses isn come
18) buton when the FUNC. menu is displayed.
«Hens tyouremove fom ere menu oto My Meru
(en snotenanotome FUN: men jane
reve omy Mem
Rearranging Menu Items
1 Access the setting screen.
On the scaen in step 2 of Choosing
Items to Include in the Menu” (£21100).
press the [i] button.
Presse 18) e (D button to choose an
icontomove, Press ne (al tons
or un the (dal to choose the new
Poston, an on rai er
on
2 Configure the setting.
‘© Press the (MENU button, choose [OK]
(einer press the [€)[D] buttons or tum the
[6] cia), and then press the (@ button.
™ Saving Shooting Settings
D sill Images
‘Save commonly used shooting modes and your configured function
settings for reuse. To access saved settings later, simply tum the mode
dal to (Cl. Even setings that are usually eared when you Switch
shooting modes or tum the camera off (such as sel.timer settings) can be
retained this way,
Settings that can be saved
+ Shostng mode (PI. (Ti. AW). IM)
+ Items set in (PJ, [Tv]. [Av]. or IM] modes (174-194)
+ Snoaing menu setings
+ Zoom psions
+ Manua fous pestions (2)
2 My Menu setings (21102)
1 Enter a shooting mode with settings,
you want to save, and change the
settings as desired.
2 Configure the setting.
e Press the MENU] button, choose [Save
‘Setings} onthe (KN) tab, and then press
the (@) button
3 Save the settings.
‘© Press the (€)[D] buttons or tum the (9)
dal to choose [OK], and then press the
fl button
Betore Use
Guide
Inder
1 Canora Basics,
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4 P Mode
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
101
18) buton when the FUNC. menu is displayed.
«Hens tyouremove fom ere menu oto My Meru
(en snotenanotome FUN: men jane
reve omy Mem
Rearranging Menu Items
1 Access the setting screen.
On the scaen in step 2 of Choosing
Items to Include in the Menu” (£21100).
press the [i] button.
Presse 18) e (D button to choose an
icontomove, Press ne (al tons
or un the (dal to choose the new
Poston, an on rai er
on
2 Configure the setting.
‘© Press the (MENU button, choose [OK]
(einer press the [€)[D] buttons or tum the
[6] cia), and then press the (@ button.
™ Saving Shooting Settings
D sill Images
‘Save commonly used shooting modes and your configured function
settings for reuse. To access saved settings later, simply tum the mode
dal to (Cl. Even setings that are usually eared when you Switch
shooting modes or tum the camera off (such as sel.timer settings) can be
retained this way,
Settings that can be saved
+ Shostng mode (PI. (Ti. AW). IM)
+ Items set in (PJ, [Tv]. [Av]. or IM] modes (174-194)
+ Snoaing menu setings
+ Zoom psions
+ Manua fous pestions (2)
2 My Menu setings (21102)
1 Enter a shooting mode with settings,
you want to save, and change the
settings as desired.
2 Configure the setting.
e Press the MENU] button, choose [Save
‘Setings} onthe (KN) tab, and then press
the (@) button
3 Save the settings.
‘© Press the (€)[D] buttons or tum the (9)
dal to choose [OK], and then press the
fl button
Betore Use
Guide
Inder
1 Canora Basics,
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4 P Mode
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
101
© treat sae sets (ecstner snoring mote ann IC
Changs sigs ann pen 23 Tete ng
San ane st oe,
+ To clear information you have saved to (C) and restore default
‘valves, tute made dato (Cana choose (Reset A (2157).
™ Saving Commonly Used Shooting Menu Items
(My Menu)
D Suit images Po Movies
You can save up to fe commonly used shooting menu tems on the [ke]
tab. By customizing the [x] tab, you can access to these tems quickly
from a single screen,
1 Access the setting screen
‘© Press the MENU button, choose (My
Menu seins on ne eben ten
press the (@) button (1130)
2 Configure the setting.
Press the [AY] buttons or turn the [4
dial to choose (Select items}, and then
press the (@) button.
‘© Choose up to five menu items to save
(either press the [auf] buttons or turn the
[6 dal), and then press the (®) button.
e[V]is dsplayed.
‘© To cancel saving, press the [6] button,
[v/s no longer displayed
+ Press the MENU button
3 Rearrange menu items, as needed,
© Press the [a][w] buttons or tun the (@]
da to choose [Sort], and then press the
(8 button
‘© Choose a menu item to move (either
press the [a] buttons or turn the [@]
a), andthen press the [@) button
© Press the [a]fw] buttons or turn the (@]
dl o change the order, and then press
the (@) button
+ Press the MENU] button
rayas at tems instep 2 can aso be space, butthey may
rnc be aulatle in some stating modes
Tomate My Meru Inmedatey access by pressing he
IMENUjbiton in snocing mode, choose [Se default vien] and
press te (D butns to choose [ves]
(onthe [Seta tems] screen for saving or clarin ems, you can
asotauen ems to secte
‘onthe [Sar screen, you can aso cag tems to change the
say onder
Betore Use
Basie Guide
1 Camora Basics,
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4 P Mode
6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
Inder
«ba
102
Changs sigs ann pen 23 Tete ng
San ane st oe,
+ To clear information you have saved to (C) and restore default
‘valves, tute made dato (Cana choose (Reset A (2157).
™ Saving Commonly Used Shooting Menu Items
(My Menu)
D Suit images Po Movies
You can save up to fe commonly used shooting menu tems on the [ke]
tab. By customizing the [x] tab, you can access to these tems quickly
from a single screen,
1 Access the setting screen
‘© Press the MENU button, choose (My
Menu seins on ne eben ten
press the (@) button (1130)
2 Configure the setting.
Press the [AY] buttons or turn the [4
dial to choose (Select items}, and then
press the (@) button.
‘© Choose up to five menu items to save
(either press the [auf] buttons or turn the
[6 dal), and then press the (®) button.
e[V]is dsplayed.
‘© To cancel saving, press the [6] button,
[v/s no longer displayed
+ Press the MENU button
3 Rearrange menu items, as needed,
© Press the [a][w] buttons or tun the (@]
da to choose [Sort], and then press the
(8 button
‘© Choose a menu item to move (either
press the [a] buttons or turn the [@]
a), andthen press the [@) button
© Press the [a]fw] buttons or turn the (@]
dl o change the order, and then press
the (@) button
+ Press the MENU] button
rayas at tems instep 2 can aso be space, butthey may
rnc be aulatle in some stating modes
Tomate My Meru Inmedatey access by pressing he
IMENUjbiton in snocing mode, choose [Se default vien] and
press te (D butns to choose [ves]
(onthe [Seta tems] screen for saving or clarin ems, you can
asotauen ems to secte
‘onthe [Sar screen, you can aso cag tems to change the
say onder
Betore Use
Basie Guide
1 Camora Basics,
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4 P Mode
6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
Inder
«ba
102
Playback Mode
Have fun reviewing your shots, and browse or edit
them in many ways
+ To prepare the camera for these operations, press the [EI]
button to enter Playback mode.
Itmay notbe possible to playback or ect mages that were
renamed or ae ested en à computer, or images rom oer
Viewing
Sill Images D> Movies
Alter shooting images or movie, you can view them an the screen as follows
Enter Playback mode.
Press the [EI] button
Your last shots displayed
2 Browse through your images.
o view the previcus image, press
the [4]button or turn the (@ dal
counterciocimise, To
the [PJ but
rss and hold the [4J(»] buttons to
browse through images quichy
To access ths screen (Sol Display made)
tu ) dal rapidly inthis made, tum
the (0) dal to browse thraugh images.
To mage ess
press the [af] buttons in Scroll
Display made
Movies are identified by a [ERP] icon
To play movies, goto step à
Betore Use
Basie
ue
1 Camera Basics,
Auto Mode
2 Hybrid Auto Mode
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4 P Mode
5 Taya, and C Modo
Inder
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
9 Accessories
10 Appendix
103
Have fun reviewing your shots, and browse or edit
them in many ways
+ To prepare the camera for these operations, press the [EI]
button to enter Playback mode.
Itmay notbe possible to playback or ect mages that were
renamed or ae ested en à computer, or images rom oer
Viewing
Sill Images D> Movies
Alter shooting images or movie, you can view them an the screen as follows
Enter Playback mode.
Press the [EI] button
Your last shots displayed
2 Browse through your images.
o view the previcus image, press
the [4]button or turn the (@ dal
counterciocimise, To
the [PJ but
rss and hold the [4J(»] buttons to
browse through images quichy
To access ths screen (Sol Display made)
tu ) dal rapidly inthis made, tum
the (0) dal to browse thraugh images.
To mage ess
press the [af] buttons in Scroll
Display made
Movies are identified by a [ERP] icon
To play movies, goto step à
Betore Use
Basie
ue
1 Camera Basics,
Auto Mode
2 Hybrid Auto Mode
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4 P Mode
5 Taya, and C Modo
Inder
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
9 Accessories
10 Appendix
103
3 Play movies. Touch-Screen Operations Bor Uso
+ To start playback press the (8) button to
aceras tho movie contol pana, choose
[>] (either press the [4][}] buttons or
{un the (@ da), anc ton press the (9)
button again
+ To view the next image, drag lft across
the screen, and to view the previous
“= Le
1 Camera Basics,
Basie Guide
Adjust the volume.
‘© Press the [AY] buttons to adjust the
volume + To access Sort Display made, que —
raptor ght repeated, 2 ye te Modo
Toads th volme when the volume ki
indicator (1) is no longer displayed, press ARR RER foes RR ae
Inet (1) 1 ro longer payed, pr Deplay mode by raging et ht 3 OnerSrooim Mages
Touring th central mage wil restore
(1) 5 Pause playback rote mage ey. à Pe
à Te pause or resume payback, pres he + Tobrowse mages grouped by shooting
pro nn enr rors
‘© After the movie is finished, (BHP is wn,
aspayes D 7 |
Pet ong” tS
oat the volume ding movie
anna ren naa on Pr mes js 7 ventanas
re Ba iy ng do cs
+ Todeactvate Scrol Display, choose MENU (30) > (LEN ab the screen. Sn
> [Scroll Display] »> (OM. + To stop playback, touch the screen. Deia
ASE treo perce The stoon alts Gp andthe
trode owe MENU 6239 > BI > Resume] Las. Camera ead oyo nom operate, EZ
Anna ‘© Touch [m] to display the volume panel,
© To hänge I tianallon shown born lagos, ascose MENU and then touch [a.)[w] to adjust the 10 Appendix
AS A a
un To switch frames, touch the scrolbar or Index
rag lft o right.
+ To resume playback, touch 1}
+ Touch [9] 0 retum tothe screen in step
201 Viewing’ (21103)
«ba
104
+ To start playback press the (8) button to
aceras tho movie contol pana, choose
[>] (either press the [4][}] buttons or
{un the (@ da), anc ton press the (9)
button again
+ To view the next image, drag lft across
the screen, and to view the previous
“= Le
1 Camera Basics,
Basie Guide
Adjust the volume.
‘© Press the [AY] buttons to adjust the
volume + To access Sort Display made, que —
raptor ght repeated, 2 ye te Modo
Toads th volme when the volume ki
indicator (1) is no longer displayed, press ARR RER foes RR ae
Inet (1) 1 ro longer payed, pr Deplay mode by raging et ht 3 OnerSrooim Mages
Touring th central mage wil restore
(1) 5 Pause playback rote mage ey. à Pe
à Te pause or resume payback, pres he + Tobrowse mages grouped by shooting
pro nn enr rors
‘© After the movie is finished, (BHP is wn,
aspayes D 7 |
Pet ong” tS
oat the volume ding movie
anna ren naa on Pr mes js 7 ventanas
re Ba iy ng do cs
+ Todeactvate Scrol Display, choose MENU (30) > (LEN ab the screen. Sn
> [Scroll Display] »> (OM. + To stop playback, touch the screen. Deia
ASE treo perce The stoon alts Gp andthe
trode owe MENU 6239 > BI > Resume] Las. Camera ead oyo nom operate, EZ
Anna ‘© Touch [m] to display the volume panel,
© To hänge I tianallon shown born lagos, ascose MENU and then touch [a.)[w] to adjust the 10 Appendix
AS A a
un To switch frames, touch the scrolbar or Index
rag lft o right.
+ To resume playback, touch 1}
+ Touch [9] 0 retum tothe screen in step
201 Viewing’ (21103)
«ba
104
™ Switching Display Modes Overexposure Warning (for Image Highlights) Betore Use
D>Süilimages D Movies D suit images Do Movies
Press the (w] button to view other information on the screen, orto hide Washed-out highlights in the image flash on the screen in detailed
the information, For details on he information displayed, see "Playback information spay (511105)
(stalled Information Display)" (1180).
Basie Guide
Histogram
D siii images e movies 1 Camera asics
+ The gaph in detaled information display
No Information Display (£11105) is a histogram showing the 2 aaa Mode
distrbution of trighiness inthe mage
‘The honzental ads represents te degree pee
of brighness, nd ne verical ads, how a
much of te image is at each level of
brighiness.Viewng the histograms a 4 Pode
way to check exposure
‘Simple information Display «The histogram can aso be accessed
while shocking (HAS9 £2179), Dee ser)
AGB Histogram, GPS Information Display AZ
> Sil Images Do Movies
+ The RGB histogrem shows the
distribution of shades of red, green, and
blue in an image. The horizontal axis
represents R, G, or Ebrighiness, andthe
Vetted axis, how much ofthe mage is. 9 Accessories
hat level of brightness. Viewing tis,
Pistogram enables you to check mage
7 WiFi Functions
Detaled Information Display
8 Sowing Menu.
RGB Histogram, GPS information coor characters. 10 Arona
Display + Using a smatphone connected the
camera via Wei, you con gectag mages index
tn tne camera adting information such
$2 laude longue end etveon
(611147), You can review this information
Inme GeSinfomaton dpa,
Lettuce, longtide,sevaton and UTC
(Shoctng date and te) ae ite om «ba
{optobston
105
D>Süilimages D Movies D suit images Do Movies
Press the (w] button to view other information on the screen, orto hide Washed-out highlights in the image flash on the screen in detailed
the information, For details on he information displayed, see "Playback information spay (511105)
(stalled Information Display)" (1180).
Basie Guide
Histogram
D siii images e movies 1 Camera asics
+ The gaph in detaled information display
No Information Display (£11105) is a histogram showing the 2 aaa Mode
distrbution of trighiness inthe mage
‘The honzental ads represents te degree pee
of brighness, nd ne verical ads, how a
much of te image is at each level of
brighiness.Viewng the histograms a 4 Pode
way to check exposure
‘Simple information Display «The histogram can aso be accessed
while shocking (HAS9 £2179), Dee ser)
AGB Histogram, GPS Information Display AZ
> Sil Images Do Movies
+ The RGB histogrem shows the
distribution of shades of red, green, and
blue in an image. The horizontal axis
represents R, G, or Ebrighiness, andthe
Vetted axis, how much ofthe mage is. 9 Accessories
hat level of brightness. Viewing tis,
Pistogram enables you to check mage
7 WiFi Functions
Detaled Information Display
8 Sowing Menu.
RGB Histogram, GPS information coor characters. 10 Arona
Display + Using a smatphone connected the
camera via Wei, you con gectag mages index
tn tne camera adting information such
$2 laude longue end etveon
(611147), You can review this information
Inme GeSinfomaton dpa,
Lettuce, longtide,sevaton and UTC
(Shoctng date and te) ae ite om «ba
{optobston
105
© + is omiso naerctvatestor tons rotate
yo marae orten seo cn
D > une Canänsedunena ese em m
Semin ie
«Gesamte nae te
Sonam
+ Youcan aso suit between the RGB histogram (il Images
or and GPS infomation play by eraggng he lower ai ot
the screen pra or dowrmard in tale nom ao spay.
E Viewing Short Movies Created When Shooting
Still Images (Digest Movies)
DP Movies
View digest movies recorded automatically in (a mode (C1126) on a
day of stil mage shooting as follows.
M 1 Choose an image.
Choose a stil image ebeled with
{a9 ond press the (69) button.
cm
7 2 Pray the movie
Press tho HD] buttons or tum te 16)
dial to choose [OK]
+ The movie recorded automaticaly onthe
day of sti image shooting is payed back
from the beginning,
+ Aner amomert, EERE wit no longer be displayed when
You ae sing the camera wih nfommaton display deacbvates
Bros,
+ Youcan aso pay dgest moves by touching EHER en ne
sereenin step 1 and touching [CK] one screen in stp 2
Viewing by Date
Digest movies can be viewed by date
1 Choose a movie.
«© Press the MENU] buton, choose [is
Play Digest Movies] on ine (EJ) eb, and
then choose a date (F120,
2 Play the movie
‘© Press the (@) button to start playback
Betore Use
Basie Guide
1 Camora Basics,
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4 P Mode
5 Taya, and C Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
Inder
«>4
106
yo marae orten seo cn
D > une Canänsedunena ese em m
Semin ie
«Gesamte nae te
Sonam
+ Youcan aso suit between the RGB histogram (il Images
or and GPS infomation play by eraggng he lower ai ot
the screen pra or dowrmard in tale nom ao spay.
E Viewing Short Movies Created When Shooting
Still Images (Digest Movies)
DP Movies
View digest movies recorded automatically in (a mode (C1126) on a
day of stil mage shooting as follows.
M 1 Choose an image.
Choose a stil image ebeled with
{a9 ond press the (69) button.
cm
7 2 Pray the movie
Press tho HD] buttons or tum te 16)
dial to choose [OK]
+ The movie recorded automaticaly onthe
day of sti image shooting is payed back
from the beginning,
+ Aner amomert, EERE wit no longer be displayed when
You ae sing the camera wih nfommaton display deacbvates
Bros,
+ Youcan aso pay dgest moves by touching EHER en ne
sereenin step 1 and touching [CK] one screen in stp 2
Viewing by Date
Digest movies can be viewed by date
1 Choose a movie.
«© Press the MENU] buton, choose [is
Play Digest Movies] on ine (EJ) eb, and
then choose a date (F120,
2 Play the movie
‘© Press the (@) button to start playback
Betore Use
Basie Guide
1 Camora Basics,
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4 P Mode
5 Taya, and C Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
Inder
«>4
106
™ Checking People Detected in Face ID
D> sii images
ityou sich the camerao simple information display made (01105)
the names of pto fue detected people regstered in Face ID (las)
vil be dspiayed
Press the [w] button several times unt
simple information display is activated
‘and then press the (4](p] buttons or tum
the (@) dia to choose an mage
Names wil be displayed on detected
people
+ poupee nt to have names csptayed on images she using
Face1D, choose MENU (C2430) » [[E]) tab > [Face ID Info}
(Name Display >» [ot
wsing and Filterin:
™ Navigating through Images in an Index
> Sil images. Po Movies
By displaying multiple images in an index, you can quichy fnathe images
you ar looking for
1 Display images in an index.
‘© Move the zoom lever toward [ER] to
‘display images in an index. Moving the
lever again wil increase the number of
images shown.
‘© To display fewer images, move the zoom
lever toward [QJ. Fewer images are
‘shown each time you move the lever
2 Choose an image.
‘© Tum the [@] dia to scroll through the
images.
+ Press he [AJ[wI[4][»] buttons to choose
an image.
‘© An orange frame is displayed around the
selected mage.
‘© Press the (8) button to view the selected
image in single-image display,
+ To deactivate the 30 aspay eect shown ya old down he
[ary butons or tun ne (8) dal rapa), choose MENU
(C30) » (BE) 220 » ix Erect» (om
Betore Use
Basie Guide
1 Camora Basics,
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4 P Mode
5 Taya, and C Modo
Inder
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
4/»/9
107
D> sii images
ityou sich the camerao simple information display made (01105)
the names of pto fue detected people regstered in Face ID (las)
vil be dspiayed
Press the [w] button several times unt
simple information display is activated
‘and then press the (4](p] buttons or tum
the (@) dia to choose an mage
Names wil be displayed on detected
people
+ poupee nt to have names csptayed on images she using
Face1D, choose MENU (C2430) » [[E]) tab > [Face ID Info}
(Name Display >» [ot
wsing and Filterin:
™ Navigating through Images in an Index
> Sil images. Po Movies
By displaying multiple images in an index, you can quichy fnathe images
you ar looking for
1 Display images in an index.
‘© Move the zoom lever toward [ER] to
‘display images in an index. Moving the
lever again wil increase the number of
images shown.
‘© To display fewer images, move the zoom
lever toward [QJ. Fewer images are
‘shown each time you move the lever
2 Choose an image.
‘© Tum the [@] dia to scroll through the
images.
+ Press he [AJ[wI[4][»] buttons to choose
an image.
‘© An orange frame is displayed around the
selected mage.
‘© Press the (8) button to view the selected
image in single-image display,
+ To deactivate the 30 aspay eect shown ya old down he
[ary butons or tun ne (8) dal rapa), choose MENU
(C30) » (BE) 220 » ix Erect» (om
Betore Use
Basie Guide
1 Camora Basics,
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4 P Mode
5 Taya, and C Modo
Inder
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
4/»/9
107
Touch-Sereen Operations 1 Choose Image Search]
«Press the MENU ton, end nen
«Pinch into switch fom singleimage choose Image Search] on the [EI] tab oran
pl to index display 0), os
e To view more thumbnails per screen, A
pinch in again
+ Drag up oF down onthe screen to sera 2 Choose the first condition forimage
through displayed images. display or navigation.
e To view fewer thumbnails per screen, + Press the [a][w] buttons to choose a rede
eee enn Bessie tay ta
Tess anmeget core, nd ouch shee Femi pcia
by pressing the [4][»] buttons or turning
Betore Use
1 Camora Basics,
3 Otner Shooting Modes
the (@) da. To perform an action or all 4 Pode
these images together, press he [@)
button and go to step 4. 5 Taya, and C Modo
* Finding Images Matching Specified Conditions.
3 Choose the second condition and
D>Stil images Do Movies check the images found. hee
Find desired images quiiy on a memory card tl of images by fiteing + Vin you have selected (@) or as a
image dsplay according t your spectied conditons. Yau can io protect the ra condtion choose the second T wre
(Gitta) or delete (2116) these mages eat ence. by pressing the AID} buttons, and then
tum the (6) dato view ony machin ing Menu
[A Favores [Displays images tagged as favortes Can). ee AS Le
@SnoiDas [Displays te mages shoton a speci date «To such fitered image display, pres Dana
ePeonte [Displays mages win detected faces Mie Bel ior and ose
+ When you have selected (E] as the st 10 Appendix
+, Su image/ [Displays sl images, moves, or movies shot in GM condton, press the (@) button, and press
Move mode (16). the LI VII4])] butons on tne next he
None Displays mages of aregstered person (44) AREA Eee
4/»/9
108
«Press the MENU ton, end nen
«Pinch into switch fom singleimage choose Image Search] on the [EI] tab oran
pl to index display 0), os
e To view more thumbnails per screen, A
pinch in again
+ Drag up oF down onthe screen to sera 2 Choose the first condition forimage
through displayed images. display or navigation.
e To view fewer thumbnails per screen, + Press the [a][w] buttons to choose a rede
eee enn Bessie tay ta
Tess anmeget core, nd ouch shee Femi pcia
by pressing the [4][»] buttons or turning
Betore Use
1 Camora Basics,
3 Otner Shooting Modes
the (@) da. To perform an action or all 4 Pode
these images together, press he [@)
button and go to step 4. 5 Taya, and C Modo
* Finding Images Matching Specified Conditions.
3 Choose the second condition and
D>Stil images Do Movies check the images found. hee
Find desired images quiiy on a memory card tl of images by fiteing + Vin you have selected (@) or as a
image dsplay according t your spectied conditons. Yau can io protect the ra condtion choose the second T wre
(Gitta) or delete (2116) these mages eat ence. by pressing the AID} buttons, and then
tum the (6) dato view ony machin ing Menu
[A Favores [Displays images tagged as favortes Can). ee AS Le
@SnoiDas [Displays te mages shoton a speci date «To such fitered image display, pres Dana
ePeonte [Displays mages win detected faces Mie Bel ior and ose
+ When you have selected (E] as the st 10 Appendix
+, Su image/ [Displays sl images, moves, or movies shot in GM condton, press the (@) button, and press
Move mode (16). the LI VII4])] butons on tne next he
None Displays mages of aregstered person (44) AREA Eee
4/»/9
108
View the filtered images. ™ Using the Control Ring to Jump between Before Use
DST Images
ssplayed in yelon rames, To view on mi ewe
these images, press the [4)[D] buttons, or D> Still Images D> Movies Balak
turn the [9] dal. Use the control ring to find and jump between desired images quickly by
To cancel fitered display, press the [A] fitering image dsplay according to your spectied conditions.
buon
umptoFavottes |OSplys mages tagged a evetes rn
o fe sompro Favores [ass 1 Gamer Bas
«mene camea as ono caresanding mage fr some ADI =
conato, nose cotos mi rte avale A | ages tht wee stn tesa dee 2 Mona Auo Modo
[Jure TOimages | umps by 10 mages at aime SEE
+ To show or hide information, press the [W] button in step 4. | Jump 100 Images [Jumps by 100 images at a time.
2 Opto rena the mages tars ene) ne 4 Pues
*Nadgatng trough Images nan Index" 21107) "Magniying,
Images" £21112), and "Viewing Sidespows’ (D112) Youcan
iso pp mage operations in a Images foun, by choosing
[Protect AI mages in Seach In Prtecing Images" (2114) or
[Select images in Search] in Erasing Mutple Images at Once
(Gini, Adan Images tote Prnt List (DPF) (N68),
“Ass images toa Photobook (MAI).
you eat mages an save tem as new images (21120—
24125), amessage's stayed, and te mages hat were
1 Choose a condition.
+ Choose a conden (or jump method)
in shgle-mage display by tuning the
10) ing and then pressing the [AY] 6 Playback m
buttons
5 Taya, and C Modo
7 wer Functions
2 View images matching your
ds specified condition, or ump by the Bes
re ‘specified amount. 8 2
Tum the (O gto vio any mages TS
A + Youcanaso cos cette sees a racing he condon or jump by he
En Sent number images emard or ge
+ After choosing conditions, you can view images matching your back.
Condtons by toucing a condition again. =
4/»/9
109
DST Images
ssplayed in yelon rames, To view on mi ewe
these images, press the [4)[D] buttons, or D> Still Images D> Movies Balak
turn the [9] dal. Use the control ring to find and jump between desired images quickly by
To cancel fitered display, press the [A] fitering image dsplay according to your spectied conditions.
buon
umptoFavottes |OSplys mages tagged a evetes rn
o fe sompro Favores [ass 1 Gamer Bas
«mene camea as ono caresanding mage fr some ADI =
conato, nose cotos mi rte avale A | ages tht wee stn tesa dee 2 Mona Auo Modo
[Jure TOimages | umps by 10 mages at aime SEE
+ To show or hide information, press the [W] button in step 4. | Jump 100 Images [Jumps by 100 images at a time.
2 Opto rena the mages tars ene) ne 4 Pues
*Nadgatng trough Images nan Index" 21107) "Magniying,
Images" £21112), and "Viewing Sidespows’ (D112) Youcan
iso pp mage operations in a Images foun, by choosing
[Protect AI mages in Seach In Prtecing Images" (2114) or
[Select images in Search] in Erasing Mutple Images at Once
(Gini, Adan Images tote Prnt List (DPF) (N68),
“Ass images toa Photobook (MAI).
you eat mages an save tem as new images (21120—
24125), amessage's stayed, and te mages hat were
1 Choose a condition.
+ Choose a conden (or jump method)
in shgle-mage display by tuning the
10) ing and then pressing the [AY] 6 Playback m
buttons
5 Taya, and C Modo
7 wer Functions
2 View images matching your
ds specified condition, or ump by the Bes
re ‘specified amount. 8 2
Tum the (O gto vio any mages TS
A + Youcanaso cos cette sees a racing he condon or jump by he
En Sent number images emard or ge
+ After choosing conditions, you can view images matching your back.
Condtons by toucing a condition again. =
4/»/9
109
Touch-Screen Operations
You can aio jump to the previous or next
image according to your jump method
chosen in step 1 of Using the Control
Ring to Jump between Images” (£11109)
by dragging lft or ight with two fingers,
A
À + 2091010 ngwnen wang image n ns ay
E a
chosen in singleimage display. However, f you have chosen [3]
or if] the jump metnog will be switched to [F8].
™ Viewing Individual Images in a Group
D suit images
Images shot continucusiy (£2143, (87) images shot in [OH] mode,
(54), andindwidual st mages saved as source data in (2%) mode
(Diss) are grouped, and only the frst image is displayed. However, you
can also view the mages individual,
1 choose a grouped image.
e Press the (4][»] buttons or tum the (@)
dal to choose an mage abaed win
(aD). and then press the (@} button.
2 View images in the group
individually,
ressing the [4](D] buttons or turning the
19) cial will display only images in the group.
Pressing the a] button wi spay
[Osplay al mages Press to cancel
group payback
43 À
During group plyozck (step 2). ou can browse Ewough images
que Navgangtraugh Images ia Inde (107) nd
magny tem Magniying Images" FA 112, 9y choosing
[Prete al Images In Group] n-Pretecng images" EI
(A Images in Group|in “Erasing Mule Images at Once”
(its) or“Adang ImagestotnePıntList(DPOF) (D169),
lor Adding Images toa Phatocoai (D171), al Images nine
our canbe manulates at once
oungaup images so na ey ae displays ort as single
Si images, choose MENU 30) > [EJ] tz» (Group
Images] » [Om (230) However, gouped Images camote
Ungrouped ing incl playback.
Inf mode, ne smulanecus display ater step 2 n-Enoyng
Vary a mages rom Each Shot (Create Shot (ESA)
ony shown immediately ater you at
You can as view group images nsiduay by touching
nthe sereeninstep 1
Betore Use
Guide
1 Camora Basics
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4 P Mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
Inder
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
110
You can aio jump to the previous or next
image according to your jump method
chosen in step 1 of Using the Control
Ring to Jump between Images” (£11109)
by dragging lft or ight with two fingers,
A
À + 2091010 ngwnen wang image n ns ay
E a
chosen in singleimage display. However, f you have chosen [3]
or if] the jump metnog will be switched to [F8].
™ Viewing Individual Images in a Group
D suit images
Images shot continucusiy (£2143, (87) images shot in [OH] mode,
(54), andindwidual st mages saved as source data in (2%) mode
(Diss) are grouped, and only the frst image is displayed. However, you
can also view the mages individual,
1 choose a grouped image.
e Press the (4][»] buttons or tum the (@)
dal to choose an mage abaed win
(aD). and then press the (@} button.
2 View images in the group
individually,
ressing the [4](D] buttons or turning the
19) cial will display only images in the group.
Pressing the a] button wi spay
[Osplay al mages Press to cancel
group payback
43 À
During group plyozck (step 2). ou can browse Ewough images
que Navgangtraugh Images ia Inde (107) nd
magny tem Magniying Images" FA 112, 9y choosing
[Prete al Images In Group] n-Pretecng images" EI
(A Images in Group|in “Erasing Mule Images at Once”
(its) or“Adang ImagestotnePıntList(DPOF) (D169),
lor Adding Images toa Phatocoai (D171), al Images nine
our canbe manulates at once
oungaup images so na ey ae displays ort as single
Si images, choose MENU 30) > [EJ] tz» (Group
Images] » [Om (230) However, gouped Images camote
Ungrouped ing incl playback.
Inf mode, ne smulanecus display ater step 2 n-Enoyng
Vary a mages rom Each Shot (Create Shot (ESA)
ony shown immediately ater you at
You can as view group images nsiduay by touching
nthe sereeninstep 1
Betore Use
Guide
1 Camora Basics
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4 P Mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
Inder
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
110
Editing Face ID Information
It you notice that a name is incorrect during playback you can change it
orerase it
However, you cannot add names for people who are not detected by Face
ID (names are not displayed), and for people whose names have been
erased
™ Changing Names
1 Access the setting screen
«© Press the MENU button and choose
{Face ID Inf on the [EI) tab (2130,
Press the [aw] buttons or tur the
dial to choose (Eat ID info, and then
press tre (@) button
2 Choose an image.
‘© Following the procedure in “Checking
People Detected in Face ID (107)
choose an image and press the (9)
button
‘© An orange frame is displayed around the
selected face. When multiple names are
displayed in an image, press the [4][P)
buttons or turn the (6) dial to choose the
name to change, and then press the (E)
button
3 Choose the editing option.
e Press the [aJIwII4I(D] buttons orturn
the [@ did to choose [Ovenarte], and
then press the (@) button
Æ Choose the name of the person to
overwrite with
‘© Follow step 2in "Ovenwrting and Adding
Face information’ (£2147) to choose
the name ofthe person you want to
5 + oem assess et seen trig an
Image on the screen in step 2, touching | to display the
are rane, ans tentang te face worte ae
+ Youn 380 case estore young ne ns
" Erasing Names
e Following step 3n “Changing Names’
EAN), choose [Erase] and press the
[@)butten
e After [Erase] is displayed, press the
[ID] buttons or tum the (@ dial to
choose [OK], and then press the [8)
button
ee
Betore Use
Guide
1 Camera Basics,
2 Auto Mode
Hybrid Auto Mode
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4 P Mode
5 Taya, and C Modo
Inder
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
1
It you notice that a name is incorrect during playback you can change it
orerase it
However, you cannot add names for people who are not detected by Face
ID (names are not displayed), and for people whose names have been
erased
™ Changing Names
1 Access the setting screen
«© Press the MENU button and choose
{Face ID Inf on the [EI) tab (2130,
Press the [aw] buttons or tur the
dial to choose (Eat ID info, and then
press tre (@) button
2 Choose an image.
‘© Following the procedure in “Checking
People Detected in Face ID (107)
choose an image and press the (9)
button
‘© An orange frame is displayed around the
selected face. When multiple names are
displayed in an image, press the [4][P)
buttons or turn the (6) dial to choose the
name to change, and then press the (E)
button
3 Choose the editing option.
e Press the [aJIwII4I(D] buttons orturn
the [@ did to choose [Ovenarte], and
then press the (@) button
Æ Choose the name of the person to
overwrite with
‘© Follow step 2in "Ovenwrting and Adding
Face information’ (£2147) to choose
the name ofthe person you want to
5 + oem assess et seen trig an
Image on the screen in step 2, touching | to display the
are rane, ans tentang te face worte ae
+ Youn 380 case estore young ne ns
" Erasing Names
e Following step 3n “Changing Names’
EAN), choose [Erase] and press the
[@)butten
e After [Erase] is displayed, press the
[ID] buttons or tum the (@ dial to
choose [OK], and then press the [8)
button
ee
Betore Use
Guide
1 Camera Basics,
2 Auto Mode
Hybrid Auto Mode
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4 P Mode
5 Taya, and C Modo
Inder
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
1
Image Viewing Option
™ Magnifying Images
D St images
À Magnity an image.
‘© Moving te zoom lever toward (QQ wil
Zoomin and megnt the image. You
can magnify images up to about 10% by
continuing lo hold the zoom lever
‘© The approximate poston ofthe displayed
area (1) is shown for reference
To zoom out, move the zoom lever
‘toward eg) You can return to single
image display by continuing to hold it.
(1) 2 Move the display position and
Switch images as needed.
+ To move the dsplay postion, press the
LAID batons
To smichto ther images while zoomed
tum te (9) dat
Q Youcnreumw sngeimase al om na ospayoy
pressing the MENU) buton.
+ You can check the focus wren EHRE] is splayed by pressing
‘the [8 button to show the position in focus (Focus Check). When
tug por ete este bun pet
or
Touch-Screen Operations
+ Spread your fingers apart (inch out) to
+ You can magniy images up to about 10x
by repeating ths action
+ Tomove the display postion, drag across
the screen
e Pinch in to zoom out
© Touch MAI to restore sings image
spay.
" Viewing Slideshows
D sill images D Movies
Automaïcal play back images from a memory card as follows
1 Access the setting screen.
«© Press the MENU) button, and then
choose [Sideshow] onthe [BI] tab
Mo.
2 Configure the setting.
Choose a menu item to configure, and
then choose the desired option (E1130).
Betore Use
Guide
1 Camera Basics,
2 Auto Mode
Hybrid Auto Mode
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4 P Mode
5 Taya, and C Modo
Inder
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
12
™ Magnifying Images
D St images
À Magnity an image.
‘© Moving te zoom lever toward (QQ wil
Zoomin and megnt the image. You
can magnify images up to about 10% by
continuing lo hold the zoom lever
‘© The approximate poston ofthe displayed
area (1) is shown for reference
To zoom out, move the zoom lever
‘toward eg) You can return to single
image display by continuing to hold it.
(1) 2 Move the display position and
Switch images as needed.
+ To move the dsplay postion, press the
LAID batons
To smichto ther images while zoomed
tum te (9) dat
Q Youcnreumw sngeimase al om na ospayoy
pressing the MENU) buton.
+ You can check the focus wren EHRE] is splayed by pressing
‘the [8 button to show the position in focus (Focus Check). When
tug por ete este bun pet
or
Touch-Screen Operations
+ Spread your fingers apart (inch out) to
+ You can magniy images up to about 10x
by repeating ths action
+ Tomove the display postion, drag across
the screen
e Pinch in to zoom out
© Touch MAI to restore sings image
spay.
" Viewing Slideshows
D sill images D Movies
Automaïcal play back images from a memory card as follows
1 Access the setting screen.
«© Press the MENU) button, and then
choose [Sideshow] onthe [BI] tab
Mo.
2 Configure the setting.
Choose a menu item to configure, and
then choose the desired option (E1130).
Betore Use
Guide
1 Camera Basics,
2 Auto Mode
Hybrid Auto Mode
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4 P Mode
5 Taya, and C Modo
Inder
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
12
Start automatic playback. 2 Choose an image. Botore Use,
‘© Press the [AY] buttons or turn the (6) e Press the [A wII4]ID] buttons to choose
dal to choose [Stat], and then press the the image you want to view next. REO
[Ol buton
© The sideshow will stat after [Loading
image] is displayed for afew seconds.
«© Your chosen image is displayedin the
center, surrounded by the next four
candidate images.
Press the MENU buton t stop the + For fullscreen dsply ofthe center
slideshow image, press the [@ button. To restore RES)
the ana display. press the (8) buton —
OR Te en 2 HR tage
Gui sess «© Press the MENU) button to restore
singleimage display 3 ner Shooting Modes
@ + Topause resume sidesnons, press the ¡Sp burn. © + smartsnuts not avaatein ie fotoning cases 4 P Mode
À. Van ant ae Images dung plas y pressing te Tee av esa ana nw cane
(A Bons ar turing 1) al Forts ar oras unsupported image cue us
‘ung, ode MDB com Images ae shown me day NOS) (ieee ere
ung gu pan GAO)
6 Para
“Ab + Youcanatso stip sassnons by tourng me ren. 5
> = See A, + ont srenin ste tan an imag above, teta, ron 7 wor Funeiors
eier ie wl show your nasen image nte carter, sure
. bye esto cansino mages, Sn
Auto Playback of Related Images (Smart Shuffle) Me eres ee a 8 Sel Men
le Image. To er In oral say Rae srcen gan TE
sed on the curentimoge. the camera ofers four images tht you may
vishto view After you choose to view one of those mages, e camera Te
‘offers four more images. Tis is an enjoyable way to play back mages in
‘an unexpacted order Try this feature efter you have taken many shot, in
many kinds of scenes. Index
1 Choose Smart Shuffle.
Press the MENU button, choose [Smart
‘Shuffle onthe [Bl tab, and then press
the (@)buton (80, SIL
Four candidate images are displayed
113
‘© Press the [AY] buttons or turn the (6) e Press the [A wII4]ID] buttons to choose
dal to choose [Stat], and then press the the image you want to view next. REO
[Ol buton
© The sideshow will stat after [Loading
image] is displayed for afew seconds.
«© Your chosen image is displayedin the
center, surrounded by the next four
candidate images.
Press the MENU buton t stop the + For fullscreen dsply ofthe center
slideshow image, press the [@ button. To restore RES)
the ana display. press the (8) buton —
OR Te en 2 HR tage
Gui sess «© Press the MENU) button to restore
singleimage display 3 ner Shooting Modes
@ + Topause resume sidesnons, press the ¡Sp burn. © + smartsnuts not avaatein ie fotoning cases 4 P Mode
À. Van ant ae Images dung plas y pressing te Tee av esa ana nw cane
(A Bons ar turing 1) al Forts ar oras unsupported image cue us
‘ung, ode MDB com Images ae shown me day NOS) (ieee ere
ung gu pan GAO)
6 Para
“Ab + Youcanatso stip sassnons by tourng me ren. 5
> = See A, + ont srenin ste tan an imag above, teta, ron 7 wor Funeiors
eier ie wl show your nasen image nte carter, sure
. bye esto cansino mages, Sn
Auto Playback of Related Images (Smart Shuffle) Me eres ee a 8 Sel Men
le Image. To er In oral say Rae srcen gan TE
sed on the curentimoge. the camera ofers four images tht you may
vishto view After you choose to view one of those mages, e camera Te
‘offers four more images. Tis is an enjoyable way to play back mages in
‘an unexpacted order Try this feature efter you have taken many shot, in
many kinds of scenes. Index
1 Choose Smart Shuffle.
Press the MENU button, choose [Smart
‘Shuffle onthe [Bl tab, and then press
the (@)buton (80, SIL
Four candidate images are displayed
113
Protecting Images
D Sil images D Movies
Protect important images to prevent accidental erasure bythe camera
(Ane)
™ Choosing a Selection Method
1 Access the setting screen.
‘© Press the MENU button and choose
[Protec] on the [DJ tb (C220),
2 Choose a selection method.
‘© Choose a menu item and an option as
desired (0130)
‘© To return to the menu screen, press the
IMENUI button.
(ee eee
Ber
+ Protected mages cam be erased using the cameras ersure
function To erase nem his way. rst cance! protection
™ Choosing Images Individual!
1 Choose [Select].
‘© Folloning step 2 in “Choosing a Selection
Method" (11114), choose [Select] and
press the (@) button,
2 choose an image
‘© Press the (4]1)] buttons or tum the [@]
Gal chose an mage, sn pres
the (6) button. (ex) is displayed.
‘© To cancel selection, press the [@) button
cam Es volar aloe
Repeats processo speciy ater
Images
3 Protect the image.
+ Press the (MENU button. Aconfrmaion
message is displayed.
+ Press the [AD] butions or tum the (9)
to choose [OK], and then press the
(8) buton
D + taza pat mento Sres or
A an e mii De sp proces ap
Ay SEs
Se Se eae
Em
eisernen
FH
Betore Use
Guide
1 Camera Basics,
2 Auto Mode
Hybrid Auto Mode
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4 P Mode
5 Taya, and C Modo
Inder
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
114
D Sil images D Movies
Protect important images to prevent accidental erasure bythe camera
(Ane)
™ Choosing a Selection Method
1 Access the setting screen.
‘© Press the MENU button and choose
[Protec] on the [DJ tb (C220),
2 Choose a selection method.
‘© Choose a menu item and an option as
desired (0130)
‘© To return to the menu screen, press the
IMENUI button.
(ee eee
Ber
+ Protected mages cam be erased using the cameras ersure
function To erase nem his way. rst cance! protection
™ Choosing Images Individual!
1 Choose [Select].
‘© Folloning step 2 in “Choosing a Selection
Method" (11114), choose [Select] and
press the (@) button,
2 choose an image
‘© Press the (4]1)] buttons or tum the [@]
Gal chose an mage, sn pres
the (6) button. (ex) is displayed.
‘© To cancel selection, press the [@) button
cam Es volar aloe
Repeats processo speciy ater
Images
3 Protect the image.
+ Press the (MENU button. Aconfrmaion
message is displayed.
+ Press the [AD] butions or tum the (9)
to choose [OK], and then press the
(8) buton
D + taza pat mento Sres or
A an e mii De sp proces ap
Ay SEs
Se Se eae
Em
eisernen
FH
Betore Use
Guide
1 Camera Basics,
2 Auto Mode
Hybrid Auto Mode
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4 P Mode
5 Taya, and C Modo
Inder
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
114
™ Selecting a Range
1 Choose [Select Range].
Folowing stop 2n “Choosing a Selection
Method (£11114), choose [Select
Range] and press the (8) button
2 Choose a starting image.
e Press the (8) button
Press the [4JIM buttons or tum the (6)
dial to choose an image, and then press
the (®) button
3 choose an enaing mage
2 Press the [p] button to choose [Last
image], and then press the (8) button
2 Press the [QD] buttons or tum the (6)
dial to choose an image, and then press
the (O) button
Images before the frstimage cannot be
selected as the lastimage
4 Protect the images.
+ Press he [y] button to choose [Protect
and press the (8) buton
B > voucan cms era mas ut a
in to scores 2 ms cope
+ Teal sot ates nage oca a soy
AY + Youcan aso say ie sreenter choosing meist ortast
Image by tuchng an mage onthe top screen in steps 2 or 3
+ You can aso protect images by touching Protec on ne screen
insepa
Protecting All Images at Once
1 Choose [Protect All Images].
+ Foloning step 2in“Choosing a Selection
Method" (1114), choose Protect Al
Images} and press the (6) buton
2 Protect the images.
‘© ress the (QD buttons or tum the (9)
ato choose [OK and then press the
outer
Clearing All Protection at Once
You can clear protection from all mages at once.
To clear protection, choose [Unprotect Al Images] in step 1 of Protecting
All images at Once’, and then complete step 2
Betore Use
Basie Guide
1 Camora Basics,
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
es
7
ERES
Mr
es
8 Sotting Menu
9 Accessories
10 Appendix
Inder
«ba
115
1 Choose [Select Range].
Folowing stop 2n “Choosing a Selection
Method (£11114), choose [Select
Range] and press the (8) button
2 Choose a starting image.
e Press the (8) button
Press the [4JIM buttons or tum the (6)
dial to choose an image, and then press
the (®) button
3 choose an enaing mage
2 Press the [p] button to choose [Last
image], and then press the (8) button
2 Press the [QD] buttons or tum the (6)
dial to choose an image, and then press
the (O) button
Images before the frstimage cannot be
selected as the lastimage
4 Protect the images.
+ Press he [y] button to choose [Protect
and press the (8) buton
B > voucan cms era mas ut a
in to scores 2 ms cope
+ Teal sot ates nage oca a soy
AY + Youcan aso say ie sreenter choosing meist ortast
Image by tuchng an mage onthe top screen in steps 2 or 3
+ You can aso protect images by touching Protec on ne screen
insepa
Protecting All Images at Once
1 Choose [Protect All Images].
+ Foloning step 2in“Choosing a Selection
Method" (1114), choose Protect Al
Images} and press the (6) buton
2 Protect the images.
‘© ress the (QD buttons or tum the (9)
ato choose [OK and then press the
outer
Clearing All Protection at Once
You can clear protection from all mages at once.
To clear protection, choose [Unprotect Al Images] in step 1 of Protecting
All images at Once’, and then complete step 2
Betore Use
Basie Guide
1 Camora Basics,
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
es
7
ERES
Mr
es
8 Sotting Menu
9 Accessories
10 Appendix
Inder
«ba
115
Erasing Images
D Stilimages De Movies
You can choose and erase unneeded images one by one. Be careful
when erasing images, because they cannot be recovered. However,
protected images (HA 114) cannot be erased,
1 Choose an image to erase.
e Press the [4JIM buttons or tum the (8)
dal to choose an image
2 Erase the image.
e Press the [ff button.
+ Mier [Erase?] is splayed, press the
HI] buttons orturn the (6) dalto
choose [Erase], and nen press the (8)
button
The current image is now erased
To cancel erasure, press the (D)
buttons ortum the (@ dia to choose
[Cancel and then press the (@) button
Q + Presang meinten mue mages ze pto
give you the option of choosing [Erase (BJ) [Erase PEG), or
{Ere or son
+ Youcan aso erase me eurentimage by tuchng [Erase] onthe
Seren instep 2
+ Images can sobe erased by sing Town Actions 11)
™ Erasing Multiple Images at Once
You can choose muliple images to erase at once, Be careful when
erasing images, because they cannct be recovered. However, protected
images (AA 114) cannot be erased
Choosing a Selection Method
4 Access te setting screen
‘© Press the MENU] button, ana then
choose [Erase] on tre (DB tab (190).
2 Choose a selection method.
‘© Choose a menu item and an option as.
desired (SO).
+ Toretum to the menu screen, press the
MENU button
Choosing Images Individually
1 Choose [Select].
e Following step 2in “Choosing a Selection
Method’ (21116), choose [Select and
press the [8] button.
2 choose an image
© Once you choose an image folowing
step 2 in “Choosing Images individual
114), Wis dsplayed
+ To cancel selection, press the (9) button
aga. [v/is no longer dsplayed.
‘© Repeat his process to spec other images.
Betore Use
Basie Guide
1 Camora Basics,
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
es
4 riu
ERES
Mr
es
rom
9 Accessories
10 Appendix
Inder
«ba
116
D Stilimages De Movies
You can choose and erase unneeded images one by one. Be careful
when erasing images, because they cannot be recovered. However,
protected images (HA 114) cannot be erased,
1 Choose an image to erase.
e Press the [4JIM buttons or tum the (8)
dal to choose an image
2 Erase the image.
e Press the [ff button.
+ Mier [Erase?] is splayed, press the
HI] buttons orturn the (6) dalto
choose [Erase], and nen press the (8)
button
The current image is now erased
To cancel erasure, press the (D)
buttons ortum the (@ dia to choose
[Cancel and then press the (@) button
Q + Presang meinten mue mages ze pto
give you the option of choosing [Erase (BJ) [Erase PEG), or
{Ere or son
+ Youcan aso erase me eurentimage by tuchng [Erase] onthe
Seren instep 2
+ Images can sobe erased by sing Town Actions 11)
™ Erasing Multiple Images at Once
You can choose muliple images to erase at once, Be careful when
erasing images, because they cannct be recovered. However, protected
images (AA 114) cannot be erased
Choosing a Selection Method
4 Access te setting screen
‘© Press the MENU] button, ana then
choose [Erase] on tre (DB tab (190).
2 Choose a selection method.
‘© Choose a menu item and an option as.
desired (SO).
+ Toretum to the menu screen, press the
MENU button
Choosing Images Individually
1 Choose [Select].
e Following step 2in “Choosing a Selection
Method’ (21116), choose [Select and
press the [8] button.
2 choose an image
© Once you choose an image folowing
step 2 in “Choosing Images individual
114), Wis dsplayed
+ To cancel selection, press the (9) button
aga. [v/is no longer dsplayed.
‘© Repeat his process to spec other images.
Betore Use
Basie Guide
1 Camora Basics,
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
es
4 riu
ERES
Mr
es
rom
9 Accessories
10 Appendix
Inder
«ba
116
3 Erase the image.
‘© Press the MENU button. A confirmation
message is dsplayed
‘© Press the (4][D] buttons or tum the (6)
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[O button
Selecting a Range
1 Choose [Select Range].
‘© Fotowing step 2 in ‘Choosing a Selection
Method (21115), choose [Select
Renge] and press the (6) button
2 Choose images.
Folow steps 23 in “Selecting a Range
(C1115) to speci images
Erase the images.
‘© Press the [w] button to choose [Erase],
‘and then press the (8) button
Specifying All Images at Once
1 Choose [Select All images}
‘© Foloning step 2n “Choosing a Selection
Method (121116), choose [Select Al
Images] and press the [©] button
2 Erase the images.
‘© Press the [QD] buttons or tum the (8)
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
(@)button
Rotating Images
D Sil images
Change the orientation of images and save them as follows
À Choose [Rotate].
Press the MENU] button and choose
[Rotate] on the [LE tab (2120),
2 Rotate the image.
‘© Press the (€)[D] buttons or tum the (69)
al to choose an image.
‘© The image is rotated 90° each time you
press the (@) button
© To retum to the menu screen, press the
IMENU button
CO
ae).
5 + ontnesreeninstep 2 you canas oc IN ae
images ouch ME re o e mena ste
Betore Use
Guide
1 Camera Basics,
2 Auto Mode
Hybrid Auto Mode
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4 P Mode
5 Taya, and C Modo
Inder
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
17
‘© Press the MENU button. A confirmation
message is dsplayed
‘© Press the (4][D] buttons or tum the (6)
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[O button
Selecting a Range
1 Choose [Select Range].
‘© Fotowing step 2 in ‘Choosing a Selection
Method (21115), choose [Select
Renge] and press the (6) button
2 Choose images.
Folow steps 23 in “Selecting a Range
(C1115) to speci images
Erase the images.
‘© Press the [w] button to choose [Erase],
‘and then press the (8) button
Specifying All Images at Once
1 Choose [Select All images}
‘© Foloning step 2n “Choosing a Selection
Method (121116), choose [Select Al
Images] and press the [©] button
2 Erase the images.
‘© Press the [QD] buttons or tum the (8)
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
(@)button
Rotating Images
D Sil images
Change the orientation of images and save them as follows
À Choose [Rotate].
Press the MENU] button and choose
[Rotate] on the [LE tab (2120),
2 Rotate the image.
‘© Press the (€)[D] buttons or tum the (69)
al to choose an image.
‘© The image is rotated 90° each time you
press the (@) button
© To retum to the menu screen, press the
IMENU button
CO
ae).
5 + ontnesreeninstep 2 you canas oc IN ae
images ouch ME re o e mena ste
Betore Use
Guide
1 Camera Basics,
2 Auto Mode
Hybrid Auto Mode
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4 P Mode
5 Taya, and C Modo
Inder
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
17
™ Deactivating Auto Rotation
Follow these steps to deactivate automat image rotation, which rates.
images based on the current camera orientalion.
‘© Press the (MENU button, choose (Auto
Rotate] on the [[EJ)tab, and then choose
tom (a0),
© images comet be ote (117) wenos set Ao Rea)
{0 (OT Adora, mages ars te we ped
ie ra ton.
«mat shane UB mote, cient totes
{o[om, apes vea ibe sayo veia and
rs wa be pe nr
Tagging Images as Favorites
D Sil images De Movies
You can organize images by tagging them as favorites. By choosing a
category in fitered playback, you can restrict the folowing operations to
al ofthose images.
+ “Viewing' (£11103), "Viewing Slideshows" (C1112), "Protecting
Images” ((11114) "Erasing Images” (11116), "Addng Images to
‘the Print List (DPOF) (169) Adding Images to a Photobock
am
1 Choose [Favorites]
+ Press the MENU] button and choose
[Favortes] on the [EI (0)
2 Choose an image.
e Press the [4JIM buttons o tum the [@]
«dal to choose an image, and then press
the (9) button. [is displayed
e To untag the image, press the [$] button
‘again. lis no longer displayed,
«© Repeat this process to choose additional
images
3 Finish the setup process.
+ Press the MENU button. Aconfrmaion
message is displayed.
+ Press the [AD] buttons or tum the (9)
to choose [OK], and then press the
(8) buton
Betore Use
Basic Guido
1 Camera Basics,
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4 P Mode
5 Taya, and C Modo
Inder
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
18
Follow these steps to deactivate automat image rotation, which rates.
images based on the current camera orientalion.
‘© Press the (MENU button, choose (Auto
Rotate] on the [[EJ)tab, and then choose
tom (a0),
© images comet be ote (117) wenos set Ao Rea)
{0 (OT Adora, mages ars te we ped
ie ra ton.
«mat shane UB mote, cient totes
{o[om, apes vea ibe sayo veia and
rs wa be pe nr
Tagging Images as Favorites
D Sil images De Movies
You can organize images by tagging them as favorites. By choosing a
category in fitered playback, you can restrict the folowing operations to
al ofthose images.
+ “Viewing' (£11103), "Viewing Slideshows" (C1112), "Protecting
Images” ((11114) "Erasing Images” (11116), "Addng Images to
‘the Print List (DPOF) (169) Adding Images to a Photobock
am
1 Choose [Favorites]
+ Press the MENU] button and choose
[Favortes] on the [EI (0)
2 Choose an image.
e Press the [4JIM buttons o tum the [@]
«dal to choose an image, and then press
the (9) button. [is displayed
e To untag the image, press the [$] button
‘again. lis no longer displayed,
«© Repeat this process to choose additional
images
3 Finish the setup process.
+ Press the MENU button. Aconfrmaion
message is displayed.
+ Press the [AD] buttons or tum the (9)
to choose [OK], and then press the
(8) buton
Betore Use
Basic Guido
1 Camera Basics,
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4 P Mode
5 Taya, and C Modo
Inder
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
18
(D + images wit rot be tagged as tavrtes it you sich to Snootng Convenient Control: Touch Actions Before Use
mode er um me camera. beer rising ne setup process 9
aes ah Pest images Pe Movies Susie Guide
You can quick and easily activate funcions thatyou have assigned to
fourtouch gestures (Touch Actions), in single-image display. A
+ Favre mages wa rave atera )
En, Using Touch Actions Functions, {anne
{Goes capt tomes or RAW mages)
+ Drag across the screen as shown 2 Auto Mode
: The function assigned to [4] is now. eerie Moo]
2 Vans ue maso ge actvaed SEE
«Images can as be tages as votes y ag Tourn Actors
cano, 4 Pose
«Similarly, you can also actvate functions
assigned to [P] (el), and Lo] by (D ITIEAIM et O Mode)
7 WiFi Functions
™ Changing Touch Actions Functions 8 Setting Menu.
‘Simpify your preferred camera operations by reassigning dragging 9 Accessories
patterns to them as desired
1 Access the setting screen. 10 Appendix
e Press the MENU} button, and then
choose [Set Touch Actions} onthe [EJ]
tab (C30),
Inder
«ba
119
mode er um me camera. beer rising ne setup process 9
aes ah Pest images Pe Movies Susie Guide
You can quick and easily activate funcions thatyou have assigned to
fourtouch gestures (Touch Actions), in single-image display. A
+ Favre mages wa rave atera )
En, Using Touch Actions Functions, {anne
{Goes capt tomes or RAW mages)
+ Drag across the screen as shown 2 Auto Mode
: The function assigned to [4] is now. eerie Moo]
2 Vans ue maso ge actvaed SEE
«Images can as be tages as votes y ag Tourn Actors
cano, 4 Pose
«Similarly, you can also actvate functions
assigned to [P] (el), and Lo] by (D ITIEAIM et O Mode)
7 WiFi Functions
™ Changing Touch Actions Functions 8 Setting Menu.
‘Simpify your preferred camera operations by reassigning dragging 9 Accessories
patterns to them as desired
1 Access the setting screen. 10 Appendix
e Press the MENU} button, and then
choose [Set Touch Actions} onthe [EJ]
tab (C30),
Inder
«ba
119
2 Assign afunction to a Touch Action.
‘© Press the [a]fw] buttons or tum the [@)
dial to choose a dragging pattern, and
then press the (4)[P] buttons to choose
{he function to assign.
Assignable Functions
Editing Still Images
®
Image esting (F120 - 128) sony arabe when the
memory cara has sufldent ee space,
You can a:cess eating screens or various funcions by tuning
animage ater choosing the function in he menu.
Forres Tag mages a avers or wig te mage elie ai ne ese ne
Ewa Sitch to dslang the net image tagged as IMR stas sang» MENU ony re
stars Vie SEAR «ro nen es sc jan en
ProvausFavete _ |Swtchtodspemngihe pranous magetges (RR neat rang me (heaton youre
as ofoverte,
Switch to deg MTS mage wih ene
Next Date ome u ™ Resizing Images
previous se [Sete dsg he fstimage wah he Dun Images
Srat ute | Sat Smat Ste lyback Save a copy fags at lower resolten
Fo Camere 1 Choose (Resize)
To Smartphone Access the Wi-Fi connection screen. «© Press the MENU] button and choose
Fe Computer For it dts, ses WiFi Füncions Resco] one [EN ao (2130.
[To Printer aa 2 Choose an image.
To Web Son ‘Press the (QD tons or tum te 10]
Sicksnon Sara sideshow ¿alt choose an mage, and en pres.
Erase Erase an image. the (@) button.
Pred Prec an image or arcs precio 3 choose an image size
Rotate Rotate an image. ‘© Press the [4][}] buttons or tum the [@]
«da to choose the size, and then press
the (8) button
e [Save new image?] is displayed
Betore Use
Guide
1 Camera Basics,
2 Auto Mode
Hybrid Auto Mode
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4 P Mode
5 Taya, and C Modo
Inder
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
120
‘© Press the [a]fw] buttons or tum the [@)
dial to choose a dragging pattern, and
then press the (4)[P] buttons to choose
{he function to assign.
Assignable Functions
Editing Still Images
®
Image esting (F120 - 128) sony arabe when the
memory cara has sufldent ee space,
You can a:cess eating screens or various funcions by tuning
animage ater choosing the function in he menu.
Forres Tag mages a avers or wig te mage elie ai ne ese ne
Ewa Sitch to dslang the net image tagged as IMR stas sang» MENU ony re
stars Vie SEAR «ro nen es sc jan en
ProvausFavete _ |Swtchtodspemngihe pranous magetges (RR neat rang me (heaton youre
as ofoverte,
Switch to deg MTS mage wih ene
Next Date ome u ™ Resizing Images
previous se [Sete dsg he fstimage wah he Dun Images
Srat ute | Sat Smat Ste lyback Save a copy fags at lower resolten
Fo Camere 1 Choose (Resize)
To Smartphone Access the Wi-Fi connection screen. «© Press the MENU] button and choose
Fe Computer For it dts, ses WiFi Füncions Resco] one [EN ao (2130.
[To Printer aa 2 Choose an image.
To Web Son ‘Press the (QD tons or tum te 10]
Sicksnon Sara sideshow ¿alt choose an mage, and en pres.
Erase Erase an image. the (@) button.
Pred Prec an image or arcs precio 3 choose an image size
Rotate Rotate an image. ‘© Press the [4][}] buttons or tum the [@]
«da to choose the size, and then press
the (8) button
e [Save new image?] is displayed
Betore Use
Guide
1 Camera Basics,
2 Auto Mode
Hybrid Auto Mode
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4 P Mode
5 Taya, and C Modo
Inder
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
120
Save the new image.
‘© Press the [4JIM buttons or turn the (6)
al to choose [OK], and then press the
(@)button
+ The image is now saved as a new fle
5 Roview the now image.
Press the MENU button [splay new
image asaje0
‘© Press the [4][}] buttons or tum the (9)
dal to choose (Yes, andthen press the
[6] button.
+ The saved mage is now displayed.
(O © Estat otpossbietecmage nett respon)
me,
2 PaWimages came estes
WEE
AY) + Youcanaasocontigure nis seting by auchngtne size onthe
screen in step 3, touring agan, and then touching [OK
+ Yu can aso ew saved images by touring [Yes] onthe screen
inseps
™ Cropping
D sill images
You can specify a porton of an image to save as a separate image file,
1 Choose [Cropping].
+ Press the MENU] buton, andthen
choose [Cropping on the (TE ab
(so.
2 Choose an image.
«© Press the (QD) buttons or tur the (8)
di to choose an image, and then press
the (Ol button
3 Adjust the cropping area.
+ Aframe is displayed around the portion of
the image to be cropped (1).
‘© The originalimage is shown in the upper
left, and a preview ofthe image as
‘cropped (2) is shown in the lower right
You can aso see the resolution after
cropping (3)
e To resize the frame, move the zoom
lever,
e To move the frame, press the
LAIWILAIID buttons.
‘© To change the frame orientation, press
the (0) button
‘© Faces detected in the image are
enclosed in gray frames in the upper-left
image. To crop the image based on this
frame, turn the [4] dia to switch to the
‘ther frame.
+ Press the MENU] button
® @ @
Betore Use
Basie Guide
1 Camera Basics,
2 Auto Mode
Hybrid Auto Mode
es
4 riu
ERES
Mr
es
rom
9 Accessories
10 Appendix
Inder
«ba
121
‘© Press the [4JIM buttons or turn the (6)
al to choose [OK], and then press the
(@)button
+ The image is now saved as a new fle
5 Roview the now image.
Press the MENU button [splay new
image asaje0
‘© Press the [4][}] buttons or tum the (9)
dal to choose (Yes, andthen press the
[6] button.
+ The saved mage is now displayed.
(O © Estat otpossbietecmage nett respon)
me,
2 PaWimages came estes
WEE
AY) + Youcanaasocontigure nis seting by auchngtne size onthe
screen in step 3, touring agan, and then touching [OK
+ Yu can aso ew saved images by touring [Yes] onthe screen
inseps
™ Cropping
D sill images
You can specify a porton of an image to save as a separate image file,
1 Choose [Cropping].
+ Press the MENU] buton, andthen
choose [Cropping on the (TE ab
(so.
2 Choose an image.
«© Press the (QD) buttons or tur the (8)
di to choose an image, and then press
the (Ol button
3 Adjust the cropping area.
+ Aframe is displayed around the portion of
the image to be cropped (1).
‘© The originalimage is shown in the upper
left, and a preview ofthe image as
‘cropped (2) is shown in the lower right
You can aso see the resolution after
cropping (3)
e To resize the frame, move the zoom
lever,
e To move the frame, press the
LAIWILAIID buttons.
‘© To change the frame orientation, press
the (0) button
‘© Faces detected in the image are
enclosed in gray frames in the upper-left
image. To crop the image based on this
frame, turn the [4] dia to switch to the
‘ther frame.
+ Press the MENU] button
® @ @
Betore Use
Basie Guide
1 Camera Basics,
2 Auto Mode
Hybrid Auto Mode
es
4 riu
ERES
Mr
es
rom
9 Accessories
10 Appendix
Inder
«ba
121
Save as anew image and review.
‘© Folow steps 4 5 in “Resizing Images
(i129)
© © Estngirrposstermages tata esoo)
(RAS) or resized to (S] (22120).
«Ramage coma betes
Q + woes semer cngprg wna me sane apo
erga
2 Cage ea eres van coges
mas
+ yap images satay ce Des ny
ane DD nage ean,
+ Tomove the tame, ag ether mage onthe screen instep 3.
+ Youcan aso resize rames bypincring n ara (ED) nthe
sereen instep 3
™ Changing Image Color Tones (My Colors)
D Su images
You can agust image colors and then save the edted image as a
Separate fle. For detals on each option, see “Changing Image Color
Tones (My Colors)" (280).
1 Choose [My Colors]
‘© Press the MENU button, and then
choose [My Colors] on the [[EI] tab
(dio)
2 Choose an image.
‘© Press the [4)1D] buttons or tum the (6)
da to choose an image, and then press
the (@) button
3 Choose an option
+ Press the [4][ ] buttons or turn the (@]
«da to choose an option, and then press
the (8) button
4 Save as a new image and review.
+ Fallow steps 4-5 in Resizing Images
zo,
Image quaty e pictures you repeat eats way wil be
ate lower each me, and you may na be able to tan te
ese colo.
Colors of RAWimages cannot be este
‘The color of mages edited using is uncon may var sy
ram the calor ef mages st using My Colors (80.
‘You can aso congue Ms setig by touching an option select
Ion te screen nstep3andthentauchngit again,
Betore Use
Guide
Inder
1 Canora Basics,
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4 P Mode
5 Taya, and C Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
122
‘© Folow steps 4 5 in “Resizing Images
(i129)
© © Estngirrposstermages tata esoo)
(RAS) or resized to (S] (22120).
«Ramage coma betes
Q + woes semer cngprg wna me sane apo
erga
2 Cage ea eres van coges
mas
+ yap images satay ce Des ny
ane DD nage ean,
+ Tomove the tame, ag ether mage onthe screen instep 3.
+ Youcan aso resize rames bypincring n ara (ED) nthe
sereen instep 3
™ Changing Image Color Tones (My Colors)
D Su images
You can agust image colors and then save the edted image as a
Separate fle. For detals on each option, see “Changing Image Color
Tones (My Colors)" (280).
1 Choose [My Colors]
‘© Press the MENU button, and then
choose [My Colors] on the [[EI] tab
(dio)
2 Choose an image.
‘© Press the [4)1D] buttons or tum the (6)
da to choose an image, and then press
the (@) button
3 Choose an option
+ Press the [4][ ] buttons or turn the (@]
«da to choose an option, and then press
the (8) button
4 Save as a new image and review.
+ Fallow steps 4-5 in Resizing Images
zo,
Image quaty e pictures you repeat eats way wil be
ate lower each me, and you may na be able to tan te
ese colo.
Colors of RAWimages cannot be este
‘The color of mages edited using is uncon may var sy
ram the calor ef mages st using My Colors (80.
‘You can aso congue Ms setig by touching an option select
Ion te screen nstep3andthentauchngit again,
Betore Use
Guide
Inder
1 Canora Basics,
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4 P Mode
5 Taya, and C Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
122
™ Correcting Image Brightness (i-Contrast)
D Su Images
Excessively dark image areas (such as faces or backgrounds) cen be
detected and automaticaly aqusted to the optimal brightness. Insuficient
‘overall image contrast is also automaticaly corrected, to make subjects
stand out beter. Choose from four correction levels, andthen save the
image as a separate fl.
1 Choose Contrast
‘© Press the MENU button, anathen
choose [-Contrasi] onthe [TE] tab
(so.
2 Choose an image.
‘© Press the [4I[D buttons or tum the (6)
dial to choose an image, and then press
the (®) button
3 Choose an option.
e Press the (QD) buttons or tum the (6)
il to choose an option, and then press
the (6) button.
Æ Save as a new image and review.
‘© Follow steps 45 in Restzing Images
(i129)
OR
Ino gg ary
pena ga ptos ory ee tn
2 Rene etsy
+ to] dos mt produce the expectedresuts, ty comectng
Images using [Low], Mesum] or High
Ad) + voucan aso contare mis sting by toucring 4} onthe
sereeninstep à
™ Correcting Red-Eye
> Sit images
Automatically corects images aeted by re.eye. You can save the
comrectedimage esa separate ie,
1 Choose (Red-Eye Correction}
+ Press the MENU] button, and then
choose [Red-Eye Correction] on the [LEI]
tab RO)
2 Choose an image.
‘© Press the [4I[D] buttons or tum the [69]
dal to choose an image.
3 Correct the image.
e Press the (8) button
© Redeye detected by the camera is now
corrected, and frames are displayed.
around corrected image areas.
‘© Enlarge or reduce images as needed.
Follow the steps in “Magnifying Images’
cana),
4 Save as a new image and review.
+ Press the [a][wI4][D] buttons or tum.
the 16] da to choose [New Fil), and
then press the (@) button
The image is now saved as anew fie.
e Follow step 5 in Resizing Images’
(0120)
Betore Use
Basic Guido
1 Camera Basics,
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4 P Mode
5 Taya, and C Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
Inder
«ba
123
D Su Images
Excessively dark image areas (such as faces or backgrounds) cen be
detected and automaticaly aqusted to the optimal brightness. Insuficient
‘overall image contrast is also automaticaly corrected, to make subjects
stand out beter. Choose from four correction levels, andthen save the
image as a separate fl.
1 Choose Contrast
‘© Press the MENU button, anathen
choose [-Contrasi] onthe [TE] tab
(so.
2 Choose an image.
‘© Press the [4I[D buttons or tum the (6)
dial to choose an image, and then press
the (®) button
3 Choose an option.
e Press the (QD) buttons or tum the (6)
il to choose an option, and then press
the (6) button.
Æ Save as a new image and review.
‘© Follow steps 45 in Restzing Images
(i129)
OR
Ino gg ary
pena ga ptos ory ee tn
2 Rene etsy
+ to] dos mt produce the expectedresuts, ty comectng
Images using [Low], Mesum] or High
Ad) + voucan aso contare mis sting by toucring 4} onthe
sereeninstep à
™ Correcting Red-Eye
> Sit images
Automatically corects images aeted by re.eye. You can save the
comrectedimage esa separate ie,
1 Choose (Red-Eye Correction}
+ Press the MENU] button, and then
choose [Red-Eye Correction] on the [LEI]
tab RO)
2 Choose an image.
‘© Press the [4I[D] buttons or tum the [69]
dal to choose an image.
3 Correct the image.
e Press the (8) button
© Redeye detected by the camera is now
corrected, and frames are displayed.
around corrected image areas.
‘© Enlarge or reduce images as needed.
Follow the steps in “Magnifying Images’
cana),
4 Save as a new image and review.
+ Press the [a][wI4][D] buttons or tum.
the 16] da to choose [New Fil), and
then press the (@) button
The image is now saved as anew fie.
e Follow step 5 in Resizing Images’
(0120)
Betore Use
Basic Guido
1 Camera Basics,
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4 P Mode
5 Taya, and C Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
Inder
«ba
123
Some mages mayo be cortes ua, Editing Movies Bor Uso
‘Tooverwnte the orga Image wit the crectedimage, choose
[Overa] in step. ints case, the xgnal image wi be DrMovies —_/BasieGuide
erased,
a ES LT
FRS
Red-eye correction can be applied to JPEG images shotin il, 1 Choose [Xx
butte orginal image cam be ovenkten. Ef ong tard TES Resin 1 Camera Basics
(211103), choose [de] and press the (8) "Auto Mode /
button 2 Hybrid Auto Mode
‘You can save images by touching [New File or[Ovenurtelontne e The movie editing panel and edting bar
screen in step 4 are now displayed. 3 Other Shooting Modes
(1) 2 Specify portions to cut. 4 P Mode
© (1) is the movie edting panel, and
the editing bar 5 Tw.Av.M, and C Mode
e Press the [a] buttons to choose LI]
m AEE]
(identfied by [SE] on the screen), press anaes
the {CID} buttons or tum the (@ dial to ARE
e
more ($) Cut the beginning of the movie
(from (36) by choosing UT, and cut the 8 Sowing Menu.
end ofthe movie by choosing FA)
«If you move Mo a positon other than a Accessories
18%] mark, in HD the potion before the
‘earest [34] mark onthe left wi be cut,
le in (Ate porton after the nearest
134] mark on the right wil be cut
10 Appendix
Inder
«ba
124
‘Tooverwnte the orga Image wit the crectedimage, choose
[Overa] in step. ints case, the xgnal image wi be DrMovies —_/BasieGuide
erased,
a ES LT
FRS
Red-eye correction can be applied to JPEG images shotin il, 1 Choose [Xx
butte orginal image cam be ovenkten. Ef ong tard TES Resin 1 Camera Basics
(211103), choose [de] and press the (8) "Auto Mode /
button 2 Hybrid Auto Mode
‘You can save images by touching [New File or[Ovenurtelontne e The movie editing panel and edting bar
screen in step 4 are now displayed. 3 Other Shooting Modes
(1) 2 Specify portions to cut. 4 P Mode
© (1) is the movie edting panel, and
the editing bar 5 Tw.Av.M, and C Mode
e Press the [a] buttons to choose LI]
m AEE]
(identfied by [SE] on the screen), press anaes
the {CID} buttons or tum the (@ dial to ARE
e
more ($) Cut the beginning of the movie
(from (36) by choosing UT, and cut the 8 Sowing Menu.
end ofthe movie by choosing FA)
«If you move Mo a positon other than a Accessories
18%] mark, in HD the potion before the
‘earest [34] mark onthe left wi be cut,
le in (Ate porton after the nearest
134] mark on the right wil be cut
10 Appendix
Inder
«ba
124
Review the edited movie. ™ Reducing File Sizes Before Use
‘© Pros the fal] butons to choose Db
andthen press the (@) button The ected Movie fe sizes can be reduced by compressing movies as follows re
movies now played + On the screen in step 2of Eling
+ To edit the movie again, repeat step 2. Movies’, choose [L)_ Choose [New File], LEEDS
To cancel eting press ne MENU) tion pen Holl atin:
button, choose [OK] (either press the © Choose [Compress & Sav], and then
(MILD buttons ortun ne 18] da, and press tre (@ button
then press the [®) button
1 Camera Basics,
2 ui mater
4 Save ne edited movie. Hd Auto ode
+ Press the [AN w] buttons to choose [AI
erden ese (8 ton er
‘© Press the [AN w ID) buttons or turn ‘choose [Ovenunte, 4 P Mode
the [@] did to choose [New File], and
then press the [®) button.
© Choose [Save w/o Comp]. and then x
ed + Youcan aso ext moves by touching the move eating panel or
Shab
«Temores seas arena 2 A=
7 WiFi Functions
Q + conressesmoves ae saves n FREE toma.
+ (BER moves cannot ve compressed 3 Other Shooting Modes
5 Taya, and C Modo
8 Sowing Menu.
D mom song nove win ne coe done
[Overwrite] in step 4. In this case, the orignal movie will be 9 Accessories
cost
+ lite memory carac suce space, ony [Ovewnte wi be
Helis 10 Appendix
+ Movies may na be saves he bate pack uns ot whe sang
Isinpogess,
+ When eating moves, you hau use a ui charge battery pack
Oran AG adopter (sol separately C150),
Inder
«ba
125
‘© Pros the fal] butons to choose Db
andthen press the (@) button The ected Movie fe sizes can be reduced by compressing movies as follows re
movies now played + On the screen in step 2of Eling
+ To edit the movie again, repeat step 2. Movies’, choose [L)_ Choose [New File], LEEDS
To cancel eting press ne MENU) tion pen Holl atin:
button, choose [OK] (either press the © Choose [Compress & Sav], and then
(MILD buttons ortun ne 18] da, and press tre (@ button
then press the [®) button
1 Camera Basics,
2 ui mater
4 Save ne edited movie. Hd Auto ode
+ Press the [AN w] buttons to choose [AI
erden ese (8 ton er
‘© Press the [AN w ID) buttons or turn ‘choose [Ovenunte, 4 P Mode
the [@] did to choose [New File], and
then press the [®) button.
© Choose [Save w/o Comp]. and then x
ed + Youcan aso ext moves by touching the move eating panel or
Shab
«Temores seas arena 2 A=
7 WiFi Functions
Q + conressesmoves ae saves n FREE toma.
+ (BER moves cannot ve compressed 3 Other Shooting Modes
5 Taya, and C Modo
8 Sowing Menu.
D mom song nove win ne coe done
[Overwrite] in step 4. In this case, the orignal movie will be 9 Accessories
cost
+ lite memory carac suce space, ony [Ovewnte wi be
Helis 10 Appendix
+ Movies may na be saves he bate pack uns ot whe sang
Isinpogess,
+ When eating moves, you hau use a ui charge battery pack
Oran AG adopter (sol separately C150),
Inder
«ba
125
® Editing Digest Movies Betore Use
D>Movies aes
Individual chapters (cips) (£2126) recorded in (M mode can be
erased, as needed, Be careful when erasing clips, because they cannot
be recovered
ME 7 Select the clip to erase. 1 Camera Basics
e Folow steps 1- 2 in “Viewing Short —
~~" Movies Created When Shooting Stil 2 Aus
Images (Digest Movies) (1108) to type Auto Mode
play a movi created in bf] mode, and TEAS US
then press the (@) button to access the
‘movie control panel
Press the [4]IM buttons or tum the (8)
dial to choose th] or Dell, and then press.
tre [@] button. 5 Taya, and C Modo
gee AEE]
reson otr rt 6
dial to choose ($), andthen press the (6)
buon
The selected cip is played back
repeal
3 contin erasure, 9 Accessories
Press the D buttons or tum he 16)
dial to choose [OK and then press the oven
[Ol buton D
+ The ip is erased, and he shor movies es
overunten
4 Prode
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
DI ee
CH
«ba
126
D>Movies aes
Individual chapters (cips) (£2126) recorded in (M mode can be
erased, as needed, Be careful when erasing clips, because they cannot
be recovered
ME 7 Select the clip to erase. 1 Camera Basics
e Folow steps 1- 2 in “Viewing Short —
~~" Movies Created When Shooting Stil 2 Aus
Images (Digest Movies) (1108) to type Auto Mode
play a movi created in bf] mode, and TEAS US
then press the (@) button to access the
‘movie control panel
Press the [4]IM buttons or tum the (8)
dial to choose th] or Dell, and then press.
tre [@] button. 5 Taya, and C Modo
gee AEE]
reson otr rt 6
dial to choose ($), andthen press the (6)
buon
The selected cip is played back
repeal
3 contin erasure, 9 Accessories
Press the D buttons or tum he 16)
dial to choose [OK and then press the oven
[Ol buton D
+ The ip is erased, and he shor movies es
overunten
4 Prode
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
DI ee
CH
«ba
126
Wi-Fi Functions
‘Send images wirelessly from the camera to a variety
of compatible devices, and use the camera with Web
services
| Available Wi-Fi Features
ve images and control the c
e devices and services via WLFi
You cen send and
connecting ito th
smartphones and Tablets
‘Send images to smartphones and tai
functions. You can also shoot rem
Smartphone or tablet
For convenience in this manı
compat
Compu
Use software to save camera images to a computer connected via
WF
ied Services
Add your account in NON IMAGE
'EWAY online phat (eb services to send
camera images to the services. Unsent mages on the camer
ica o a computer or Web service via
era remotely by
mputers that have W
}geotag your shots froma
1, smartphones, tablet, and other
fly referred to as "smertphones
ge.
printer (supporting
Fi compatible Canon cameras
Betore Use
Basie Guide
1 Camora Basics,
Auto Mode
2 Hybrid Auto Mode
9 Accessories
10 Appendix
Inder
127
‘Send images wirelessly from the camera to a variety
of compatible devices, and use the camera with Web
services
| Available Wi-Fi Features
ve images and control the c
e devices and services via WLFi
You cen send and
connecting ito th
smartphones and Tablets
‘Send images to smartphones and tai
functions. You can also shoot rem
Smartphone or tablet
For convenience in this manı
compat
Compu
Use software to save camera images to a computer connected via
WF
ied Services
Add your account in NON IMAGE
'EWAY online phat (eb services to send
camera images to the services. Unsent mages on the camer
ica o a computer or Web service via
era remotely by
mputers that have W
}geotag your shots froma
1, smartphones, tablet, and other
fly referred to as "smertphones
ge.
printer (supporting
Fi compatible Canon cameras
Betore Use
Basie Guide
1 Camora Basics,
Auto Mode
2 Hybrid Auto Mode
9 Accessories
10 Appendix
Inder
127
nding Images to a Smartphone
Connect the camera to a smartphone and send images in either of these
ways.
+ Connect to a device assigned to the [button (£11128)
‘Simply press the [button to connect the devices, This simplifies
imporing images from a smartphone (£11128). Note that only one
smartphone can be assigned tothe I] button.
+ Connect via the WiFi menu (1130)
You can connect the camera to a smartphone as you would connec it
toa computer or her device. Mutiple smartphones can be added.
Before connecting to the camera, you must instal the free dedicated
‘Cameraiindow app on the smartphone. For details on this applicabon
(supported smartphones and included functions), refer tothe Canon
webste,
© + women amer tcs ys cono mes
a ear ape
rends Fasa,
™ Sending to a Smartphone Assigned to the
Button
Once you have connected to a smartphone intially by pressing the [CJ
button, you can simply ress the [button ater at to connect again for
Viewing and saving camera images on connected devices.
These steps show howto use the camera as an access point, but you can
also use an existing access point (£11132),
1 Install CameraWindow.
2 For an NFC.compatible Android
smartphone (OS version 40 or later)
‘activating NFC and touching the
Smartphone against the cameras
IN-Mark (RD val stat Google Play on the
Smartphone. Once the CameraWindow
‘download page i displayed, download
‘andinstall the app.
«© For other Android smartphones, find
'CameraWindow in Google Play and
donnload and install the app,
For an iPhone, iPad, or iPod touch, find
CCameraWindowin the App Store and
‘download and install the app,
2 Press the (LJ button
e Press the [J button.
‘When the [Device Nickname] screen is
displayed, press he ($) button Use the
keyboard displayed to enter aniciname
2222), On the [Device Nickname)
screen, choose [OK] (ether press the
(a buttons er tum te (8) dl) and
then press the [) button
Betore Use
Guide
1 Camora Basics,
2 Auto mee
Hybrid Auto Modo
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4 P Mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
Index
8 Sowing Menu,
9 Accessories
10 Apendix
4/»/9
128
Connect the camera to a smartphone and send images in either of these
ways.
+ Connect to a device assigned to the [button (£11128)
‘Simply press the [button to connect the devices, This simplifies
imporing images from a smartphone (£11128). Note that only one
smartphone can be assigned tothe I] button.
+ Connect via the WiFi menu (1130)
You can connect the camera to a smartphone as you would connec it
toa computer or her device. Mutiple smartphones can be added.
Before connecting to the camera, you must instal the free dedicated
‘Cameraiindow app on the smartphone. For details on this applicabon
(supported smartphones and included functions), refer tothe Canon
webste,
© + women amer tcs ys cono mes
a ear ape
rends Fasa,
™ Sending to a Smartphone Assigned to the
Button
Once you have connected to a smartphone intially by pressing the [CJ
button, you can simply ress the [button ater at to connect again for
Viewing and saving camera images on connected devices.
These steps show howto use the camera as an access point, but you can
also use an existing access point (£11132),
1 Install CameraWindow.
2 For an NFC.compatible Android
smartphone (OS version 40 or later)
‘activating NFC and touching the
Smartphone against the cameras
IN-Mark (RD val stat Google Play on the
Smartphone. Once the CameraWindow
‘download page i displayed, download
‘andinstall the app.
«© For other Android smartphones, find
'CameraWindow in Google Play and
donnload and install the app,
For an iPhone, iPad, or iPod touch, find
CCameraWindowin the App Store and
‘download and install the app,
2 Press the (LJ button
e Press the [J button.
‘When the [Device Nickname] screen is
displayed, press he ($) button Use the
keyboard displayed to enter aniciname
2222), On the [Device Nickname)
screen, choose [OK] (ether press the
(a buttons er tum te (8) dl) and
then press the [) button
Betore Use
Guide
1 Camora Basics,
2 Auto mee
Hybrid Auto Modo
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4 P Mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
Index
8 Sowing Menu,
9 Accessories
10 Apendix
4/»/9
128
3 Choose (0.
«Press the (QD buttons or tum he 16)
dia to choose (and then press tre (0)
button
The camera's SSID is displayed.
4 Connect the smartphone to the
network
‘ein the smatphones WAI setting menu
choose the SSID (network name)
displayed on the camera to establish a
connection
5 Start CameraWindow.
For an NFC-compatible Android
smartphone (OS version 40 of later)
‘activating NFC and touching the
smartphone against the camera's N-Mark
(RD wi start Camerawindow on the
smartphone.
For other smartphones, stat
CameraWindow on the smartphone.
+ Ar the camera recognizes the
Smartphone, a device selection screen is
displayed
6 Choose a smartphone to connect to.
‘© Choose the smartphone (ether by
pressing the [a][w] buttons or by turning
(0) da), andthen press the (©)
button
© After a connection is established with
the smartphone, the smartphone name
is displayed on the camera. (This screen
will dose in about one minute.)
7 Import images.
Use the smartphone to import images
from the camerato the smartphone,
+ Use the smartphone to end the
connection; the camera will automatically
tum off
© + ‘rer sg i.e town pans nm
a reg pat een Cana aemanptne Tis
re
Depend onthe arte, e dees mayerecgnte
torn ober med ns as. ay nolngte deers
together in sligty diferent postions.
Dana ace ve aj duce e came an
raton: Alone camera or smarts coves or
Sar acesonesma/ oa cman
1 Camora Basics,
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
ee
9 Accessories
10 Appendix
Inder
«ba
129
«Press the (QD buttons or tum he 16)
dia to choose (and then press tre (0)
button
The camera's SSID is displayed.
4 Connect the smartphone to the
network
‘ein the smatphones WAI setting menu
choose the SSID (network name)
displayed on the camera to establish a
connection
5 Start CameraWindow.
For an NFC-compatible Android
smartphone (OS version 40 of later)
‘activating NFC and touching the
smartphone against the camera's N-Mark
(RD wi start Camerawindow on the
smartphone.
For other smartphones, stat
CameraWindow on the smartphone.
+ Ar the camera recognizes the
Smartphone, a device selection screen is
displayed
6 Choose a smartphone to connect to.
‘© Choose the smartphone (ether by
pressing the [a][w] buttons or by turning
(0) da), andthen press the (©)
button
© After a connection is established with
the smartphone, the smartphone name
is displayed on the camera. (This screen
will dose in about one minute.)
7 Import images.
Use the smartphone to import images
from the camerato the smartphone,
+ Use the smartphone to end the
connection; the camera will automatically
tum off
© + ‘rer sg i.e town pans nm
a reg pat een Cana aemanptne Tis
re
Depend onthe arte, e dees mayerecgnte
torn ober med ns as. ay nolngte deers
together in sligty diferent postions.
Dana ace ve aj duce e came an
raton: Alone camera or smarts coves or
Sar acesonesma/ oa cman
1 Camora Basics,
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
ee
9 Accessories
10 Appendix
Inder
«ba
129
Ccomestions equre thata memory care in he camera
message Is splayed fhe nckrame you eter begins win
a Symbol or space. Press the (®) bution and entera arent
ncinane.
For beter securty you can display a passwordon ine screen
In step by accessing MENU AM) and choosing [fito
> [WHF Setings| > [Password] » [On] Int case inte
passar il onthe smartphone in te 4, entre password
aspayeg onthe camera
(One smartphone cante registeredto the button. To assign
a fret one, rst clear eurent one in MENU (ASO) >
ifTita » (Mote Device Connect Buon
Nal NFC-compabble smartphones have an N-Mark RD For
(als reterto te smatpnone user manual
™ Adding a Smartphone Using the Wi-Fi Menu
These steps show how to use the camera as an access point, but you can
also use an existing access point (£11132),
1 Install CameraWindow.
+ Fallow step 1 in"Sendngtoa Smartphone
Assigned to the Button” (£21128) to install
‘CameraiWindow on a smartphone
2 Access the Wi-Fi menu.
© Press the [EN button to tum the camera
Press the [A] button
Ifa screen requesting he device
nickname is displayed, enter the
nickname (£21128).
3 Choose D].
‘© Press the (II) buttons or tum the (6)
da to choose (I, and then press the (8)
button
4 Choose [Add a Device],
Press the [a][w]buttons or tum the
dal to choose [Add a Device], and th
press the (6) button,
Betore Use
Basic Guido
1 Camera Basics,
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4 P Mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo.
Inder
8 Sowing Menu,
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
130
message Is splayed fhe nckrame you eter begins win
a Symbol or space. Press the (®) bution and entera arent
ncinane.
For beter securty you can display a passwordon ine screen
In step by accessing MENU AM) and choosing [fito
> [WHF Setings| > [Password] » [On] Int case inte
passar il onthe smartphone in te 4, entre password
aspayeg onthe camera
(One smartphone cante registeredto the button. To assign
a fret one, rst clear eurent one in MENU (ASO) >
ifTita » (Mote Device Connect Buon
Nal NFC-compabble smartphones have an N-Mark RD For
(als reterto te smatpnone user manual
™ Adding a Smartphone Using the Wi-Fi Menu
These steps show how to use the camera as an access point, but you can
also use an existing access point (£11132),
1 Install CameraWindow.
+ Fallow step 1 in"Sendngtoa Smartphone
Assigned to the Button” (£21128) to install
‘CameraiWindow on a smartphone
2 Access the Wi-Fi menu.
© Press the [EN button to tum the camera
Press the [A] button
Ifa screen requesting he device
nickname is displayed, enter the
nickname (£21128).
3 Choose D].
‘© Press the (II) buttons or tum the (6)
da to choose (I, and then press the (8)
button
4 Choose [Add a Device],
Press the [a][w]buttons or tum the
dal to choose [Add a Device], and th
press the (6) button,
Betore Use
Basic Guido
1 Camera Basics,
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4 P Mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo.
Inder
8 Sowing Menu,
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
130
+ The cameras SSID is displayed.
‘© Choose a smartphone to connect to, as
descibedin steps 4-6 of “Sending to
‘a Smartphone Assigned tothe Button
(28)
5 Adjust the privacy setting
e Press the [QD] buttons or turn the (8)
il to choose [Yes], and then press the
[@)buton
«© You can now use the smartphone to
browse, import, or geotag images on the
camera or shoot remotaly,
6 Send images.
2 Tum the [0] dato choose an image to
send, press the [4][p] buttons to choose
[Send his image], and then press the [©
button
Press the [AL YIID buttons to choose
[Send], and then press the (@) button
Image transfer will begin. The screen
darkens during image transfer.
[Transfer complete] is displayed ater
the image is sent, andthe image transfer
screen is displayed again
To cancel the connection, press the
¡MENU tuton, choose (OK) on the
confirmation screen (ether press the
HD) buttons or turn the (M) sia), and
‘then press the (®) button, You can
also use the smartphone to end the
connection
To add multiple smartphones, repeat the
above procedures staring from step 1
‘Al mages inte camera canbe ewes ram te connected
‘smatphone when you choose [es] I step 5. o keep camera
Images rv, thatthe cannot e viewed fom ne
smatphons choose] m step $
(Once you have registered a smartphone, you can change privacy
setigsfriton the camera (149).
Comes require na amemoy card be ne camera.
Once youhave comectetodevces wate WiF menu, cart
strates ut stats when you access the MT menu
Youcan easly conect aga by pressing te (a) pons D
choose te dence ans ten pressing me [Baton To add a
new device, Blaye seve sect see y presang me
(Al ets, anatnen congue he sting
M pret a ply recent eves, chooee MENU
(ERG > AMT» pr Serge)» Mage >
(om
Youcan aso sendmustpe mages atone and change the image
se vtr senang (Ras)
Betore Use
Basic Guido
1 Camera Basics,
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
cs
9 Accessories
10 Appendix
Inder
«ba
131
‘© Choose a smartphone to connect to, as
descibedin steps 4-6 of “Sending to
‘a Smartphone Assigned tothe Button
(28)
5 Adjust the privacy setting
e Press the [QD] buttons or turn the (8)
il to choose [Yes], and then press the
[@)buton
«© You can now use the smartphone to
browse, import, or geotag images on the
camera or shoot remotaly,
6 Send images.
2 Tum the [0] dato choose an image to
send, press the [4][p] buttons to choose
[Send his image], and then press the [©
button
Press the [AL YIID buttons to choose
[Send], and then press the (@) button
Image transfer will begin. The screen
darkens during image transfer.
[Transfer complete] is displayed ater
the image is sent, andthe image transfer
screen is displayed again
To cancel the connection, press the
¡MENU tuton, choose (OK) on the
confirmation screen (ether press the
HD) buttons or turn the (M) sia), and
‘then press the (®) button, You can
also use the smartphone to end the
connection
To add multiple smartphones, repeat the
above procedures staring from step 1
‘Al mages inte camera canbe ewes ram te connected
‘smatphone when you choose [es] I step 5. o keep camera
Images rv, thatthe cannot e viewed fom ne
smatphons choose] m step $
(Once you have registered a smartphone, you can change privacy
setigsfriton the camera (149).
Comes require na amemoy card be ne camera.
Once youhave comectetodevces wate WiF menu, cart
strates ut stats when you access the MT menu
Youcan easly conect aga by pressing te (a) pons D
choose te dence ans ten pressing me [Baton To add a
new device, Blaye seve sect see y presang me
(Al ets, anatnen congue he sting
M pret a ply recent eves, chooee MENU
(ERG > AMT» pr Serge)» Mage >
(om
Youcan aso sendmustpe mages atone and change the image
se vtr senang (Ras)
Betore Use
Basic Guido
1 Camera Basics,
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
cs
9 Accessories
10 Appendix
Inder
«ba
131
™ Using Another Access Point
When connecting the camera to a smartphone wih the [DI button or
through the WEFI menu, you can also use an existing access point
5 Configure the privacy settings and
send images.
© Follow steps 5-5 in "Adding a
1 Prepare for the connection.
+ Access the Wang to connect] screen
Either follow steps 1-3 in Sending
a Smartphone Assigned othe Button
125} or steps 1-4in "Adanga
Smartphone Using the WiFi Menu’
so)
2 connect the smartphone to the
access point
3 Choose [Switch Network].
e Press the [QD] buttons or tum the (8)
dal to choose (Switch Network], and then
press the (8) button
e Alist of detected access points will be
displayed
Æ Connect to the access point and
choose the smartphone.
‘© For WPS-compatible access points,
connect to the access point and choose
the smartphone as described in steps
5 - Bin Using WPS.Compatble Access
Ponts” (2135).
«© For non-WPS access points, follow steps
2-4 in “Connecting to Listed Access
Points” (21137) to connectto the
‘access pont and choose the smartphone
Smartphone Using the W-Fi Menu
(120) to configure the privacy
settings and send images.
™ Previous Access Points
To reconnect to a previous access point automatically, follow step 3 in
‘Sending toa Smartphone Assigned to the Button” (11128) or step din
"Adding a Smartphone Using the W+Fi Menu" (11130)
+ Touse the camera as an access paint, choose [Switch Network} on the
screen displayed when you establish a connection, and then choose
[Camera Access Point Mode]
+ Toreconnectto a previous access point follow the procedure from
step 5 in ‘Using Ancther Access Point (1182).
+ To switch access points, choose [Switch Network] on the screen
splayed when you establish a connection, and then folow the
procedure in “Using Ancther Access Point (£11132) from step 4.
Betore Use
Basie Guide
1 Camora Basics,
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
ee
9 Accessories
10 Appendix
Inder
«>4
132
When connecting the camera to a smartphone wih the [DI button or
through the WEFI menu, you can also use an existing access point
5 Configure the privacy settings and
send images.
© Follow steps 5-5 in "Adding a
1 Prepare for the connection.
+ Access the Wang to connect] screen
Either follow steps 1-3 in Sending
a Smartphone Assigned othe Button
125} or steps 1-4in "Adanga
Smartphone Using the WiFi Menu’
so)
2 connect the smartphone to the
access point
3 Choose [Switch Network].
e Press the [QD] buttons or tum the (8)
dal to choose (Switch Network], and then
press the (8) button
e Alist of detected access points will be
displayed
Æ Connect to the access point and
choose the smartphone.
‘© For WPS-compatible access points,
connect to the access point and choose
the smartphone as described in steps
5 - Bin Using WPS.Compatble Access
Ponts” (2135).
«© For non-WPS access points, follow steps
2-4 in “Connecting to Listed Access
Points” (21137) to connectto the
‘access pont and choose the smartphone
Smartphone Using the W-Fi Menu
(120) to configure the privacy
settings and send images.
™ Previous Access Points
To reconnect to a previous access point automatically, follow step 3 in
‘Sending toa Smartphone Assigned to the Button” (11128) or step din
"Adding a Smartphone Using the W+Fi Menu" (11130)
+ Touse the camera as an access paint, choose [Switch Network} on the
screen displayed when you establish a connection, and then choose
[Camera Access Point Mode]
+ Toreconnectto a previous access point follow the procedure from
step 5 in ‘Using Ancther Access Point (1182).
+ To switch access points, choose [Switch Network] on the screen
splayed when you establish a connection, and then folow the
procedure in “Using Ancther Access Point (£11132) from step 4.
Betore Use
Basie Guide
1 Camora Basics,
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
ee
9 Accessories
10 Appendix
Inder
«>4
132
Saving Images to a Compu
™ Preparing to Register a Computer
Checking Your Computer Environment
The camera can conned via Wi-Fi to computers running the fallowing
‘operating systems For detaled system requirements and compatbilty
information, including support in new operating systems, vsitthe Canon
website,
+ Windows 88.1
+ Windows 7 SP1
+ Mac OSX 109
+ Mac OSX 10.8.2 oF later
© : won stat atm Ba tos an spots
1 ina In ron ern ad Soneto)
Ten separ oie! man Wao eds
AA
Fords ect olonng webs
re ago mins Cen MOTO
Installing the Software
Windows 7 and Mac OS X 108 are used here forthe sake ofilustraton
What you will nee:
+ Computer
+. USB cable (camera end Mini-6)*
“AUSB cal mitinciued. Athaug You can instal he sore winout using a
ane features wil robe 30H69
1 Download the software.
‘© With a computer connectedto the
Intemet, access np /huww canon com!
icpd.
+ Access the ste for your county or region
+ Download the sofware,
2 Begin the instalation.
© Cick [Easy Installation] and folow the
‘on-screen instructions to complete the
installation process.
3 When a message is displayed
‘prompting you to connect the camera,
choose whether to connect or not.
Betore Use
Basie Guide
1 Camora Basics,
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
cs
9 Accessories
10 Appendix
Inder
«>4
133
™ Preparing to Register a Computer
Checking Your Computer Environment
The camera can conned via Wi-Fi to computers running the fallowing
‘operating systems For detaled system requirements and compatbilty
information, including support in new operating systems, vsitthe Canon
website,
+ Windows 88.1
+ Windows 7 SP1
+ Mac OSX 109
+ Mac OSX 10.8.2 oF later
© : won stat atm Ba tos an spots
1 ina In ron ern ad Soneto)
Ten separ oie! man Wao eds
AA
Fords ect olonng webs
re ago mins Cen MOTO
Installing the Software
Windows 7 and Mac OS X 108 are used here forthe sake ofilustraton
What you will nee:
+ Computer
+. USB cable (camera end Mini-6)*
“AUSB cal mitinciued. Athaug You can instal he sore winout using a
ane features wil robe 30H69
1 Download the software.
‘© With a computer connectedto the
Intemet, access np /huww canon com!
icpd.
+ Access the ste for your county or region
+ Download the sofware,
2 Begin the instalation.
© Cick [Easy Installation] and folow the
‘on-screen instructions to complete the
installation process.
3 When a message is displayed
‘prompting you to connect the camera,
choose whether to connect or not.
Betore Use
Basie Guide
1 Camora Basics,
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
cs
9 Accessories
10 Appendix
Inder
«>4
133
When Connecti
Computer
‘© With the camera turned of, open the
cover (1). With the smaller plug ofthe
USB cable in the orientation shown,
insert the plug fly into the camera
terminal (2)
insert ne large plug ofthe USE cable
inthe computers USS por. For dots
about USE comectons onthe computer.
FA —| refer tothe computer user manual
‘Turn the camera on, endfolon the
on-screen instructions to complete the
installation process.
1g the Camera to the
Without Connecting the Camera
e Select nstal without connecting the device)
and folow the on-screen insrucions to
complet the installation proces.
4 instal thet
+ Instalaicn may take sometime
depending on computer performance and
the Imernet connection
+ Cick [Finish] or (Resta onthe screen
ter nstalaton
+ Aterinstalicn when the camera is
Connected tothe computer, tum the
Camera of before dsconnectng the cable
Q + men oe certs tte stay rite
Pe
eee Sean
Configuring the Computer for a Wi-Fi Connection Before Use
(Windows Only)
On a computer running Windows, configure the folowing settings before
connecting the camera to the computer wirelessly, MET
1 Confirm that the computer is
connected to an access point Fe
Basie Guide
+ For instructions on checking your network
== connection, rfer to the computer user 2 Auto Mod /
mana. Hybrid Auto Modo
2 Configure the setting. 8 Other Shooting Modos.
Gickin he following order [Stat] menu
> [AI Programs] » [Canon Utities] > 4 P Mode
[Cameraiindon] > [Wi-Fi connection
setup] 5 Tv.Av.M and C Modo
e inthe application that opens, folow the
‘on-screen instructions and configure the
Sting
© rr rneg in ting conose AZ
iy instep 2.
Tum onmeda steaming 8 Sowing Menu,
‘This wl erable te camera se (ng) the computer to access
va Wi
Tum on network cave.
‘This wl enable the computerto see fin) he camera
Tum on CMP {remet Cotra Message Proc 10 Appendix
salons yuto check ne networkcomecton sats.
Enable UnversalPlu & Play (UPrP) index
‘This wa erable neworkdeveesto detect each omer
agomatcaly
+ Some secur sofware may prevent you Ram completing ne
‘setings as desenbeahere.Checktnesetings of your secu
sofware
(6 Playback Modo.
Accessories
«ba
134
Computer
‘© With the camera turned of, open the
cover (1). With the smaller plug ofthe
USB cable in the orientation shown,
insert the plug fly into the camera
terminal (2)
insert ne large plug ofthe USE cable
inthe computers USS por. For dots
about USE comectons onthe computer.
FA —| refer tothe computer user manual
‘Turn the camera on, endfolon the
on-screen instructions to complete the
installation process.
1g the Camera to the
Without Connecting the Camera
e Select nstal without connecting the device)
and folow the on-screen insrucions to
complet the installation proces.
4 instal thet
+ Instalaicn may take sometime
depending on computer performance and
the Imernet connection
+ Cick [Finish] or (Resta onthe screen
ter nstalaton
+ Aterinstalicn when the camera is
Connected tothe computer, tum the
Camera of before dsconnectng the cable
Q + men oe certs tte stay rite
Pe
eee Sean
Configuring the Computer for a Wi-Fi Connection Before Use
(Windows Only)
On a computer running Windows, configure the folowing settings before
connecting the camera to the computer wirelessly, MET
1 Confirm that the computer is
connected to an access point Fe
Basie Guide
+ For instructions on checking your network
== connection, rfer to the computer user 2 Auto Mod /
mana. Hybrid Auto Modo
2 Configure the setting. 8 Other Shooting Modos.
Gickin he following order [Stat] menu
> [AI Programs] » [Canon Utities] > 4 P Mode
[Cameraiindon] > [Wi-Fi connection
setup] 5 Tv.Av.M and C Modo
e inthe application that opens, folow the
‘on-screen instructions and configure the
Sting
© rr rneg in ting conose AZ
iy instep 2.
Tum onmeda steaming 8 Sowing Menu,
‘This wl erable te camera se (ng) the computer to access
va Wi
Tum on network cave.
‘This wl enable the computerto see fin) he camera
Tum on CMP {remet Cotra Message Proc 10 Appendix
salons yuto check ne networkcomecton sats.
Enable UnversalPlu & Play (UPrP) index
‘This wa erable neworkdeveesto detect each omer
agomatcaly
+ Some secur sofware may prevent you Ram completing ne
‘setings as desenbeahere.Checktnesetings of your secu
sofware
(6 Playback Modo.
Accessories
«ba
134
™ Saving Images to a Connected Computer
Connect to your access point via Wi-Fi as folons,
Also refer tothe access point user manual.
Confirming Access Point Compatibility
CConfrm that the Wi-Fi router or base station conforms to the WWF
standards in "Wi-Fi" (C2194),
‚Connection methods vary depencing on whether the access point
supports WV-Fi Protected Setup (WPS, £11135) or not (21137). For
non. WPS access paints, check the folowing information.
+ Network name (SSIDIESSID)
The SSID or ESSIO for the access pont you use Also called the
‘access point name" or “network name
+ Network authentication / data encryption (encryption method /
encryption mode)
The method for encrypting data during wireless transmission. Check
which security setting is used: WPA2-PSK (AES), WPAZPSK
(TKIP), WPA-PSK (AES), WPA-PSK (TKIP), WEP (open system
authentication), or no secur,
+ Password (encryption key I network key)
The key used hen encrypting data during wireless transmission. Also
called the “encryption key" or network hey
+ Key index (ransmit key)
‘The key set when WEP is used for network authentication / data
encryption. Use asthe setting,
Ont antros receto aqu tr
‘sting cota ve sem sto ro
2 Tri enge rv po ot sy Etre
ener aro nee sng
Forintomaton on WPS compatbasy and for rsuctons on CET
Checking setngs, fete access port user manual
router à de tat creates antwork (LAN) suc or Basie Guide
comectg mule computers A router trat cortan an itera
AW functonis calles a" router
“This gui refers to al Woxter and ase stations access
pants"
Iryouuse MAC adtres ang on your WEF newark, be sure
agde cameras MAC adaess to your access port Youcan
check your camera's MAC adress by choosing MENU (HD)
> IL > (wer Setings] » [check MAC Adress}
1 Camora Basics,
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
3 Otner Shooting Modes
Using WPS: Compatible Access Points
WPS makes it easy to complete settings when connecting devices over
Wi-Fi. You can use either Push Button Configuration Method or PIN
Method for settings on a WPS supported device
Be
1 Confirm that the computer is 6 Playback Mode
nn as
2 Access the Wi-Fi menu.
‘© Press the ([EJ] button to turn the camera aes
o
e Press the [a] button DEEE
«When the (Device Nichnamel screen is
‘splayed, press ne (@) buton Use the
keyboard dsplayedto eter à creme
2132) On te Device Nickname)
‘screen, choose [OK] (either press the
[aJ[-¥] buttons or tum the [(@] dial), and
then press ne (6) buon
4 P mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
«ba
135
Connect to your access point via Wi-Fi as folons,
Also refer tothe access point user manual.
Confirming Access Point Compatibility
CConfrm that the Wi-Fi router or base station conforms to the WWF
standards in "Wi-Fi" (C2194),
‚Connection methods vary depencing on whether the access point
supports WV-Fi Protected Setup (WPS, £11135) or not (21137). For
non. WPS access paints, check the folowing information.
+ Network name (SSIDIESSID)
The SSID or ESSIO for the access pont you use Also called the
‘access point name" or “network name
+ Network authentication / data encryption (encryption method /
encryption mode)
The method for encrypting data during wireless transmission. Check
which security setting is used: WPA2-PSK (AES), WPAZPSK
(TKIP), WPA-PSK (AES), WPA-PSK (TKIP), WEP (open system
authentication), or no secur,
+ Password (encryption key I network key)
The key used hen encrypting data during wireless transmission. Also
called the “encryption key" or network hey
+ Key index (ransmit key)
‘The key set when WEP is used for network authentication / data
encryption. Use asthe setting,
Ont antros receto aqu tr
‘sting cota ve sem sto ro
2 Tri enge rv po ot sy Etre
ener aro nee sng
Forintomaton on WPS compatbasy and for rsuctons on CET
Checking setngs, fete access port user manual
router à de tat creates antwork (LAN) suc or Basie Guide
comectg mule computers A router trat cortan an itera
AW functonis calles a" router
“This gui refers to al Woxter and ase stations access
pants"
Iryouuse MAC adtres ang on your WEF newark, be sure
agde cameras MAC adaess to your access port Youcan
check your camera's MAC adress by choosing MENU (HD)
> IL > (wer Setings] » [check MAC Adress}
1 Camora Basics,
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
3 Otner Shooting Modes
Using WPS: Compatible Access Points
WPS makes it easy to complete settings when connecting devices over
Wi-Fi. You can use either Push Button Configuration Method or PIN
Method for settings on a WPS supported device
Be
1 Confirm that the computer is 6 Playback Mode
nn as
2 Access the Wi-Fi menu.
‘© Press the ([EJ] button to turn the camera aes
o
e Press the [a] button DEEE
«When the (Device Nichnamel screen is
‘splayed, press ne (@) buton Use the
keyboard dsplayedto eter à creme
2132) On te Device Nickname)
‘screen, choose [OK] (either press the
[aJ[-¥] buttons or tum the [(@] dial), and
then press ne (6) buon
4 P mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
«ba
135
3 choose IQ
Press the [AN VID buttons ortum
‘the (@ dia to choose (E), and then
press the (@) button
Choose [Add a Device)
e Press the [4] buttons or tum the [
dial to choose (Add a Devil, andthen
press the (@) button
5 Choose [WPS Connection}.
e Press the [aw] buttons ortum the (9)
dial to choose [WPS Connection], and
then press the (@) button
6 Choose [PBC Method}.
© Press the [a] buttons or tum the I
dial to choose [PEC Method), and then
press the (@) button
7 Establish the connection
‘© On the access point, hold down the WPS
connection button for afew seconds
‘© On the camera, press the [@) button to
goto the next step.
The camera connects to the access point
and ists devices connectedtoit on the
[Select a Device] screen
Pr
[5] 9 instal a driver (frst Windows
8 Choose the target device.
+ Choose the target vice name (ether
press the [a] buions or ur the (9)
da), andthen press the [) buton
connection only)
Wen this screen is displayed on the
camera, click the Stert menu on the
computer, click [Control Panel), and then
dick [Add a device]
Double-click the connected camera icon
Driver instalation wil begin.
‘ter diver instalation is complet, and
the camera and computer connection
is enabled, the AutoPtay screen willbe
displayed, Nothing will be displayed on
the camera screen.
10 Display CameraWindow.
+ Windows: Access Cameralindow by
licking Downloads Images From Canon
Camera}
+ Mac OS. ComeraWindow is automatically
splayed when a Wi-Fi connecton is
established between the camera and
computer
Betore Use
Basic Guido
1 Camera Basics,
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4 P Mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
6 Playback Modo
8 Sowing Menu,
Accessories
10 Appendix
Inder
«ba
136
Press the [AN VID buttons ortum
‘the (@ dia to choose (E), and then
press the (@) button
Choose [Add a Device)
e Press the [4] buttons or tum the [
dial to choose (Add a Devil, andthen
press the (@) button
5 Choose [WPS Connection}.
e Press the [aw] buttons ortum the (9)
dial to choose [WPS Connection], and
then press the (@) button
6 Choose [PBC Method}.
© Press the [a] buttons or tum the I
dial to choose [PEC Method), and then
press the (@) button
7 Establish the connection
‘© On the access point, hold down the WPS
connection button for afew seconds
‘© On the camera, press the [@) button to
goto the next step.
The camera connects to the access point
and ists devices connectedtoit on the
[Select a Device] screen
Pr
[5] 9 instal a driver (frst Windows
8 Choose the target device.
+ Choose the target vice name (ether
press the [a] buions or ur the (9)
da), andthen press the [) buton
connection only)
Wen this screen is displayed on the
camera, click the Stert menu on the
computer, click [Control Panel), and then
dick [Add a device]
Double-click the connected camera icon
Driver instalation wil begin.
‘ter diver instalation is complet, and
the camera and computer connection
is enabled, the AutoPtay screen willbe
displayed, Nothing will be displayed on
the camera screen.
10 Display CameraWindow.
+ Windows: Access Cameralindow by
licking Downloads Images From Canon
Camera}
+ Mac OS. ComeraWindow is automatically
splayed when a Wi-Fi connecton is
established between the camera and
computer
Betore Use
Basic Guido
1 Camera Basics,
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4 P Mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
6 Playback Modo
8 Sowing Menu,
Accessories
10 Appendix
Inder
«ba
136
11 Import images.
Click [Import Images from Camera), and
then click Import Untransferred Images]
‘© Images are now saved to the Pictures
older on the computer, in separate
‘folders named by date
‘© Click [OK in the screen thatis displayed
after image impor is complete. For
instructions on viewing images on a
computer, refer to "Software Instruction
Manual" (£11163).
‘once you have conecte to devices athe W-FI menu, recent.
Gestation wil be Usted rst when you acces the W-F menu
You can easly connect again y pressing the LJ Y] DLTNS to
‘choose ne device and tien pressing the (@) button. To 263 a
eu device, spay the device selection screen by pressing te
Abi tutors, andre conique te setirg
Ityou prefer not to dspay recent target deuces, choose MENU
(Cen) > Fao > (04 FiSettngs > [Target History >
fon,
A messages slayeail the nickname you enter begins wah
3 Spmbal or space. Press te (@) bution and entera aire
Amen te cameras comté to a computer, the camera screen
Ist.
Mac OS. Cameron ls natlsplaye ck tne
Camera icon ne Dock.
To disamect ram he camera, un othe camera,
Ityouchnse PIN Metro] in step 6, a PIN code wi be displayed
‘nine sereen Be sie to sens code inthe access pot
(Choose a device inthe [Selec a Device) screen, For futher
ells, reerto te user manual included win your acces pant
Connecting to Listed Access Points
1 View the listed access points.
«© View the listed networks (access points)
as described in steps 1 ~ 4 of "Using
\WPS-Compatble Access Points
Ass)
2 Choose an access point.
+ Press the [a][v] buttons or tum the (@]
alto choose a network (access point),
‘and then press the [@] button,
Enter the access point password.
‘© Press the (8) button to access the
Keyboard, and then enter the password
ise).
‘© Press the [AV] buttons or turn the (@]
dal to choose [Next], and then press the
18] button
4 Choose Auto]
+ Press the [a][w] buttons or tum the (@)
dial to choose [Auto], and then press the
(6) button.
+ To save images to acomected computer
foton nepcedue romstep in
ang WES Compete Recess Ponts
(138).
1 Camora Basics,
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4 P Mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo.
Inder
8 Sowing Menu,
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
137
Click [Import Images from Camera), and
then click Import Untransferred Images]
‘© Images are now saved to the Pictures
older on the computer, in separate
‘folders named by date
‘© Click [OK in the screen thatis displayed
after image impor is complete. For
instructions on viewing images on a
computer, refer to "Software Instruction
Manual" (£11163).
‘once you have conecte to devices athe W-FI menu, recent.
Gestation wil be Usted rst when you acces the W-F menu
You can easly connect again y pressing the LJ Y] DLTNS to
‘choose ne device and tien pressing the (@) button. To 263 a
eu device, spay the device selection screen by pressing te
Abi tutors, andre conique te setirg
Ityou prefer not to dspay recent target deuces, choose MENU
(Cen) > Fao > (04 FiSettngs > [Target History >
fon,
A messages slayeail the nickname you enter begins wah
3 Spmbal or space. Press te (@) bution and entera aire
Amen te cameras comté to a computer, the camera screen
Ist.
Mac OS. Cameron ls natlsplaye ck tne
Camera icon ne Dock.
To disamect ram he camera, un othe camera,
Ityouchnse PIN Metro] in step 6, a PIN code wi be displayed
‘nine sereen Be sie to sens code inthe access pot
(Choose a device inthe [Selec a Device) screen, For futher
ells, reerto te user manual included win your acces pant
Connecting to Listed Access Points
1 View the listed access points.
«© View the listed networks (access points)
as described in steps 1 ~ 4 of "Using
\WPS-Compatble Access Points
Ass)
2 Choose an access point.
+ Press the [a][v] buttons or tum the (@]
alto choose a network (access point),
‘and then press the [@] button,
Enter the access point password.
‘© Press the (8) button to access the
Keyboard, and then enter the password
ise).
‘© Press the [AV] buttons or turn the (@]
dal to choose [Next], and then press the
18] button
4 Choose Auto]
+ Press the [a][w] buttons or tum the (@)
dial to choose [Auto], and then press the
(6) button.
+ To save images to acomected computer
foton nepcedue romstep in
ang WES Compete Recess Ponts
(138).
1 Camora Basics,
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4 P Mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo.
Inder
8 Sowing Menu,
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
137
© » Toastemine ne access port password, check onthe access ding Images to a Registered Web Service Retreat
Pant set refer to te user manual
+ Upto 16 acces pant wi e displayed Ito acess pts are = Basie Guide
detecten even ater you choose [Retest instep 2to update ne Registering Web Services
ist, choose Manual Setrgs]in step 210 complete acces pie LEURS
setings manual Fol onscreen nutes a entran Use a smartphone or computer to adito the camera Web services hat
SSID, seur setings, and a pasara ‘you want to use.
+ Wnenyou use an access pant that you have already comected
totorconnecingto anoiner deve, (1's dsplayed tor tne
Camera Bases
+ Assmartphone or computer with a browser and Internet connection is E
required to complete camera settings for CANON IMAGE GATEWAY
pessuordistep à To sete same passa cha Nes] Auto Modo
(etnerpress ne (AT batons orton ne (@ a) apre sd ce Ne sanos 2 yond Auto Mode
ve (Oo + Checkthe CANON IMAGE GATEWAY website for details on browser
(Microsoft Internet Explorer, et) requrements,induding setings and 3 ner Shooting Modes
version information
Previous Access Points + Forintormaton on counties and regions where CANON IMAGE 4 Puedo
GATEWAY is aralable, viste Canon webste (tp ws canon,
You can reconnect to any previous access points automaticaly by como)
Tw Au Mand Gode
following stop 4 n "Using WPS-Compatitie Access Points" (11135). + You must have an account with Web services other than CANON B
+ Torecomecttothe access point, confim thatthe target device is IMAGE GATEWAY # you deste to usa them Forfurther deals, check
already comectedt it andthen alow the procedure rom step in ‘he webstes for each Web service you vanttoregster 6 Playback Mode
‘Using WPS.Compatibie Access Ponts" (21198).
+ Separate ISP connection and access pain fees may be applicable
+ To switch access points, choose [Switch Network] on the screen
splayed after connection, and then ether fllow the procedure in
‘Using WPS-Compatible Access Points’ (£01135) from step 5 or the 8 Setting Menu
procedure in” Connecting to Listed Access Points” (01137) from
e. 9 Accessories
10 Aopen
me
«ba
138
Pant set refer to te user manual
+ Upto 16 acces pant wi e displayed Ito acess pts are = Basie Guide
detecten even ater you choose [Retest instep 2to update ne Registering Web Services
ist, choose Manual Setrgs]in step 210 complete acces pie LEURS
setings manual Fol onscreen nutes a entran Use a smartphone or computer to adito the camera Web services hat
SSID, seur setings, and a pasara ‘you want to use.
+ Wnenyou use an access pant that you have already comected
totorconnecingto anoiner deve, (1's dsplayed tor tne
Camera Bases
+ Assmartphone or computer with a browser and Internet connection is E
required to complete camera settings for CANON IMAGE GATEWAY
pessuordistep à To sete same passa cha Nes] Auto Modo
(etnerpress ne (AT batons orton ne (@ a) apre sd ce Ne sanos 2 yond Auto Mode
ve (Oo + Checkthe CANON IMAGE GATEWAY website for details on browser
(Microsoft Internet Explorer, et) requrements,induding setings and 3 ner Shooting Modes
version information
Previous Access Points + Forintormaton on counties and regions where CANON IMAGE 4 Puedo
GATEWAY is aralable, viste Canon webste (tp ws canon,
You can reconnect to any previous access points automaticaly by como)
Tw Au Mand Gode
following stop 4 n "Using WPS-Compatitie Access Points" (11135). + You must have an account with Web services other than CANON B
+ Torecomecttothe access point, confim thatthe target device is IMAGE GATEWAY # you deste to usa them Forfurther deals, check
already comectedt it andthen alow the procedure rom step in ‘he webstes for each Web service you vanttoregster 6 Playback Mode
‘Using WPS.Compatibie Access Ponts" (21198).
+ Separate ISP connection and access pain fees may be applicable
+ To switch access points, choose [Switch Network] on the screen
splayed after connection, and then ether fllow the procedure in
‘Using WPS-Compatible Access Points’ (£01135) from step 5 or the 8 Setting Menu
procedure in” Connecting to Listed Access Points” (01137) from
e. 9 Accessories
10 Aopen
me
«ba
138
Registering CANON IMAGE GATEWAY.
After Ilingthe camera and CANON IMAGE GATEWAY, add CANON
IMAGE GATEWAY as a desinaion Web service on the Camera
4 Log into CANON IMAGE GATEWAY
CI and access the camera web link
settings page.
EAS am a computer or smartphone, access.
"uo ivan confi! to visk CANON
IMAGE GATEWAY
+ Once he lg screens displayed
enter your user name and password
Ko Do n 1 yeu do nd have a CANON
IMAGE GATEWAY account toto
the insnucionsto complete member
registration (ree of charge)
2 choose the ype of camera.
© On this camera model, [M] is displayed
inthe WiFi menu
+ Once you choose fi a age is
displayed for entemmg te authentication
Code. On tis page n sp 7, you wi
tarte authentication code played
onthe comer afta steps 3-6
3 Access the WHF! menu
‘© Press the [EN button to turn the camera
on
rs Press the [a] button
‘© When the [Device Nickname] screen is
displayed, press the [@) button. Use the
keyboard displayed to enter a nickname
(21132), On the (Device Nickname]
screen, choose [Ok] (ether press the
alt] buttons or tum the (@) dal), and
then press the (6) button
4 Choose (da)
© Press the [AJ wI14](D] buttons or tum.
the [6] da to choose (dia), and then
press the (6) button,
5 Choose {Authenticate}.
«© Press the [ID butons or tum the (0)
alto choose (Authenticate), andthen
press the (6) button
6 Establish a connection with an
access point.
© Connect to the access point as described
in steps 5- Tin “Using WPS Compatible
Access Points” (011135) or in steps 2— 4
in Connecting to Listed Access Points
(ia.
‘© Once the camera is connected to CANON
IMAGE GATEWAY via the access point,
en authentication code is displayed.
7 Enter the authentication code.
mere
== camera and goto the next step.
© Asix-dait confrmaton number is
splayed
Betore Use
Basie Guide
1 Camora Basics,
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
cs
9 Accessories
10 Appendix
Inder
«ba
139
After Ilingthe camera and CANON IMAGE GATEWAY, add CANON
IMAGE GATEWAY as a desinaion Web service on the Camera
4 Log into CANON IMAGE GATEWAY
CI and access the camera web link
settings page.
EAS am a computer or smartphone, access.
"uo ivan confi! to visk CANON
IMAGE GATEWAY
+ Once he lg screens displayed
enter your user name and password
Ko Do n 1 yeu do nd have a CANON
IMAGE GATEWAY account toto
the insnucionsto complete member
registration (ree of charge)
2 choose the ype of camera.
© On this camera model, [M] is displayed
inthe WiFi menu
+ Once you choose fi a age is
displayed for entemmg te authentication
Code. On tis page n sp 7, you wi
tarte authentication code played
onthe comer afta steps 3-6
3 Access the WHF! menu
‘© Press the [EN button to turn the camera
on
rs Press the [a] button
‘© When the [Device Nickname] screen is
displayed, press the [@) button. Use the
keyboard displayed to enter a nickname
(21132), On the (Device Nickname]
screen, choose [Ok] (ether press the
alt] buttons or tum the (@) dal), and
then press the (6) button
4 Choose (da)
© Press the [AJ wI14](D] buttons or tum.
the [6] da to choose (dia), and then
press the (6) button,
5 Choose {Authenticate}.
«© Press the [ID butons or tum the (0)
alto choose (Authenticate), andthen
press the (6) button
6 Establish a connection with an
access point.
© Connect to the access point as described
in steps 5- Tin “Using WPS Compatible
Access Points” (011135) or in steps 2— 4
in Connecting to Listed Access Points
(ia.
‘© Once the camera is connected to CANON
IMAGE GATEWAY via the access point,
en authentication code is displayed.
7 Enter the authentication code.
mere
== camera and goto the next step.
© Asix-dait confrmaton number is
splayed
Betore Use
Basie Guide
1 Camora Basics,
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
cs
9 Accessories
10 Appendix
Inder
«ba
139
8 Check the confirmation numbers
and complete the setup process.
‘© Make sure the confirmation number on
the camera matches the number on the
‘smartphone or computer
‘© Press the [4][P] buttons or tum the (6)
dial to choose (OK) and then press the
(6) button
+ Complete the setup process on he
smartphone or computer
e (E (E2145) and CANON IMAGE
GATEWAY are now added as
destinations, and the (M icon changes
to (dal
+ Amessage is dsplayed on the
smartphone or computer to indicate that
this process is fnished To add other
Web services, fallow the procedure
in Registering Other Web Services
(E1140) rom step 2
PR EE
es
urn
Feel
Be ann Icon
alles
Registering Other Web Services
You can also add Web services besides CANONIMAGE GATEWAY to the
camera, Note that CANON IMAGE GATEWAY must be registered on the
camera frst (21199)
1 Access the Web service settings
Ü Pp tr 4 1
IMAGE GATEWAY (£11139) to login
to CANON IMAGE GATEWAY, andthen
‘access the Web service satings screen
2 Configure the Web service you want
ot
U Pp ‘smartphone or computer to set up the
Web service
3 Choose [a
+ In Plajback mode, press te [AJ button
to access the WiFi menu
+ Press the LAN WII butons ortum
the (@) da to cioose fl ancien
press the (@) button
© The Web service setings are now
updated
+ ttanycotigued setings change, low these steps again to
Update ne camera settings
1 Camora Basics,
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4 P Mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
6 Playback Modo
Inder
8 Sowing Menu,
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
140
and complete the setup process.
‘© Make sure the confirmation number on
the camera matches the number on the
‘smartphone or computer
‘© Press the [4][P] buttons or tum the (6)
dial to choose (OK) and then press the
(6) button
+ Complete the setup process on he
smartphone or computer
e (E (E2145) and CANON IMAGE
GATEWAY are now added as
destinations, and the (M icon changes
to (dal
+ Amessage is dsplayed on the
smartphone or computer to indicate that
this process is fnished To add other
Web services, fallow the procedure
in Registering Other Web Services
(E1140) rom step 2
PR EE
es
urn
Feel
Be ann Icon
alles
Registering Other Web Services
You can also add Web services besides CANONIMAGE GATEWAY to the
camera, Note that CANON IMAGE GATEWAY must be registered on the
camera frst (21199)
1 Access the Web service settings
Ü Pp tr 4 1
IMAGE GATEWAY (£11139) to login
to CANON IMAGE GATEWAY, andthen
‘access the Web service satings screen
2 Configure the Web service you want
ot
U Pp ‘smartphone or computer to set up the
Web service
3 Choose [a
+ In Plajback mode, press te [AJ button
to access the WiFi menu
+ Press the LAN WII butons ortum
the (@) da to cioose fl ancien
press the (@) button
© The Web service setings are now
updated
+ ttanycotigued setings change, low these steps again to
Update ne camera settings
1 Camora Basics,
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4 P Mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
6 Playback Modo
Inder
8 Sowing Menu,
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
140
™ Uploading Images to Web Services
1 Access the Wi-Fi menu
Press the [EN button to turn the camera
e Press the [A] button
2 Choose the destination
2 Choose the con of the Web service or
sharing (either press the [aJ[w] buttons
or um the (6) dal, and then pres the
[6] button.
multiple recipients e sharing options
aro used vith a Neb service, choose the
desred tem onthe (Select Recent)
screen (either press the [a][w] buttons
or um te (@} dal), nd then press he
(@buten
3 Send images.
‘© Tum the (@) dato choose an image to
send press the [4][P] buttons to choose
[Send his image), and then press the (©)
button
e Press the [a Y ID} buttons to choose
[Send], and then press the (@) button
‘© When uploading to YouTube, read the
terms of service, choose I Agree], and
press the (@) button
Image transfer will begin. The screen
darkens during image transfer
After the images are sent, [OK] is
displayed Press the (@ button to return
tothe playback screen.
=e MN
=
a comments before senang 144)
1 Camera Basics,
2 Auto Mode
Hybrid Auto Mode
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4 P Mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo.
Inder
8 Sowing Menu,
Accessories
10 Appendix
4/»/9
141
1 Access the Wi-Fi menu
Press the [EN button to turn the camera
e Press the [A] button
2 Choose the destination
2 Choose the con of the Web service or
sharing (either press the [aJ[w] buttons
or um the (6) dal, and then pres the
[6] button.
multiple recipients e sharing options
aro used vith a Neb service, choose the
desred tem onthe (Select Recent)
screen (either press the [a][w] buttons
or um te (@} dal), nd then press he
(@buten
3 Send images.
‘© Tum the (@) dato choose an image to
send press the [4][P] buttons to choose
[Send his image), and then press the (©)
button
e Press the [a Y ID} buttons to choose
[Send], and then press the (@) button
‘© When uploading to YouTube, read the
terms of service, choose I Agree], and
press the (@) button
Image transfer will begin. The screen
darkens during image transfer
After the images are sent, [OK] is
displayed Press the (@ button to return
tothe playback screen.
=e MN
=
a comments before senang 144)
1 Camera Basics,
2 Auto Mode
Hybrid Auto Mode
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4 P Mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo.
Inder
8 Sowing Menu,
Accessories
10 Appendix
4/»/9
141
Printing Images Wirelessly from a Connected
Printer
Connect the camera o a printer via WI-Fi to print as follows,
‘These steps show how to use the camera as an access paint, but you can
‘also use an existing access point (£11132)
À Access the Wi-Fi menu
‘© Access the WiFi menu as described in
step 2 in" Adding a Smartphone Using
the Wi-Fi Menu” (£21130).
2 Choose (Bj,
‘© Press the [aJwI4ID] buttons or tur
‘the [6] dia to choose KB, andtnen
press the (@) button
3 Choose [Add a Device),
Press the [a] buttons ortum the [
dial to choose (Add a Device, andthen
press the (@) button
+ The cameras SSID is displayed
4 Connect the printer to the network.
‘Inthe printer's WiFi setting menu, choose
the SSID (network name) displayed on
the camera to establish a connection
5 Choose the printer.
© Choose the printer name (either press the
{all buttons or tum the (@] dal), and
then press the (6) button
6 Choose an image to print.
«© Press the [4JIM buttons o turn the (8)
«da to choose an image.
e Press the (@) button
e Press the [a] buttons or tum the (0)
dal to choose Print), and then press the
(@)butten
e For detailed printing instructions, see
Printing images” (21168).
e To cancel the connection, press the [a]
button, choose [OK] on the confirmation
screen (ether press the [41] buttons or
tum the [6) dal), and then press the (8)
button
Q + comestens require na memory ars win savesimages bein
ne camera
+ Once ouhar comestesto devees va near mer, ent
estates ie Ie test when you access ne WT men
You can easly connect gan y presse LAN tons to
noose te deve an nen pressing me [ton To add a
new deve, asp e deve sectonscee y resang e
HA Di tons nan core e set
you pete noo Aspa recent target ces chose MENU
ER)» (tas > (va Stings)» [rage hist» [OM
+ Touse ander access port flow tps 3 din"Langananer
acces Pan (12)
Betore Use
Basie Guide
1 Camora Basics,
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4 P Mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
6 Playback Modo
8 Sowing Menu,
Accessories
10 Appendix
Inder
«ba
142
Printer
Connect the camera o a printer via WI-Fi to print as follows,
‘These steps show how to use the camera as an access paint, but you can
‘also use an existing access point (£11132)
À Access the Wi-Fi menu
‘© Access the WiFi menu as described in
step 2 in" Adding a Smartphone Using
the Wi-Fi Menu” (£21130).
2 Choose (Bj,
‘© Press the [aJwI4ID] buttons or tur
‘the [6] dia to choose KB, andtnen
press the (@) button
3 Choose [Add a Device),
Press the [a] buttons ortum the [
dial to choose (Add a Device, andthen
press the (@) button
+ The cameras SSID is displayed
4 Connect the printer to the network.
‘Inthe printer's WiFi setting menu, choose
the SSID (network name) displayed on
the camera to establish a connection
5 Choose the printer.
© Choose the printer name (either press the
{all buttons or tum the (@] dal), and
then press the (6) button
6 Choose an image to print.
«© Press the [4JIM buttons o turn the (8)
«da to choose an image.
e Press the (@) button
e Press the [a] buttons or tum the (0)
dal to choose Print), and then press the
(@)butten
e For detailed printing instructions, see
Printing images” (21168).
e To cancel the connection, press the [a]
button, choose [OK] on the confirmation
screen (ether press the [41] buttons or
tum the [6) dal), and then press the (8)
button
Q + comestens require na memory ars win savesimages bein
ne camera
+ Once ouhar comestesto devees va near mer, ent
estates ie Ie test when you access ne WT men
You can easly connect gan y presse LAN tons to
noose te deve an nen pressing me [ton To add a
new deve, asp e deve sectonscee y resang e
HA Di tons nan core e set
you pete noo Aspa recent target ces chose MENU
ER)» (tas > (va Stings)» [rage hist» [OM
+ Touse ander access port flow tps 3 din"Langananer
acces Pan (12)
Betore Use
Basie Guide
1 Camora Basics,
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4 P Mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
6 Playback Modo
8 Sowing Menu,
Accessories
10 Appendix
Inder
«ba
142
Sending Images to Another Camera
Connect two cameras via WI-Fiand send images between them as.
follows
+ Only Canon-brand cameras equipped with a Wi-Fi funcion can be
connected to wirelessly. Even Canon-brand cameras that support Eye-
F cards cannot be connected tof they do nt have a W+Fi function
You cannot connect to PowerShot SD430 DIGITAL ELPH WIRELESS!
DIGITAL IXUS WIRELESS cameras with this camera,
À Access the Wi-Fi menu
‘© Access the WiFi menu as described in
step 2 in“ Adding a Smartphone Using
the Wi-Fi Menu” (£21130).
2 choose (ta
+ Press the (aJiwi{4]{ >] buttons or tum
‘the (@ did to choose IGM, and then
press the (8) button
3 Choose [Add a Device]
Presse [aw] buttons ortum the
¿alto choose (Adda Device], and then
press the (8) buton
‘Foto steps 1 ~3 on the target camera
too
+ Camera connection infrmaton vil be
aad en (Sta connection on target
camera) is slayed on bo camera
4 Send images.
‘© Tum the (6) dial to choose an image to
‘send, press the (4][}] buttons to choose
{Send this image), and then press the (©)
button
+ Press the [all wI14](p] buttons to choose
[Seng], and then press the (E) button
‘© Image transfer will begin. The screen
darkens during image transfer
[Transfer completed] is displayed after
{he image is sent, and the image transfer
screen is displayed again
‘© To cancel the connection, press the
IMENU button, choose [OK] on the
cconfrmetion screen (either press the
HI buttons or turn the (8) cial), and
then press the (@) button
‘Comets require that a memory cad be inthe camera
(Once you have commestedto devices wate WEF mena, recent
Gestation wi be Usted st nen you access the WEF menu,
You can easly connect again by pressing the Law] butons to
choose he de and en pressing ne (8) button To adda
new device, display re device seecton screen y pressing the
HD butons, nd Men coque te senng
Inyou prefer not to pay recenttargt devices, choose MENU
(C00) > Mita» [en Stings] > [Target Histo >
(on,
Youcan aso send mie Images at once ans change the mage
se before sensing Gi)
Betore Use
Guide
1 Camera Basics,
2 Auto Mode
Hybrid Auto Mode
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4 P Mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo.
Inder
8 Sowing Menu,
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
143
Connect two cameras via WI-Fiand send images between them as.
follows
+ Only Canon-brand cameras equipped with a Wi-Fi funcion can be
connected to wirelessly. Even Canon-brand cameras that support Eye-
F cards cannot be connected tof they do nt have a W+Fi function
You cannot connect to PowerShot SD430 DIGITAL ELPH WIRELESS!
DIGITAL IXUS WIRELESS cameras with this camera,
À Access the Wi-Fi menu
‘© Access the WiFi menu as described in
step 2 in“ Adding a Smartphone Using
the Wi-Fi Menu” (£21130).
2 choose (ta
+ Press the (aJiwi{4]{ >] buttons or tum
‘the (@ did to choose IGM, and then
press the (8) button
3 Choose [Add a Device]
Presse [aw] buttons ortum the
¿alto choose (Adda Device], and then
press the (8) buton
‘Foto steps 1 ~3 on the target camera
too
+ Camera connection infrmaton vil be
aad en (Sta connection on target
camera) is slayed on bo camera
4 Send images.
‘© Tum the (6) dial to choose an image to
‘send, press the (4][}] buttons to choose
{Send this image), and then press the (©)
button
+ Press the [all wI14](p] buttons to choose
[Seng], and then press the (E) button
‘© Image transfer will begin. The screen
darkens during image transfer
[Transfer completed] is displayed after
{he image is sent, and the image transfer
screen is displayed again
‘© To cancel the connection, press the
IMENU button, choose [OK] on the
cconfrmetion screen (either press the
HI buttons or turn the (8) cial), and
then press the (@) button
‘Comets require that a memory cad be inthe camera
(Once you have commestedto devices wate WEF mena, recent
Gestation wi be Usted st nen you access the WEF menu,
You can easly connect again by pressing the Law] butons to
choose he de and en pressing ne (8) button To adda
new device, display re device seecton screen y pressing the
HD butons, nd Men coque te senng
Inyou prefer not to pay recenttargt devices, choose MENU
(C00) > Mita» [en Stings] > [Target Histo >
(on,
Youcan aso send mie Images at once ans change the mage
se before sensing Gi)
Betore Use
Guide
1 Camera Basics,
2 Auto Mode
Hybrid Auto Mode
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4 P Mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo.
Inder
8 Sowing Menu,
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
143
Image Sending Options
You can choose mulipl images to send at once and change the image
resolution (size) before sending, Some Web services also enable you to
annotate the images you send
™ Sending Multiple Images
4 Choose [Select and send}
© On the image transe screen press ho
AID] buttons to choose [Select and
send], andthen press the (@ button
2 Choose images.
Press the [AN wI[4][»] buttons to choose
‘an image to send, and then press the (©)
button. [is displayed.
‘© To cancel selection, press the [@] button
again. [VA is no longer displayed,
‘© Repeet this process to choose additional
images.
‘© After you finish choosing images, press.
the MENU) button.
3 Send the images.
Press the (4JIM buttons or tum the (8)
al to choose [Send], and then press the
[Ol buton
Yu can also choose mages instep 2 by mowing the zoom
lever woe tonare [QU o access sngeimage display andtnen
pressing the (4 runs orturing te (QI al
™ Notes on Sending Images
Keep your fingers or other objects off the WEFI antenna area
(CRM). Covering this may decrease the speed of your image
tenders,
Dependng on the condiion of the network you are using. may take
long tie to send movies. Be sure to keep an eye on the camera.
battery level
Up to 50 images can be sent together at once, One movie up to five
minutes (or one digest movie up to 13 minutes) can be sent. However,
‘Web services may Imit the number o images or length of movies you
can send, For deals, refer to the Web service you are using,
For movies that you do nat compress (22125), separate
Compressed fie is Sent instead o the orginal fle, Note tht this may
delay transmission, andthe fle cannot be sent unless there is enough
space fort on the memory card
When sending movies to smartphones, note thet the supported image
Quality varies depending on the smartphone, For details, refer tothe
smartphone user manual.
On the screen, wireless signal strength is indicated by the folowing
Mal hig, (il medium, IM low (weak
‘Sending images to Web services will take less time when resending
images you have already sent that are stil on the CANONIMAGE,
GATEWAY server.
Betore Use
Basie Guide
1 Camora Basics,
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
4 Pode
9 Accessories
10 Appendix
Inder
«>4
144
You can choose mulipl images to send at once and change the image
resolution (size) before sending, Some Web services also enable you to
annotate the images you send
™ Sending Multiple Images
4 Choose [Select and send}
© On the image transe screen press ho
AID] buttons to choose [Select and
send], andthen press the (@ button
2 Choose images.
Press the [AN wI[4][»] buttons to choose
‘an image to send, and then press the (©)
button. [is displayed.
‘© To cancel selection, press the [@] button
again. [VA is no longer displayed,
‘© Repeet this process to choose additional
images.
‘© After you finish choosing images, press.
the MENU) button.
3 Send the images.
Press the (4JIM buttons or tum the (8)
al to choose [Send], and then press the
[Ol buton
Yu can also choose mages instep 2 by mowing the zoom
lever woe tonare [QU o access sngeimage display andtnen
pressing the (4 runs orturing te (QI al
™ Notes on Sending Images
Keep your fingers or other objects off the WEFI antenna area
(CRM). Covering this may decrease the speed of your image
tenders,
Dependng on the condiion of the network you are using. may take
long tie to send movies. Be sure to keep an eye on the camera.
battery level
Up to 50 images can be sent together at once, One movie up to five
minutes (or one digest movie up to 13 minutes) can be sent. However,
‘Web services may Imit the number o images or length of movies you
can send, For deals, refer to the Web service you are using,
For movies that you do nat compress (22125), separate
Compressed fie is Sent instead o the orginal fle, Note tht this may
delay transmission, andthe fle cannot be sent unless there is enough
space fort on the memory card
When sending movies to smartphones, note thet the supported image
Quality varies depending on the smartphone, For details, refer tothe
smartphone user manual.
On the screen, wireless signal strength is indicated by the folowing
Mal hig, (il medium, IM low (weak
‘Sending images to Web services will take less time when resending
images you have already sent that are stil on the CANONIMAGE,
GATEWAY server.
Betore Use
Basie Guide
1 Camora Basics,
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
4 Pode
9 Accessories
10 Appendix
Inder
«>4
144
™ Choosing the Image Resolution (Size)
‘On the image transfer screen, choose [EX by pressing the Law)
buttons, and then press the ($) button. On the screen displayed, choose
the rescluton by pressing the (a. buttons, and then press the (@)
button.
+ Tosend images at criginal size, select [No] as the resizing option.
+ Choosing M2 or {Sil resize images that are larger than the
selected size before sending,
+ Movies cannot be resized
PAPE nen > >
e ea ena
™ Adding Comments
Using the camera, you can add comments to images that you send
to e-mal addresses, soci networking services, etc. The number of
characters and symbols that can be entered may offer depending on the
Web service.
1 Access the screen for adding
‘comments
On the image transfer screen, choose
(8 by pressing the [allwI4]»] buttons,
‘and then press the (@} button.
2 Adda comment (182).
3 Send the image
Deere ane conn ok cnon
MCE xenon so
+ orcas aia mags fon sea. me
oe
es Automaticall
ding Im
Image Sync)
Images on the memory card that have not been transferred already can
be sent toa computer or Web services via CANON IMAGE GATEWAY
Note that mages cannot be sent only to Web services.
* Initial Preparations
Preparing the Camera
Register (as the destination. You can also assign (to the [D button
so that you can simply press the [button to send any unsent images on
the memory card to a computer via CANON IMAGE GATEWAY.
Ho
À Ada [Bl as a destination.
© Add (E as a destination, as descrbedin
Regsterng CANON MAGE GATEWAY"
iss),
+ To choose a Web service as the
destnaten,folon the steps n
Regsterng Other Web Senices
(ED) to update the camera setings.
2 Choose the type of images to send
(only when sending movies with
images).
«© Press the MENU} button and choose
WIFI Settings] onthe [FT] tab (2130),
e Press the [a] buttons to choose
[Image Syne}, andthen press the (dIID]
buttons to choose [Stils!Movies}
Betore Use
Guide
1 Camora Basics
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4 P Mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo.
8 Sowing Menu,
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
145
‘On the image transfer screen, choose [EX by pressing the Law)
buttons, and then press the ($) button. On the screen displayed, choose
the rescluton by pressing the (a. buttons, and then press the (@)
button.
+ Tosend images at criginal size, select [No] as the resizing option.
+ Choosing M2 or {Sil resize images that are larger than the
selected size before sending,
+ Movies cannot be resized
PAPE nen > >
e ea ena
™ Adding Comments
Using the camera, you can add comments to images that you send
to e-mal addresses, soci networking services, etc. The number of
characters and symbols that can be entered may offer depending on the
Web service.
1 Access the screen for adding
‘comments
On the image transfer screen, choose
(8 by pressing the [allwI4]»] buttons,
‘and then press the (@} button.
2 Adda comment (182).
3 Send the image
Deere ane conn ok cnon
MCE xenon so
+ orcas aia mags fon sea. me
oe
es Automaticall
ding Im
Image Sync)
Images on the memory card that have not been transferred already can
be sent toa computer or Web services via CANON IMAGE GATEWAY
Note that mages cannot be sent only to Web services.
* Initial Preparations
Preparing the Camera
Register (as the destination. You can also assign (to the [D button
so that you can simply press the [button to send any unsent images on
the memory card to a computer via CANON IMAGE GATEWAY.
Ho
À Ada [Bl as a destination.
© Add (E as a destination, as descrbedin
Regsterng CANON MAGE GATEWAY"
iss),
+ To choose a Web service as the
destnaten,folon the steps n
Regsterng Other Web Senices
(ED) to update the camera setings.
2 Choose the type of images to send
(only when sending movies with
images).
«© Press the MENU} button and choose
WIFI Settings] onthe [FT] tab (2130),
e Press the [a] buttons to choose
[Image Syne}, andthen press the (dIID]
buttons to choose [Stils!Movies}
Betore Use
Guide
1 Camora Basics
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4 P Mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo.
8 Sowing Menu,
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
145
Assign [EI to the [I] button (only
‘when sending images by pressing
the (E button).
+ Clear the button seting a
smartphone is ready assignedto the
buton (21128.
+ Press the I button to access the mobile
connecton screen, choose I (eher
press the [Ip] butons or tur the (9)
Gal), andihen press te (@buton
Preparing the Computer,
Install and configure the sofware on the destination computer
O
pp
1 Install the software,
Install the software on a computer
connected to the Internet (£11133).
2 Register the camera.
‘© Windows: Inthe taskbar, rightclick [ER
andthen click [Add new camera]
‘© Mac OS. In the menu bar, dick [and
then click [Add new camera]
«© Alist of cameras liked to CANON
IMAGE GATEWAY is displayed. Choose
the camera from which images are to be
sent
‘© Once the camera is registered and the
computer is ready to receive images, the
icon changes to (2.
™ Sending Images
Images sent from the camera re automatically saved to the computer.
Ihe computer that you intend to send images to is turned of, the images.
vil be stored temporarily on the CANON IMAGE GATEWAY server
‘Stored images are regularly erased, so make sure to tum on the computer
end save the images
1 Send images.
1 you have already assigned El othe
IL baton, press the (bution
+ Ifyou have no assigned th button this
wa, choose [E as descrbed in steps
1- 2in "Uploadng mages to Wed
Senices (Lan)
+ Once the connection is established
the mages are sent When the mages
have been sent successfull tothe
CANON IMAGE GATEWAY server, [Eis
played an the screen
2 Save the images to the computer.
‘© Images are automaticaly savedto the
‘computer when you turn it on
‘© Images are automatically sentto Web
services from the CANON IMAGE
GATEWAY server, even ifthe computer
‘sof.
CDD + veneno maps you sr any cragesatey
Paar ana eb ero EN
Before Use
Basie Guide
1 Camera Basics
2 Auto mee
Hybrid Auto Modo
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4 P Mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
8 Sowing Menu,
9 Accessories
10 Apendix
«ba
146
‘when sending images by pressing
the (E button).
+ Clear the button seting a
smartphone is ready assignedto the
buton (21128.
+ Press the I button to access the mobile
connecton screen, choose I (eher
press the [Ip] butons or tur the (9)
Gal), andihen press te (@buton
Preparing the Computer,
Install and configure the sofware on the destination computer
O
pp
1 Install the software,
Install the software on a computer
connected to the Internet (£11133).
2 Register the camera.
‘© Windows: Inthe taskbar, rightclick [ER
andthen click [Add new camera]
‘© Mac OS. In the menu bar, dick [and
then click [Add new camera]
«© Alist of cameras liked to CANON
IMAGE GATEWAY is displayed. Choose
the camera from which images are to be
sent
‘© Once the camera is registered and the
computer is ready to receive images, the
icon changes to (2.
™ Sending Images
Images sent from the camera re automatically saved to the computer.
Ihe computer that you intend to send images to is turned of, the images.
vil be stored temporarily on the CANON IMAGE GATEWAY server
‘Stored images are regularly erased, so make sure to tum on the computer
end save the images
1 Send images.
1 you have already assigned El othe
IL baton, press the (bution
+ Ifyou have no assigned th button this
wa, choose [E as descrbed in steps
1- 2in "Uploadng mages to Wed
Senices (Lan)
+ Once the connection is established
the mages are sent When the mages
have been sent successfull tothe
CANON IMAGE GATEWAY server, [Eis
played an the screen
2 Save the images to the computer.
‘© Images are automaticaly savedto the
‘computer when you turn it on
‘© Images are automatically sentto Web
services from the CANON IMAGE
GATEWAY server, even ifthe computer
‘sof.
CDD + veneno maps you sr any cragesatey
Paar ana eb ero EN
Before Use
Basie Guide
1 Camera Basics
2 Auto mee
Hybrid Auto Modo
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4 P Mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
8 Sowing Menu,
9 Accessories
10 Apendix
«ba
146
Q + sentimos we mprestone compuertas aut Using a Smartphone to View Camera Balto ee
Inno ay mage sera comp a TON MASE :
ea Images and Control the Camera
+ Senna ler ann San a compere sane
ener 4 caer, becouse nages are set a e acest You can do the following with the dedicated smartphone app
Pant nsead of CANON MAGE GATEWAY Note that Images Camerainindow.
Basie Guide
stored onthe computer are ser to CANON IMAGE GATEWAY, so + Browse images on the camera and save them tothe smartphone
the computer mustbe canectedto te Item. + Geolag images on the camera (11147) 1 Camora Basics,
+ Shoot remotely (£21148) ‘Auto Made /
2 Hybrid Auto Mode
+ Incamera sebngs. me smarghone muse alone vw
Oe 8 ote Sein on
: 4 Pose
Geotagging Images on the Camera
5 Tv,Av.M and C Modo
(GPS data recorded on a smartphone using the dedicated CameraWindow
application can be added to images on the camera. Images are tagged
‘th information including th lattude, longitude, and elevation,
QD: ests nc rca ones
ue Zone re st core, as esciesin"Setng De ate ana
“ine (120) Aso alone stes in War Clic (2) 8 Souing Menu
to pet any shooingdestnatonsin er me zones
+ Oe maybe abe toca or ry youby ug loatan ca
(6 Playback Modo.
In your gectagge sil mages or moves, Be corea when shar By pecmnsoret
these mages wth others, as when posing images nie where
many ones ean view tem, 10 Appendix
Inder
«ba
147
Inno ay mage sera comp a TON MASE :
ea Images and Control the Camera
+ Senna ler ann San a compere sane
ener 4 caer, becouse nages are set a e acest You can do the following with the dedicated smartphone app
Pant nsead of CANON MAGE GATEWAY Note that Images Camerainindow.
Basie Guide
stored onthe computer are ser to CANON IMAGE GATEWAY, so + Browse images on the camera and save them tothe smartphone
the computer mustbe canectedto te Item. + Geolag images on the camera (11147) 1 Camora Basics,
+ Shoot remotely (£21148) ‘Auto Made /
2 Hybrid Auto Mode
+ Incamera sebngs. me smarghone muse alone vw
Oe 8 ote Sein on
: 4 Pose
Geotagging Images on the Camera
5 Tv,Av.M and C Modo
(GPS data recorded on a smartphone using the dedicated CameraWindow
application can be added to images on the camera. Images are tagged
‘th information including th lattude, longitude, and elevation,
QD: ests nc rca ones
ue Zone re st core, as esciesin"Setng De ate ana
“ine (120) Aso alone stes in War Clic (2) 8 Souing Menu
to pet any shooingdestnatonsin er me zones
+ Oe maybe abe toca or ry youby ug loatan ca
(6 Playback Modo.
In your gectagge sil mages or moves, Be corea when shar By pecmnsoret
these mages wth others, as when posing images nie where
many ones ean view tem, 10 Appendix
Inder
«ba
147
Betore Use
™ Shooting Remotel O)
+ The camera wons in) mode aurngremote shoctng, However,
some FUNC. and MENU setings you have cours In advance
may be changed automaticaly. Basic Guido
+ Move shootng snot avalate,
AS you check a shooting screen on your smartphone, you can use ito
shoot remotely,
En D tay zener meme ann EEN
‚from zooming may also move the camera ar KABEL IM REES
‘out of position. Keep the camera still by o ere ap aye Copies a at nage LINE De 2 Auto Mode /
‘mounting it on a tripod or taking other (sh Hybrid Auto Mode
reve N en
ee EEE
2 Connect the camera and
Spann Gi ME
fein the privacy settings, choose [Yes]
3 Choose remote shooting. 5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
‘© In CameraiWindow on the smartphone,
choose remote shooting
‘© The camera lens will come out. Do not
press near the lens, and make sure no
Objects wil obstruct it
(6 Playback Modo.
‘© Once the camera is ready for remote Bhutan
shooting, alive image from the camera
wie displayed on the smartphone Accessories
‘© Atthis ime, a message is displayed on
the camera, and all operations except
10 Appendix
pressing the power button are disabled.
Shoot. Index
‘© Use the smartphone to shoot
«ba
148
™ Shooting Remotel O)
+ The camera wons in) mode aurngremote shoctng, However,
some FUNC. and MENU setings you have cours In advance
may be changed automaticaly. Basic Guido
+ Move shootng snot avalate,
AS you check a shooting screen on your smartphone, you can use ito
shoot remotely,
En D tay zener meme ann EEN
‚from zooming may also move the camera ar KABEL IM REES
‘out of position. Keep the camera still by o ere ap aye Copies a at nage LINE De 2 Auto Mode /
‘mounting it on a tripod or taking other (sh Hybrid Auto Mode
reve N en
ee EEE
2 Connect the camera and
Spann Gi ME
fein the privacy settings, choose [Yes]
3 Choose remote shooting. 5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
‘© In CameraiWindow on the smartphone,
choose remote shooting
‘© The camera lens will come out. Do not
press near the lens, and make sure no
Objects wil obstruct it
(6 Playback Modo.
‘© Once the camera is ready for remote Bhutan
shooting, alive image from the camera
wie displayed on the smartphone Accessories
‘© Atthis ime, a message is displayed on
the camera, and all operations except
10 Appendix
pressing the power button are disabled.
Shoot. Index
‘© Use the smartphone to shoot
«ba
148
Editing or Erasing Wi
ttings
Et or erase WiFi settings as follows.
Editing Connection Information
1 Access the Wi-Fi menu and choose
the device to edit.
‘© Press the [[B]] button to turn the camera
on.
e Press the [AJ button
© Press the [AN VIII] buttons ortum
the [6) did to choose the icon ofthe
device to edit, and then press the [$]
button
2 Choose [Edit a Device]
Press the [AJ w] buttons or tum the [
dial to choose (Edt a Device), and then
press the (@) button
3 choose adovicero eat
Press the [aw] butons ort he (@)
dal to choose the device to eat and en
press ne (@) baton
4 Choose an item to edt
Press he [av buttons ortum tre
Gal to choose an tem oe, and them
press the (@) buton
‘The tems you can change depend on
what device or Service the camera wil
Connection
Configurable items Ma
DS |e [senices
(Change Device Nickname a) | o [o Jo |o | -
(View Setings| (130), =-fo[-|-| =
(Erase Connection nto Garay [Oo Jo Jo [o | =
O: Configurable =: Net configurable
Changing a Device Nickname
You can change the device nickname (dsplay name) that is displayed on
the camera.
e Following step 4n “Eating Connection
Information” (£21149), choose [Change
Device Nickname] and press the (@)
button
Selectthe input field and press the (6)
button. Use the keyboard displayed to
entera new nickname (132).
Erasing Connection Information
Erase connection information (information about devices that
connected to) as follows.
y have
Following step 4 in “Eating Connection
Information” ($1149), choose [Erase
¡Connection Info] and press the (8)
button
+ After [Erase] is displayed, press the
[ID] buttons or tum the (@ alto
choose [OK], and then press the (8)
button
+ The connection information vál be
erased
Betore Use
Basie Guide
1 Camora Basics,
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4 P Mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
6 Playback Modo
8 Sowing Menu,
Accessories
10 Appendix
Inder
«ba
149
ttings
Et or erase WiFi settings as follows.
Editing Connection Information
1 Access the Wi-Fi menu and choose
the device to edit.
‘© Press the [[B]] button to turn the camera
on.
e Press the [AJ button
© Press the [AN VIII] buttons ortum
the [6) did to choose the icon ofthe
device to edit, and then press the [$]
button
2 Choose [Edit a Device]
Press the [AJ w] buttons or tum the [
dial to choose (Edt a Device), and then
press the (@) button
3 choose adovicero eat
Press the [aw] butons ort he (@)
dal to choose the device to eat and en
press ne (@) baton
4 Choose an item to edt
Press he [av buttons ortum tre
Gal to choose an tem oe, and them
press the (@) buton
‘The tems you can change depend on
what device or Service the camera wil
Connection
Configurable items Ma
DS |e [senices
(Change Device Nickname a) | o [o Jo |o | -
(View Setings| (130), =-fo[-|-| =
(Erase Connection nto Garay [Oo Jo Jo [o | =
O: Configurable =: Net configurable
Changing a Device Nickname
You can change the device nickname (dsplay name) that is displayed on
the camera.
e Following step 4n “Eating Connection
Information” (£21149), choose [Change
Device Nickname] and press the (@)
button
Selectthe input field and press the (6)
button. Use the keyboard displayed to
entera new nickname (132).
Erasing Connection Information
Erase connection information (information about devices that
connected to) as follows.
y have
Following step 4 in “Eating Connection
Information” ($1149), choose [Erase
¡Connection Info] and press the (8)
button
+ After [Erase] is displayed, press the
[ID] buttons or tum the (@ alto
choose [OK], and then press the (8)
button
+ The connection information vál be
erased
Betore Use
Basie Guide
1 Camora Basics,
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4 P Mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
6 Playback Modo
8 Sowing Menu,
Accessories
10 Appendix
Inder
«ba
149
™ Returning the Wi-Fi Settings to Default
Retum the WiFi settings to defaut you transfer ownership ofthe
camera to another person, or dspose of it
Resetting the Wi-Fi setings wil also clear al Web service setings. Be
‘sure that you want to reset all W-F settings before using ths option
4 choose (Wii Satin),
Press the MENU button and choose
Mi-FI Setings] on the (PP tab (£230)
2 choose [Reset Settings]
Press the [a] buttons ortum the (6)
dal to choose Reset Settings), and then
press the (8) button
3 Restore the default settings.
e Press the [QD] buttons or tum the (8)
al to choose [OK], and then press the
[@)button
e The Wi-Fi settings are now reset
Y + room sing ae on cenas ccoo
[Reset] on the PM tab (11157).
Betore Use
Guide
1 Camera Basics,
2 Auto Mode
Hybrid Auto Mode
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4 P Mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo.
Inder
8 Sowing Menu,
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
150
Retum the WiFi settings to defaut you transfer ownership ofthe
camera to another person, or dspose of it
Resetting the Wi-Fi setings wil also clear al Web service setings. Be
‘sure that you want to reset all W-F settings before using ths option
4 choose (Wii Satin),
Press the MENU button and choose
Mi-FI Setings] on the (PP tab (£230)
2 choose [Reset Settings]
Press the [a] buttons ortum the (6)
dal to choose Reset Settings), and then
press the (8) button
3 Restore the default settings.
e Press the [QD] buttons or tum the (8)
al to choose [OK], and then press the
[@)button
e The Wi-Fi settings are now reset
Y + room sing ae on cenas ccoo
[Reset] on the PM tab (11157).
Betore Use
Guide
1 Camera Basics,
2 Auto Mode
Hybrid Auto Mode
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4 P Mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo.
Inder
8 Sowing Menu,
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
150
| Adjusting Basic Camera Functions Bator Use
MENU (£0120) functions on the [ff] tab can be configured
commonly used functions as desire, for greater conv
Silencing Camera Operations Le
1 Camera Basics,
Basie Guise
ra sounds and movies as follows
Choose [Mute], and then choose [On] |
2 Hybrid Auto Mode
Setting Menu
3 Otner Shooting Modes
Customize or adjust basic camera functions for
greater convenience
4 P Mode
(Operation can as be slensed by holding down re tuton 5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
asyoutumthe camera on
Sounds nat played dung modes (2103) you mute camera
sounds. Tresore sound Guig modes, press tn LA button or
agp across he sereen,Agust alum as neededby press
the [a batons by ragangup or coun 7 WiFi Functions
B ting Wen
Adjusting the Volume AZ
9 Accessories
6 Playback Modo
Adust the volume ol individual camera sounds as fol
Choose [Volume], and then i
ton
essthe @} 10 Appendix
tem, and then press the
Inder
151
MENU (£0120) functions on the [ff] tab can be configured
commonly used functions as desire, for greater conv
Silencing Camera Operations Le
1 Camera Basics,
Basie Guise
ra sounds and movies as follows
Choose [Mute], and then choose [On] |
2 Hybrid Auto Mode
Setting Menu
3 Otner Shooting Modes
Customize or adjust basic camera functions for
greater convenience
4 P Mode
(Operation can as be slensed by holding down re tuton 5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
asyoutumthe camera on
Sounds nat played dung modes (2103) you mute camera
sounds. Tresore sound Guig modes, press tn LA button or
agp across he sereen,Agust alum as neededby press
the [a batons by ragangup or coun 7 WiFi Functions
B ting Wen
Adjusting the Volume AZ
9 Accessories
6 Playback Modo
Adust the volume ol individual camera sounds as fol
Choose [Volume], and then i
ton
essthe @} 10 Appendix
tem, and then press the
Inder
151
™ Customizing Sounds
® World Clock
Customize camera operating sounds as allows
‘© Choose [Sound Options], and then press.
the (®) button
‘© Choose an item, and then press the
[Gp] buttons to choose an option
+ The shutter sounainaigest moves recorded in i mae
(Css) carnat be changed
™ Hiding Hints and Tips
Hits and tips are normally shown when you choose FUNC, (£126) or
MENU (£2120) items. you prefer, you can deactivate this information
‘© Choose [Hints & Tips], and then choose
(om
™ Date and Time
Adjust the date and time as follows,
‘© Choose [Date/Time], and then press the
(@)button
‘© Press the [4JIM buttons to choose an
‘option, and then adjust the setting, ether
by pressing the ftw] buttons or turing
the 1@] dia.
To ensure that your shets will have the correct local date and ime when
you travel abroad, simply register the destination in advance and switch to
that ime zone. This convenient feature eliminates the need to change the
Date/Time setting manually
Before using the world clock be sure to st the date and time and your
home time zone, as describedin “Setting the Date and Time” (£1120).
1 Specity your destination
‘© Choose [Time Zone], and then press the
(8) buton
+ Press the [aJ'w]butonsortum the (9)
alto choose (World, and then press
the (8) button
«© Press the [ID] butonsto choose he
esbnation
© To set daylht saving time (1 hour
shea), choose A] by pressing the
(Alf buttons or tung the (6) dal,
andithen choose PR] by pressing the
KON butions
© Press the (@) button
2 Switch to the destination time zone.
e Press the [aw] buttons or tum the (@)
dia to choose [A World], and then press
the MENU button.
e is now shown on the shooting screen
dre)
D rangs en
automatically update your [ff Home] ime and date.
Betore Use
Guide
1 Camera Basics,
2 Auto Mode
Hybrid Auto Mode
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4 P Mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
Inder
9 Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
152
® World Clock
Customize camera operating sounds as allows
‘© Choose [Sound Options], and then press.
the (®) button
‘© Choose an item, and then press the
[Gp] buttons to choose an option
+ The shutter sounainaigest moves recorded in i mae
(Css) carnat be changed
™ Hiding Hints and Tips
Hits and tips are normally shown when you choose FUNC, (£126) or
MENU (£2120) items. you prefer, you can deactivate this information
‘© Choose [Hints & Tips], and then choose
(om
™ Date and Time
Adjust the date and time as follows,
‘© Choose [Date/Time], and then press the
(@)button
‘© Press the [4JIM buttons to choose an
‘option, and then adjust the setting, ether
by pressing the ftw] buttons or turing
the 1@] dia.
To ensure that your shets will have the correct local date and ime when
you travel abroad, simply register the destination in advance and switch to
that ime zone. This convenient feature eliminates the need to change the
Date/Time setting manually
Before using the world clock be sure to st the date and time and your
home time zone, as describedin “Setting the Date and Time” (£1120).
1 Specity your destination
‘© Choose [Time Zone], and then press the
(8) buton
+ Press the [aJ'w]butonsortum the (9)
alto choose (World, and then press
the (8) button
«© Press the [ID] butonsto choose he
esbnation
© To set daylht saving time (1 hour
shea), choose A] by pressing the
(Alf buttons or tung the (6) dal,
andithen choose PR] by pressing the
KON butions
© Press the (@) button
2 Switch to the destination time zone.
e Press the [aw] buttons or tum the (@)
dia to choose [A World], and then press
the MENU button.
e is now shown on the shooting screen
dre)
D rangs en
automatically update your [ff Home] ime and date.
Betore Use
Guide
1 Camera Basics,
2 Auto Mode
Hybrid Auto Mode
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4 P Mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
Inder
9 Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
152
® Lens Retraction Timing
™ Power-Saving Adjustment
‘The lensis normally retracted fr safety about one minute eter you press.
the [[EI button in Shooting mode (£1128). To have the lens retracted
immediately eter you press the ({B]] button, set the retraction timing to
(Osec}
© Choose [Lens Retraction], and then
choose [sec]
“Using Eco Mode
‘This function allows you to conserve battery power in Shooting mode.
When the camera isnot in use, the screen quickly darkens to reduce
battery consumption
1 Configure the setting.
+ Choose [Eco Mode], and then choose
{On}
© ED is now shown onthe shooting
screen (79,
+ The screen darkens when the camera
isnot used for approximately two
Seconds approximately ten seconds
after darkening the screen tus of
‘Tne camera ums of ater approximately
tires minutes of nactvty.
2 Shoot.
To activate the screen and prepare for
shoctng when the screen is of but the
lens i sil cut, press the shutter button
have.
‘Adjust he timing of automatic camera and screen deactivation (Auto
Poner Down and Display OF, respectively) as needed (1127).
‘© Choose [Power Saving), and then press
the (@) buen
© After choosing an item, press the [LD]
buttons to adjustit as needed
© ‘ecorsen bate pones yo mat mas nme one
Auto Power Down] and [1 min or less for [Display Om.
Q + Teiosanyon sen mon event sto Power
Dan
+ Too sen non rc aa nenas ase
como GED oon
™ Screen Brightness
‘Adjust screen brightness as follows,
Choose [LCD Brightness), and then
press the [4]fP] buttons to adust the
bighiness
+ For maimum brightness, pres and hld he [bution er at
Teast one second when the shooting screens displayed ar han in
ingb-image dapay. (This wl ovate the LCD Brghiness sting
onthe ab Y esoo tho original brightness, pres and hal
the (7 buton again for at east one secondo restar he camera.
Betore Use
Guide
1 Camera Basics,
2 Auto Mode
Hybrid Auto Mode
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4 P Mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
Inder
9 Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
153
™ Power-Saving Adjustment
‘The lensis normally retracted fr safety about one minute eter you press.
the [[EI button in Shooting mode (£1128). To have the lens retracted
immediately eter you press the ({B]] button, set the retraction timing to
(Osec}
© Choose [Lens Retraction], and then
choose [sec]
“Using Eco Mode
‘This function allows you to conserve battery power in Shooting mode.
When the camera isnot in use, the screen quickly darkens to reduce
battery consumption
1 Configure the setting.
+ Choose [Eco Mode], and then choose
{On}
© ED is now shown onthe shooting
screen (79,
+ The screen darkens when the camera
isnot used for approximately two
Seconds approximately ten seconds
after darkening the screen tus of
‘Tne camera ums of ater approximately
tires minutes of nactvty.
2 Shoot.
To activate the screen and prepare for
shoctng when the screen is of but the
lens i sil cut, press the shutter button
have.
‘Adjust he timing of automatic camera and screen deactivation (Auto
Poner Down and Display OF, respectively) as needed (1127).
‘© Choose [Power Saving), and then press
the (@) buen
© After choosing an item, press the [LD]
buttons to adjustit as needed
© ‘ecorsen bate pones yo mat mas nme one
Auto Power Down] and [1 min or less for [Display Om.
Q + Teiosanyon sen mon event sto Power
Dan
+ Too sen non rc aa nenas ase
como GED oon
™ Screen Brightness
‘Adjust screen brightness as follows,
Choose [LCD Brightness), and then
press the [4]fP] buttons to adust the
bighiness
+ For maimum brightness, pres and hld he [bution er at
Teast one second when the shooting screens displayed ar han in
ingb-image dapay. (This wl ovate the LCD Brghiness sting
onthe ab Y esoo tho original brightness, pres and hal
the (7 buton again for at east one secondo restar he camera.
Betore Use
Guide
1 Camera Basics,
2 Auto Mode
Hybrid Auto Mode
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4 P Mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
Inder
9 Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
153
™ Start-Up Screen
Customs the startup screen shown aftr you tun the cama on solos
1 Choose [Startup Image, andthen press
the (6) button.
+ Press th (ADI buttons ortum ne 18)
dial to choose an option
canon
™ Formatting Memory Cards
Before using a new memory card or a cardformatted in another device, you
shoul format the card with ths camera
Formatting erases al data on a memory card. Before formatting, copy images
On the memory cardto a computer, ar take other stepsto back them up.
1 Access the [Format] screen,
‘© Choose [Format], and then press the (6)
button
2 choose [Ok]
Presse Law] buttons to choose
{Cancel}, choose [OK] (either press the
[411] buttons or turn the (Q) dal), and
then press the [®) button
3 Format the memory card
‘To beg the formating process, press
the [alt buttons o tum he (6) dal
‘to choose [OK], and then press the [6]
buon
+ inanfometing¡s fished, [Memory
cardtomeling complete] displayed
Press te (@) buen
(O © Formate ering ton a mena cas ny changes
Insogmetomaon ne cr es eae as
Comput en ramos aran men e.
{Be sep opted pert re necro oy
psc conga
+ ‘The total card capa indicated onthe tomatin screen maybe
lessthan tne aaverise copay
Low-Level Formatting
Perform low-level formating in the falloning cases: [Memory card error] is
displayed, the camera is not working correctly, card image reading
is slower, continuous shocting is slower, or movie recording suddenly
stops, Low-level formatting erases al data on a memory card, Before low.
level formating, copy images on the memory card to a computer, or take
other steps to back them up.
+ On Ie screen in step 1 of Formatting
Memory Cards’ (C1154), press the
fal] buttons or tum the (6) dial to
choose [Low Level Formal, and then
press the [AJ[P] buttons to select this
‘option. A icon is displayed,
«© Follow steps 2 ~ 3 in “Formatting Memory
Cards" (11154) to continue with the
formating process.
© > Lov omatng es gero remain
aur Een na aaa easton a sere core
a
o ee
Fee tool ranean emenoy exe
EUA
Betore Use
Guide
1 Camera Basics,
2 Auto Mode
Hybrid Auto Mode
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4 P Mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
Inder
9 Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
154
Customs the startup screen shown aftr you tun the cama on solos
1 Choose [Startup Image, andthen press
the (6) button.
+ Press th (ADI buttons ortum ne 18)
dial to choose an option
canon
™ Formatting Memory Cards
Before using a new memory card or a cardformatted in another device, you
shoul format the card with ths camera
Formatting erases al data on a memory card. Before formatting, copy images
On the memory cardto a computer, ar take other stepsto back them up.
1 Access the [Format] screen,
‘© Choose [Format], and then press the (6)
button
2 choose [Ok]
Presse Law] buttons to choose
{Cancel}, choose [OK] (either press the
[411] buttons or turn the (Q) dal), and
then press the [®) button
3 Format the memory card
‘To beg the formating process, press
the [alt buttons o tum he (6) dal
‘to choose [OK], and then press the [6]
buon
+ inanfometing¡s fished, [Memory
cardtomeling complete] displayed
Press te (@) buen
(O © Formate ering ton a mena cas ny changes
Insogmetomaon ne cr es eae as
Comput en ramos aran men e.
{Be sep opted pert re necro oy
psc conga
+ ‘The total card capa indicated onthe tomatin screen maybe
lessthan tne aaverise copay
Low-Level Formatting
Perform low-level formating in the falloning cases: [Memory card error] is
displayed, the camera is not working correctly, card image reading
is slower, continuous shocting is slower, or movie recording suddenly
stops, Low-level formatting erases al data on a memory card, Before low.
level formating, copy images on the memory card to a computer, or take
other steps to back them up.
+ On Ie screen in step 1 of Formatting
Memory Cards’ (C1154), press the
fal] buttons or tum the (6) dial to
choose [Low Level Formal, and then
press the [AJ[P] buttons to select this
‘option. A icon is displayed,
«© Follow steps 2 ~ 3 in “Formatting Memory
Cards" (11154) to continue with the
formating process.
© > Lov omatng es gero remain
aur Een na aaa easton a sere core
a
o ee
Fee tool ranean emenoy exe
EUA
Betore Use
Guide
1 Camera Basics,
2 Auto Mode
Hybrid Auto Mode
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4 P Mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
Inder
9 Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
154
™ File Numbering
™ Metric / Non-Metric Display
Your shots are automaticaly numbered in sequential order (0001 - 9999)
and saved in folders that store up to 2,000 images each. You can change
how the camera assigns fle numbers,
‘© Choose [File Numbering], and then
choose an option
Continuous] 13985 are numbered consecutively (nti the 5699
VOUS | shot is taken/saved) even if you switch memory cards
Image numbering is reset to 0001 if you switch memory
Auto Reset | cards, or when anew aider is created.
© + avis ne op miens setas maybe
ae
oneness mandy ars Tan ang sha ya.
Beine mac ESA) mena
+ Refer to” Software Instruction Manual" (21163) for information
Dee
™ Date-Based Image Storage
Instead of saving images in folders created each month, you can have the
camera create folders each day you Shock to store shots taken that day,
‘© Choose [Create Folder], and then choose
[Daily
Images will now be saved in folders
created on the shocting dae.
Change the unit of measurement shown in the zoom bar (E1134), the
MF indicator (E81), and elsewhere from mm to in as needed
© Choose [Unts), and then choose tin},
™ Electronic Level Calibration
Calibrate the electronic level seems inefacve in helping you level the
camera
For greater calibration accuracy, display rd ines (C199) to help you
level he camerain advance.
1 Make sure the camera is level.
Place the camera on a flat surface, such
as atable.
2 Calibrate the alectronic oval
+ Choose Electronic Lave], and then press
the (@) button
To aust ltright tit, choose (Horizontal
Rall Carat), and to aqus foward
Daclwardtit, choose [Vertical Pech
Calibration, followed by the (8) button. A
confrmetion message's spayed.
+ Choose [OK], and then press the (8)
button
1 Camora Basics,
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4 P Mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
Inder
9 Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
155
™ Metric / Non-Metric Display
Your shots are automaticaly numbered in sequential order (0001 - 9999)
and saved in folders that store up to 2,000 images each. You can change
how the camera assigns fle numbers,
‘© Choose [File Numbering], and then
choose an option
Continuous] 13985 are numbered consecutively (nti the 5699
VOUS | shot is taken/saved) even if you switch memory cards
Image numbering is reset to 0001 if you switch memory
Auto Reset | cards, or when anew aider is created.
© + avis ne op miens setas maybe
ae
oneness mandy ars Tan ang sha ya.
Beine mac ESA) mena
+ Refer to” Software Instruction Manual" (21163) for information
Dee
™ Date-Based Image Storage
Instead of saving images in folders created each month, you can have the
camera create folders each day you Shock to store shots taken that day,
‘© Choose [Create Folder], and then choose
[Daily
Images will now be saved in folders
created on the shocting dae.
Change the unit of measurement shown in the zoom bar (E1134), the
MF indicator (E81), and elsewhere from mm to in as needed
© Choose [Unts), and then choose tin},
™ Electronic Level Calibration
Calibrate the electronic level seems inefacve in helping you level the
camera
For greater calibration accuracy, display rd ines (C199) to help you
level he camerain advance.
1 Make sure the camera is level.
Place the camera on a flat surface, such
as atable.
2 Calibrate the alectronic oval
+ Choose Electronic Lave], and then press
the (@) button
To aust ltright tit, choose (Horizontal
Rall Carat), and to aqus foward
Daclwardtit, choose [Vertical Pech
Calibration, followed by the (8) button. A
confrmetion message's spayed.
+ Choose [OK], and then press the (8)
button
1 Camora Basics,
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4 P Mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
Inder
9 Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
155
Resetting the Electronic Level
™ Setting Copyright Information to Record in Images
Restore the electronic level to ts original state as folons Note tht tis is
nd possible unless you have calbred the electoni vel
+ Choose (Electronic Level, andthen press
the (®)buton
+ Choose [Resa], and then press the (9)
buton
Choose [OK], and then press the (@)
button
™ Deactivating Touch-Screen Operations
‘The touch-screen can be disabled to prevent unintended touch
operations
© Choose [Touch Operation], and then
choose [OM]
Increasing Touch-Screen Panel Sensitivit
‘Sensitvty ofthe touch-screen panel can be increased, so Ina the camera
responds to lighter touch
‘© Choose [Touch Response], and then
choose High]
To record the author's name and copyright details in images, set this
Information beforehand as folows,
‘© Choose [Copyright Info], and then press
the (@) button
e Press the [a['] buttons or tum the (6)
dl to choose [Enter Author's Name] or
[Enter Copyright Detais] Press the (@)
button to access the keyboard, and ent
the name (132)
e Press the MENU) button. When [Accept
changes is dsplayed, choose [Ves]
(eier press the [4I[D] buttons or tum the
10) cía), and then press the (6) button
+ The information set here wil now be
recorded in images.
© > roomie toman ste cos Depa conngtn|
‘onthe screen above, and then press the [@) button.
+ You can also use the software (163) to enter, change, and delete
ee,
ee
A
Fein owt sn nem cmt
Deleting All Copyright Information
You can delete both the authors name and copyright detail atthe same
time asfolons,
‘© Follow the steps in ‘Setting Copyright
Information to Record n Images (1156)
‘and choose (Delete Copyright nf)
+ Press the [4JIM buttons or tum the (8)
«da to choose OK], and then press the
(@)butten
Betore Use
Basie Guide
1 Camora Basics,
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4 P Mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
Inder
9 Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
156
™ Setting Copyright Information to Record in Images
Restore the electronic level to ts original state as folons Note tht tis is
nd possible unless you have calbred the electoni vel
+ Choose (Electronic Level, andthen press
the (®)buton
+ Choose [Resa], and then press the (9)
buton
Choose [OK], and then press the (@)
button
™ Deactivating Touch-Screen Operations
‘The touch-screen can be disabled to prevent unintended touch
operations
© Choose [Touch Operation], and then
choose [OM]
Increasing Touch-Screen Panel Sensitivit
‘Sensitvty ofthe touch-screen panel can be increased, so Ina the camera
responds to lighter touch
‘© Choose [Touch Response], and then
choose High]
To record the author's name and copyright details in images, set this
Information beforehand as folows,
‘© Choose [Copyright Info], and then press
the (@) button
e Press the [a['] buttons or tum the (6)
dl to choose [Enter Author's Name] or
[Enter Copyright Detais] Press the (@)
button to access the keyboard, and ent
the name (132)
e Press the MENU) button. When [Accept
changes is dsplayed, choose [Ves]
(eier press the [4I[D] buttons or tum the
10) cía), and then press the (6) button
+ The information set here wil now be
recorded in images.
© > roomie toman ste cos Depa conngtn|
‘onthe screen above, and then press the [@) button.
+ You can also use the software (163) to enter, change, and delete
ee,
ee
A
Fein owt sn nem cmt
Deleting All Copyright Information
You can delete both the authors name and copyright detail atthe same
time asfolons,
‘© Follow the steps in ‘Setting Copyright
Information to Record n Images (1156)
‘and choose (Delete Copyright nf)
+ Press the [4JIM buttons or tum the (8)
«da to choose OK], and then press the
(@)butten
Betore Use
Basie Guide
1 Camora Basics,
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4 P Mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
Inder
9 Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
156
Q + srecoomerino easy eco ninas wit be ota
™ Checking Certification Logos
‘Some logos for certification requirements met by the camera can be
viewed on the screen, Other certification logos are printed inthis guide, on
the camera packaging, or on the camera body
‘© Choose {Certification Logo Display], and
then press the (@) button
™ Display Language
‘Change the display language as needed.
© Choose [Language dl, and then press
the (©) button
e Press the [al wII4I(D] buttons or turn
the [@] did to choose alanguage, and
then press the (B) button
+ Youcan aso access the [Language] sreenin Playa mod by
pressing and nalang the (@) button and immesately pressing
the MENU tuton
™ Adjusting Other Settings
The following settings can also be adjusted on the IM tab
+ [Video System] (01162)
+ WiFi Settings} (24127)
+ [Mobile Device Connect Button] (22128)
™ Restoring Defaults
It you accidentally change a setting, you can restore defaut camera
settings.
1 Access the [Reset All] screen.
Choose [Reset AI], andthen press the
(@)butten
2 Restore default settings.
+ Press the [db buttons e tum he (9)
ou ere
(9) buton
+ Default setings are now restored
© > rretorning incre ae nc esoo east ng
Iomega sing Face D (Ds)
(Fita segs atime} 62152 (me Zone] (D152)
Language) AIS, ans Veo Syste] 62)
custom wre Dance da you ave er CAT)
O 2) ar (| D8)
Vaus setusng ne exposure compensation a (a)
Mowe mode 6273)
Wer sets E2127
Caire aw othe ecto lve (155)
Copy maman (se)
Betore Use
Guide
1 Camera Basics,
2 Auto Mode
Hybrid Auto Mode
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4 P Mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
Inder
9 Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
157
™ Checking Certification Logos
‘Some logos for certification requirements met by the camera can be
viewed on the screen, Other certification logos are printed inthis guide, on
the camera packaging, or on the camera body
‘© Choose {Certification Logo Display], and
then press the (@) button
™ Display Language
‘Change the display language as needed.
© Choose [Language dl, and then press
the (©) button
e Press the [al wII4I(D] buttons or turn
the [@] did to choose alanguage, and
then press the (B) button
+ Youcan aso access the [Language] sreenin Playa mod by
pressing and nalang the (@) button and immesately pressing
the MENU tuton
™ Adjusting Other Settings
The following settings can also be adjusted on the IM tab
+ [Video System] (01162)
+ WiFi Settings} (24127)
+ [Mobile Device Connect Button] (22128)
™ Restoring Defaults
It you accidentally change a setting, you can restore defaut camera
settings.
1 Access the [Reset All] screen.
Choose [Reset AI], andthen press the
(@)butten
2 Restore default settings.
+ Press the [db buttons e tum he (9)
ou ere
(9) buton
+ Default setings are now restored
© > rretorning incre ae nc esoo east ng
Iomega sing Face D (Ds)
(Fita segs atime} 62152 (me Zone] (D152)
Language) AIS, ans Veo Syste] 62)
custom wre Dance da you ave er CAT)
O 2) ar (| D8)
Vaus setusng ne exposure compensation a (a)
Mowe mode 6273)
Wer sets E2127
Caire aw othe ecto lve (155)
Copy maman (se)
Betore Use
Guide
1 Camera Basics,
2 Auto Mode
Hybrid Auto Mode
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4 P Mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
Inder
9 Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
157
Accessories
Enjoy the camera in more ways with optional Canon
accessories and other compatible accessories sold
separately
‘System Map
Included Accessories
LI
wis Strap
Battery Charger
cB aloe LE"
cx >: omer
sage companero <—J
a purchase separately
3 Use commercial avarate cable no anger an 25 m (9.21
Betore Use
Basie Guide
1 Camora Basics,
Auto Mode
2 Hybrid Auto Mode
3 Omer Shooting Modes
4 Phoce
5 TAvM and Code
6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Funciona
8 Soting Menu
9 Acer
10 Appendix
Inder
158
Enjoy the camera in more ways with optional Canon
accessories and other compatible accessories sold
separately
‘System Map
Included Accessories
LI
wis Strap
Battery Charger
cB aloe LE"
cx >: omer
sage companero <—J
a purchase separately
3 Use commercial avarate cable no anger an 25 m (9.21
Betore Use
Basie Guide
1 Camora Basics,
Auto Mode
2 Hybrid Auto Mode
3 Omer Shooting Modes
4 Phoce
5 TAvM and Code
6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Funciona
8 Soting Menu
9 Acer
10 Appendix
Inder
158
Use of genuine Canon accessories is recommended.
This product s designed to achieve excellent performance when used
with genuine Canon accessories,
‘Canon shall not be liable for any damage to this product andlor accidents
Such as fie, etc, caused by the malfunction of non-genuine Canon
accessories (eg, a leekage andlor explosion ofa batery pack). Please
ote thet this warranty does not apply to repars arising aut ofthe
‘malfunction of non-genuine Canon accessories, athough you may request
Such repars on a chargeable bass
Optional Accessories
The following camera accessories are sold Separate. Note that
avalebiiy varies by area, and some accessories may no longer be
avaiable
™ Power Supplies
Battery Pack NB-13L
+ Rechargeable lithium-ion battery
Battery Charger CB-2LHICB-2LHE
(© Charger far Battery Pack NB-13L
CD > memes ester cmt eros axpayeoryou
Be A
PE RO fGen sat oka tay Sans
Bas
Ba ee tno gee Conte pas
Q + rmvaer patina a coman cow yo can
tacna bon ge as tages DC
tha ste on nern, pack an stan sit
ema ont pec
Betore Use
Basic Guido
1 Camera Basics,
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
8 Omer Shooting Modes
4 Prode
5 RAM and Modo
6 Playback Modo
7 wer Functions
8 Song Meno
BE |
10 Anponax
Inder
«>4
159
This product s designed to achieve excellent performance when used
with genuine Canon accessories,
‘Canon shall not be liable for any damage to this product andlor accidents
Such as fie, etc, caused by the malfunction of non-genuine Canon
accessories (eg, a leekage andlor explosion ofa batery pack). Please
ote thet this warranty does not apply to repars arising aut ofthe
‘malfunction of non-genuine Canon accessories, athough you may request
Such repars on a chargeable bass
Optional Accessories
The following camera accessories are sold Separate. Note that
avalebiiy varies by area, and some accessories may no longer be
avaiable
™ Power Supplies
Battery Pack NB-13L
+ Rechargeable lithium-ion battery
Battery Charger CB-2LHICB-2LHE
(© Charger far Battery Pack NB-13L
CD > memes ester cmt eros axpayeoryou
Be A
PE RO fGen sat oka tay Sans
Bas
Ba ee tno gee Conte pas
Q + rmvaer patina a coman cow yo can
tacna bon ge as tages DC
tha ste on nern, pack an stan sit
ema ont pec
Betore Use
Basic Guido
1 Camera Basics,
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
8 Omer Shooting Modes
4 Prode
5 RAM and Modo
6 Playback Modo
7 wer Functions
8 Song Meno
BE |
10 Anponax
Inder
«>4
159
AC Adapter Kit ACK-DC110
‘© For powering the camera using
household power. Recommended when
using the camera over extended periods,
or when comectng the camera to a
printer or computer. Cannot be used to
charge the battery pack inte camera
al
CD + teeta nage and sara eed naa wth
Herr
+ Fonera maite ma te a conne
aa spa o Na an ea tomar
Sata ag wc ma mago BP
" Flash Unit
High-Power Flash HF-DC2
‘© Extemal flash fr iluminating subjects
that are out of range ofthe Buin flash
ZE
(D + Hon Power Fish untscanotbe useain IM. LA or(T vi
shooing mode when|Fash Mel sto aru
“Other Accessories
Waterproof Case WP-DOS4
Far underwater photography at depths of
up to 40 meters (130 ft). Also useful for
shodting in the rain, atthe beach, or on
‘ki sopes.
Interface Cable IFC-400PCU
‘© For connecting the camera toa computer
oF printer.
Stereo AV Cable AVC-DC400ST
© Connect he camerato a TV to enjoy
Playback on the larger TV screen
Printers
MG) Canon Brand PictBridge-Compatibie
Printers
‘© Even without using a computer, you can
Printimages by connecting the camera
Grec t a printer.
For detals, Visit your nearest Canon
retailer.
Before Use
Basie Guide
1 Camora Basics
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4 P Mode
snd C Modo
5 ma
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
‘© For powering the camera using
household power. Recommended when
using the camera over extended periods,
or when comectng the camera to a
printer or computer. Cannot be used to
charge the battery pack inte camera
al
CD + teeta nage and sara eed naa wth
Herr
+ Fonera maite ma te a conne
aa spa o Na an ea tomar
Sata ag wc ma mago BP
" Flash Unit
High-Power Flash HF-DC2
‘© Extemal flash fr iluminating subjects
that are out of range ofthe Buin flash
ZE
(D + Hon Power Fish untscanotbe useain IM. LA or(T vi
shooing mode when|Fash Mel sto aru
“Other Accessories
Waterproof Case WP-DOS4
Far underwater photography at depths of
up to 40 meters (130 ft). Also useful for
shodting in the rain, atthe beach, or on
‘ki sopes.
Interface Cable IFC-400PCU
‘© For connecting the camera toa computer
oF printer.
Stereo AV Cable AVC-DC400ST
© Connect he camerato a TV to enjoy
Playback on the larger TV screen
Printers
MG) Canon Brand PictBridge-Compatibie
Printers
‘© Even without using a computer, you can
Printimages by connecting the camera
Grec t a printer.
For detals, Visit your nearest Canon
retailer.
Before Use
Basie Guide
1 Camora Basics
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4 P Mode
snd C Modo
5 ma
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Optional Accessorie:
D Sil images D Movies
™ Playback on a TV
Pott images. > Movies
By connecting the camera to a TV, you can view your shots on te larger
screen ofthe TV.
For details on connection or how to switch inputs, refer to the TV manual
Q + soma ntematennayrat ae mening neon
rt
Playback on a High-Definition TV
D Suilimages Pe Movies
You can view your shots on a TV by connectng the camera to an HDTV
with a commercialy avalebie HDMI cable (not exceeding 25 m, vih
a Type Dterminalon the camera end) Movies shot at à resolution of
(SEED, Moi. or [MEER can be viewed in high definition
1 Make sure the camera and TV are off.
ES) 2 connect ne camera to nev
ge | con the Ty, insert ne cable plug ful nto
the HDM input as shown
+ On the camera, open the terminal cover
‘and nsertthe cable plug fully into the
camera termina
3 Tune Ton and suite to video
input
+ Saitch the TV input to the video input you
connected the cable to in step 2.
4 Tum the camera on.
«© Press the (EN button o tur the camera on
«© Images from the camera are now
‘splayed on the TV. (Nothing is
displayed on the camera screen.)
‘© When nished, tum off tne camera and
TV before disconnecting the cable
© + wisntprsieto omen se cate ran opal seco
Jet athe sane ie san ete. Fong cates
tome canta ate sane me may cage te cara a
cates
+ Trac operon an etc vaca
cometes osea
+ Camera operating sounds are nt ayes whl the camera is
cometes o an HOTY,
Betore Use
Basie Guide
1 Camora Basics,
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
8 Omer Shooting Modes
4 Prode
5 RAM and Modo
6 Playback Modo
7 wer Functions
8 Song Meno
10 Appendix
«ba
161
D Sil images D Movies
™ Playback on a TV
Pott images. > Movies
By connecting the camera to a TV, you can view your shots on te larger
screen ofthe TV.
For details on connection or how to switch inputs, refer to the TV manual
Q + soma ntematennayrat ae mening neon
rt
Playback on a High-Definition TV
D Suilimages Pe Movies
You can view your shots on a TV by connectng the camera to an HDTV
with a commercialy avalebie HDMI cable (not exceeding 25 m, vih
a Type Dterminalon the camera end) Movies shot at à resolution of
(SEED, Moi. or [MEER can be viewed in high definition
1 Make sure the camera and TV are off.
ES) 2 connect ne camera to nev
ge | con the Ty, insert ne cable plug ful nto
the HDM input as shown
+ On the camera, open the terminal cover
‘and nsertthe cable plug fully into the
camera termina
3 Tune Ton and suite to video
input
+ Saitch the TV input to the video input you
connected the cable to in step 2.
4 Tum the camera on.
«© Press the (EN button o tur the camera on
«© Images from the camera are now
‘splayed on the TV. (Nothing is
displayed on the camera screen.)
‘© When nished, tum off tne camera and
TV before disconnecting the cable
© + wisntprsieto omen se cate ran opal seco
Jet athe sane ie san ete. Fong cates
tome canta ate sane me may cage te cara a
cates
+ Trac operon an etc vaca
cometes osea
+ Camera operating sounds are nt ayes whl the camera is
cometes o an HOTY,
Betore Use
Basie Guide
1 Camora Basics,
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
8 Omer Shooting Modes
4 Prode
5 RAM and Modo
6 Playback Modo
7 wer Functions
8 Song Meno
10 Appendix
«ba
161
Playback on a Standard-Definition TV
Po stit images Pe Movies
Connecting the camera to a TV withthe Stereo AV Cable AVC-DC24D0ST
(Sold separately) enables you to view your shots onthe larger screen of
the TV as you contol the camera,
1 Make sure the camera and TV are off.
2 Connect the camera to the TV.
‘© On the TV. insert the cable plugs ful into
the video inputs as shown
‘© Make sure he cable plugs are in video
inputs ofthe same color
‘© On the camera, open the terminal cover
‘andinsert the cable plug fully into the
camera terminal
3 Display images
‘© Folow stops 3-4 in“Playpackon a
High Defiton TV" (LA 181) to display
images
OR orporti unes ne canara en rt
‘oma (rec PA mass roma Toreo
‘video output format, press the MENU, button ans choose
[Video System] on ne (PP tab.
+ Touch-screen operations are not supported while the camera is
comets laos
Q - von aes sn e neyo ao stoke
pronta ono Tele en EN Ta
see Spas unenung be cna sore Hore
AF-Poirt Zoom (AS 1), MF-Pont Zoom (F118), MF Peaking
(De2) and Night Display (KAS2) are not avatatie,
™ Powering the Camera with Household Power
D Sil images. D Movies
Powering the camera with AC Adapter Kit ACK-DC110 (sold separately)
eliminates the need to montor the remaining Eater level
À Make sure the camera is off.
2 Open the cover.
e Follow step 1 in "Inserting the Battery
Pack and Memory Cara" (£1119) to
‘pen the memory card/batery cover, and
then open the coupler cable port cover
as shown,
3 inser the coupler.
‘© Holding the coupler with the terminals (1)
fang as shown insert the coupe just
8 you would a baton pack folowng
Step 2 Inseringthe Battery Peck and
Memo Ca C219),
+ Make sure the coupler cable passes
through the por (1)
Before Use
Basie Guide
1 Camora Basics
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4 P Mode
snd C Modo
5 An
6 Playback Modo
7 Wer Functions
8 soning Menu
10 Appendix
«ba
162
Po stit images Pe Movies
Connecting the camera to a TV withthe Stereo AV Cable AVC-DC24D0ST
(Sold separately) enables you to view your shots onthe larger screen of
the TV as you contol the camera,
1 Make sure the camera and TV are off.
2 Connect the camera to the TV.
‘© On the TV. insert the cable plugs ful into
the video inputs as shown
‘© Make sure he cable plugs are in video
inputs ofthe same color
‘© On the camera, open the terminal cover
‘andinsert the cable plug fully into the
camera terminal
3 Display images
‘© Folow stops 3-4 in“Playpackon a
High Defiton TV" (LA 181) to display
images
OR orporti unes ne canara en rt
‘oma (rec PA mass roma Toreo
‘video output format, press the MENU, button ans choose
[Video System] on ne (PP tab.
+ Touch-screen operations are not supported while the camera is
comets laos
Q - von aes sn e neyo ao stoke
pronta ono Tele en EN Ta
see Spas unenung be cna sore Hore
AF-Poirt Zoom (AS 1), MF-Pont Zoom (F118), MF Peaking
(De2) and Night Display (KAS2) are not avatatie,
™ Powering the Camera with Household Power
D Sil images. D Movies
Powering the camera with AC Adapter Kit ACK-DC110 (sold separately)
eliminates the need to montor the remaining Eater level
À Make sure the camera is off.
2 Open the cover.
e Follow step 1 in "Inserting the Battery
Pack and Memory Cara" (£1119) to
‘pen the memory card/batery cover, and
then open the coupler cable port cover
as shown,
3 inser the coupler.
‘© Holding the coupler with the terminals (1)
fang as shown insert the coupe just
8 you would a baton pack folowng
Step 2 Inseringthe Battery Peck and
Memo Ca C219),
+ Make sure the coupler cable passes
through the por (1)
Before Use
Basie Guide
1 Camora Basics
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4 P Mode
snd C Modo
5 An
6 Playback Modo
7 Wer Functions
8 soning Menu
10 Appendix
«ba
162
Close the cover.
Betore Use
‘© Lower the cover (1) and hold down as
You side the switch, unlit dicks into the
hosed postion (2). The sofware availble for download fromthe Canon website is introduced — Basle Guido
below, wit instuctons for installation and saving images to a compute.
"Software Le
‘After downloading the software from the Canon website and installing i, RES)
you can do ne faloning tings on your computer
5 Connect the power cord + Cameraindow frie
2 Hybrid Auto Mode
“Insert one end ofthe power cord into the
srt ane and of he pone cord Impartimegesandchange camera setings
I Mer ndo ponerme + Imagetronser Ex 3 Omer Shooting Mates
Manage images view sere, andorganze
Tun the camera on and use as dested
© When finished, tum the camera off and Print and edit images 4 Poe
uml te poner cor om ine tet + Dita Preto Professional
Brose process and edt RAWimages 5 TU Av MC Moo
(D © dones mor pu est cr te
e fur ie (D + remates reguero 5e catches ar 6 Paria
¡so could result in malfunction or damage to the product eee ee e
7 WiFi Functions
Software instruction Manual
==
10 Appendix
Inder
«>4
163
Betore Use
‘© Lower the cover (1) and hold down as
You side the switch, unlit dicks into the
hosed postion (2). The sofware availble for download fromthe Canon website is introduced — Basle Guido
below, wit instuctons for installation and saving images to a compute.
"Software Le
‘After downloading the software from the Canon website and installing i, RES)
you can do ne faloning tings on your computer
5 Connect the power cord + Cameraindow frie
2 Hybrid Auto Mode
“Insert one end ofthe power cord into the
srt ane and of he pone cord Impartimegesandchange camera setings
I Mer ndo ponerme + Imagetronser Ex 3 Omer Shooting Mates
Manage images view sere, andorganze
Tun the camera on and use as dested
© When finished, tum the camera off and Print and edit images 4 Poe
uml te poner cor om ine tet + Dita Preto Professional
Brose process and edt RAWimages 5 TU Av MC Moo
(D © dones mor pu est cr te
e fur ie (D + remates reguero 5e catches ar 6 Paria
¡so could result in malfunction or damage to the product eee ee e
7 WiFi Functions
Software instruction Manual
==
10 Appendix
Inder
«>4
163
™ Computer Connections via a Cable
™ Saving Images to a Computer
Checking Your Computer Environment
‘The software can be used on the following computers. For detailed
‘system requirements and compatbity information, including support in
new operating systems, vst the Canon website
ran me
re Eee
Pa re ETA
* when senang images a computer via WEF checkthe system requirements 1
‘Checking Your Computer Environment (2139).
O > canoa
FREE
Installing the Software
Windows 7 and Mac OS X 108 are used here forthe sake ofilustratn.
For other functions, referto the help system of the relevant software
(some software excluded),
1 Connect the camera to the
computer.
+ With the camera tumed of, open the
cover (1). Wh the smaller plug of the
USE cable in the orientation shown,
insert the plug fly into the camera
terminal (2).
e Insert the larger plug of the USB cable
in the computers USB port. For details.
‘about USE connections on the computer,
refer tothe computer user manual.
For software installation instuctons, see "Instalingtho Sofware”
Az.
2 Turn the camera on to access
CameraWindow.
+ Press the [EN button to tum the camera
on
+ Mac OS: Camerltindow is displayed
\when a comecton is established
between the camera and computer.
Windows: Folow the steps induced
below
+ In the screen that dsplays, dick the [i=]
Inkto modify the progam.
Before Use
Basie Guide
1 Camora Basics
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4 P Mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
10 Appendix
«ba
164
™ Saving Images to a Computer
Checking Your Computer Environment
‘The software can be used on the following computers. For detailed
‘system requirements and compatbity information, including support in
new operating systems, vst the Canon website
ran me
re Eee
Pa re ETA
* when senang images a computer via WEF checkthe system requirements 1
‘Checking Your Computer Environment (2139).
O > canoa
FREE
Installing the Software
Windows 7 and Mac OS X 108 are used here forthe sake ofilustratn.
For other functions, referto the help system of the relevant software
(some software excluded),
1 Connect the camera to the
computer.
+ With the camera tumed of, open the
cover (1). Wh the smaller plug of the
USE cable in the orientation shown,
insert the plug fly into the camera
terminal (2).
e Insert the larger plug of the USB cable
in the computers USB port. For details.
‘about USE connections on the computer,
refer tothe computer user manual.
For software installation instuctons, see "Instalingtho Sofware”
Az.
2 Turn the camera on to access
CameraWindow.
+ Press the [EN button to tum the camera
on
+ Mac OS: Camerltindow is displayed
\when a comecton is established
between the camera and computer.
Windows: Folow the steps induced
below
+ In the screen that dsplays, dick the [i=]
Inkto modify the progam.
Before Use
Basie Guide
1 Camora Basics
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4 P Mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
10 Appendix
«ba
164
‘© Choose [Downloads Images From Canon
Camera) and then dick [OK]
‘© Double-cick (Hi
3 Save the images to the computer.
«© Click [Import Images from Camera), and
then click Import Untransterred Images]
Images are now saved to the Pictures.
folder on the computer, in separate
folders named by date,
(© After images are saved, dose
CameraWndow, press the [CE] button to
turn the camera of, and unplug the cable.
‘© For instructions on viewing images on a
computer refer to Software instruction
Manual (63).
Q - nos toe sen sep 28 mann.
tenn tte
+ Mar OS Emma tenerse cen
(Gane ene So
«you save nage cmp ny y
ee
Siva De ong tore sy
ayia atu er an yu cent cane othe
|
Inne ann onan ay e tort
bee
a nas (JPEG me aient nage)
mayra aa
Im: pons may te lemon moe ses
Pia
Sone tens y ocurren sat tags rage
Ion. ang one opinen ran De
san a
Son ener poza e sume oy pte aaa
Pe
Before Use
Basie Guide
1 Camera Basics
2 Auto mee
Hybrid Auto Modo
8 Omer Shooting Modes
4 Pode
5 TWA Mand Gode
6 Playback Mode
7 Wer Functions
8 Souing Menu
10 Apendix
«ba
165
Camera) and then dick [OK]
‘© Double-cick (Hi
3 Save the images to the computer.
«© Click [Import Images from Camera), and
then click Import Untransterred Images]
Images are now saved to the Pictures.
folder on the computer, in separate
folders named by date,
(© After images are saved, dose
CameraWndow, press the [CE] button to
turn the camera of, and unplug the cable.
‘© For instructions on viewing images on a
computer refer to Software instruction
Manual (63).
Q - nos toe sen sep 28 mann.
tenn tte
+ Mar OS Emma tenerse cen
(Gane ene So
«you save nage cmp ny y
ee
Siva De ong tore sy
ayia atu er an yu cent cane othe
|
Inne ann onan ay e tort
bee
a nas (JPEG me aient nage)
mayra aa
Im: pons may te lemon moe ses
Pia
Sone tens y ocurren sat tags rage
Ion. ang one opinen ran De
san a
Son ener poza e sume oy pte aaa
Pe
Before Use
Basie Guide
1 Camera Basics
2 Auto mee
Hybrid Auto Modo
8 Omer Shooting Modes
4 Pode
5 TWA Mand Gode
6 Playback Mode
7 Wer Functions
8 Souing Menu
10 Apendix
«ba
165
Printing Images
D Sil images De Movies
Your shots can easily be printed by connecting the camera to a printer.
On the camera, you can speciy images to set up batch printing, prepare
orders for photo development services, and prepare orders or print
images for photabooks
JA Canon SELPHY CP series compact photo printer is used here forthe
sake of ilustration, Screens displayed and available functions vary by
printer. Also refer tothe printer manual for addtional information
™ Easy Print
D Sil Images
Easily print your shots by connecting the camera to a PictBridge:
compatible printer (sold separately) withthe USE cable.
À Make sure the camera and printer
are off
2 Connect the camera to the printer.
‘© Open te terminal cover. Holding the
smaller cable plug in the orientation
shown, inset the plug fully ito the
camera terminal
‘© Connect the larger cable plug to the
Printer For other connection details, refer
tothe printer manual
3 Turn the printer on.
4 Tur the camera on.
+ Press the [EN button to turn the camera
5 Choose an image.
+ Press he {ID} butons or tum the (@)
alto choose an mage
6 Access the printing screen.
«© Press the (@) button
7 Print the image.
+ Fess the [aw] butons or tum the (9)
Ga to choose (Prt, andthen press the
(Ol buton
+ Painting now begs.
+ To prin other images, repeat the above
procedures stating rom sep 5 aer
prining is fishes
+ Von you are finished printing tun the
camera and printer off and dsconnect
the cable
O - ru canoncana iso compare pr)
senor Co)
> imag te pie,
Betore Use
Guide
1 Camera Basics,
2 Auto Mode
Hybrid Auto Mode
8 Omer Shooting Modes
4 Prode
5 RAM and Modo
6 Playback Modo
7 wer Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Inder
10 Appendix
4/»/9
166
D Sil images De Movies
Your shots can easily be printed by connecting the camera to a printer.
On the camera, you can speciy images to set up batch printing, prepare
orders for photo development services, and prepare orders or print
images for photabooks
JA Canon SELPHY CP series compact photo printer is used here forthe
sake of ilustration, Screens displayed and available functions vary by
printer. Also refer tothe printer manual for addtional information
™ Easy Print
D Sil Images
Easily print your shots by connecting the camera to a PictBridge:
compatible printer (sold separately) withthe USE cable.
À Make sure the camera and printer
are off
2 Connect the camera to the printer.
‘© Open te terminal cover. Holding the
smaller cable plug in the orientation
shown, inset the plug fully ito the
camera terminal
‘© Connect the larger cable plug to the
Printer For other connection details, refer
tothe printer manual
3 Turn the printer on.
4 Tur the camera on.
+ Press the [EN button to turn the camera
5 Choose an image.
+ Press he {ID} butons or tum the (@)
alto choose an mage
6 Access the printing screen.
«© Press the (@) button
7 Print the image.
+ Fess the [aw] butons or tum the (9)
Ga to choose (Prt, andthen press the
(Ol buton
+ Painting now begs.
+ To prin other images, repeat the above
procedures stating rom sep 5 aer
prining is fishes
+ Von you are finished printing tun the
camera and printer off and dsconnect
the cable
O - ru canoncana iso compare pr)
senor Co)
> imag te pie,
Betore Use
Guide
1 Camera Basics,
2 Auto Mode
Hybrid Auto Mode
8 Omer Shooting Modes
4 Prode
5 RAM and Modo
6 Playback Modo
7 wer Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Inder
10 Appendix
4/»/9
166
™ Configuring Print Settings
Cropping Images before Printing
D Sl Images
1 Access the printing screen.
e Follow steps 1 6 in "Easy Print
(60166) to access this screen
2 Configure the settings.
Press the [aw] buttons ortum the (
dial to choose an tem, and than choo
‘an option by pressing the (4][p] buttons
Detauk_[ Matches current printer satings.
Date | Prints images wih the date added
eo rien fronts moges un mee umber added
ein | Ps moges vun ba te cae angie
number ade
a
Data | Mathes curar pao songs
CE
B I, [uses ntomaton rome tme mg
print under optimal settings.
[RedEye 1] Correct red-eye
| 22,2% | noose me number of copies to print
Cropping = ‘Specify a desired image area to print (£11167).
Paper |_| Spec the pope sz, layout, end or deals
Settings 01168).
D suit images
By cropping images before printing, you can print a desired image area
instead of the entre mage
1 Choose [Cropping]
«Alter folowing step 1in*Coniguing Pint
Setings” (167) t access the printing
screen, choose (Cropping) and gress te
but
+ Acropping frame is now displayed
indcatng the image area t print
2 Adjust the cropping frame as needed.
© To resize the frame, move the zoom lever
© To move the frame, press the
LAIYIIDI buttons.
(© To rotate the frame, tum the (4) dal.
‘© When fnished, press the (@) button.
Print the image.
e Follow step 7in "Easy Print’ (£21166)
to print
© > xro mana pose tas map ses rstsome
Pr
Betore Use
Basie Guide
1 Camora Basics,
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
8 Omer Shooting Modes
4 Prode
5 RAM and Modo
6 Playback Modo
7 wer Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Inder
10 Appendix
4/»/9
167
Cropping Images before Printing
D Sl Images
1 Access the printing screen.
e Follow steps 1 6 in "Easy Print
(60166) to access this screen
2 Configure the settings.
Press the [aw] buttons ortum the (
dial to choose an tem, and than choo
‘an option by pressing the (4][p] buttons
Detauk_[ Matches current printer satings.
Date | Prints images wih the date added
eo rien fronts moges un mee umber added
ein | Ps moges vun ba te cae angie
number ade
a
Data | Mathes curar pao songs
CE
B I, [uses ntomaton rome tme mg
print under optimal settings.
[RedEye 1] Correct red-eye
| 22,2% | noose me number of copies to print
Cropping = ‘Specify a desired image area to print (£11167).
Paper |_| Spec the pope sz, layout, end or deals
Settings 01168).
D suit images
By cropping images before printing, you can print a desired image area
instead of the entre mage
1 Choose [Cropping]
«Alter folowing step 1in*Coniguing Pint
Setings” (167) t access the printing
screen, choose (Cropping) and gress te
but
+ Acropping frame is now displayed
indcatng the image area t print
2 Adjust the cropping frame as needed.
© To resize the frame, move the zoom lever
© To move the frame, press the
LAIYIIDI buttons.
(© To rotate the frame, tum the (4) dal.
‘© When fnished, press the (@) button.
Print the image.
e Follow step 7in "Easy Print’ (£21166)
to print
© > xro mana pose tas map ses rstsome
Pr
Betore Use
Basie Guide
1 Camora Basics,
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
8 Omer Shooting Modes
4 Prode
5 RAM and Modo
6 Playback Modo
7 wer Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Inder
10 Appendix
4/»/9
167
Choosing Paper Size and Layout before Printing
Available Layout Options
D St images
1 Choose [Paper Settings),
«After folowing step 1 in*Coniguing Pit
Setings” (11167) to access te printing
screen, choose [Paper Setings and
press the [@ button
2 Choose a paper size.
e Press the [aw] buttons or tum the (9)
dal to choose an option, and then press.
the [@] button.
3 choose a ype of paper
© Press the [aw] butons ortum tre
dial to choose an option, andthen press
the (6) buton
4 Choose a layout.
Press the [aw] buttons ortum the I
dial to choose an option.
Men choosing [N-up], press the [4][D]
buttons to speci the number of mages
per sheet.
Press the (8) button
5 Print the image.
Default | Matches curent printer satings
ordered [Prints with blank space around the image.
Bordariess_| Borderless, edgeto-edge printing
Nup (Choose how many images to pant per sheet
Prints images for identification purposes,
10 Photo | Only avaiable for images with à resolution of L and an
aspect ratio of 32
‘Choose the prit size
Fed Sze | Choose from 35x 5in., postcard, or wide format pnts
Printing ID Photos
D suit Images
1 Choose ID Photo)
e Following steps 1— 4 in “Choosing
Paper Sze and Layout before Printing
(£11166), choose [ID Photo] and press
the (@) button
2 Choose the long and short side
length
e Press the [aw] buttons or tum the (4)
dal to choose an tem. Choose the length
by pressing ne [4I[D] buttons, and then
press the (8) button
3 choose the printing area.
y e Fallow step 2 n° Cropping Images before
Printing’ (C2167) to choose the printing
a) Print the image.
Betore Use
Basie Guide
1 Camora Basics,
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
ee
10 Appendix
Inder
«ba
168
Available Layout Options
D St images
1 Choose [Paper Settings),
«After folowing step 1 in*Coniguing Pit
Setings” (11167) to access te printing
screen, choose [Paper Setings and
press the [@ button
2 Choose a paper size.
e Press the [aw] buttons or tum the (9)
dal to choose an option, and then press.
the [@] button.
3 choose a ype of paper
© Press the [aw] butons ortum tre
dial to choose an option, andthen press
the (6) buton
4 Choose a layout.
Press the [aw] buttons ortum the I
dial to choose an option.
Men choosing [N-up], press the [4][D]
buttons to speci the number of mages
per sheet.
Press the (8) button
5 Print the image.
Default | Matches curent printer satings
ordered [Prints with blank space around the image.
Bordariess_| Borderless, edgeto-edge printing
Nup (Choose how many images to pant per sheet
Prints images for identification purposes,
10 Photo | Only avaiable for images with à resolution of L and an
aspect ratio of 32
‘Choose the prit size
Fed Sze | Choose from 35x 5in., postcard, or wide format pnts
Printing ID Photos
D suit Images
1 Choose ID Photo)
e Following steps 1— 4 in “Choosing
Paper Sze and Layout before Printing
(£11166), choose [ID Photo] and press
the (@) button
2 Choose the long and short side
length
e Press the [aw] buttons or tum the (4)
dal to choose an tem. Choose the length
by pressing ne [4I[D] buttons, and then
press the (8) button
3 choose the printing area.
y e Fallow step 2 n° Cropping Images before
Printing’ (C2167) to choose the printing
a) Print the image.
Betore Use
Basie Guide
1 Camora Basics,
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
ee
10 Appendix
Inder
«ba
168
™ Printing Movie Scenes
™ Adding Images to the Print List (DPOF)
D>Movies
1 Access the printing screen.
e Follow steps 1-5 in "Easy Print
(601165) to choose a movie, andthen
press the (6) button.
‘© Press the [4I[D] buttons or tum the (6)
dial to choose (DY, and then press the
[@)button. This screen is dsplayed,
2 Choose a printing method.
Press the [A] v] buttons ortum the
1@ dial to choose [FW and then press
the [QI buttons to choose the printing
method,
3 Print the image.
Movie Printing Options
‘Sagle [Prints the current scene as a sl mage.
Pints a series of scenes, a certain interval apart on a single
sheet of paper. You can also print the older number, fle
number, and elapsed time forthe frame by setting [Caption]
to [On]
D Sil Images
Batch printing (£01171) and ordering prints from a photo development
series can be setup on the camera, Choose up to 998 images on a memory
card and configure relevant setings, such as the number of copies, as
follows, The pining information you prepare this way vllconformto DPOF
(Cigta Print Order Format) standards.
Q + rostimages cameos ecc pania
Configuring Print Settings
D suit images
‘Specty the printing format, whether to add the date or fle number, and
other settings as folons. These setings apply o al images in the print ist
e Press the MENU] button, and then
choose [Print Setings] on the [Ey tb.
‘Choose and configure tems as desired
Me.
Standard [One image is printed per sheet
‘Smaller versions of muliple mages are
Print Type | Index | printed per sheet.
Y «ca eran press ese) ton come
‘and then press the (@ button again.
o
Page conte tae am PTT eta
ne
Ban — | Both standard andindex formats ae printed
)n — [mages are printed with the shoctin
m ‘On| mages are printed withthe shooting date
CE
nr Fe printed with the fle num
=e On fines ie wae He nme,
Alımage pint ist stings ae cleared ater
ear DPOF] on [és
deta
CE
Betore Use
Basie Guide
1 Camera Basics,
2 Auto Mode
Hybrid Auto Mode
a
10 Appendix
Inder
«>4
169
™ Adding Images to the Print List (DPOF)
D>Movies
1 Access the printing screen.
e Follow steps 1-5 in "Easy Print
(601165) to choose a movie, andthen
press the (6) button.
‘© Press the [4I[D] buttons or tum the (6)
dial to choose (DY, and then press the
[@)button. This screen is dsplayed,
2 Choose a printing method.
Press the [A] v] buttons ortum the
1@ dial to choose [FW and then press
the [QI buttons to choose the printing
method,
3 Print the image.
Movie Printing Options
‘Sagle [Prints the current scene as a sl mage.
Pints a series of scenes, a certain interval apart on a single
sheet of paper. You can also print the older number, fle
number, and elapsed time forthe frame by setting [Caption]
to [On]
D Sil Images
Batch printing (£01171) and ordering prints from a photo development
series can be setup on the camera, Choose up to 998 images on a memory
card and configure relevant setings, such as the number of copies, as
follows, The pining information you prepare this way vllconformto DPOF
(Cigta Print Order Format) standards.
Q + rostimages cameos ecc pania
Configuring Print Settings
D suit images
‘Specty the printing format, whether to add the date or fle number, and
other settings as folons. These setings apply o al images in the print ist
e Press the MENU] button, and then
choose [Print Setings] on the [Ey tb.
‘Choose and configure tems as desired
Me.
Standard [One image is printed per sheet
‘Smaller versions of muliple mages are
Print Type | Index | printed per sheet.
Y «ca eran press ese) ton come
‘and then press the (@ button again.
o
Page conte tae am PTT eta
ne
Ban — | Both standard andindex formats ae printed
)n — [mages are printed with the shoctin
m ‘On| mages are printed withthe shooting date
CE
nr Fe printed with the fle num
=e On fines ie wae He nme,
Alımage pint ist stings ae cleared ater
ear DPOF] on [és
deta
CE
Betore Use
Basie Guide
1 Camera Basics,
2 Auto Mode
Hybrid Auto Mode
a
10 Appendix
Inder
«>4
169
OT
pores op dope sc sona cas
+ may be displayed on the camera to warn you that the
‘thoy cranes frtsemoetanewcomreden rer
ano error ne ptr ar e nos na)
overt a proa es
Y + Specnmotnsen prestan ran on toh
Pare o ai eine
«fran aaa som Carne Pte
Comes es ep
+ Hoge colar mat setng ca pa
Time] on the [FT] tab (1120).
Setting Up Printing for Individual Images
D Su images
1 Choose [Select Images & Qty].
+ Press the [MENU button, choose
[Select Images & Qty] on the (Dj tab,
and nen press the (8) baton
2 Choose an image.
‘© Press the (4][D] buttons or tum the (8)
dial to choose an image, and then press
the (€) button.
‘© You can now specify the number of
copies.
e Ifyou specity index printing for the
image, itis labeled with a [Y/ icon. To
cancel index printing for the image, press.
the (@) button again. [4/1 is no longer
displayed.
3 Specity the number of prints.
© Press the [Av] buttons or tun the (@]
da to specify the numberof prints (up
1099).
+ To set up printing for other images and
speafy the number of prints, repeat steps
«© Printing quantty cannot be specified for
index prints, You can only choose which
images to pint, by fallovang step 2
© When fnisted, press the MENU button
torelum to the menu screen
‘Setting Up Printing for a Range of Images
D sill Images
+ Following step 1in“Seting Up Printing
for Individual images’ (21170), choose
[Select Range] and press the (9) button.
‘© Fallow steps 2 ~3 in "Selecing a Range
21115) to speci images,
+ Press the [aJ[w] buttons to choose
[Order], and then press the (6) button
Setting Up Printing for All Images
D suit images
+ Following step 1in“Seting Up Printing
for Indvidual mages" (21170), choose
[Select Al Images] and press the (9)
button
e Press the [4JIM buttons or tum the (6)
{dai to choose [OK], end then press the
(@)butten
Betore Use
Basie Guide
1 Camora Basics,
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
ee
10 Appendix
Inder
«ba
170
pores op dope sc sona cas
+ may be displayed on the camera to warn you that the
‘thoy cranes frtsemoetanewcomreden rer
ano error ne ptr ar e nos na)
overt a proa es
Y + Specnmotnsen prestan ran on toh
Pare o ai eine
«fran aaa som Carne Pte
Comes es ep
+ Hoge colar mat setng ca pa
Time] on the [FT] tab (1120).
Setting Up Printing for Individual Images
D Su images
1 Choose [Select Images & Qty].
+ Press the [MENU button, choose
[Select Images & Qty] on the (Dj tab,
and nen press the (8) baton
2 Choose an image.
‘© Press the (4][D] buttons or tum the (8)
dial to choose an image, and then press
the (€) button.
‘© You can now specify the number of
copies.
e Ifyou specity index printing for the
image, itis labeled with a [Y/ icon. To
cancel index printing for the image, press.
the (@) button again. [4/1 is no longer
displayed.
3 Specity the number of prints.
© Press the [Av] buttons or tun the (@]
da to specify the numberof prints (up
1099).
+ To set up printing for other images and
speafy the number of prints, repeat steps
«© Printing quantty cannot be specified for
index prints, You can only choose which
images to pint, by fallovang step 2
© When fnisted, press the MENU button
torelum to the menu screen
‘Setting Up Printing for a Range of Images
D sill Images
+ Following step 1in“Seting Up Printing
for Individual images’ (21170), choose
[Select Range] and press the (9) button.
‘© Fallow steps 2 ~3 in "Selecing a Range
21115) to speci images,
+ Press the [aJ[w] buttons to choose
[Order], and then press the (6) button
Setting Up Printing for All Images
D suit images
+ Following step 1in“Seting Up Printing
for Indvidual mages" (21170), choose
[Select Al Images] and press the (9)
button
e Press the [4JIM buttons or tum the (6)
{dai to choose [OK], end then press the
(@)butten
Betore Use
Basie Guide
1 Camora Basics,
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
ee
10 Appendix
Inder
«ba
170
Clearing All Images from the Print List
™ Adding Images to a Photobook
‘© Fotowing top 1 in"Seting Up Printing
for Individual Images’ (A170), choose
{Clear All Selections] and press ne (8)
buton
Press te [4] butons or tum he (@)
dial to choose OK, andthen press the
(@buton
Printing Images Added to the Print List (DPOF)
D sui images
‘whan images have been added tro
pant i EE Tao) sion
[Sdsplayed ater yas conectte camera
to aPutenge-compatte pier Press
the fait Baton fo choos tno
and er am pres the (ben
part images ine pt ht
Any DPOF pn job tat you temporary
Sop ibe resumed han Mono mage
D Su Images
Photobooks can be set up on the camera by choosing up to 998 images
on a memory card and importing them into the software on your computer,
where they are stored in their own folder. This is convenient when
Ordering printed photobooks online or printing photobooks with your own
printer.
Choosing a Selection Method
Press the [MENU] button, choose
(Photobook Setup] onthe [EN tab, and
then choose how you wil select images.
CD + 101 may ve aspiayed one caneratowamyoutattne
memory caras rr stings th were cored ander
Camera. Chara a ent segs sna hs camera may
overt at previa segs
O + ssa mp mages yu compas arr Sonne
actin Wana (IE ate arma aa
ile
Betore Use
Basie Guide
1 Camora Basics,
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
ee
10 Appendix
Inder
«ba
71
™ Adding Images to a Photobook
‘© Fotowing top 1 in"Seting Up Printing
for Individual Images’ (A170), choose
{Clear All Selections] and press ne (8)
buton
Press te [4] butons or tum he (@)
dial to choose OK, andthen press the
(@buton
Printing Images Added to the Print List (DPOF)
D sui images
‘whan images have been added tro
pant i EE Tao) sion
[Sdsplayed ater yas conectte camera
to aPutenge-compatte pier Press
the fait Baton fo choos tno
and er am pres the (ben
part images ine pt ht
Any DPOF pn job tat you temporary
Sop ibe resumed han Mono mage
D Su Images
Photobooks can be set up on the camera by choosing up to 998 images
on a memory card and importing them into the software on your computer,
where they are stored in their own folder. This is convenient when
Ordering printed photobooks online or printing photobooks with your own
printer.
Choosing a Selection Method
Press the [MENU] button, choose
(Photobook Setup] onthe [EN tab, and
then choose how you wil select images.
CD + 101 may ve aspiayed one caneratowamyoutattne
memory caras rr stings th were cored ander
Camera. Chara a ent segs sna hs camera may
overt at previa segs
O + ssa mp mages yu compas arr Sonne
actin Wana (IE ate arma aa
ile
Betore Use
Basie Guide
1 Camora Basics,
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
ee
10 Appendix
Inder
«ba
71
Adding Images Individual
Removing All Images from a Photobook
D suit images
1 Choose [Select].
Folowngihe procedure in “Choosing
a Selection Method" (21171), choose
[Selec and press o (8) Euton
2 Choose an image.
‘© Press the (4][D] buttons or tum the (6)
dial to choose an image, and then press
the (O) button,
elvis dsplayed
‘© To remove the image from the pholobock,
press the (@] button again. (Vis no
longer displayed.
‘© Repest this process to specify other
images.
‘© When finished, press the MENU button
{to retum tothe menu sereen
Adding All Images to a Photobook
D sui images
® Fotowing the procedure in “Choosing
a Selection Method” (£21171), choose
[Select Al Images) and press the (©)
button
‘© Press the (QD) buttons or tum the (6)
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[@)button
D suit images
+ Following the procedure in “Choosing
a Selecton Method’ (£2171), choose
[Clear All Selections] and press the (8)
button
+ Press the (4JIM buttons or turn the (9)
«da to choose [OK], and then press the
outer
Betore Use
Guide
Inder
1 Canora Basics,
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4 P Mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
9
10 Appendix
«ba
172
Removing All Images from a Photobook
D suit images
1 Choose [Select].
Folowngihe procedure in “Choosing
a Selection Method" (21171), choose
[Selec and press o (8) Euton
2 Choose an image.
‘© Press the (4][D] buttons or tum the (6)
dial to choose an image, and then press
the (O) button,
elvis dsplayed
‘© To remove the image from the pholobock,
press the (@] button again. (Vis no
longer displayed.
‘© Repest this process to specify other
images.
‘© When finished, press the MENU button
{to retum tothe menu sereen
Adding All Images to a Photobook
D sui images
® Fotowing the procedure in “Choosing
a Selection Method” (£21171), choose
[Select Al Images) and press the (©)
button
‘© Press the (QD) buttons or tum the (6)
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[@)button
D suit images
+ Following the procedure in “Choosing
a Selecton Method’ (£2171), choose
[Clear All Selections] and press the (8)
button
+ Press the (4JIM buttons or turn the (9)
«da to choose [OK], and then press the
outer
Betore Use
Guide
Inder
1 Canora Basics,
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4 P Mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
9
10 Appendix
«ba
172
Helpful information when using the camera
| Troubleshooting
It you think here is. problem withthe camera, fist che
Ifthe items below do not solve your probe
Support Help Desk.
the folowing
Power
Nothing happens when the power button is pressed.
‘Conte ate batery packs erarged (19,
Conte tatin baten, packis Inserts facing e carectway (19)
Conte ate memory cardtatey over sy coses (19)
Datybatery teminals reduce baner performance, Try cleaning
M a cot swab and relseren e tatey pack ew times
out cf power quickly
mance dereases ato Tempera
pack te by puting tin you"
Go mt teuEn any metal oes
Daty watery teminais reduce bat perfomance. y cleaning
tn action swab andrensereng te batty pack few mes
itthese measures do mel andthe battery packs uns oto omer soon
fer cnang, Ras reached tend if, Puchase anew tater pack
es. Try waming the bat
sot for ecample,ersunng Pathe tamis
The lensis not retracted,
Do notopen the memory carwbatery over whe the camera ison Close te
over ham te camera on and then tan tc again ENN).
The battery pack is swollen.
Barry swelingis roma and does na pose any safety concems, However 1
tater swelng reverts te batery pack nom iting n ne camera, contact 3
Cana Custor (ap De
Display on aT
Camera images lock dstorted or net displayed on a TV (£1161),
Betore Use
Basie Guide
1 Camora Basics,
Auto Mode
2 Hybrid Auto Mode
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4 P Mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Setting Menu.
Accessories
Inder
173
| Troubleshooting
It you think here is. problem withthe camera, fist che
Ifthe items below do not solve your probe
Support Help Desk.
the folowing
Power
Nothing happens when the power button is pressed.
‘Conte ate batery packs erarged (19,
Conte tatin baten, packis Inserts facing e carectway (19)
Conte ate memory cardtatey over sy coses (19)
Datybatery teminals reduce baner performance, Try cleaning
M a cot swab and relseren e tatey pack ew times
out cf power quickly
mance dereases ato Tempera
pack te by puting tin you"
Go mt teuEn any metal oes
Daty watery teminais reduce bat perfomance. y cleaning
tn action swab andrensereng te batty pack few mes
itthese measures do mel andthe battery packs uns oto omer soon
fer cnang, Ras reached tend if, Puchase anew tater pack
es. Try waming the bat
sot for ecample,ersunng Pathe tamis
The lensis not retracted,
Do notopen the memory carwbatery over whe the camera ison Close te
over ham te camera on and then tan tc again ENN).
The battery pack is swollen.
Barry swelingis roma and does na pose any safety concems, However 1
tater swelng reverts te batery pack nom iting n ne camera, contact 3
Cana Custor (ap De
Display on aT
Camera images lock dstorted or net displayed on a TV (£1161),
Betore Use
Basie Guide
1 Camora Basics,
Auto Mode
2 Hybrid Auto Mode
3 Otner Shooting Modes
4 P Mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Setting Menu.
Accessories
Inder
173
Shooting
Cannot shoot
© In Payback mode (2103), pres the shutter buon natway F2).
Strange display on the screen under low ight (1129).
Strange display on the screen when shocting.
+ Not ratte folowing splay prokiems are rat recordea in st images bt are
recortes in movies
“The seen may cer ans orzanta banang may appear under restent
orLeDigrng
Fullscreen display is nc available while shooting (C249).
No date stamp is added to images.
+ Atioug date stamps cant be added images win is camera, mages can
be pnnte win ne date as alo.
Use e srware pit
For deals, ee Software nsructon Manual (160)
Pret using painter functons
18] flashes on the screen when the shutter buttons pressed, and shooting
IS not possible (ar).
[Gis dsplayed ven the shutter button is pressedhaltway (2137).
Sets Mode] to [Continus] (91
False netas ana set the ash moe 1] 68).
© Increase tne ISO spees ERS).
© Mourt ine camera ona tipod or take otr measures to keep ts Inti case
pu sas set lS Mode to [Om (on,
Shots are out of focus,
+ Press the shutter bution away to focus on sujets before pressing al the
way onto shot (2,
+ Make sur subjects are win focusing range (196)
2 Set[aF-assist Seam to On as
+ Cortrm mt unneededtunctors suchas macro ze deactivated
©. my snontng win fous lok OFF 10% (EDS, EAST)
‘Shots are blur.
® Bring may occur more aten when Touch shutters used shot, depenang
fn shading condo. Hela the camera stl when snaotng
No AF frames are displayed and the camera does notfocus when the
shutter button is pressed halfway
* To have AF frames diplayed and te camera focus comet, y composing the
shotwanrigher contrast sujet areas centered before you press te ster
on naway.Cterwise, ty pressing eshte button away FPE EL.
‘Subjects in shots lak too dark
Raise the fash and sets ash mode to [$] (MS)
Adustorgriess oy using exposure compensation (278),
Aust cortrast by using Conrast (477. 1412).
Use AE lock or spot metenng (74,74),
‘Subjects look too bright, highights are washed. out,
Lower the las and sete fash mode to (DJ (34),
5. Aqustgrness by using exposure compensation (AV)
Use at lek or spat matonng (ra, RV)
Reduce me ing on seas
‘Shots look too dark despite the flash fring (C2137)
shook win lah ange (ER.
{Adjust ngtnass by using las exposure compensation or changing tetas
aout evel 9 os),
+ Increase the 180 speed KU)
‘Subjects in flash shots look too bright, highlights are washed-cut
‘Shoo wit as range (2196,
{Lower tne ash and sett fash mode to (®) (D3)
{Aust grtness by using las exposure compensation or hanging tasa
put ve ES F295)
‘White spots appear in flash shots
«This causedby hg rom e ish rflecing of du orafoome pares
‘Shots ook grainy.
+ Lower thetSO speed IV).
©. HgniSO speeds some stactng modes may cause gramy images (155)
‘Subjects are affected by redeye.
+ Se [Redeye Lamp} to (On) E52) Thereseye reduction tmp (Dawn
De tas in ach ste Forbestresuts, have suet lock the ede
reaeton amp. Aso ty increasing he igtingn Indoor scenes are shooting at
oser range
+ ES mages usngres-ye correcton (D129),
Before Use
Basie Guide
1 Camora Basics
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
8 Other Shooting Modos.
4 P mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
Inder
«ba
174
Cannot shoot
© In Payback mode (2103), pres the shutter buon natway F2).
Strange display on the screen under low ight (1129).
Strange display on the screen when shocting.
+ Not ratte folowing splay prokiems are rat recordea in st images bt are
recortes in movies
“The seen may cer ans orzanta banang may appear under restent
orLeDigrng
Fullscreen display is nc available while shooting (C249).
No date stamp is added to images.
+ Atioug date stamps cant be added images win is camera, mages can
be pnnte win ne date as alo.
Use e srware pit
For deals, ee Software nsructon Manual (160)
Pret using painter functons
18] flashes on the screen when the shutter buttons pressed, and shooting
IS not possible (ar).
[Gis dsplayed ven the shutter button is pressedhaltway (2137).
Sets Mode] to [Continus] (91
False netas ana set the ash moe 1] 68).
© Increase tne ISO spees ERS).
© Mourt ine camera ona tipod or take otr measures to keep ts Inti case
pu sas set lS Mode to [Om (on,
Shots are out of focus,
+ Press the shutter bution away to focus on sujets before pressing al the
way onto shot (2,
+ Make sur subjects are win focusing range (196)
2 Set[aF-assist Seam to On as
+ Cortrm mt unneededtunctors suchas macro ze deactivated
©. my snontng win fous lok OFF 10% (EDS, EAST)
‘Shots are blur.
® Bring may occur more aten when Touch shutters used shot, depenang
fn shading condo. Hela the camera stl when snaotng
No AF frames are displayed and the camera does notfocus when the
shutter button is pressed halfway
* To have AF frames diplayed and te camera focus comet, y composing the
shotwanrigher contrast sujet areas centered before you press te ster
on naway.Cterwise, ty pressing eshte button away FPE EL.
‘Subjects in shots lak too dark
Raise the fash and sets ash mode to [$] (MS)
Adustorgriess oy using exposure compensation (278),
Aust cortrast by using Conrast (477. 1412).
Use AE lock or spot metenng (74,74),
‘Subjects look too bright, highights are washed. out,
Lower the las and sete fash mode to (DJ (34),
5. Aqustgrness by using exposure compensation (AV)
Use at lek or spat matonng (ra, RV)
Reduce me ing on seas
‘Shots look too dark despite the flash fring (C2137)
shook win lah ange (ER.
{Adjust ngtnass by using las exposure compensation or changing tetas
aout evel 9 os),
+ Increase the 180 speed KU)
‘Subjects in flash shots look too bright, highlights are washed-cut
‘Shoo wit as range (2196,
{Lower tne ash and sett fash mode to (®) (D3)
{Aust grtness by using las exposure compensation or hanging tasa
put ve ES F295)
‘White spots appear in flash shots
«This causedby hg rom e ish rflecing of du orafoome pares
‘Shots ook grainy.
+ Lower thetSO speed IV).
©. HgniSO speeds some stactng modes may cause gramy images (155)
‘Subjects are affected by redeye.
+ Se [Redeye Lamp} to (On) E52) Thereseye reduction tmp (Dawn
De tas in ach ste Forbestresuts, have suet lock the ede
reaeton amp. Aso ty increasing he igtingn Indoor scenes are shooting at
oser range
+ ES mages usngres-ye correcton (D129),
Before Use
Basie Guide
1 Camora Basics
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
8 Other Shooting Modos.
4 P mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
Inder
«ba
174
Recording to the memary card takes too ong or conthuous shooting is
slower.
Use te cameratoperfom iow evel formating of he memory cara (154),
‘Shooting setings or FUNC. menu settings are not avaiable,
"Aue setng ems vay by shocing mode Refer to Funcons Avalabıe in
Each Shooting Mode" FUNG. Menu, and"Shoctng Tar FA! 11865),
‘The Babies or Children icon does not display.
+ Tre Babes ans Cen cons wil na: Gspay ite tray isnt stn tace
irtcematon (AS) rt cons tl set display even when you settne.
Dray, reregster ace infomation (TR), o make sur Ina he datetime
ae sa comecty (2152)
Touch AF or Touch Shutter does nat work
2 Tu AF or Touch Shutter wil nct work youteurhthe edges ote screen
au closer toe enter oft screen
Shooting Movies.
‘The elapsed time shown is incorrect, or recording is interupted.
+ Use ne cameratofomattne memary card, or set a car hat sippads
grspaea recorda, Note hat even te lapsed me play ls ncorest ne
lenginof moves en e memory card coms spands one ach recorang me.
iss, 96,
(@ is dsplayed and shooting stops automaticaly,
©" Ms camer intemal memory ter tiled up as he camera could not record to
te memory cara uy enough. Ty one a ne foung measures
see Camera pertom low-level fm ag ofthe memory card (D154),
Lonertne image quay (SO)
Sent a memory card tat supports highspeed recorang (CD86
Zooming isnot possible,
Zooming not poss im | mode (ss).
{Zooming s nt posse unen shooting modes in ah mode AGO)
‘Subjects look distorted,
Subjects tat pass ion of he camera qui maylook store, sis mata
matuneten
Playback.
Playback is not possible
‘mage of move paytack may nt be possible a computer is used to rename
ies or atertne fade retro Reta Sofware Insti Manual (A168)
‘ordeals ontadersru-ture anale names
Playback stops, or audio skips.
+ Suc toa memary car that yauhave petomedon-eveltomating on with tre
camera (2154),
+ There may be brerimem pions when paying movies copied to memory caras
rat au sow rad speeds
+ When moves ae layed ona computer. rames maybe dospes and audo may
D computer petomance s nase alate
‘Sound's not played during movies
Adjust te volume (IS!) you nave activate [Mute] (2151) ar me sound
ine mode is fat,
+ No sural played tr moves shana AGO) or (EEE) made
because audo sna recorded ntnese modes.
Memory Card
The memory card is not recognized.
+ Restattre camera, inte memory car in 20)
Computer.
Cannot transfer images to a computer
When attempting to ranstr mages tothe computer va acabe, y reaucingthe
‘rater speed asfatons,
ress the [DE] ou to enter Playoack mode. Host MENU buton
‘down a you press the [A and) ators the same time On the nest
Sereen presstne (1 tutors choc [6 and ten press ine ¡cto
Before Use
Basie Guide
1 Camora Basics
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
8 Other Shooting Modos.
4 P mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
Inder
«al
175
slower.
Use te cameratoperfom iow evel formating of he memory cara (154),
‘Shooting setings or FUNC. menu settings are not avaiable,
"Aue setng ems vay by shocing mode Refer to Funcons Avalabıe in
Each Shooting Mode" FUNG. Menu, and"Shoctng Tar FA! 11865),
‘The Babies or Children icon does not display.
+ Tre Babes ans Cen cons wil na: Gspay ite tray isnt stn tace
irtcematon (AS) rt cons tl set display even when you settne.
Dray, reregster ace infomation (TR), o make sur Ina he datetime
ae sa comecty (2152)
Touch AF or Touch Shutter does nat work
2 Tu AF or Touch Shutter wil nct work youteurhthe edges ote screen
au closer toe enter oft screen
Shooting Movies.
‘The elapsed time shown is incorrect, or recording is interupted.
+ Use ne cameratofomattne memary card, or set a car hat sippads
grspaea recorda, Note hat even te lapsed me play ls ncorest ne
lenginof moves en e memory card coms spands one ach recorang me.
iss, 96,
(@ is dsplayed and shooting stops automaticaly,
©" Ms camer intemal memory ter tiled up as he camera could not record to
te memory cara uy enough. Ty one a ne foung measures
see Camera pertom low-level fm ag ofthe memory card (D154),
Lonertne image quay (SO)
Sent a memory card tat supports highspeed recorang (CD86
Zooming isnot possible,
Zooming not poss im | mode (ss).
{Zooming s nt posse unen shooting modes in ah mode AGO)
‘Subjects look distorted,
Subjects tat pass ion of he camera qui maylook store, sis mata
matuneten
Playback.
Playback is not possible
‘mage of move paytack may nt be possible a computer is used to rename
ies or atertne fade retro Reta Sofware Insti Manual (A168)
‘ordeals ontadersru-ture anale names
Playback stops, or audio skips.
+ Suc toa memary car that yauhave petomedon-eveltomating on with tre
camera (2154),
+ There may be brerimem pions when paying movies copied to memory caras
rat au sow rad speeds
+ When moves ae layed ona computer. rames maybe dospes and audo may
D computer petomance s nase alate
‘Sound's not played during movies
Adjust te volume (IS!) you nave activate [Mute] (2151) ar me sound
ine mode is fat,
+ No sural played tr moves shana AGO) or (EEE) made
because audo sna recorded ntnese modes.
Memory Card
The memory card is not recognized.
+ Restattre camera, inte memory car in 20)
Computer.
Cannot transfer images to a computer
When attempting to ranstr mages tothe computer va acabe, y reaucingthe
‘rater speed asfatons,
ress the [DE] ou to enter Playoack mode. Host MENU buton
‘down a you press the [A and) ators the same time On the nest
Sereen presstne (1 tutors choc [6 and ten press ine ¡cto
Before Use
Basie Guide
1 Camora Basics
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
8 Other Shooting Modos.
4 P mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
Inder
«al
175
WF
(Cannot access the Fi menu by pressing the [A] button
©. The WEF menu isnot avalabe im Snooty mode. Sn Payback mode and
nyagan
+ In Playback mode, he F1 menu canna be accessed cing magi dipl
rind play Such to sing image display and ty again Smlary me
"Fl menu cama be accessed aug group playbak ortitered image cspay
arcerdngto specea condor. Cancel gap a ered imag? playback
+ Tre AFI mera cam be arcessed wr tnecaneralscomertes o aprte,
computer ce TV via a cable. Oscennect the cae
Cannot add a deviceidestnation,
‘Ato of 20 ems ef canton ntormationcan be ade to the camera, Erase
Uaineeded cornastion hfomatontrem te camera Is, and en sig nen
‘evcesaestnations (AS)
+ Use a computer or smarphanetoregster Web series (113).
{odd smartphone tt metal he eccated appeaton CameraWindow on
your smarprone (228),
+ To 200 a computer estinstaa e sware CameraWndon on your computer
Als check you computer and wi endrormert ana setings (RSS, F135)
+ Do notuse the cameranear sources of WF! Sgral itererence, such as
meronave overs, Beto dewes, oF ner equipment operating ante 2
Crta
+ Bang the camera loserto te ner device you re tinto connect (such as
‘ne access pan, and make sure ner reno fects between te deves
Cannot connect tothe access point.
+ Cort mate acces pir channel's setto a channel supported y he
camera (A194) Note at stade ao crame assgrment. Kis advise to
Spechya supported channel manual
Cannot send images.
© The destination device nasinsuient trage space Increase the storage space
nine sestraton device aa resend ne Images
+ Tre nte recto of he memory cara inte destnation cameras setto tre
locked poston. Side te wit-protectta tothe unlocked poston.
+ RAWImages cannatbe set Inf mode, oly the JPEG images are set
However RAM Images can be srt using image Sync
+ Images are net sere to CANON IMAGE GATEWAY or mer Web sente you
move or rename Image es ortoders n ne compra recelve Images Sent
sing mage Sync via an acess poire HS) Before moving or renaming
These mage es or der one compute. make sure Me images rave ready
been sere to CANON MAGE GATEWAY or ner Web semis
Cannot resize images for sending,
"Images cannot be reset be Digger than the resolution set of ir eigal
+ Moves camet be resizes
Images tae a ong time t snd Te wireless comecion s dsnupied
+ Muliple images may take a long time to send, Try resizing the image to (M2 or
(Shores snag US
+ Mens e auto in sea,
1 Gonoture tne conere en souces ofA sgn tere, sanas
iconos ora Suton is one Samer Pr oe 24
Dia nae banger ma ches lo sl cb ibe
Spa
. indie camer couertote one anice you rito cames unas
A 0 DANSE
‘Want to erase Wi-Fi connection information before disposing of the
camera or gvingit to someone else,
Rese te WHF setos (ESO)
Before Use
Basie Guide
1 Camora Basics
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
8 Other Shooting Modos.
4 P mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
Inder
«ba
176
(Cannot access the Fi menu by pressing the [A] button
©. The WEF menu isnot avalabe im Snooty mode. Sn Payback mode and
nyagan
+ In Playback mode, he F1 menu canna be accessed cing magi dipl
rind play Such to sing image display and ty again Smlary me
"Fl menu cama be accessed aug group playbak ortitered image cspay
arcerdngto specea condor. Cancel gap a ered imag? playback
+ Tre AFI mera cam be arcessed wr tnecaneralscomertes o aprte,
computer ce TV via a cable. Oscennect the cae
Cannot add a deviceidestnation,
‘Ato of 20 ems ef canton ntormationcan be ade to the camera, Erase
Uaineeded cornastion hfomatontrem te camera Is, and en sig nen
‘evcesaestnations (AS)
+ Use a computer or smarphanetoregster Web series (113).
{odd smartphone tt metal he eccated appeaton CameraWindow on
your smarprone (228),
+ To 200 a computer estinstaa e sware CameraWndon on your computer
Als check you computer and wi endrormert ana setings (RSS, F135)
+ Do notuse the cameranear sources of WF! Sgral itererence, such as
meronave overs, Beto dewes, oF ner equipment operating ante 2
Crta
+ Bang the camera loserto te ner device you re tinto connect (such as
‘ne access pan, and make sure ner reno fects between te deves
Cannot connect tothe access point.
+ Cort mate acces pir channel's setto a channel supported y he
camera (A194) Note at stade ao crame assgrment. Kis advise to
Spechya supported channel manual
Cannot send images.
© The destination device nasinsuient trage space Increase the storage space
nine sestraton device aa resend ne Images
+ Tre nte recto of he memory cara inte destnation cameras setto tre
locked poston. Side te wit-protectta tothe unlocked poston.
+ RAWImages cannatbe set Inf mode, oly the JPEG images are set
However RAM Images can be srt using image Sync
+ Images are net sere to CANON IMAGE GATEWAY or mer Web sente you
move or rename Image es ortoders n ne compra recelve Images Sent
sing mage Sync via an acess poire HS) Before moving or renaming
These mage es or der one compute. make sure Me images rave ready
been sere to CANON MAGE GATEWAY or ner Web semis
Cannot resize images for sending,
"Images cannot be reset be Digger than the resolution set of ir eigal
+ Moves camet be resizes
Images tae a ong time t snd Te wireless comecion s dsnupied
+ Muliple images may take a long time to send, Try resizing the image to (M2 or
(Shores snag US
+ Mens e auto in sea,
1 Gonoture tne conere en souces ofA sgn tere, sanas
iconos ora Suton is one Samer Pr oe 24
Dia nae banger ma ches lo sl cb ibe
Spa
. indie camer couertote one anice you rito cames unas
A 0 DANSE
‘Want to erase Wi-Fi connection information before disposing of the
camera or gvingit to someone else,
Rese te WHF setos (ESO)
Before Use
Basie Guide
1 Camora Basics
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
8 Other Shooting Modos.
4 P mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
Inder
«ba
176
On-Screen
If an error message is displayed, respond as folows.
Capture or Playback
No memory card
‘The memory card may be inserted acing te wrong way. Rensertine memory
(ara acia e corect way (N)
Memory card locked
‘The Mt recta o he memory cards setto he locked pasion, Swen the
ape ao te uta posten (49)
(Cannot record!
© Shodting was atempes without a memory cardinthe camera, To shoo, inserta
memory caafacng the correct way (18)
Memory card error (2214)
+ ine same ear messages played even ater you ae fomated a
supported memory card (ER) and have inserte Racing fe crest way
AS) corta a Canon Customer Support ep Desk
Insufficient space on card
‘Thee isnt enaugh Ree space onthe memarycarato ac SA ASA,
1217s, s9) or estimages (D120) ether erase unneeded images
AAA HE or sert a memory cara win enough free space (ES),
Touch AF unavailable
+ Tu AF isnot avalible inthe cure shacting mode (FD).
Touch AF canceled
the subject select for Tau AF can no longer be detected (ED).
‘Charge the battery (£2119)
No mage.
+ Tre memory car does nt cortan any images tnt can D cspaye
Protected! (21114)
Unidentfied ImagelIncompatble JPEGIImage too large {Cannot play back
MOVICannot play back MP4
+ Unsupported or cot mages camote dsaye,
©. Rmayna be possible 1 display mages tna were este ar renamed ona
(Camper, or mages snotwin ander camera
Cannot megniy/Cannot play back his content in Smart ShufleiCannot
Fotate/Cennot modi image/Cannot modtyiCannk assign to category!
Unselectatl image ¡No identification information
«Thefalowingturtons may e unavalable tor images tr were renamed or
read) edtes an a computer, o mages shot win anther camera. Note at
tarea () Un:tons are not avatate for movies,
Eat 0 tor (ANI) Magny (112) Smart Srume” (D119), Rotates
117), Favors (Avie), Ea (120) Por Us (6). am
Photobook Setup (171),
Invalid selection range
* When spectying a ange torimage section (115,17. (170) you
temple o choose an eal mage nat was ar ie nal inane rMeewersa.
Excpoded stein ime
‘More tan 998 Images were secte for Prt ust (TRIE) or Protobook Setup
RI) Choose 988 mages or ess
+ PintList D168) arPhobook Setup (D171) setings cou atve saved
Corey Reauce te number o selected mages and ty
+ Youattemptegte morse more tran 600 mages in rates ED), Erase
(DING), Favores (118), Pont Uist GS), or Prottock Setup (171),
Naming error
+ me older cous not be reste o images couldnt be recorded, because ne
gres supported tales number (98) or tring images on tre car as been
reached and te highest supported Image number (3999) or images infalders
hasbeen reached. One (It, change [Fl Numbenng] to o Reset)
ISS) orfama te memory cra (A158),
Lens Error
ins emormay eur lens heu is mown, orwnen te camerais
usegin dst or sandy locations
+ Frequertasplay cs error message may indice camera damage. nis
(ase, contacta Canon Customer Support Help Desk
Betore Use
Basie Guide
1 Camora Basics
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
8 Other Shooting Modos.
4 P mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
Inder
«ba
177
If an error message is displayed, respond as folows.
Capture or Playback
No memory card
‘The memory card may be inserted acing te wrong way. Rensertine memory
(ara acia e corect way (N)
Memory card locked
‘The Mt recta o he memory cards setto he locked pasion, Swen the
ape ao te uta posten (49)
(Cannot record!
© Shodting was atempes without a memory cardinthe camera, To shoo, inserta
memory caafacng the correct way (18)
Memory card error (2214)
+ ine same ear messages played even ater you ae fomated a
supported memory card (ER) and have inserte Racing fe crest way
AS) corta a Canon Customer Support ep Desk
Insufficient space on card
‘Thee isnt enaugh Ree space onthe memarycarato ac SA ASA,
1217s, s9) or estimages (D120) ether erase unneeded images
AAA HE or sert a memory cara win enough free space (ES),
Touch AF unavailable
+ Tu AF isnot avalible inthe cure shacting mode (FD).
Touch AF canceled
the subject select for Tau AF can no longer be detected (ED).
‘Charge the battery (£2119)
No mage.
+ Tre memory car does nt cortan any images tnt can D cspaye
Protected! (21114)
Unidentfied ImagelIncompatble JPEGIImage too large {Cannot play back
MOVICannot play back MP4
+ Unsupported or cot mages camote dsaye,
©. Rmayna be possible 1 display mages tna were este ar renamed ona
(Camper, or mages snotwin ander camera
Cannot megniy/Cannot play back his content in Smart ShufleiCannot
Fotate/Cennot modi image/Cannot modtyiCannk assign to category!
Unselectatl image ¡No identification information
«Thefalowingturtons may e unavalable tor images tr were renamed or
read) edtes an a computer, o mages shot win anther camera. Note at
tarea () Un:tons are not avatate for movies,
Eat 0 tor (ANI) Magny (112) Smart Srume” (D119), Rotates
117), Favors (Avie), Ea (120) Por Us (6). am
Photobook Setup (171),
Invalid selection range
* When spectying a ange torimage section (115,17. (170) you
temple o choose an eal mage nat was ar ie nal inane rMeewersa.
Excpoded stein ime
‘More tan 998 Images were secte for Prt ust (TRIE) or Protobook Setup
RI) Choose 988 mages or ess
+ PintList D168) arPhobook Setup (D171) setings cou atve saved
Corey Reauce te number o selected mages and ty
+ Youattemptegte morse more tran 600 mages in rates ED), Erase
(DING), Favores (118), Pont Uist GS), or Prottock Setup (171),
Naming error
+ me older cous not be reste o images couldnt be recorded, because ne
gres supported tales number (98) or tring images on tre car as been
reached and te highest supported Image number (3999) or images infalders
hasbeen reached. One (It, change [Fl Numbenng] to o Reset)
ISS) orfama te memory cra (A158),
Lens Error
ins emormay eur lens heu is mown, orwnen te camerais
usegin dst or sandy locations
+ Frequertasplay cs error message may indice camera damage. nis
(ase, contacta Canon Customer Support Help Desk
Betore Use
Basie Guide
1 Camora Basics
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
8 Other Shooting Modos.
4 P mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
Inder
«ba
177
Acamera error was detected (error number)
Sins err message is apps mme ater asha ine mage may ok
have been saved Sitch to Playback mode to checkfor the Image
+ Frequent alslay otis enor message mayIndcate camera samage.n this
ase, nte down the err number (Exe) nd corta a Canon Customer Support
Help Desk
File Error
+ Comet ping (216) may note posse for photos tram other cameras e
Images Eat hate been atered sing comer sofware, even fire camera 5
connected tothe pater.
Print error
= Check he paper sae seting (2169) ts eror messages alsplayeawhen
the seting is comet restart te rirter and complete the seing on the camera
agan
Ink absorber full
Contact a Canon Customer Suppart HelpDesk to request assistance with nk
sosnberreplacemert.
Wei
Connection faled
© No acess ports were recognized. Checkthe access port stings (2135),
© AG coud ot beans. Tumtne camera a and on agan, angreiytne
comnecton
+ Check me aevce you wat to connectto and make sure read or comectin,
‘Cannot determine access point
© The WS butons on mumeraus access pons wee pressed smuaneausy. Ty
recomectg agan
No access points found
Check to male sre tat the access ports tres.
© Wen comecingto an access pore marualy. make sue tat yauertereatne
coneet $50.
Incorrect passwordiincorrect Wi-Fi securly settings
‘Check he access pont secunty setngs (D135).
IP address confict
+ Reset te IP afress so ttt doesnot conte wth acter.
OsconnectedRecsvingfaledSending aled
“ou may bein an enurenmert where WAI signa are ete
© Aveigusing the camera's WF funtion and mictomave vers, Bluetooth
‘vices, and other devices that operate on te 24 Gz band
«Bangin camera doserto te omer dee you ae Ang Comet suchas
(he access pot), and male sure hare are m objet Deweente devices.
+ Check te comeste deuce to make sure Als ra experiencing errs,
Sending failed
Memory card error
‘lhe same ero message is play even when yau have insted aformated
memory cardfacn ne cotect way, ortat a Canon Customer Suppo Help
Desk
Receiving failed
Insuficient space on card
There not enoughtre space on re memo canine target camerato
recetve mages. Erase Images to create space onthe memory card, orinse à
memory Car Su space
Receiving failed
Memory cardlocked
‘The wie prctecttab of he memory carne camera to receive the Images is
eto me locked poston Side the nte rec 1b to Me urtocked postion
Receiving failed
Naming error!
"Went highest alder number (869), and te highest image number (9988)
have been reached onthe recen camera, images cannot be received
Insufficient space on server
+ Delete unnecessary mages upcadedto CANON MAGE GATEWAY to create
space
+ Savetheimages set va image Syn: (Fs) t your computer
Check network settings
‘Check to make sure your computer can connec tothe Internet win the eurent
two stings
Before Use
Basie
Guide
1 Camora Basics
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
8 Other Shooting Modos.
4 P mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
Inder
«ba
178
Sins err message is apps mme ater asha ine mage may ok
have been saved Sitch to Playback mode to checkfor the Image
+ Frequent alslay otis enor message mayIndcate camera samage.n this
ase, nte down the err number (Exe) nd corta a Canon Customer Support
Help Desk
File Error
+ Comet ping (216) may note posse for photos tram other cameras e
Images Eat hate been atered sing comer sofware, even fire camera 5
connected tothe pater.
Print error
= Check he paper sae seting (2169) ts eror messages alsplayeawhen
the seting is comet restart te rirter and complete the seing on the camera
agan
Ink absorber full
Contact a Canon Customer Suppart HelpDesk to request assistance with nk
sosnberreplacemert.
Wei
Connection faled
© No acess ports were recognized. Checkthe access port stings (2135),
© AG coud ot beans. Tumtne camera a and on agan, angreiytne
comnecton
+ Check me aevce you wat to connectto and make sure read or comectin,
‘Cannot determine access point
© The WS butons on mumeraus access pons wee pressed smuaneausy. Ty
recomectg agan
No access points found
Check to male sre tat the access ports tres.
© Wen comecingto an access pore marualy. make sue tat yauertereatne
coneet $50.
Incorrect passwordiincorrect Wi-Fi securly settings
‘Check he access pont secunty setngs (D135).
IP address confict
+ Reset te IP afress so ttt doesnot conte wth acter.
OsconnectedRecsvingfaledSending aled
“ou may bein an enurenmert where WAI signa are ete
© Aveigusing the camera's WF funtion and mictomave vers, Bluetooth
‘vices, and other devices that operate on te 24 Gz band
«Bangin camera doserto te omer dee you ae Ang Comet suchas
(he access pot), and male sure hare are m objet Deweente devices.
+ Check te comeste deuce to make sure Als ra experiencing errs,
Sending failed
Memory card error
‘lhe same ero message is play even when yau have insted aformated
memory cardfacn ne cotect way, ortat a Canon Customer Suppo Help
Desk
Receiving failed
Insuficient space on card
There not enoughtre space on re memo canine target camerato
recetve mages. Erase Images to create space onthe memory card, orinse à
memory Car Su space
Receiving failed
Memory cardlocked
‘The wie prctecttab of he memory carne camera to receive the Images is
eto me locked poston Side the nte rec 1b to Me urtocked postion
Receiving failed
Naming error!
"Went highest alder number (869), and te highest image number (9988)
have been reached onthe recen camera, images cannot be received
Insufficient space on server
+ Delete unnecessary mages upcadedto CANON MAGE GATEWAY to create
space
+ Savetheimages set va image Syn: (Fs) t your computer
Check network settings
‘Check to make sure your computer can connec tothe Internet win the eurent
two stings
Before Use
Basie
Guide
1 Camora Basics
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
8 Other Shooting Modos.
4 P mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
Inder
«ba
178
Haies es
Shooting (Information Display) (22) OR carection Mr) (82) Comer shake warring (187)
A —
en
mn mare Ce nennen 1 Oman
e (28) Wing En Wer
(28), Aperture vals FREI) (87) Exposure level (Aga) 2 Hyond Auto Mode
= es
> en
41) Shooting mode (AIB1).Scene (10) Seittimer et) = [Sufficient charge 7 Wei Functions:
¡con 38) (1) 18 mose con (Aso) = [Signty depleted, but sufficient
€) Flasnmoae Res) (12) Battery evel 62172) atmingres, Near depieted-charge the bateny 8 Soting Menu
(9) Flash exposure compensaton/Flash (13). sul image compression (ASt) Jack Soon
ees os PT TE D porros
(4) Metering meinos (2274). (14) Recordable shots tes)"
(5) ND fier (Are) a em)
(16) Digealz00m magntcaton
en (aan, Da comener tno
‘bracketing (82) cana
D trea ire weary 7) Reng tne ia
amp correction (22449) (18) Histogram (221105)
ai terco er (19) Foewingrnge ASE |
© My Cors ce cnrs 4/9
© Ecomose (Musa,
179
Shooting (Information Display) (22) OR carection Mr) (82) Comer shake warring (187)
A —
en
mn mare Ce nennen 1 Oman
e (28) Wing En Wer
(28), Aperture vals FREI) (87) Exposure level (Aga) 2 Hyond Auto Mode
= es
> en
41) Shooting mode (AIB1).Scene (10) Seittimer et) = [Sufficient charge 7 Wei Functions:
¡con 38) (1) 18 mose con (Aso) = [Signty depleted, but sufficient
€) Flasnmoae Res) (12) Battery evel 62172) atmingres, Near depieted-charge the bateny 8 Soting Menu
(9) Flash exposure compensaton/Flash (13). sul image compression (ASt) Jack Soon
ees os PT TE D porros
(4) Metering meinos (2274). (14) Recordable shots tes)"
(5) ND fier (Are) a em)
(16) Digealz00m magntcaton
en (aan, Da comener tno
‘bracketing (82) cana
D trea ire weary 7) Reng tne ia
amp correction (22449) (18) Histogram (221105)
ai terco er (19) Foewingrnge ASE |
© My Cors ce cnrs 4/9
© Ecomose (Musa,
179
™ Playback (Detailed Information Display) A Ec OBERE Bere Uso
(ae man es Moses Pac ome Fine)
R fit Dos moves an
za 99, RAW EDs nes 2 Bare ue
(ANS) ANOS Kon)
=
Wars
armen, 1 Camera Basics
a uvas
uy] >) accessed as described in "Viewing (11103). TE
41) Moses (3 501109) (16) 180 5pesa Os) o adust the volume At a volume of 0, [ef is displayed.
= RES
Images (18) Flash (88), Flash exposure Ll li
e a memes oi -
(a) one ie ULF (653 Weds tours Care) IP [buttons or tum the (@] dal. No sound's played) (SEES
(5) WEFi signal strength (A144) (20) White balance correction (1157), ‘Skip Backward" or Previous Clip (1126) (To continue skipping "
pen que wa muenencn gun CEA 7 mn non
Lee ce Ea ME =D AL [Previous Frame (Forfast-revind, keep holding down the (8) vuton sane
py Faros Fon re py | S80 Fonard or Nex Cip (2126) To continue sipping 9 Accessories
©) Protection Ana) es . mer (00178) en forward, keep holding down the (@) button.)
ss) (25) High SONR (76) # ip (splay a (126)
(11) Shooting date/tme (A20) (26) OR correction (277) ENE) Index
(13) Shutter speed (093, Miss) (28) Image quality / Frame rate printer (A166).
coe Q ~ weg move pack you can ship tack arte roue Pil dps]
previous ornext ip) by pressing the (41) buen.
180
(ae man es Moses Pac ome Fine)
R fit Dos moves an
za 99, RAW EDs nes 2 Bare ue
(ANS) ANOS Kon)
=
Wars
armen, 1 Camera Basics
a uvas
uy] >) accessed as described in "Viewing (11103). TE
41) Moses (3 501109) (16) 180 5pesa Os) o adust the volume At a volume of 0, [ef is displayed.
= RES
Images (18) Flash (88), Flash exposure Ll li
e a memes oi -
(a) one ie ULF (653 Weds tours Care) IP [buttons or tum the (@] dal. No sound's played) (SEES
(5) WEFi signal strength (A144) (20) White balance correction (1157), ‘Skip Backward" or Previous Clip (1126) (To continue skipping "
pen que wa muenencn gun CEA 7 mn non
Lee ce Ea ME =D AL [Previous Frame (Forfast-revind, keep holding down the (8) vuton sane
py Faros Fon re py | S80 Fonard or Nex Cip (2126) To continue sipping 9 Accessories
©) Protection Ana) es . mer (00178) en forward, keep holding down the (@) button.)
ss) (25) High SONR (76) # ip (splay a (126)
(11) Shooting date/tme (A20) (26) OR correction (277) ENE) Index
(13) Shutter speed (093, Miss) (28) Image quality / Frame rate printer (A166).
coe Q ~ weg move pack you can ship tack arte roue Pil dps]
previous ornext ip) by pressing the (41) buen.
180
Func: nd Menu Tables
ions
™ Functions Available in Each Shooting Mode
Avaïale or automaticaly setfunctions are indicated by black icons, such as C
Unavailable functions ae indicated by gray icons, such as C.
Exposure Compensation (274)
CML Ay! Ty Pas AUT TT
SANA aa,
ITA
Drive Mode (£187)
[=]
CM Av/ Ty /P/ 88 AUTO! 0/23/82 / BY
Ba eo eee a Oe Ra ae
a
C/M/Av/Tv/P 1% AUTO!
RETURN
=
CM Av/ Tu /P/ m AUTO! ODIA
BRIE RB PT EE Ur ET 2
Cu
GM TU O SS
Ce de LS Ur IE 2
CoM Ay Tv PIB AUTO ODE II
ISS Y @ 2
LAY Ty PI 0 AUTO OEI E
AID
IV AY TV/P I ERS / AUTO® Où 9122 101) BD)
E ARAS Y
> /M/AY/ Tu/P/é8/ AUTO ODE CDR
AEREAS Y LI
Compensation (C189)
> MVA Ty Pt AU
ae
IE IRIS
LL
°C) MUAY TP 28/4 on enon: TN
CAR volt 412111
ETA
CM Av!Tv/P/88/ AUTO / O1
n
TEN
rien
1-1
¡DE
TEO IEA war
¡Je TAS
Shutter Speed
EM 'Ay/ TV/P/@®/ AUTO OBER
IR BD! COB E
Betore Use
Basie Guide
1 Camora Basics
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
8 Other Shooting Modos.
4 P mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
«ba
181
ions
™ Functions Available in Each Shooting Mode
Avaïale or automaticaly setfunctions are indicated by black icons, such as C
Unavailable functions ae indicated by gray icons, such as C.
Exposure Compensation (274)
CML Ay! Ty Pas AUT TT
SANA aa,
ITA
Drive Mode (£187)
[=]
CM Av/ Ty /P/ 88 AUTO! 0/23/82 / BY
Ba eo eee a Oe Ra ae
a
C/M/Av/Tv/P 1% AUTO!
RETURN
=
CM Av/ Tu /P/ m AUTO! ODIA
BRIE RB PT EE Ur ET 2
Cu
GM TU O SS
Ce de LS Ur IE 2
CoM Ay Tv PIB AUTO ODE II
ISS Y @ 2
LAY Ty PI 0 AUTO OEI E
AID
IV AY TV/P I ERS / AUTO® Où 9122 101) BD)
E ARAS Y
> /M/AY/ Tu/P/é8/ AUTO ODE CDR
AEREAS Y LI
Compensation (C189)
> MVA Ty Pt AU
ae
IE IRIS
LL
°C) MUAY TP 28/4 on enon: TN
CAR volt 412111
ETA
CM Av!Tv/P/88/ AUTO / O1
n
TEN
rien
1-1
¡DE
TEO IEA war
¡Je TAS
Shutter Speed
EM 'Ay/ TV/P/@®/ AUTO OBER
IR BD! COB E
Betore Use
Basie Guide
1 Camora Basics
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
8 Other Shooting Modos.
4 P mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
«ba
181
it (074)
CM Av! Tv /P/ a AUTO! Ons 1
ee OE Pon
ee en
aa
1171, £2174, 2189)
CMe Av! TW P/E /AUTO/ OD
INDIA
EJES
ST: 127
aaa
ck (during recording)Exposure Compensation (LIS9)"e
CO MI Ay! TV Pr AUTO LIE
BAER
LE
Cn Mi Av Tv! PIE AUTO/ ON O/B.
BE 4 ES Os 2a a
Rh
A
C'/M/Av/Tv/P/ de AUTO OD IIA
Ras eve ara
x
CUM) Av! Tv PI AUTO On O22
A a LEP Mole Ur TE
m
CE
(CIM! Av! Tv /P/ 8 / AUTO OB EIER
TEA SE R80) THE IE EN 20
CRE
MF
CUM Ay TP IIS
LE CS Re 0 40/62/22
Before Use
Basie
Guide
GMA Ty Pr AUTO ET TT
m'4«/8 ASS Y TEN 72
CM Ay/Ty/P/ 8 AUTO! BRIET 7
Bs a I TE TL: IL!
RES
ET SEN
A
Face Select (185)
CMA! Ty Pa AUTO! ODA
SID Ra ae
BITTEN LA CBI
UAEM 0 2 O8 Ur ET 2
LILI
os en ses sng ose
Bis ML x or
Notavalatie, bi suceso [$ li some cases
FE lock rat valable n (ash mode.
WIR sO auto select
5. When IAL! Is assignedto te Rutten or move buton 99.
7. Cniywhen MIF sectes
3 On avalabe when aces ae detecte.
"3 Onyın manual focus mode
1 Camora Basics
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
8 Other Shooting Modos.
4 P mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
Inder
«ba
182
CM Av! Tv /P/ a AUTO! Ons 1
ee OE Pon
ee en
aa
1171, £2174, 2189)
CMe Av! TW P/E /AUTO/ OD
INDIA
EJES
ST: 127
aaa
ck (during recording)Exposure Compensation (LIS9)"e
CO MI Ay! TV Pr AUTO LIE
BAER
LE
Cn Mi Av Tv! PIE AUTO/ ON O/B.
BE 4 ES Os 2a a
Rh
A
C'/M/Av/Tv/P/ de AUTO OD IIA
Ras eve ara
x
CUM) Av! Tv PI AUTO On O22
A a LEP Mole Ur TE
m
CE
(CIM! Av! Tv /P/ 8 / AUTO OB EIER
TEA SE R80) THE IE EN 20
CRE
MF
CUM Ay TP IIS
LE CS Re 0 40/62/22
Before Use
Basie
Guide
GMA Ty Pr AUTO ET TT
m'4«/8 ASS Y TEN 72
CM Ay/Ty/P/ 8 AUTO! BRIET 7
Bs a I TE TL: IL!
RES
ET SEN
A
Face Select (185)
CMA! Ty Pa AUTO! ODA
SID Ra ae
BITTEN LA CBI
UAEM 0 2 O8 Ur ET 2
LILI
os en ses sng ose
Bis ML x or
Notavalatie, bi suceso [$ li some cases
FE lock rat valable n (ash mode.
WIR sO auto select
5. When IAL! Is assignedto te Rutten or move buton 99.
7. Cniywhen MIF sectes
3 On avalabe when aces ae detecte.
"3 Onyın manual focus mode
1 Camora Basics
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
8 Other Shooting Modos.
4 P mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
Inder
«ba
182
® FUNC. Menu
e
CO MU Ay! Ty IP ALTO LI
IS Ur ETC ES
a
C'/M/Ay/Tv/P/d%/AUTO
TES
JETA
OUBLIE BL
fore ren
Ay! Ty/P ii AUTON On BIE 03
ISS
ITA
CTI
PEL
CM Ay! Ty Pe /AUTO/ OLA
CAR ET ILE TON ee ELA
ET
USDA
PEUT
CM Av/ Ty /P AUTO ODIA
aoe 2/0 @
125- 12300
are
C'/M/Av! Ty/P dB AUTO HIRTEN
UT TE IE Ur ET 1]
Ne
CoM Ay Ty /P 8) AUTO! WIRT
CAR LEP eon 07 1 2
CITAS
E]
CUM/Av/TV PIANO ODIA
MEE OU ET
LIL TRI
+
IS
SETA
AMAS EY
«
C MAY Ty Pa UN!
ALESANCO a
CPE
3/8
CM Ay Ty! Pe AUTO! LIA
ISI SIERO Vol eur en
LE
whit rection (LH
CUM Av/ Ty PI EB AUTO! ODE ESA
DUDES Bole Ur et
LOTS
Before Use
Basie
Guide
1 Camora Basics
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
8 Other Shooting Modos.
4 P mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
«ba
183
e
CO MU Ay! Ty IP ALTO LI
IS Ur ETC ES
a
C'/M/Ay/Tv/P/d%/AUTO
TES
JETA
OUBLIE BL
fore ren
Ay! Ty/P ii AUTON On BIE 03
ISS
ITA
CTI
PEL
CM Ay! Ty Pe /AUTO/ OLA
CAR ET ILE TON ee ELA
ET
USDA
PEUT
CM Av/ Ty /P AUTO ODIA
aoe 2/0 @
125- 12300
are
C'/M/Av! Ty/P dB AUTO HIRTEN
UT TE IE Ur ET 1]
Ne
CoM Ay Ty /P 8) AUTO! WIRT
CAR LEP eon 07 1 2
CITAS
E]
CUM/Av/TV PIANO ODIA
MEE OU ET
LIL TRI
+
IS
SETA
AMAS EY
«
C MAY Ty Pa UN!
ALESANCO a
CPE
3/8
CM Ay Ty! Pe AUTO! LIA
ISI SIERO Vol eur en
LE
whit rection (LH
CUM Av/ Ty PI EB AUTO! ODE ESA
DUDES Bole Ur et
LOTS
Before Use
Basie
Guide
1 Camora Basics
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
8 Other Shooting Modos.
4 P mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
«ba
183
C/M/AVITV/P 88 AUTO! OY DEIS
Clk Be LEE TOI EU IE I]
D
| CMY Avi Tv/P/</ AUTO SWR,
BF 4 8B es)
er
lors (180)
&
CoM Ay) Ty PI AUTO LISA
ee SL LE TES 2/4/2
My
By! En Ba? But? | Be À / 8p/ 88/86/89 180"
CM Av! Tv/P rm AUTO On BI
BEI
EJE
Bracketing (2176, Kiez)
C7
CUM Ay/Ty/P.
Bra
Re
a
C'/M/Av/Tv/P/d*/AUTO/O1/D/
TN
E
AUTO! Oy) E/E
1909/0/0/6/2/40/2/P/
TT
ISS
5
CUM Av! Ty PIB AUTO! OUI BLIEB
CIS O TE
UP ET
a
C/M/Av/Tv/P/%/AUTO/O0/D/ TR
ANR RP Monk Ur EI
JAS
vea
C'/M/Av/Tv/P/d%/AUTO/ Or BR
eR 8 BUS 0 ol a el
kJ JE,
Ema
CMAN Ty O Ra
Cee IDA ve Ur ee
CPE
Shase
SA Ty Be AUTO 0
a
BB
ars EDDIE 242 12
otring Method (2174)
@
CM) Ay! Ty /P/@8/ AUTO On) VW RR
Sa te Reo aie aia ale!
ca
IAS TA
DIAS DIO
CT
Before Use
Basie
Guide
1 Camora Basics
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
8 Other Shooting Modos.
4 P mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
Inder
«ba
184
Clk Be LEE TOI EU IE I]
D
| CMY Avi Tv/P/</ AUTO SWR,
BF 4 8B es)
er
lors (180)
&
CoM Ay) Ty PI AUTO LISA
ee SL LE TES 2/4/2
My
By! En Ba? But? | Be À / 8p/ 88/86/89 180"
CM Av! Tv/P rm AUTO On BI
BEI
EJE
Bracketing (2176, Kiez)
C7
CUM Ay/Ty/P.
Bra
Re
a
C'/M/Av/Tv/P/d*/AUTO/O1/D/
TN
E
AUTO! Oy) E/E
1909/0/0/6/2/40/2/P/
TT
ISS
5
CUM Av! Ty PIB AUTO! OUI BLIEB
CIS O TE
UP ET
a
C/M/Av/Tv/P/%/AUTO/O0/D/ TR
ANR RP Monk Ur EI
JAS
vea
C'/M/Av/Tv/P/d%/AUTO/ Or BR
eR 8 BUS 0 ol a el
kJ JE,
Ema
CMAN Ty O Ra
Cee IDA ve Ur ee
CPE
Shase
SA Ty Be AUTO 0
a
BB
ars EDDIE 242 12
otring Method (2174)
@
CM) Ay! Ty /P/@8/ AUTO On) VW RR
Sa te Reo aie aia ale!
ca
IAS TA
DIAS DIO
CT
Before Use
Basie
Guide
1 Camora Basics
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
8 Other Shooting Modos.
4 P mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
Inder
«ba
184
Tv/Pı®
PA
C'/M/Av! Ty Pd AUTO! ODER
III II
TY
DIARIA are
PE
AV! TV/P AUTO:
Ne at RB
CM Ay/Ty/P a / AUTO!
UTA
Av Ty/P st
8 EUR
C'/M/Ay/Ty/P/ Em AUTO!
ISI PIO De
a
©. AV! Tv/P/ a) AUTO! ODIA
® EUr ET) 23
AI DIO
a
CoM Ay! Ty /P/@8 AUTO! RER,
IIA OI D TZ
Er]
C'/M/Ay/Tv/P/d8/AUTO/ BER,
II IAS Or ed
A
i)
Betore Use
Basie Guide
1 Camora Basics
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
8 Other Shooting Modos.
4 P mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
PA
C'/M/Av! Ty Pd AUTO! ODER
III II
TY
DIARIA are
PE
AV! TV/P AUTO:
Ne at RB
CM Ay/Ty/P a / AUTO!
UTA
Av Ty/P st
8 EUR
C'/M/Ay/Ty/P/ Em AUTO!
ISI PIO De
a
©. AV! Tv/P/ a) AUTO! ODIA
® EUr ET) 23
AI DIO
a
CoM Ay! Ty /P/@8 AUTO! RER,
IIA OI D TZ
Er]
C'/M/Ay/Tv/P/d8/AUTO/ BER,
II IAS Or ed
A
i)
Betore Use
Basie Guide
1 Camora Basics
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
8 Other Shooting Modos.
4 P mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
11. Optons vay depending onthe assigne shosting mode
2, Advanced stings na avalaie
3. Vite balance talle
“4. Setinarange o 1-8 COMaSL shapness, color suraton re, green, blue
‘na sun one
"5. Camatte sett 0 seconds in moses wihout selection ef he number sols
5 One shat (cannot be modted) inmates wir schen of te rumber of shits
*7Synetronaes win tne aspect rato sing and Is automatica se (61),
"Shooting Tab
Face AAP?
CM) Ty Pet SES Y
ne TD Oi ELU
CPE
point
CUM: Ay Ty Pe AUTO) Oy)
BEER
EJEA
AF Framo Sizo (84)
Normal
C MI Ay TIP IAS
le Y Y
TAS
Small
CM AY Ty HET
PEDIDO! DIE)
Ed
Digital Zoom (£2140)
Standard
A AUTO.
E ERB
CPE
EAS
aan:
or
C' /M/ Av/ Ty/P/ a8 AUTO/ RER!
Ce a Pot D Ur el
Rs
aes
CHM Ay! Ty 88 AUTO (Oy 121 3/2
IAE AA USES a
ER
er
CM) Av! Tv/P/ a9 AUTO / IB EI
IS SS @ IR
oe
GMA, Ty O SA
IA 2 LI
on
CMI Ay! Ty!P 1 AUTO!
RR O
EP
of
C' /M/Av'/Tv/P/@®/ AUTO"
BIER
LIL D
on
C'/M/Av! T/P/é8/AUTO/Oÿ/®/ WIM,
le ete ES a @
TS
Betore Use
Basie
Guide
1 Camora Basics
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
8 Other Shooting Modos.
4 P mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
Inder
«ba
186
2, Advanced stings na avalaie
3. Vite balance talle
“4. Setinarange o 1-8 COMaSL shapness, color suraton re, green, blue
‘na sun one
"5. Camatte sett 0 seconds in moses wihout selection ef he number sols
5 One shat (cannot be modted) inmates wir schen of te rumber of shits
*7Synetronaes win tne aspect rato sing and Is automatica se (61),
"Shooting Tab
Face AAP?
CM) Ty Pet SES Y
ne TD Oi ELU
CPE
point
CUM: Ay Ty Pe AUTO) Oy)
BEER
EJEA
AF Framo Sizo (84)
Normal
C MI Ay TIP IAS
le Y Y
TAS
Small
CM AY Ty HET
PEDIDO! DIE)
Ed
Digital Zoom (£2140)
Standard
A AUTO.
E ERB
CPE
EAS
aan:
or
C' /M/ Av/ Ty/P/ a8 AUTO/ RER!
Ce a Pot D Ur el
Rs
aes
CHM Ay! Ty 88 AUTO (Oy 121 3/2
IAE AA USES a
ER
er
CM) Av! Tv/P/ a9 AUTO / IB EI
IS SS @ IR
oe
GMA, Ty O SA
IA 2 LI
on
CMI Ay! Ty!P 1 AUTO!
RR O
EP
of
C' /M/Av'/Tv/P/@®/ AUTO"
BIER
LIL D
on
C'/M/Av! T/P/é8/AUTO/Oÿ/®/ WIM,
le ete ES a @
TS
Betore Use
Basie
Guide
1 Camora Basics
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
8 Other Shooting Modos.
4 P mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
Inder
«ba
186
of
CM Ay Ty Pc SIR!
El UTE
Av! TV IP IATA
IMSS
re
of
CUM) Av) Ty /P ran AUTOR EIER
ea en TS Ur EU
LE
on
CM. Av! Ty Pd AUTO! 00 SAT el
O O IS ole 07 LU 2
E
on
CM. Ay! Ty Pd / AUTO! na VW
sa 3140/8/2/4/2F
En
EL
Safety MF (£1181)
on
Ty Pe AUTOS BB
CIA ASS
LL
or
C'/M/Ay/Tv/P/ 48 AUTO! IB ER,
PL Paar
MF Peaking Settings (1182)
Peaking
omo
CUM Ay! Ty PU AUTO Cu
A CE
Leal
LowtHigh
Y
INIA
Le Oa Oe. aan
RE
RediVellowBlue
CM Ay! Ty! am AUTO Ou
IA BD OD!
TS
Betore Use
Basic Guido
1 Camera Basics,
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
8 Other Shooting Modos.
4 P mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
CM Ay Ty Pc SIR!
El UTE
Av! TV IP IATA
IMSS
re
of
CUM) Av) Ty /P ran AUTOR EIER
ea en TS Ur EU
LE
on
CM. Av! Ty Pd AUTO! 00 SAT el
O O IS ole 07 LU 2
E
on
CM. Ay! Ty Pd / AUTO! na VW
sa 3140/8/2/4/2F
En
EL
Safety MF (£1181)
on
Ty Pe AUTOS BB
CIA ASS
LL
or
C'/M/Ay/Tv/P/ 48 AUTO! IB ER,
PL Paar
MF Peaking Settings (1182)
Peaking
omo
CUM Ay! Ty PU AUTO Cu
A CE
Leal
LowtHigh
Y
INIA
Le Oa Oe. aan
RE
RediVellowBlue
CM Ay! Ty! am AUTO Ou
IA BD OD!
TS
Betore Use
Basic Guido
1 Camera Basics,
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
8 Other Shooting Modos.
4 P mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
CoM Ay! Ty /P 8) AUTO! DIE
CM UOTE ene oe Ur EU 2
LEA
Manual
C'/M' Av/ Ty/P 188 AUTO ANTIVIR
AIRIS ET
ET
Flash Exp. Comp.
CH MI Av TV PIE AUTO DIAS
TIERE DIDI Ve Ur Y
LITE
Flash Output
CMI Av/Ty/P AUTO Ou Oe.
CE
LU
Shutter Sync.
CUM/AV/TV PI AUTO DL
AMAS EAS Y
Fd
MATIN
DITS EU EI)
Red.Eye Lamp
on
C/M/Av/Ty Pd AUTO OD LIA
IA EASY TY 22
Pi
of
C'/M/Av/Tu/P/&8/AUTO/Oy/D/ EI,
ee RO DOS TY
Safely FE
on
C/A Ty NETT. TED
IEA re
C"/M/Av/Tv/P/. AU TOM Oy TRAIN: 11.72
ORT AT UT Il
MaxISO Speed
CUM/Av/Tv/P/ AUTO 00/8/12) 2 7
A ME AE PTT DENT LYS
LE
m
C'/M/Av/Tv/P/d%/AUTO/ O)
ms
GF
ETT
CMS M / AUTO O/B
A AAA TO
CM Arm
BUT Bere!
DT
MATIN
Pirin A
(a)
a) AUTO! ©
DUO
TEE IN
Dorf 0 @
Before Use
Basie Guide
1 Camora Basics
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
8 Other Shooting Modos.
4 P mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
Inder
«ba
188
CM UOTE ene oe Ur EU 2
LEA
Manual
C'/M' Av/ Ty/P 188 AUTO ANTIVIR
AIRIS ET
ET
Flash Exp. Comp.
CH MI Av TV PIE AUTO DIAS
TIERE DIDI Ve Ur Y
LITE
Flash Output
CMI Av/Ty/P AUTO Ou Oe.
CE
LU
Shutter Sync.
CUM/AV/TV PI AUTO DL
AMAS EAS Y
Fd
MATIN
DITS EU EI)
Red.Eye Lamp
on
C/M/Av/Ty Pd AUTO OD LIA
IA EASY TY 22
Pi
of
C'/M/Av/Tu/P/&8/AUTO/Oy/D/ EI,
ee RO DOS TY
Safely FE
on
C/A Ty NETT. TED
IEA re
C"/M/Av/Tv/P/. AU TOM Oy TRAIN: 11.72
ORT AT UT Il
MaxISO Speed
CUM/Av/Tv/P/ AUTO 00/8/12) 2 7
A ME AE PTT DENT LYS
LE
m
C'/M/Av/Tv/P/d%/AUTO/ O)
ms
GF
ETT
CMS M / AUTO O/B
A AAA TO
CM Arm
BUT Bere!
DT
MATIN
Pirin A
(a)
a) AUTO! ©
DUO
TEE IN
Dorf 0 @
Before Use
Basie Guide
1 Camora Basics
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
8 Other Shooting Modos.
4 P mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
Inder
«ba
188
Center
CM Av! TV Pr AUTO
IAS
AF Point
CMA TW P/E AUTO! DIET. 1-1
AS aaa
or My Ay) Ty/P /@ AUTO! WI BTW 162
ÉD IRE elt T
CUM: Ay/Ty/P/d®/AUTO/ OY
UA
AutolOft
My, Ty O SS
IIS
CPE
view image after sh
Display Time
Orouick
CU M/Av/Tv/P/ AUTO 20/8/2022 8/87
IIA NT 0 UT LT 2
Os gar
ing (152)
2 sec/4 sac sec.
CV M/AU/ TYP AUTO! BEI
48 EUR 8 0 B/S 210 @
12 AUTO DIE A
Se aol ea ed
oy M/AV/TV Pig AUTO! OWN
MIG ID DI 2142 Pr
on
C'/M/Av/Ty/P/d%/AUTO/ <
ee EEN
D
191
SS
dar
or
C''M'Av Tv Pi SSA: By
Re sta Os sar
NE
cm: Av! Ty/P/ da) AUTO OD LIRA
> CM ER 189 40/82 0 ea
im
Betore Use
Basie Guide
1 Camora Basics
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
8 Other Shooting Modos.
4 P mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
Ma
CM Av! TV Pr AUTO
IAS
AF Point
CMA TW P/E AUTO! DIET. 1-1
AS aaa
or My Ay) Ty/P /@ AUTO! WI BTW 162
ÉD IRE elt T
CUM: Ay/Ty/P/d®/AUTO/ OY
UA
AutolOft
My, Ty O SS
IIS
CPE
view image after sh
Display Time
Orouick
CU M/Av/Tv/P/ AUTO 20/8/2022 8/87
IIA NT 0 UT LT 2
Os gar
ing (152)
2 sec/4 sac sec.
CV M/AU/ TYP AUTO! BEI
48 EUR 8 0 B/S 210 @
12 AUTO DIE A
Se aol ea ed
oy M/AV/TV Pig AUTO! OWN
MIG ID DI 2142 Pr
on
C'/M/Av/Ty/P/d%/AUTO/ <
ee EEN
D
191
SS
dar
or
C''M'Av Tv Pi SSA: By
Re sta Os sar
NE
cm: Av! Ty/P/ da) AUTO OD LIRA
> CM ER 189 40/82 0 ea
im
Betore Use
Basie Guide
1 Camora Basics
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
8 Other Shooting Modos.
4 P mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
Ma
om
C'/M/Av/Tv/P/ am AUTO!
TEA
FUNC. Menu Layout (21100)
CM Ay! Ty /P 8 AUTO! ODE
WEAR Id
Ono
CM) Ay Ty /P am’ AUTO! Où EY
CARIES
TAS
IS Mode
ort
CUM! Ay) Ty /P 8 AUTO VIS
MRE Bo ne on ear ea a
ETE
Continuous
CUM Ay Ty PRATER
A CIE SET ETS
Shoot Only
CM. Ay! Ty PI AUTO! OBER,
a Er a EL 1
TO) Ou Sram
Dr EU EL
Dynamics
CoM Ay! Ty! AUTO ma ER,
DOME es cole Ur ETC)
Nie
Include SülSIND Sits
CIM) Ay /Ty/P dB) AUTO WRITER
a ES Vr EN 13
E IES
C/M/Av/Tv/P/ 8 /AUTO/OMI 9/20/0303 / BD 887
AE SEA EL I]
CIM) Av TV IP IR AUTO! On 9/2012) 2/8)
BTP 4/8 IRB BB Bsa
‘Star Visibility
Snare
VI TV PA AUTOS WRITER
CI OBS TEN 22
Before Use
Basie Guide
1 Camora Basics
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
8 Other Shooting Modos.
4 P mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
Inder
«ba
190
C'/M/Av/Tv/P/ am AUTO!
TEA
FUNC. Menu Layout (21100)
CM Ay! Ty /P 8 AUTO! ODE
WEAR Id
Ono
CM) Ay Ty /P am’ AUTO! Où EY
CARIES
TAS
IS Mode
ort
CUM! Ay) Ty /P 8 AUTO VIS
MRE Bo ne on ear ea a
ETE
Continuous
CUM Ay Ty PRATER
A CIE SET ETS
Shoot Only
CM. Ay! Ty PI AUTO! OBER,
a Er a EL 1
TO) Ou Sram
Dr EU EL
Dynamics
CoM Ay! Ty! AUTO ma ER,
DOME es cole Ur ETC)
Nie
Include SülSIND Sits
CIM) Ay /Ty/P dB) AUTO WRITER
a ES Vr EN 13
E IES
C/M/Av/Tv/P/ 8 /AUTO/OMI 9/20/0303 / BD 887
AE SEA EL I]
CIM) Av TV IP IR AUTO! On 9/2012) 2/8)
BTP 4/8 IRB BB Bsa
‘Star Visibility
Snare
VI TV PA AUTOS WRITER
CI OBS TEN 22
Before Use
Basie Guide
1 Camora Basics
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
8 Other Shooting Modos.
4 P mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
Inder
«ba
190
ar TimeLas
Effect
CEE
IM Av! TV IP ABI AUTO/ HIRTEN
A SAA
St interval
15 sec /30 sec/1 min
CIM Ay! Tv/P/
VA
SRI AUTO! HALT
RDA re 2
CIM) Av/ TV /P/8/ AUTO OY DLE ISC
Ce ASE Y
Md
‘Shooting Time
{60 min /90 min 120 min JUnimited
CUM Ay! Ty IP Ide AUTO! OHREN,
AAA Ie ele ear EU 1]
C'/M/Av! Ty (Pd AUTO! 0.
OO
RTS: 1-1
Kor 37 772
CH MI Ay! TV IP 18 AUTO 00/07
A AS
LT
TN
aan
CM Av! TV PER AUTO VEIA
IA ar
TETRIS: ITR
ARIAS
CTE
CM Ay! TV PER AUTO! OBER
MAIS Ur E
LT
11. Optons ay depensing onthe assigned shocing mate
2. Operaionwnen'ne faces are detecoa vars by smaing mode
"3. Arie entre AF ames seo [-pare
“4. JON Wen sujet movemert is detecte
- Names of people In shots taken using Face 1D Mas) may na be asiayedin
Same modes or some stings, Lu the wllbe recorded in he sl images.
Before Use
Basie
Guide
1 Camora Basics
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
8 Other Shooting Modos.
4 P mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
Inder
«ba
191
Effect
CEE
IM Av! TV IP ABI AUTO/ HIRTEN
A SAA
St interval
15 sec /30 sec/1 min
CIM Ay! Tv/P/
VA
SRI AUTO! HALT
RDA re 2
CIM) Av/ TV /P/8/ AUTO OY DLE ISC
Ce ASE Y
Md
‘Shooting Time
{60 min /90 min 120 min JUnimited
CUM Ay! Ty IP Ide AUTO! OHREN,
AAA Ie ele ear EU 1]
C'/M/Av! Ty (Pd AUTO! 0.
OO
RTS: 1-1
Kor 37 772
CH MI Ay! TV IP 18 AUTO 00/07
A AS
LT
TN
aan
CM Av! TV PER AUTO VEIA
IA ar
TETRIS: ITR
ARIAS
CTE
CM Ay! TV PER AUTO! OBER
MAIS Ur E
LT
11. Optons ay depensing onthe assigned shocing mate
2. Operaionwnen'ne faces are detecoa vars by smaing mode
"3. Arie entre AF ames seo [-pare
“4. JON Wen sujet movemert is detecte
- Names of people In shots taken using Face 1D Mas) may na be asiayedin
Same modes or some stings, Lu the wllbe recorded in he sl images.
Before Use
Basie
Guide
1 Camora Basics
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
8 Other Shooting Modos.
4 P mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
Inder
«ba
191
™ Set Up Tab ™ My Menu Tab
Tem Rat Page Tom Re Page
Mute fast My Menu setings Faz
Volume fast
‘Sound Options, 1015] " Playback Tab
Hints 6 Tips fase
Date/Time 152 Hem. Ref. Page
Time Zone sz Image Search Eos
Lens Retraction Disa ListPlay Digest Movies ios
Eco Mode iss Sman She fans
Power Saving cz, iss Sideshow ine
LCD Brightness ssa Erase ane
‚Start-up Image 154 Protect Cana
Format Fase Rotate fanz
File Numbamg Ess Favortas Bine
Greate Folder iss: Fretobock Setup fai
Units Mıss ¿Contrast Mes
Electronic Level Mıss RedEye Correction res
Video System Cee Crossing Git
Touch Operation fase Resze FM
Touch Response iss. My Colors CA
Fi Satngs er Face IDinto Duo
Mobile Device Connect Button Er Transition Effect os
Copyright Into 156 Index Effect i107
Certification Logo Display 157 ‘Scroll Display Eos
Language G3 157, Group Images, ino
Reset ll 2 Auto Rotate cine
Resume Eos
Betore Use
Basie Guide
1 Camera Basics,
2 Auto Mode
Hybrid Auto Mode
8 Other Shooting Modos.
4 P Mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
«ba
192
Tem Rat Page Tom Re Page
Mute fast My Menu setings Faz
Volume fast
‘Sound Options, 1015] " Playback Tab
Hints 6 Tips fase
Date/Time 152 Hem. Ref. Page
Time Zone sz Image Search Eos
Lens Retraction Disa ListPlay Digest Movies ios
Eco Mode iss Sman She fans
Power Saving cz, iss Sideshow ine
LCD Brightness ssa Erase ane
‚Start-up Image 154 Protect Cana
Format Fase Rotate fanz
File Numbamg Ess Favortas Bine
Greate Folder iss: Fretobock Setup fai
Units Mıss ¿Contrast Mes
Electronic Level Mıss RedEye Correction res
Video System Cee Crossing Git
Touch Operation fase Resze FM
Touch Response iss. My Colors CA
Fi Satngs er Face IDinto Duo
Mobile Device Connect Button Er Transition Effect os
Copyright Into 156 Index Effect i107
Certification Logo Display 157 ‘Scroll Display Eos
Language G3 157, Group Images, ino
Reset ll 2 Auto Rotate cine
Resume Eos
Betore Use
Basie Guide
1 Camera Basics,
2 Auto Mode
Hybrid Auto Mode
8 Other Shooting Modos.
4 P Mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
«ba
192
Tem Ref Page
Set Touch Actions Fano
™ Print Tab
Tom Rel Page
Pant =
‘Select Images & Qty. 170
Select Range Eizo
Selec Au images favo
Clear Al Selections in
Pant Satings ies
Handling Precaution:
+ The camerais ahigh-precision electronic device. Avoid dropping tor
subjecting it to strong impact
+ Never bring he camera near magnets, motors, or other devices that
(generate strong electromagnetic fields, which may cause malfunction
or erase image data.
+ If water droplets or it adheres to the camera or screen, wipe with
a dy soft clan, such as an eyeglass clon. Do not rub hard or apply
force.
+ Never use cleaners containing organic solventsto lean Ihe camera
+ Use a lower brush to remove dustfrom the lens. I cleanings acl,
contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk,
+ To prevent condensation from forming on the camera after sudden
temperature changes (when the camera is transferred from cold to
‘warm environments), put the camera in an airtight, resealable plastic
bag and ett gradually adust tothe temperature before removing it
from the bag.
+ If condensation does form on the camera, stop using t immediately.
Continuing to use the camera inthis state may damage t. Remove
‘he battery pack and memory card, and wait uni the moisture has.
‘evaporated before resuming use.
+ Store unused battery packs in a plastic bag or ther container. To
maintain battery performance i you will nt use the battery pack for
some time, charge 4 about once a year and use up the remaining
charge before storage.
Betore Use
Guide
1 Camera Basics,
2 Auto Mode
Hybrid Auto Mode
8 Omer Shooting Modes
4 Prode
5 RAM and Modo
6 Playback Modo
7 wer Functions
8 Song Meno
Accessories
Inder
«>4
193
Set Touch Actions Fano
™ Print Tab
Tom Rel Page
Pant =
‘Select Images & Qty. 170
Select Range Eizo
Selec Au images favo
Clear Al Selections in
Pant Satings ies
Handling Precaution:
+ The camerais ahigh-precision electronic device. Avoid dropping tor
subjecting it to strong impact
+ Never bring he camera near magnets, motors, or other devices that
(generate strong electromagnetic fields, which may cause malfunction
or erase image data.
+ If water droplets or it adheres to the camera or screen, wipe with
a dy soft clan, such as an eyeglass clon. Do not rub hard or apply
force.
+ Never use cleaners containing organic solventsto lean Ihe camera
+ Use a lower brush to remove dustfrom the lens. I cleanings acl,
contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk,
+ To prevent condensation from forming on the camera after sudden
temperature changes (when the camera is transferred from cold to
‘warm environments), put the camera in an airtight, resealable plastic
bag and ett gradually adust tothe temperature before removing it
from the bag.
+ If condensation does form on the camera, stop using t immediately.
Continuing to use the camera inthis state may damage t. Remove
‘he battery pack and memory card, and wait uni the moisture has.
‘evaporated before resuming use.
+ Store unused battery packs in a plastic bag or ther container. To
maintain battery performance i you will nt use the battery pack for
some time, charge 4 about once a year and use up the remaining
charge before storage.
Betore Use
Guide
1 Camera Basics,
2 Auto Mode
Hybrid Auto Mode
8 Omer Shooting Modes
4 Prode
5 RAM and Modo
6 Playback Modo
7 wer Functions
8 Song Meno
Accessories
Inder
«>4
193
Specifications
® Camera Specifications
CEE =
Peale Men hn | Approx. 20 2 miion picts
ens Focal |42< 200 88 W) -258(1) mm
Length (25mm fim equivalent 24 (M = 100 (D mm)
3.0:yp8 color TFT LCD
LCD Montor | Ertective Pixels: Approx. 1.040.000 dots
Frere pero Camera ym, DFOF
Stil Images: Ex 23 PEG), RAW (GR2 (Canon
Original)
panes Movies: MP4 (Video: MPEG-4 AVC/ H 284, Audio:
MPEG. 4 AACLC (stereo)
Hi-speed USB
HDMI output
Cie Analog audo output (stereo)
Analog video output (NTSCIPAL)
Battery Pack NB-13L
Power Source | AC Adapter Kt ACK-DC110
Dimensions
(Based on GIPA | 103.0% 60 4 x 40 4 mm (4.08 x 238x 1.59in)
Guidelines)
‘Approx. 204 x 10,7202, ndudngin
Wight Gasedon| en sack mamma a
GPA GuideHNES) | Approx. 279 a (approx. 9 84 02; camera body only)
Wi-Fi
(EE 202 Neigh
Ent +24 CHE band only
Transmission — | OFDM modulation (IEEE 802 1190)
Methods [DSSS modulation (IEEE 802 11b)
Intrastucture mode", Ad hoc mods"
eee HN | +1 Supports W-Fi Protected Setup
Medes +2 WEFICERTIFIEDIBSS
Supported = 11 (PC2D!) or 1- 13 (PC2158)
[Channels Model numbers indicated in parentheses
WER WPAPSK (AESTKIP
Securty WPA2 PSK (AESITHIP)
Digital Zoom Focal Length (35mm equivalent)
24-4082 mm
Digital Zoom [Standard] (Represents the combined focal length
of optical and digtal zoom)
[Digital Tele-Converter 16x [38.4 - 160 0 mm
[Dial Tele:Converter 20x | 48 0 - 200 0 mm
Betore Use
Basie Guide
1 Camora Basics,
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
8 Omer Shooting Modes
4 Prode
5 RAM and Modo
6 Playback Modo
7 wer Functions
8 Song Meno
9 Acceasones
Inder
«>4
194
® Camera Specifications
CEE =
Peale Men hn | Approx. 20 2 miion picts
ens Focal |42< 200 88 W) -258(1) mm
Length (25mm fim equivalent 24 (M = 100 (D mm)
3.0:yp8 color TFT LCD
LCD Montor | Ertective Pixels: Approx. 1.040.000 dots
Frere pero Camera ym, DFOF
Stil Images: Ex 23 PEG), RAW (GR2 (Canon
Original)
panes Movies: MP4 (Video: MPEG-4 AVC/ H 284, Audio:
MPEG. 4 AACLC (stereo)
Hi-speed USB
HDMI output
Cie Analog audo output (stereo)
Analog video output (NTSCIPAL)
Battery Pack NB-13L
Power Source | AC Adapter Kt ACK-DC110
Dimensions
(Based on GIPA | 103.0% 60 4 x 40 4 mm (4.08 x 238x 1.59in)
Guidelines)
‘Approx. 204 x 10,7202, ndudngin
Wight Gasedon| en sack mamma a
GPA GuideHNES) | Approx. 279 a (approx. 9 84 02; camera body only)
Wi-Fi
(EE 202 Neigh
Ent +24 CHE band only
Transmission — | OFDM modulation (IEEE 802 1190)
Methods [DSSS modulation (IEEE 802 11b)
Intrastucture mode", Ad hoc mods"
eee HN | +1 Supports W-Fi Protected Setup
Medes +2 WEFICERTIFIEDIBSS
Supported = 11 (PC2D!) or 1- 13 (PC2158)
[Channels Model numbers indicated in parentheses
WER WPAPSK (AESTKIP
Securty WPA2 PSK (AESITHIP)
Digital Zoom Focal Length (35mm equivalent)
24-4082 mm
Digital Zoom [Standard] (Represents the combined focal length
of optical and digtal zoom)
[Digital Tele-Converter 16x [38.4 - 160 0 mm
[Dial Tele:Converter 20x | 48 0 - 200 0 mm
Betore Use
Basie Guide
1 Camora Basics,
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
8 Omer Shooting Modes
4 Prode
5 RAM and Modo
6 Playback Modo
7 wer Functions
8 Song Meno
9 Acceasones
Inder
«>4
194
Number of Shots/Recording Time, Playback Time
Number of Shots per Memory Card
: The numberof shot an aspect rato (VIS) of 3 2 par memory card
Number of Shots Aoorox. 210 (ss folows Note that he number of sats avalabe varies by spec
Number of Sots (Eco Made Om | Aporor 310 rato
Movie Recoräng Tena" Aoprox 40 minutes ore] ET Sapa Maroy
Move Recording Tme "our 40 mn Recersng Pils Card Aprox shots)
(Contnuous Shooting Bt es orita a aus ETS
Poyback Time Approx Ahours Lac a ee En
Te noe came sets, en a operators ae prom, 2M
| hasan pug fuming the camara on sof, anssoomng u Brose a 1979 EN
22 Tine wae when Songe mae ode og recog ss
He" eau 1 a 1320 E]
+ The number of sts that an ba taken is based cn measurement a a 2m ES
hides of he Camera & Imaging Products Associate (CPA)
8 tach sina den de nietas 4 Has área aiden a En 17081
time may be less ran mentioned above breed à a pro
2 Number of shtstime win fal charged battery pack
tsa a 20502 Er
Sea 720.860 a 35099 rez
RAW mages
Pr E we es
+ The values in the table are based on Canon measurement condtions
and may change depending cn the subject, memory card and camera
setings.
Betore Use
Basic Guido
1 Camora Basics
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
8 Other Shooting Modos.
4 P mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
6 Playback Mode
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
WA
Number of Shots per Memory Card
: The numberof shot an aspect rato (VIS) of 3 2 par memory card
Number of Shots Aoorox. 210 (ss folows Note that he number of sats avalabe varies by spec
Number of Sots (Eco Made Om | Aporor 310 rato
Movie Recoräng Tena" Aoprox 40 minutes ore] ET Sapa Maroy
Move Recording Tme "our 40 mn Recersng Pils Card Aprox shots)
(Contnuous Shooting Bt es orita a aus ETS
Poyback Time Approx Ahours Lac a ee En
Te noe came sets, en a operators ae prom, 2M
| hasan pug fuming the camara on sof, anssoomng u Brose a 1979 EN
22 Tine wae when Songe mae ode og recog ss
He" eau 1 a 1320 E]
+ The number of sts that an ba taken is based cn measurement a a 2m ES
hides of he Camera & Imaging Products Associate (CPA)
8 tach sina den de nietas 4 Has área aiden a En 17081
time may be less ran mentioned above breed à a pro
2 Number of shtstime win fal charged battery pack
tsa a 20502 Er
Sea 720.860 a 35099 rez
RAW mages
Pr E we es
+ The values in the table are based on Canon measurement condtions
and may change depending cn the subject, memory card and camera
setings.
Betore Use
Basic Guido
1 Camora Basics
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
8 Other Shooting Modos.
4 P mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
6 Playback Mode
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
WA
Recording Time per Memory Card
Shooting Range
Pr Recording Time per Memory Card
868 3268
SE | 20m 03 sec 2h 01 min. 27 sec
WE [46min 29500 ‘2h. 55 min. 43 sec"
OED | 2hr 00 min 55 sec E hr 20min. 32sec
Shr 14min 34 sec Ahr 10 min, 38 sac
25 min, 25 fr Frame moves ML
À 46 mi 39sec fr Frame modes (O2)
+ The values in the table are based en Canon measurement conditions
nd may change dependng on the subject memory cord and camera
Ssang
+ Recording wil automatically stop when te ip fie size reaches 4 08,
cx Men te recording time reaches approximately 29 minuts and 59
seconds when shooting in EEE (SED or FREE. or approximately
1 hourwhen shooting in [BE
+ Recording may stop even f the maximum cp length has not been
reached on some memory cards SD Speed Cass 0 or igher memory
cards ore recommended.
Flash Range
Maximum wide angle D [S0cm-70m(15-238)
Maximum telephoto (CAD [40cm-40m(13- 130)
Shooting | Focusing | Marmum We Ange |, Maximum Telephoto
Mode | Range:
AUTO | - [smeom)-amay [a0 om (13) amy
A_ \smeon)-mmey 0 em (138) infty
NET
ha [20 in -15ft) =
One [ME |Semt20m)-inmmty [40 m (1310) nm
a [som
Lad (2.0 in. - 1.6 ft)
30 [15-20m(49-66n)
20m(49-66R)
+ Wet avalale nso
main modes
Continuous Shooting Speed
[Coninuous Shooting Mode) EX]
a [Approx. 6.5 shots/sec.
EY [Approx 44 shasisec
EY [Approx 44 shots/sec
+ Using an 8 GB UHS: memory card specified in Canon testing
standards. Note thatthe number of shots varias depending on.
subjects, the brand of memory card, and ther factors,
Betore Use
Basie Guide
1 Camora Basics,
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
8 Other Shooting Modos.
4 P mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
Ma
Shooting Range
Pr Recording Time per Memory Card
868 3268
SE | 20m 03 sec 2h 01 min. 27 sec
WE [46min 29500 ‘2h. 55 min. 43 sec"
OED | 2hr 00 min 55 sec E hr 20min. 32sec
Shr 14min 34 sec Ahr 10 min, 38 sac
25 min, 25 fr Frame moves ML
À 46 mi 39sec fr Frame modes (O2)
+ The values in the table are based en Canon measurement conditions
nd may change dependng on the subject memory cord and camera
Ssang
+ Recording wil automatically stop when te ip fie size reaches 4 08,
cx Men te recording time reaches approximately 29 minuts and 59
seconds when shooting in EEE (SED or FREE. or approximately
1 hourwhen shooting in [BE
+ Recording may stop even f the maximum cp length has not been
reached on some memory cards SD Speed Cass 0 or igher memory
cards ore recommended.
Flash Range
Maximum wide angle D [S0cm-70m(15-238)
Maximum telephoto (CAD [40cm-40m(13- 130)
Shooting | Focusing | Marmum We Ange |, Maximum Telephoto
Mode | Range:
AUTO | - [smeom)-amay [a0 om (13) amy
A_ \smeon)-mmey 0 em (138) infty
NET
ha [20 in -15ft) =
One [ME |Semt20m)-inmmty [40 m (1310) nm
a [som
Lad (2.0 in. - 1.6 ft)
30 [15-20m(49-66n)
20m(49-66R)
+ Wet avalale nso
main modes
Continuous Shooting Speed
[Coninuous Shooting Mode) EX]
a [Approx. 6.5 shots/sec.
EY [Approx 44 shasisec
EY [Approx 44 shots/sec
+ Using an 8 GB UHS: memory card specified in Canon testing
standards. Note thatthe number of shots varias depending on.
subjects, the brand of memory card, and ther factors,
Betore Use
Basie Guide
1 Camora Basics,
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
8 Other Shooting Modos.
4 P mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
Ma
Shutter Speed Battery Charger CB-2LH/CB-2LHE Before Use
Rated input 100 240 V AC (50/80 He)
AUTO] mode 009 AL100 V) 0.08 A(240 VI ESSE
‘automatically set = 112000 sec. A un
rage Charging Time AAgprox hr. 10 min. (when using NE-13L) A
250, 200, 160, 125, 100,0, 60, 50,40, 30,25, Charge indcater: Charging: orange / Fully charged green (to:
1
20, 45, 13,10,8,6,5,4,32,25,2.16,13 indicator system)
Avalabievauesin |08,06,05, 04.03, 14, 115, W6, 18, 110. Operating Temperatures: 5-40 °C (41 - 104 °F) 1 Camera Basics
Tv. Mores | 1/13, 1715, 1720, 125, 1130, 1140, 50, 160: —
mode (sec. Jue 1480, 1100, 1125, 11160, 11200, 1/20, 1320, 2 Aus
11409, 1500, 11840, 1800, 111000, 1/1250, Hybrid Auto Modo.
1/1900, 1/2000
2 MIRE antepasado ot aa
3 Otner Shooting Modes
"2 In Pme ster speeds of 125 seconds or slower ar nt alle a
Aperture 5 Tv,Av.M and C Modo
number remit wy, EU)
Available values mn (6 Playback Modo
Teriamareieaiannen
7 WiFi Functions
+ Depending on the 200m poston, some aperture vales may natbe avaliable
8 Sowing Menu.
Battery Pack NB-13L
Type: Rechargeable Ithium-ion battery Accessories
E
A Pons |
Chargng Cycles ‘Approx. 300 times
Operating Temperatures: D 40 °C (92 104 °F}
Dimensions 298:420x95 mm ee
(17x 1185x037in)
Weight ‘Approx. 22 g (approx. 0.78.02)
«ba
197
Rated input 100 240 V AC (50/80 He)
AUTO] mode 009 AL100 V) 0.08 A(240 VI ESSE
‘automatically set = 112000 sec. A un
rage Charging Time AAgprox hr. 10 min. (when using NE-13L) A
250, 200, 160, 125, 100,0, 60, 50,40, 30,25, Charge indcater: Charging: orange / Fully charged green (to:
1
20, 45, 13,10,8,6,5,4,32,25,2.16,13 indicator system)
Avalabievauesin |08,06,05, 04.03, 14, 115, W6, 18, 110. Operating Temperatures: 5-40 °C (41 - 104 °F) 1 Camera Basics
Tv. Mores | 1/13, 1715, 1720, 125, 1130, 1140, 50, 160: —
mode (sec. Jue 1480, 1100, 1125, 11160, 11200, 1/20, 1320, 2 Aus
11409, 1500, 11840, 1800, 111000, 1/1250, Hybrid Auto Modo.
1/1900, 1/2000
2 MIRE antepasado ot aa
3 Otner Shooting Modes
"2 In Pme ster speeds of 125 seconds or slower ar nt alle a
Aperture 5 Tv,Av.M and C Modo
number remit wy, EU)
Available values mn (6 Playback Modo
Teriamareieaiannen
7 WiFi Functions
+ Depending on the 200m poston, some aperture vales may natbe avaliable
8 Sowing Menu.
Battery Pack NB-13L
Type: Rechargeable Ithium-ion battery Accessories
E
A Pons |
Chargng Cycles ‘Approx. 300 times
Operating Temperatures: D 40 °C (92 104 °F}
Dimensions 298:420x95 mm ee
(17x 1185x037in)
Weight ‘Approx. 22 g (approx. 0.78.02)
«ba
197
Numbers
I-point(AF frame made) 83
A
AC adapter ht 189, 162
Accessories 159
‘AEG shooting 76
AE lock 74
AF frames 83
AF lock 87
Aspectrato 48
AUTO made (shooting mode) 22,34
Av (shooting mode) 94
AV cable 162
8
Background defocus
(shooting mode) 62
eatenes
“+ Datefime (datenime battery)
Battery charger 2, 159
Battery pack
Charging 19
Eco mode 153
Level 179
Power saving 27
Black and wnt images 80
Blink detection 51
o
© (shooting mode) 98
Camera
Resetal 157
‘camera access point made 132
‘CameraWindow (computer) 163
Cameraundow (smartphone) 128
CANON IMAGE GATEARY 138
Clock 93
Color (te balance) 78
Compression ratio {rage qualty) 91
Connecing via an access point 135
Continuous shooting 39,43
Control ring 97,98, 109
Creative fiters (shooting mode) 58
Creative Shot 54
Cropping 121, 167
Customuhite balance 79
D
Dateltme
Changing 21
Daelim battery 21
Settings 20
Word lock 152
DE coupler 162
Detauts — Reset a
Dota tele-converter 83
tal zoom 40
Display language 22
DPOF 169
(Dynamic Range Correction 77
E
Eco mode 153
Eating
Cropping 121
¿Contrast 128
My Colors 122
Red-eye correction 123
Resiengimages 120
Eating or erasing connection
information 149
Electronic level 50
Erasing 116
Erasing all 116
Error messages 177
Exposure
AB lok Ta
Compensation 74
FE lack 89
F
Face Ai (AF frame mode) 84
Face ID 44
Face select 85
Face satimer (shooting made) 85
Favortes 118
FE lock 89
File numbering 155
Fireworks (shooting mode) 56
Fisheye effect (shooting mode) 60
Flash
Deactvatng fash 88
Flash exposure compensation 89
no
Slowsynchro 88
Focus bracketing 82
Focus check 112
Focusing
Af frames 83
AF lock 87
AF-poit zoom 51
MF peaking 82
SenoAr 85
Touchar 86
Focusing range
Macro 81
Manual focus 81
Quick 57
Underwater macro 57
Foaus lock 83
FUNC. menu
Basic operations 29
Table 183
FUNC. menu layout 100
a
Geotagging images 147
GPS information display 105
Grid ines 99
H
Handheld rightsoene
(shooting mode) 55
HOM cable 161
High dynamic range
(shooting mode) 58
Household poner 162
Hybrid Auto (shooting made) 36
1
¿Contrast 77,128
‘Frame movies (movie mode) 72
Image quality — Compression ratio
(image quel)
Images
Display period 52
Erasing 116
Playback — Viewing
Protecting 114
Image stablizaon 91
Image Sync 145
Indicator 32,52
Betore Use
Basie Guide
Advanced Guide
1 Camora Basics
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
8 Other Shooting Modos.
4 P mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
198
I-point(AF frame made) 83
A
AC adapter ht 189, 162
Accessories 159
‘AEG shooting 76
AE lock 74
AF frames 83
AF lock 87
Aspectrato 48
AUTO made (shooting mode) 22,34
Av (shooting mode) 94
AV cable 162
8
Background defocus
(shooting mode) 62
eatenes
“+ Datefime (datenime battery)
Battery charger 2, 159
Battery pack
Charging 19
Eco mode 153
Level 179
Power saving 27
Black and wnt images 80
Blink detection 51
o
© (shooting mode) 98
Camera
Resetal 157
‘camera access point made 132
‘CameraWindow (computer) 163
Cameraundow (smartphone) 128
CANON IMAGE GATEARY 138
Clock 93
Color (te balance) 78
Compression ratio {rage qualty) 91
Connecing via an access point 135
Continuous shooting 39,43
Control ring 97,98, 109
Creative fiters (shooting mode) 58
Creative Shot 54
Cropping 121, 167
Customuhite balance 79
D
Dateltme
Changing 21
Daelim battery 21
Settings 20
Word lock 152
DE coupler 162
Detauts — Reset a
Dota tele-converter 83
tal zoom 40
Display language 22
DPOF 169
(Dynamic Range Correction 77
E
Eco mode 153
Eating
Cropping 121
¿Contrast 128
My Colors 122
Red-eye correction 123
Resiengimages 120
Eating or erasing connection
information 149
Electronic level 50
Erasing 116
Erasing all 116
Error messages 177
Exposure
AB lok Ta
Compensation 74
FE lack 89
F
Face Ai (AF frame mode) 84
Face ID 44
Face select 85
Face satimer (shooting made) 85
Favortes 118
FE lock 89
File numbering 155
Fireworks (shooting mode) 56
Fisheye effect (shooting mode) 60
Flash
Deactvatng fash 88
Flash exposure compensation 89
no
Slowsynchro 88
Focus bracketing 82
Focus check 112
Focusing
Af frames 83
AF lock 87
AF-poit zoom 51
MF peaking 82
SenoAr 85
Touchar 86
Focusing range
Macro 81
Manual focus 81
Quick 57
Underwater macro 57
Foaus lock 83
FUNC. menu
Basic operations 29
Table 183
FUNC. menu layout 100
a
Geotagging images 147
GPS information display 105
Grid ines 99
H
Handheld rightsoene
(shooting mode) 55
HOM cable 161
High dynamic range
(shooting mode) 58
Household poner 162
Hybrid Auto (shooting made) 36
1
¿Contrast 77,128
‘Frame movies (movie mode) 72
Image quality — Compression ratio
(image quel)
Images
Display period 52
Erasing 116
Playback — Viewing
Protecting 114
Image stablizaon 91
Image Sync 145
Indicator 32,52
Betore Use
Basie Guide
Advanced Guide
1 Camora Basics
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
8 Other Shooting Modos.
4 P mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
198
ISO speed 75
J
Jump display 108
le
LCD mentor 28
m
M (shooting made) 94
Macro (focusing range) 81
Magnified display 112
Manual focus (focusing range) 81
Manual (movie mode) 96
Memory cards 2
Recordingtime 196
Menu
Basic operatons 30
Table 181
Mercury lamp correction 48
Metering method 74
Miniature efec (shooting made) 80
Mobile device connection button 128
Monochrome (shooting mode) 83
Moves
Editing 124
Image quality (resoluton/trame
rate) 49,50
Recording time 196
Mutt-area White Balance 49
My Colors 80, 122
N
NO titer 78
Nostalgie (shooting made) 59
P
(shooting mode) 73
Package contents 2
Photobook setup 171
PictBridge 160, 168
Playback — Viewing
Porra (shooting mode) 55
Poster efec (shooting made) 58
Poner 159
— AC adapter it
— Battery charger
= Battery pack
Power saving 27
Printing 166
Program AE 73
Protecting 114
a
‘Quick (focusing range) 57
A
Raw 90
Redeye corection 123
Remote shooting 148
Reset al 157
Resing images 120
Resolution (mage size) 49
ing functon selector button 97,99
Rotating 117
s
Saving images! a computer 184
Screen
Display language 22
Icons 178, 180
Menu — FUNC. menu, Mena
SDISOHCISOKC maman
cards — Memory cards
Searching 108
Sétmer 41
2-second seltimer 42
Customizing the sektmer 42
Face selttmer
(shooting made) 65
Wink star
(shooting made) 64
Sending images 143
‘Sending images to another
camera 143
‘Sending images to a smartphone 128
Sending images to Web services 138
Sepa tone images 80
Servo AF 85
Shadow Conect 78
Shooting
‘Shooting dates — Datenime
Shooting information 99, 179
Slideshow 112
‘Smart Shut 113
Smart Shute (hooting mode) 83
‘Smile (shooting made) 83
‘Snow (shooting mode) 56
Soft focus (shooting made) 82
Software
Installation 139, 164
Saving images to
a computer 164
‘Sounds 161
Standard (move made) 71
‘Star (shooting made) 68
Star nightscape
(shooting made) 87
‘Star porta (shooting mode) 68
Star time-lapse movie
(shooting made) 69
Starals (shooting mode) 68
Stereo AV cable 160, 161, 182
Strap 2,18
‘Super vivid (shooting mode) 58
T
Terminal 161, 182,186
Touch Adions 119
Touch aF 86
Touch Shutter 42
Toy camera effect
(shooting mode) 61
Traveling with the camera 152
Troubleshooting 173
TV display 161
‘Tv (shooting mode) 93
u
Ungennster macro
(focusing range) 57
Underwater (shacting made) 56
v
Viewing 24
Image search 108
Index display 107
Jump display 109
Magniied display 112
Single-mage display 24
Slideshow 112
Smart Snufle 113
TV display 161
Before Use
Basie Guide
Advanced Guide
1 Camora Basics
2 Auto Mose/
yori Auto Modo
8 Other Shooting Modos.
4 P Mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
199
J
Jump display 108
le
LCD mentor 28
m
M (shooting made) 94
Macro (focusing range) 81
Magnified display 112
Manual focus (focusing range) 81
Manual (movie mode) 96
Memory cards 2
Recordingtime 196
Menu
Basic operatons 30
Table 181
Mercury lamp correction 48
Metering method 74
Miniature efec (shooting made) 80
Mobile device connection button 128
Monochrome (shooting mode) 83
Moves
Editing 124
Image quality (resoluton/trame
rate) 49,50
Recording time 196
Mutt-area White Balance 49
My Colors 80, 122
N
NO titer 78
Nostalgie (shooting made) 59
P
(shooting mode) 73
Package contents 2
Photobook setup 171
PictBridge 160, 168
Playback — Viewing
Porra (shooting mode) 55
Poster efec (shooting made) 58
Poner 159
— AC adapter it
— Battery charger
= Battery pack
Power saving 27
Printing 166
Program AE 73
Protecting 114
a
‘Quick (focusing range) 57
A
Raw 90
Redeye corection 123
Remote shooting 148
Reset al 157
Resing images 120
Resolution (mage size) 49
ing functon selector button 97,99
Rotating 117
s
Saving images! a computer 184
Screen
Display language 22
Icons 178, 180
Menu — FUNC. menu, Mena
SDISOHCISOKC maman
cards — Memory cards
Searching 108
Sétmer 41
2-second seltimer 42
Customizing the sektmer 42
Face selttmer
(shooting made) 65
Wink star
(shooting made) 64
Sending images 143
‘Sending images to another
camera 143
‘Sending images to a smartphone 128
Sending images to Web services 138
Sepa tone images 80
Servo AF 85
Shadow Conect 78
Shooting
‘Shooting dates — Datenime
Shooting information 99, 179
Slideshow 112
‘Smart Shut 113
Smart Shute (hooting mode) 83
‘Smile (shooting made) 83
‘Snow (shooting mode) 56
Soft focus (shooting made) 82
Software
Installation 139, 164
Saving images to
a computer 164
‘Sounds 161
Standard (move made) 71
‘Star (shooting made) 68
Star nightscape
(shooting made) 87
‘Star porta (shooting mode) 68
Star time-lapse movie
(shooting made) 69
Starals (shooting mode) 68
Stereo AV cable 160, 161, 182
Strap 2,18
‘Super vivid (shooting mode) 58
T
Terminal 161, 182,186
Touch Adions 119
Touch aF 86
Touch Shutter 42
Toy camera effect
(shooting mode) 61
Traveling with the camera 152
Troubleshooting 173
TV display 161
‘Tv (shooting mode) 93
u
Ungennster macro
(focusing range) 57
Underwater (shacting made) 56
v
Viewing 24
Image search 108
Index display 107
Jump display 109
Magniied display 112
Single-mage display 24
Slideshow 112
Smart Snufle 113
TV display 161
Before Use
Basie Guide
Advanced Guide
1 Camora Basics
2 Auto Mose/
yori Auto Modo
8 Other Shooting Modos.
4 P Mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
199
w
White balance (color) 78
ViFifunctons 1
Wei menu 130
Wind iter 37
Wink seiimer (shooting made) 64
World cock 152
Vitis strap —Strap
2
Zoom 22,8, 40,41
Betore Use
Basie Guide
Advanced Guide
1 Camora Basics,
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
8 Other Shooting Modos.
4 P Mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
200
White balance (color) 78
ViFifunctons 1
Wei menu 130
Wind iter 37
Wink seiimer (shooting made) 64
World cock 152
Vitis strap —Strap
2
Zoom 22,8, 40,41
Betore Use
Basie Guide
Advanced Guide
1 Camora Basics,
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
8 Other Shooting Modos.
4 P Mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
200
cautions
+ Countries and Regions Permiting WLAN Use
Use of WLAN IS restricted in some countries and regions, and legal
use may be punishable under national or loca regulations. To avoid
Valeting WLAN regulation, vist the Canon website to check where
use is alowed
Nate that Canon cannot be held able for any problems arising from
use in other countries and regions,
+ Doing any of he following may incur lega penaties:
tering or modtying the product
Removing the cerficaton labels from the product
+ Accordingto foreign exchange and foreign trade law regulations,
‘expat permission (or service transacton permission) from the
panese government is necessary to export strategic resources or
services (including this product) outside Japan.
+ Because this product includes American encryption sofware, i falls
under US. Export Administration Regulations, and cannot be exported
to orbroughtinto a country under USS. trade embargo,
+ Be sure to make notes ofthe wireless LAN settings you use.
The wireless LAN setings saved to this product may change or be
erased due to incorrect operation ofthe product, the effects of rado
waves or static electricty, or accident or mafuncton. Be sure to make
notes of wireless LAN settings as a precaution, Please note that
{Canon accepts no responsibity fer dre or indirect damages or loss.
of earnings resuling from a degradation or iseppearence of content
+ When transferring this produc to ancther person, disposing of or
sending i for repar, be sure Lo note the wireless LAN setings and
reset he product 1 ts default settings (erase setings) necessary,
+ Canon will not make compensation for damages resuling rm loss or
theft ofthe product
{Canon accepts no responsibilty for damages or loss resulting from
unauthorized access or use of target devices regstered on this
product due to loss or theft ofthe product
+ Be sure to use the product as directedin this guide.
Be sure to use the wireless LAN funcion of this product within the
guidelines noted n this guide. Canon accepts no responsibilty for
damages or loss ifthe function and product are used in ways other
than as described inthis guide.
+ Do not use the wireless LAN function ofthis product near medical
equipment or other electronic equipment
Use ofthe wireless LAN function near medical equipment or other
electronic equipment may affect operation of those devices
™ Radio Wave Interference Precautions
+ This product may receive intererence from other devices that emit
rado waves. To avaidinterference, be sure to use ths product as far
‘aay as possible ram such devices, or avoid using the devices atthe
same time as this product
= .
Security Precautions
Because WiFi uses radio waves to transmit signals, secutty precautions
more stringent than when using a LAN cable are required
Keep the folowing paints in mind wen using WF
+ Only use networks you are authorized to use,
“This product searches for W-Fi networks in the viinty end displays
‘the results on the screen. Networks you are not authorized to use
(unknown networks) may also be displayed. However, attempting to
Connect to or using such networks could be regarded as unauthorzed
‘access, Be sure to use only networks you are authorized to use, and
do not attempt to connectto cther unknown networks.
I secunty setings have not been property set, the following problems may
+ Transmission montring
“Third parties with malicious intent may monitor Wi-Fi transmissions.
end attempt to acquire the data you are sending,
Before Use
Basie Guide
Advanced Guide
1 Camora Basics
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
8 Other Shooting Modos.
4 P mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
201
+ Countries and Regions Permiting WLAN Use
Use of WLAN IS restricted in some countries and regions, and legal
use may be punishable under national or loca regulations. To avoid
Valeting WLAN regulation, vist the Canon website to check where
use is alowed
Nate that Canon cannot be held able for any problems arising from
use in other countries and regions,
+ Doing any of he following may incur lega penaties:
tering or modtying the product
Removing the cerficaton labels from the product
+ Accordingto foreign exchange and foreign trade law regulations,
‘expat permission (or service transacton permission) from the
panese government is necessary to export strategic resources or
services (including this product) outside Japan.
+ Because this product includes American encryption sofware, i falls
under US. Export Administration Regulations, and cannot be exported
to orbroughtinto a country under USS. trade embargo,
+ Be sure to make notes ofthe wireless LAN settings you use.
The wireless LAN setings saved to this product may change or be
erased due to incorrect operation ofthe product, the effects of rado
waves or static electricty, or accident or mafuncton. Be sure to make
notes of wireless LAN settings as a precaution, Please note that
{Canon accepts no responsibity fer dre or indirect damages or loss.
of earnings resuling from a degradation or iseppearence of content
+ When transferring this produc to ancther person, disposing of or
sending i for repar, be sure Lo note the wireless LAN setings and
reset he product 1 ts default settings (erase setings) necessary,
+ Canon will not make compensation for damages resuling rm loss or
theft ofthe product
{Canon accepts no responsibilty for damages or loss resulting from
unauthorized access or use of target devices regstered on this
product due to loss or theft ofthe product
+ Be sure to use the product as directedin this guide.
Be sure to use the wireless LAN funcion of this product within the
guidelines noted n this guide. Canon accepts no responsibilty for
damages or loss ifthe function and product are used in ways other
than as described inthis guide.
+ Do not use the wireless LAN function ofthis product near medical
equipment or other electronic equipment
Use ofthe wireless LAN function near medical equipment or other
electronic equipment may affect operation of those devices
™ Radio Wave Interference Precautions
+ This product may receive intererence from other devices that emit
rado waves. To avaidinterference, be sure to use ths product as far
‘aay as possible ram such devices, or avoid using the devices atthe
same time as this product
= .
Security Precautions
Because WiFi uses radio waves to transmit signals, secutty precautions
more stringent than when using a LAN cable are required
Keep the folowing paints in mind wen using WF
+ Only use networks you are authorized to use,
“This product searches for W-Fi networks in the viinty end displays
‘the results on the screen. Networks you are not authorized to use
(unknown networks) may also be displayed. However, attempting to
Connect to or using such networks could be regarded as unauthorzed
‘access, Be sure to use only networks you are authorized to use, and
do not attempt to connectto cther unknown networks.
I secunty setings have not been property set, the following problems may
+ Transmission montring
“Third parties with malicious intent may monitor Wi-Fi transmissions.
end attempt to acquire the data you are sending,
Before Use
Basie Guide
Advanced Guide
1 Camora Basics
2 Auto Mose/
Hybrid Auto Modo
8 Other Shooting Modos.
4 P mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
«ba
201
+ Unauthorized network access
“Third patties with malicious intent may gain unauthorized access to
the netwerk you are using to steal, modify, or destroy information
‘Adationally, you could fal victim to other types of unauthorized access
Such as impersonation (where someone assumes an identity to gain
access to unauthorized information) or springboard atacks (where
someone gains unauthorized access to your network as a springboard
to cover their racks when infítating other systems)
To prevent these types af problems from occuring, be sure to thoroughly
secure your WiFi network.
(Only use this camera's WLFi function with a proper understanding of
WWF securiy, and balance isk and convenience when adjusting security
settings.
The camera can pin to PrlErcge.competbe printers
via WEI PictBridge technical standards mao easy
to comect gia cames, pres, and other devices
drecty Addonaly a nen standar caled DPS
nee IP enables Pihige comectons in network
PictBridge nviconments, and tne camera's lso compatble with
DUR tis stndars
Trademarks and Licensing
+ Microsoft and Windows are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation inthe United States andr cther countries,
+ Macintosh and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc, registered in the
US. and other counties
+ App Store, Phone, and Pad are trademarks of Apple Inc
+ The SDXC logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC
+ HOM the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are
‘trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing, LLC.
+ The Frame logo and the iFrame symbol are trademarks of Apple Inc
+ VIE, NEF Aliance®, PAD", WPA2™ and Wi-Fi Protected Setup
are vademarks of registered trademarks ofthe WiFi Allance,
+ The NMarkcis a trademark o registered trademark of NFC Forum, Inc.
in the United States and in other countries.
+ Allother trademarks are the property oftheir respective onners
+ This device incorporates exFAT technology licensed from Microsoft
+ This products licensed under ATBT patents for the MPEG-4 standard
and may be used for encoding MPEG-4 compliant video andor
decoding MPEG-4 compliant video thet was encoded only (1) for
a personal and non-commercial purpose or (2) by a video provider
licensed under the ATET patents to provide MPEG-4 compliant
video. No license is ranted or implied for any other use for MPEG-4
standard
Disclaimer
+ Unauthorzed reproduction of his guide is prohibited,
‘All measurements based on Canon testing standards
+ Information subject to change without notice, as are product
specications and appearance.
+ Ilustrations and screenshots inthis guide may fer sight from the
actual equipment
+ The above items notwithstanding, Canon cannot be held liable for any
loss arising from the use of this product
Before Use
Basie Guide
Advanced Guide
1 Camora Basics
2 Auto Mose/
yori Auto Modo
8 Other Shooting Modos.
4 P Mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
202
“Third patties with malicious intent may gain unauthorized access to
the netwerk you are using to steal, modify, or destroy information
‘Adationally, you could fal victim to other types of unauthorized access
Such as impersonation (where someone assumes an identity to gain
access to unauthorized information) or springboard atacks (where
someone gains unauthorized access to your network as a springboard
to cover their racks when infítating other systems)
To prevent these types af problems from occuring, be sure to thoroughly
secure your WiFi network.
(Only use this camera's WLFi function with a proper understanding of
WWF securiy, and balance isk and convenience when adjusting security
settings.
The camera can pin to PrlErcge.competbe printers
via WEI PictBridge technical standards mao easy
to comect gia cames, pres, and other devices
drecty Addonaly a nen standar caled DPS
nee IP enables Pihige comectons in network
PictBridge nviconments, and tne camera's lso compatble with
DUR tis stndars
Trademarks and Licensing
+ Microsoft and Windows are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation inthe United States andr cther countries,
+ Macintosh and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc, registered in the
US. and other counties
+ App Store, Phone, and Pad are trademarks of Apple Inc
+ The SDXC logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC
+ HOM the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are
‘trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing, LLC.
+ The Frame logo and the iFrame symbol are trademarks of Apple Inc
+ VIE, NEF Aliance®, PAD", WPA2™ and Wi-Fi Protected Setup
are vademarks of registered trademarks ofthe WiFi Allance,
+ The NMarkcis a trademark o registered trademark of NFC Forum, Inc.
in the United States and in other countries.
+ Allother trademarks are the property oftheir respective onners
+ This device incorporates exFAT technology licensed from Microsoft
+ This products licensed under ATBT patents for the MPEG-4 standard
and may be used for encoding MPEG-4 compliant video andor
decoding MPEG-4 compliant video thet was encoded only (1) for
a personal and non-commercial purpose or (2) by a video provider
licensed under the ATET patents to provide MPEG-4 compliant
video. No license is ranted or implied for any other use for MPEG-4
standard
Disclaimer
+ Unauthorzed reproduction of his guide is prohibited,
‘All measurements based on Canon testing standards
+ Information subject to change without notice, as are product
specications and appearance.
+ Ilustrations and screenshots inthis guide may fer sight from the
actual equipment
+ The above items notwithstanding, Canon cannot be held liable for any
loss arising from the use of this product
Before Use
Basie Guide
Advanced Guide
1 Camora Basics
2 Auto Mose/
yori Auto Modo
8 Other Shooting Modos.
4 P Mode
5 TW.Av.M, and C Modo
(6 Playback Modo
7 WiFi Functions
8 Sowing Menu.
Accessories
10 Appendix
202
Tags
Categories
GeneralDownload
Download Slideshow Get the original presentation fileQuick Actions
Statistics
- Views 1,082
- Slides 202
- Favorites 1
- Age 2185 days
Related Slideshows
22
Pray For The Peace Of Jerusalem and You Will Prosper
RodolfoMoralesMarcuc
46 views
26
Don_t_Waste_Your_Life_God.....powerpoint
chalobrido8
55 views
31
VILLASUR_FACTORS_TO_CONSIDER_IN_PLATING_SALAD_10-13.pdf
JaiJai148317
46 views
14
Fertility awareness methods for women in the society
Isaiah47
46 views
35
Chapter 5 Arithmetic Functions Computer Organisation and Architecture
RitikSharma297999
47 views
5
syakira bhasa inggris (1) (1).pptx.......
ourcommunity56
46 views